United States
Environmental
Protection
Agency
                    Office of Water    Office of Solid Waste EPA
                    Regulations and    and Emergency    530-SW-87-005 D
                    Standards (WH-552) R«*poiM«
                    Washington, D.C.   ISfSjM?910"' D-c-
                    20460         20460
&EPA
        TECHNICAL REPORT: APPENDIX  D

      EXPLORATION, DEVELOPMENT, AND PRODUCTION


              CRUDE OIL A Ni NATURAL GAS

-------
                                APPENDIX  D
                           ANALYTICAL METHODS
                            TABLE OF CONTENTS
ANALYSIS CAT.   FRACTION
                  TECHNIQUE
METHOD
MODIFICATION
Organics
Metals
Classicals
Pest./Herb.
Volatiles
A/B Neutral
D ioxins/Furans

TCLP

Mercury
Furnace
Haz. Waste
ICP

TCLP

Ammonia

BOD
Chloride
Nitrate/Nitrite
Chlorine (Field)
COD
Cyanide
Flouride
pH (Field)
pH (Lab)
Oil & Grease

Residue
Specific Cond.

Sulfide
TOC

TVO

Ignit.
Corrosiv.
React.
GC
GCMS
GCMS
GCMS
GCMS
Preparation
CVAA
Digestion
FURNAA-Sb
FURNAA-As
FURNAA-Se
FURNAA-Ag
FURNAA-T1
Digestion
ICP
Preparation
Distillation
Electrode
Probe
Ion Chrom.
Ion Chrom.
Color.
Color
Distill.
SPADNS
Paper
Electrode
Grav.
Retort
Grav. -IDS
-TSS
-TOT
Wheatstone-
Bridge
Color.
Combust.

TOC



1618
1624C
1625C
613M
8280M

245.5
3020
204.2
206.2
270.2
272.2
279.2

200. 7M

350.2
350.3
405.1
300.0
300.0

410.4
335.2
340.1

150.1
413.1

160.1
160.2
160.3

120.1
376.2
415.1
9060
415. 1M
1010
1110
SW 846
                                                        Cl, to Cl -10L
                                                        High Res. MS
                                                        42 Elem. Scr.
                                                        Purge & Trap
PAGE

D-l
D-89
D-l 3 7
D-211
D-231
D-291

D-301
D-307
D-311
D-315
D-319
D-323
D-327
D-331
D-335
D-291

D-343
D-349
D-353
D-357
D-357
D-363
D-365
D-369
D-379
D-385
D-387
D-391
D-395
D-399
D-403
D-407


D-411
D-413
D-417
D-421
D-427

D-445
D-451
D-457

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 1618
     D-l

-------
                           TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION






 1.0    SUMMARY	



 2.0    REAGENTS AND EQUIPMENT	



 3.0    EXTRACTIONS-APOLAR	



 4.0    EXTRACT CLEANUP-APOLAR	



 5.0    GC ANALYSIS-APOLAR	



 6.0    EXTRACTION-PHENQXYACID	



 7.0    DERIVATIZATION-PHENOXYACID.



 8.0    GC ANALYSIS-PHENOXYACID



 9.0    QUALITY CONTROL	



10.0    REFERENCES	
                                  D-2

-------
                             1.0  SUMMARY

1.1     This method is a  consolidation  of  methods 608, 614, 615, 617,
        622 and 701 that can  be  used  for the analysis of water, solid
        and multimedia samples  for  the  parameters  listed  in Tables 1
        through 3.  The method  has  been  validated for the analysis of
        the apolar  pesticides,   phenoxyacid  herbicides, and industrial
        chemicals listed as analyzable  by  "GC/EC"  and "GC/NPD"  in the
        ITD/RCRA list of analytes (Appendix I).

1.2     Two separate extraction  and  sample  preparation schemes are re-
        quired in this method.   One for apolar organochlorine (Table 1)
        and  organophosphorous  analytes  (Table  2).    The  other  for
        phenoxyacid herbicides and their  esters  (Table 3).   The scheme
        for the preparation and  analyses of all of the method parameters
        is presented in Figure 1.

1.3     The sample is initially  split into separate aliquots for work up
        by the different procedures.  Apolar analytes are extracted from
        liquid samples with methylene chloride using a continuous  liquid
        extractor or are  extracted  from  solid  samples with methylene
        chloride/acetone using a  sonicator.    The  apolar extracts are
        cleaned using gel   permeation  chromatography  (GPC)  followed by
        adsorbtion chromatography  prior  to  GC  analysis.  Phenoxyacid
        herbicides and their esters  are extracted from acidified  liquid
        samples with methylene  chloride  using  a continuous liquid ex-
        tractor or  are  extracted  from  acidified  solid  samples with
        methylene chloride/acetone  using  a  sonicator.    The extracted
        phenoxyacids are partitioned into  aqueous base and their esters
        are hydrolyzed  to  the   free  acids.     The  acid fractions are
        combined and  derivatized  with  diazomethane  then prepared for
        analysis using adsorbtion chromatography prior to GC  analysis.
                                 D-3

-------
1.4     GC analysis  is  accomplished  on  "megabore" capillary columns.
        Apolar  analytes  are  analyzed   using  both  electron  capture
        detection (ECO) (for organochlorine analytes), and flame  photo-
        metric  detection  (FPD)  (for  organophosphates).    Derivatized
        phenoxyacid herbicides are analyzed  by  using ECD.  The primary
        column for all  analytes is the DB-5 (or equivalent), the confir-
        mation column is the SPB-608.
                                  D-4

-------
                      2.0  REAGENTS AND EQUIPMENT

2.1       REAGENTS

2.1.1     Sodium Sulfate - anhydrous reagent  grade, heated at 400*C for
          four hours, or 120*C for 16 hours, cooled  in a desiccator, and
          stored in a glass  bottle.   Baker anhydrous granular, catalog
          No. 3375 or equivalent.

2.1.2     Methylene chloride,  hexane,  ethyl  ether, acetone, isooctane
          (optional), and methanol:  pesticide quality or equivalent.  It
          is  strongly  suggested  that  each  lot  of  solvent  used be
          analyzed to  demonstrate  that  it  is  free  of interferences
          before use.

2.1.3     Primary pesticide and PCB standards  will be obtained from the
          EPA Quality Assurance  Materials  Bank,  Pesticides and Indus-
          trial Chemicals  Repository,  R.T.P.,   NC  for  the purpose of
          traceabiIity.   Commercial  standard  should be used for working
          solutions but must  be  shown  to be traceable (quantitatively
          and qualitatively)  to EPA standards.

2.1.4     Mercury (optional)

2.1.5     Copper powder  (optional),  bright and nonoxidized

2.1.6     Concentrated Sodium hydroxide  solution  (6  N).   Dissolve 24g
          NaOH in reagent water and  dilute to 100 ml_.

2.1.7     Sulfuric acid  solution (1:1 v/v) .   Slowly add 50 mL H2S04 (Sp.
          gr. 1.84)  to 50 mL of reagent water.
                                  D-5

-------
2.1.8     Potassium hydroxide solution (37%  w/v) .    Dissolve 37g of po-
          tassium hydroxide in 100 ml_ of distilled water.

2.1.9     Diol bonded silica  500-mg  or  1-g  cartridges with stainless
          steel frits (Analytichem, Harbor City, CA) or equivalent.

2.1.10    Florisil 500 mg cartridges (J.T. Baker),  or equivalent.

2.1.11    2,4,5-trichlorophenol for  Diol  cartridge  performance check,
          Prepare a 0.1 /ig/mL solution in acetone.

2.1.12    Reagent water - Reagent water  is  defined as a water  in which
          no  interferent is observed  at  the  method detection  limit of
          any parameter when 1 liter  of  the reagent water is extracted
          and prepared using the  sample  workup procedures for  environ-
          mentaI  waters.

2.1.13    N-methyl (N-nitroso-p-toluenesuIfanamide) (Diazald ) fresh and
          high purity, Aldrich Chemical Co.

2.1.14    Silicic Acid: 100 mesh powder  (optional).

2.1.15    Ten percent acetone  in  hexane  (v/v) , prepare by adding 10 ml_
          of  acetone to 90 ml_ of hexane.

2.1.16    GPC calibration solutions:

2.1.16.1  Bis(2-ethyIhexyl)phthalate/pentachlorophenol  solution 4 mg/mL
          each in methylene chloride.

2.1.16.2  Corn oil - 200 mg/mL in methylene chloride.
                                   D-6

-------
2.1.17    Acidified  sodium  sulfate.   Add   0.5   ml_   H2S04  to  100 grams  of
          sodium  sulfate  and   30-mL   ethyl   ether.   Completely  evaporate
          the ether  and store  at  110*C.    (Caution:   Transfer the  acidi-
          fied  sodium  sulfate  into a   different vessel  before placing  it
          in the  oven.  This   is  required  to  ensure no  flammable ether
          residue is placed into  a hot oven.)

2.1.18    Dilute  sodium hydroxide solution (0.1M).    Dissolve 4g NaOH  in
          reagent water and dilute to l.OL.

2.2       APPARATUS  AND MATERIALS

2.2.1     Apparatus  for determining percent  moisture.

2.2.1.1   Oven, drying.

2.2.1.2   Desiccator.

2.2.1.3   Crucibles, porcelain  (optional).

2.2.1.4   Aluminum weighing pans  (optional).

2.2.2     Sonic cell disrupter, Heat  Systems  - Ultrasonics, Inc.  Model
          375C  (or equivalent)  (375 watt with pulsing capability 1/2" or
          3/4" disrupter  horn).

2.2.3     Sonabox  (or equivalent) for  use with disrupter.

2.2.4     Beakers, 400-mL.

2.2.5     Kuderna-Danish  (K-D) apparatus.
                                  D-7

-------
2.2.5.1   Concentrator tube - 10-tnL, graduated (Kontes K-570040-1029, or
          equi valent).

2.2.5.2   Evaporative  flask   -   500-mL   (Kontes   K-470001-0500,  or
          equivalent).

2.2.5.3   Snyder column  -  three-ball  macro  (Kontes K-503000-0121, or
          equi valent).

2.2.6     Powder funnels, 10-em diameter, for filtration/drying.

2.2.7     BoiI ing chips

2.2.7.1   Silicon carbide boiling chips  (optional) - approximately 10/40
          mesh.   Heat to 400*C  for  30  minutes or solvent rinse before
          use.

2.2.7.2   Teflon boiling chips (optional).  Solvent rinse before use.

2.2.8     Water bath - heated,  with  concentric  ring cover, capable of
          temperature control.  The bath should be used in a hood.

2.2.9     Top   loading  balance,  capable   of  accurately  weighing  to
          ±0.01 g.

2.2.10    Balance-Analytical,   capable   of   accurately   weighing  to
          ±0.0001 g.

2.2.11    Nitrogen evaporation device equipped  with  a heated bath  that
          can be maintained at  35-40°C,  N-Evap by Organomation Associ-
          ates, Inc., South Berlin, MA  (or equivalent).

2.2.12    Vials and caps, 2-mL for GC auto sampler.
                                  D-8

-------
2.2.13     Gel   permeation    chromatography    cleanup  device:   automated
           system.   Gel   permeation   chromatograph   (GPC)  Analytical  Bio-
           chemical  Labs, Inc.,  GPC  Autoprep  1002  (or equivalent)  includ-
           i ng:

2.2.13.1   25-mm ID  x 600 - 700-mm   glass column packed with  70  g  of  Bio-
           Beads SX-3, Bio-Rad Laboratories  (or equivalent).

2.2.13.2   Syringe,  10-mL with Iuer  lock fitting.

2.2.13.3   Syringe fiIter  holder,   stainless  steel,   and  filters -  TFE
           (Gelman 4310 or equivalent) or glass fiber.

2.2.13.4   UV detection (optional) Type 6, 254-m/* Isco,  Inc., Lincoln, NB
           (or equi valent).

2.2.14     Vacuum system for eluting multiple cleanup cartridges.

2.2.14.1   Vac Elute  Manifold   (Analytichem  International, Harbor City,
           CA, J.T. Baker or Supelco) or equivalent.

2.2.14.2   Vacuum trap made from a  500-mL  sidearm flask fitted with a 1
           hole stopper and glass tubing.

2.2.14.3  Vacuum pressure gauge.

2.2.14.4  Rack for holding 10-mL volumetric flasks in the manifold.

2.2.15    Pyrex glass  wool.

2.2.16    Bottle or  test  tube,   50-mL  with  Teflon  lined screw cap  for
          sulfur removaI.
                                  D-9

-------
2.2.17    Separatory funnels -  1000-mL,  500-mL  and 250-mL with Teflon
          stopcocks.

2.2.18    Drying column  -  Chromatographic  column approximately 400-mm
          long x 19-mm ID, with  coarse  frit.  (Substitution of a small
          pad of disposable  Pyrex  glass  wool  for  the frit will help
          prevent cross-contamination of sample extracts.)

2.2.19    Continuous Iiquid-Iiquid  extractors  for  use  with methylene
          chloride with Teflon  or  glass  connecting lines.  Hershberg-
          Wolf Extractor, Ace  Glass  Company,  Vineland, NH P/N 6841-10
          (or equi valent).

2.2.20    Glass scintillation vials, at  least  20-mL, with screw cap and
          Teflon or  aluminum foil liner.

2.2.21    Spatula.   Stainless steel or Teflon.

2.2.22    pH Paper.  Wide  range, Hydrion Papers, MicroessentiaI Labora-
          tory, Brooklyn, N.Y. (or equivalent).

2.2.23    Pipet, Volumetric 1.00-mL (optional).

2.2.24    Syringe,  1.00-mL (optional).

2.2.25    Flask, Volumetric 10.00-mL.

2.2.26    Vials, 10-mL,  with screw cap  and teflon  liner  (optional).

2.2.27    Tube, centrifuge, 12 to  15-mL with 19-mm ground glass joint,
           (optionaI).

2.2.28    Snyder Column,  micro with a 19-mm ground glass joint.
                                   D-10

-------
2.2.29    Centrifuge, table top (optional).

2.2.30    Centrifuge bottle: 500-mL (Pyrex 1260 or equivalent).

2.2.31    Diazald kit with clear  seal  joints  for generation of diazo-
          methane, Aldrich Chemical Co., catalog No. ZlO, 025-0.

2.2.32    Flask, filter, 1-L.

2.2.33    Funnel, Buchner, 15-cm.

2.2.34    Paper, filter (Whatman #1, or equivalent), 15-cm.

2.2.35    Gas chromatographic system  including two 0.25-inch injectors,
          detection makeup  gas,  an  electron  capture  detector, and a
          flame photometric detector.   It  is recommended that the GC be
          equipped with an integrator or data system rather than a strip
          chart recorder.

2.3.36    pH Meter with a  combination glass electrode.

2.3.37    Megabore capillary column chose two.

2.3.37.1  DB-5 (J&W Scientific)  or a SP-5 (Supelco Inc.) or equivalent.

2.3.37.2  DB-608 (JAW Scientific)  or equivalent.

2.3.37.3  SPB-608 (Supelco Inc.) or equivalent.
                                  D-ll

-------
                        3.0  EXTRACTIONS-APOLAR

3.1       OVERVIEW

3.1.1     Aqueous samples are  extracted  using  methyIene chloride  in a
          continuous liquid-liquid extractor.    Extracts are then dried
          and concentrated by  Kuderna-Danish  techniques in preparation
          for cleanup (Section 4) and analysis (Section 5).

3.1.2     Soil or sediment  samples  are  mixed  with sodium sulfate and
          extracted using a 1:1  acetone:methyIene chloride solvent by a
          sonication technique.    Extracts  are  then  filtered, dried,
          concentrated  by  Kuderna-Danish,  and  solvent  exchanged  to
          methyIene chloride in preparation for GPC cleanup (4.2).

3.1.3     Most sludge samples are treated  as solid samples (3.3) and 30
          g  samples  are  extracted  using  sonication  with  methyIene
          chloride/acetone.   Some  sludge  samples  may  be  treated as
          liquids (3.2).  In that case, 30  g samples are added to a 1 L
          of reagent water and extracted with a continuous extractor.

3.2       APOLAR PROTOCOL FOR LIQUIDS

3.2.1     Summary of Sample Preparation Method

3.2.1.1   AIL volume of a water sample  or a mixture of 30 g of sludge
          and 1 L of reagent water  is extracted with methyIene chloride
          using a continuous extractor.   The methyIene chloride extract
          is dried, concentrated, exchanged to hexane, and adjusted to a
          volume of 10.0 mL and a 1.0 mL aliquot is cleaned up on a Diol
          cartridge prior to GC analysis.  Optional GPC (4.2)  and sulfur
          cleanup (4.4) techniques are also allowed.
                                   D-12

-------
3.2.2     Liquid Sample Extraction.

3.2.2.1   Liquid samples must be extracted using continuous extraction.

3.2.2.2   With some samples, it  may  be  necessary  to place a  layer of
          glass wool between the methylene  chloride and water  layers  in
          the extractor  to  prevent  precipitation  of suspended solids
          into the methylene chloride during  extraction.  Any sample  in
          which solids precipitate through the glass wool must be treat-
          ed as sol ids (3.3).

3.2.2.3   The percent  weight  loss  of  volatiles  from  sludge must be
          determined and reported according  to the procedures described
          in 3.3.1.3.

3.2.2.4   After  the  sample  has  been  transferred  to  the extractor,
          measure and record the pH with  wide range pH paper and adjust
          to between pH  5  and  9  with  6  N  sodium  hydroxide or 1:1
          sulfuric acid solution, if required.   Record and report which
          samples require pH adjustment.

3.2.2.5   Add sufficient methylene chloride  to  the distilling flask to
          ensure proper solvent cycling during operation and extract for
          18 hours.

3.2.3     Extract Drying and Concentration

3.2.3.1   Assemble a Kuderna-Danish  (K-D)  concentrator  by attaching a
          10-mL concentrator tube to  a  500-mL evaporative flask.   Pour
          the combined  extract  through  anhydrous  sodium  sulfate and
          collect the extract  in  the  K-D concentrator (the sodium sul-
          fate can be held  in   a  drying  column  filled to a height of
                                  D-13

-------
          about 20-cm or  in  a  powder  funnel   plugged with glass wool
          filled to a height of 4-5-cm [3.3.2.5]).   Rinse the Erlenmeyer
          flask and column with  at  least  one  additional   20 to 30 mL
          portion of  methylene  chloride  to  complete the quantitative
          transfer.

3.2.3.2   Add one or two  clean  boiling  chips to  the evaporative flask
          and attach  a  three-ball  Snyder  column.  Pre-wet the Snyder
          column by adding about  1  ml_  methylene   chloride to the top.
          Place the K-D apparatus on a  hot water bath (60-80'C) so that
          the concentrator tube is  partially  immersed in the hot water
          and the entire lower  rounded  surface  of the flask is bathed
          with hot vapor.  Adjust the vertical  position of the apparatus
          and the water temperature as  required to complete the concen-
          tration  in 10 to 15 minutes.   At the proper rate of distilla-
          tion, the balls of  the  column  will  actively chatter but the
          chambers will not  flood  with  condensed  solvent.   When the
          apparent volume of liquid reaches 3-5 mL, remove the K-D appa-
          ratus.  Allow it to  drain  and  cool  for at least 10 minutes.
          Do not allow the evaporator to go dry.

3.2.3.3   If GPC cleanup is to be  used, remove the Snyder column, rinse
          the flask and  its   lower  joint  into  the concentrator tube,
          adjust the  volume  to  10.0 mL  with  methylene  chloride and
          proceed  to Section 4.  If  no GPC cleanup is required, proceed
          with the hexane exchange described below.

3.2.4     Exchange into Hexane

3.2.4.1   Momentarily remove the Snyder column,  add 50 mL of hexane and
          a  new boiling chip and   re-attach  the Snyder column.  Pre-wet
          the column by adding about 1 mL of hexane to the top.  Concen-
                                  D-14

-------
           trate  the  solvent  extract  as  before.   When  the  apparent volume
           of  liquid  reaches  3-5 mL,   remove   the K-D  apparatus  and allow
           it  to  drain  and cool at   least   10  minutes.  Do  not  allow  the
           evaporator to  go dry.

3.2.4.2    Remove the Snyder  column,  rinse  the  flask  and  its  lower joint
           into the concentrator tube with  1  to 2 mL of  hexane and pro-
           ceed to Section 4  for Diol  cartridge  cleanup.

3.3        APOLAR PROTOCOL FOR SOLIDS

3.3.1      Sample Preparation

3.3.1.1    Mix samples  thoroughly,  especially   composited samples.  Dis-
           card any foreign objects   such  as  sticks, leaves, and  rocks.
           Also,  decant and discard any  standing  aqueous phase.  The  lab
           must estimate  to the nearest 10 percent (by weight) the  amount
           of water decanted  (and  discarded)   from the sample and  report
           that value with the data.

3.3.1.2    Transfer 30 g  of a  soil,  sediment or sludge sample to  100-mL
           beaker.  Add 50 mL of water and stir for 1 hour.  Determine pH
           of sample using  a  glass  electrode  and  pH  meter while the
           sample is stirring.  Report pH value with the data,  but do not
           attempt to adjust  the  pH  of  the  sample before extraction.
          Discard the portion of the sample used for pH determination.

3.3.1.3   Transfer 5 to 10 g of  the  sediment into a tarred crucible  or
          aluminum weighing pan and weigh to  the nearest 0.01  g.  Trans-
          fer the sediment and  weighing  pan  into an oven  monitored  at
          105*C and dry overnight.   Allow the sample and weighing pan  to
          cool in a desiccator  before  weighing.  Concentrations of in-
                                  D-15

-------
dividual  analytes will   be  reported  relative to the nonvola-
tiles in the sample.   (Caution:   Gases volatilized from some
                         D-16

-------
          soil/sediment samples may  require  that this drying  procedure
          be carried out  in a hood.)

          wt of sample - wt of heated sample v .-,.   „    • ,  .  ,      ,., , N
          	  wt of samp|e	    X 100 = % we.ght  loss   (3.1)

3.3.2     Extraction with Sonic Agitation
3.3.2.1   Weigh approximately 30 g of sample (to the nearest 0.1 g)  into
          a 400-mL beaker and add  60 g  of anhydrous sodium sulfate and
          mix thoroughly to give a homogeneous mixture.

3.3.2.2   Some wet sludge samples may  require  more than 60 g of sodium
          sulfate.  The laboratory is  required to add sufficient sodium
          sulfate to adsorb all  of  the  water  in  the sample prior to
          adding organic solvent.

3.3.2.3   Immediately add 80 mL  of  1:1 methylene chI oride:acetone mix-
          ture to the sample.

3.3.2.4   Place the sonicator probe about  1/2 inch below the surface of
          the solvent but above the sediment layer.

3.3.2.5   Sonicate for 3 min.,  using  the  3/4  inch horn at full  power
          with pulse set at 50 percent.   Do not use a microtip.

3.3.2.6   Prepare a filtration/drying  bed  by  placing  a plug of glass
          wool in the neck  of  a  10-cm  powder  funnel  and filling the
          funnel  to approximately half its  depth (4 or 5 cm)  with anhy-
          drous sodium sulfate.    Decant the extract through the packed
          funnel  and collect it in a 500-mL evaporation (K-D)  flask.
                                   D-17

-------
3.3.2.7   Repeat the extraction two more times with fresh 80 ml portions
          of the 1:1  methylene  chloridetacetone  mixture.   Decant the
          extraction solvent after  each  sonication.    After the final
          sonication, pour the entire  sample  into the funnel and rinse
          with 60-mL portion of 1:1 methylene chloride:acetone mixture.

3.3.2.8   Some  samples  may  require  additional  clarification  before
          evaporation.  These should  be vacuum filtered through Whatman
          #1 paper using  a  Buchner  funnel  then  transferred to a K-D
          apparatus.

3.3.2.9   Add one or two  clean  boiling  chips to the evaporative flask
          and attach a  three-ball  Snyder  column.   Pre-wet the Snyder
          column by adding about  1  mL  methylene  chloride to the top.
          Place the K-D apparatus on  a  hot  water bath (60 to 80*C) so
          that the concentrator tube  is  partially  immersed in the hot
          water and the entire  lower  rounded  surface  of the flask  is
          bathed with hot vapor.    Adjust  the vertical position of the
          apparatus and the  water  temperature  as required to complete
          the concentration in 10 - 15  minutes.   At the proper rate of
          distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but
          the chambers will not flood  with condensed solvent.  In order
          to remove as  much  acetone  as  possible, reduce the apparent
          volume of   liquid  to   less  than  3 mL,  but  do  not take to
          dryness.  Remove the K-D  apparatus  and allow it to drain and
          cool for at least 10 minutes.    Make  up a 10 mL finaI  volume
          with methylene chloride.

          Proceed to Part 4.1 for mandatory GPC cleanup.
                                   D-18

-------
                       4.0  EXTRACT CLEANUP-APOLAR

 4.1        REQUIREMENTS

 4.1.1      GPC  cleanup  is  mandatory for  all  apolar analyses  of  soil/sedi-
           ment and  sludge  extracts.     It  can   also   be used for  water
           samples,  if  needed.  GPC  removes many  higher molecular  weight
           contaminants which would  otherwise  accelerate degradation  of
           gas  chromatography columns  and  thus  reduce  instrument perform-
           ance.  The GPC  must meet monthly  performance   checks.

 4.1.2      Diol  cartridge  cleanup   is   required   for  all   extracts.   It
           removes polar organic  molecules   such   as  phenols.   Each  lot
           number of Diol  cartridges  must   pass  a cartridge performance
           check.

 4.1.3      Sulfur can be   removed   by  one   of  two methods, according  to
           laboratory preference.   Chromatogram  interference due to sul-
           fur  is not acceptable.

4.2        EXTRACT CLEANUP BY GEL PERMEATION CHROMATOGRAPHY  (GPC)

4.2.1      GPC Setup, Operation and  Initial Calibration

4.2.1.1    Packing the column - Place 70 g  of Bio Beads SX-3 in a 400-mL
           beaker.   Allow  the  beads  to  swell   overnight in methylene
           chloride before  packing  the  column.     Transfer the swelled
           beads to the  column  and  begin  pumping  solvent through the
           column, from bottom to top,  at  a  rate of 5.0 mL/min.  After
           approximately 1 hour,   adjust  the  pressure  on the column to
           between 5 and 10 psi  and  pump an additional  4 hours to remove
           air from the column.    Adjust the column pressure  periodically
           as required to maintain 5 to 10 psi.
                                 D-19

-------
4.2.1.2   NOTE:  The description of solvent  flow  rate and column pres-
          sure applies only  to  the  ABC  GPC  apparatus.  Laboratories
          using equivalent  equipment  must  develop  the parameters for
          their apparatus which  give  acceptable performance (described
          in Section 4.2.2).

4.2.1.3   The SX-3 Bio Beads column may be used for several months, even
          if discoloration occurs.    System calibration usually remains
          constant over this period of  time if column flow rate remains
          constant.  The calibration  must  be checked periodically, not
          less than once every 30 days, using standard pesticide and PCB
          mi xtures.

4.2.1.4   NOTE:  Some  samples  should  be  centrifuged  and/or filtered
          through an inert filter held in a 25-mm stainless steel holder
          before loading onto  the  GPC  in  order to remove parti cut ate
          matter.

4.2.1.5   Load the 5.0-mL sample  loop using 7.5 mL of the concentrate of
          the extract of each soil  sample  (described in 3.3.2.) and of
          those water  samples  (described  in  3.2.2  or  3.2.3.) to be
          cleaned up by GPC.

4.2.1.6   NOTE:  Some samples may  have  to  be  loaded into two or more
          loops  in order to  prevent  overloading  the  GPC column.  All
          highly viscous samples or samples  known  to  contain > 1 g of
          nonvolatile residue should be diluted to 15 mL using methylene
          chloride and loaded into two   loops  or  to 22.5 mL and  loaded
          into three  loops.

4.2.1.7   Set  the   instrument  terminal  for  the  appropriate number of
          samples; set the length of  the  dump, collect and wash cycles
                                  D-20

-------
          for the number of minutes determined by either of the calibra-
          tion procedures described below   in  4.2.1.9 or 4.2.1.10.  Set
          up and label one collection flask for each  loop by placing the
          appropriate Teflon effluent line  into the flask, then covering
          the  flask  with  aluminum  foil.    Begin  pumping  methylene
          chloride through the column at  5 mL/min. (5 to 10 psi), allow
          the flow to stabilize for at  least 15 minutes, then begin the
          automatic  cleanup  sequence  by  pressing  the  "auto  start"
          button.

4.2.1.8   After the appropriate GPC fraction has been collected for each
          sample,  evaporate  the  methylene  chloride  and  exchange to
          hexane as described in 3.2.5.

4.2.1.9   Two alternate GPC calibration  procedures are described below,
          one of these two  must  be  used.    The  first  is based on a
          combination of gravimetric  and  GC  analysis of collected GPC
          fractions, the second is  based  on  monitoring the elution of
          standards with a UV detector connected  to the GPC column.  If
          the UV technique is chosen, care  must be taken to account for
          any difference in volume (elution  time) between the GC column
          and the detector and the GPC column and the collection vial.

4.2.2     Gravimetric GPC Calibration Procedure

4.2.2.1   Set the "dump", "collect" and "wash"  times for 00,  02,  and 00
          minutes,  respectively.  Set the terminal for 20 samples.

4.2.2.2   Under each of the first twenty receiver lines,  place a   tared
          20-mL scintillation vial.

4.2.2.3   Into Sample No. 1 load 5 ml_ of 200-mg/mL corn oil  solution.
                                  D-21

-------
4.2.2,4   Start the auto  sequence,   collect  twenty 10-mL fractions  (40
          mi n.) .

4.2.2.5   Passively evaporate each fraction  to  dryness  in a fume hood
          (overnight).

4.2.2.6   Reweigh the vials and record the net weight gain.

4.2.2.7   Plot weight of the  elute  vs.  time  to determine the elution
          profile.

4.2.2.8   Reset the sampling position to 00.

4.2.2.9   Into Sample Loop No. 1, load 5 ml_ of 0.4-mg/mL   PCP/Phtha late
          Solution.

4.2.2.10  Set  the "collect" time to 03 minutes.

4.2.2.11  Under each of the  first  twenty  receiver lines place a clean
          20-mL scintillation  vial.  (NOTE:    The  vials  need  not be
          tared.)

4.2.2.12  Start the auto  sequence,  collect  twenty  15-mL fractions (1
          hour).

4.2.2.13  Analyze each fraction by GC to determine the amount of PCP  and
          phthalate.

4.2.2.14  Plot the  amounts  of  PCP  and  phthaI ate  to  determine  the
          elution profiles.

4.2.2.15  Choose  the "DUMP" time such  that  85+  percent of phthalate is
          recovered and the corn oil  is discarded.
                                    D-22

-------
4.2.2.16  Choose the  "COLLECT"  time  to  extend  10  minutes after the
          elution of PCP and set a "WASH" time of 10 minutes.

4.2.3     UV Detector Calibration Procedure

4.2.3.1   Connect the end of the column to a UV detector (254 nm).

4.2.3.2   Zero the detector and start the strip chart recorder.

4.2.3.3   Into Sample Loop No. 1 load 5 mL of 20-mg/mL corn oil solution
          and  into  Sample   Loop   No.   2   load  5 mL  of  0.4-mg/mL
          PCP/phthalate.  (NOTE:    The  corn  oil concentration used in
          this UV procedure is a  10-fold  dilution  of that used in the
          gravimetric method.)

4.2.3.4   Inject Sample Loop  No.   1,  note  the  injection on the strip
          chart recorder.

4.2.3.5   After the corn  oil   elutes,   allow  the  recorder to continue
          for a few minutes to again establish a baseline.

4.2.3.6   Inject Sample Loop No. 2 and  note the injection on the   strip
          chart recorder.

4.2.3.7   Determine  the  elution   times  for  the  corn  oil,   PCP   and
          phthalate.

4.2.3.8   Choose a "DUMP" time which  removes  the corn oil  yet recovers
          >85 percent of the phthaI ate.     Choose a "COLLECT" time which
          continues 10 minutes  beyond   the elution of  pentachlorophenol
          and a "WASH" time of 10  minutes.
                                 D-23

-------
4.2.3.9   NOTE:  The DUMP and collect times  must be adjusted to compen-
          sate for the difference  in  volume  of  the lines between the
          detector and the collection flask.

4.2.4     Continuing GPC calibration requirement.

4.2.4.1   At least once ever 30 days, the calibration of the GPC must be
          verified by determining  the  recovery  of  10 method analytes
          (Tables 1 and 2).

4.2.4.2   The ten analytes used are chosen  by  each lab.  The choice is
          based on which analytes that were most often detected in their
          samples during the previous month.

4.2.4.3   The GPC calibration solution  is  prepared so that the concen-
          tration of each analyte is between 0.5 and 5 /jg/mL.

4.2.4.4   Using 7.5 mL of  the  calibration  solution  loaded into a GPC
          loop and a fraction  using  the  GPC program established using
          either of the described procedures (4.2.2 or 4.2.3).

4.2.4.5   The collected GPC calibration  fraction is transferred quanti-
          tatively to a K-D apparatus and the volume of methylene chlor-
          ide  is  reduced  (3.2.3).    After  cooling,  the  solvent is
          exchanged to hexane (3.2.4).   The final volume is adjusted to
          10.0 mL and the  sample  is  analyzed  by  GC according to the
          procedures in Section 5.

4.2.4.6   The GPC performance is acceptable  if  all of the analytes are
          recovered at 85-110 percent and  the column can continue to be
          used.  If the recovery is   less  than 85 percent, or more than
          110 percent, the column  must  be repacked (4.2.1) and recali-
          brated before more samples are run.
                                   D-24

-------
4.3       DIOL CARTRIDGE CLEANUP

4.3.1     Cartridge Performance Check

          Every lot number of Diol cartridges  must be tested.  A  lot of
          Diol cartridges is  demonstrated  as  acceptable if all apolar
          analytes   are   recovered   at    80-110   percent   and   if
          trichlorophenol is not detected  when the compounds are eluted
          through a cartridge using the method described in 4.3.4.

4.3.2     Nitrogen Slowdown Technique (Taken from ASTM Method D 3086)

4.3.2.1   Place the concentrator tube in a heating bath (35*C) and evap-
          orate the solvent to the final volume using a gentle stream of
          clean, dry nitrogen  (filtered  through  a column of activated
          carbon).  The extract must never be allowed to become dry.

4.3.2.2   CAUTION:  New plastic  tubing  must  not  be  used between the
          carbon trap and the sample, as it may introduce interferences.
          The internal  wall  of new  tubing  must be rinsed several times
          with hexane then dried prior to use.

4.3.3     Extract Preparation

4.3.3.1   For samples  which  have  been  run  through  the  GPC cleanup
          solvent, exchange  to  hexane  (3.2.4)   and  adjust the hexane
          extract volume to 5.0 mL  using nitrogen blowdown described in
          4.3.2.  For those aqueous  samples  not passed through the  GPC
          step,  adjust to  10.0 mL.    The  different  final  volumes  are
          required  because  only   half   of   the  methyiene  chloride
          concentrates are recovered from the GPC cleanup.

4.3.4     Diol Cartridge Cleanup
                                  D-25

-------
4.3.4.1   Attach the Vac-Elute vacuum manifold to a water aspirator or a
          vacuum pump with a trap installed between the manifold and the
          vacuum source.  Adjust the  vacuum pressure in the manifold to
          between 5 and 10 pounds of vacuum.

4.3.4.2   Most  liquid  samples  can  be  cleaned  using  a  500-mg Diol
          cartridge, the cleanup  of  soil  and  sludge extracts must be
          accomplished using 1 g cartridges.

4.3.4.3   Prior to cleanup  of  samples,  the  cartridges must be washed
          with hexane/acetone (9:1).    This  is accomplished by placing
          the cartridge in  the  vacuum  manifold,  pulling a vacuum and
          passing  5 mL  of  the  hexane/acetone  solution  through  the
          cartridge.

4.3.4.4   After the cartridges in the manifold are washed, the vacuum is
          released and a rack containing  labeled 10-mL volumetric flasks
          is placed inside the manifold.    Care must be taken to ensure
          that the solvent  line from  each cartridge is placed inside of
          the appropriate volumetric flask  as  the  manifold top is re-
          placed.

4.3.4.5   After the  volumetric  flasks  are  in  place,  vacuum  to the
          manifold  is restored and a  volume of 1.0 mL from each sample,
          blank or matrix spike extract to be analyzed is transferred to
          the top frit of the appropriate Diol cartridge.

4.3.4.6   NOTE:  Because the volumes  marked  on  concentrator tubes are
          not necessarily accurate, the use  of  an 1.00-mL syringe or a
          volumetric pi pet  is required.
                                   D-26

-------
4.3.4.7   The analytes   in  the  extract  concentrates  are  then  eluted
          through the column with 9 ml_  of hexane/acetone  (9:1) and col-
          lected into the 10-mL volumetric  flasks  held  in the rack  in-
          side the vacuum manifold.

4.3.4.8   Transfer the eluate  in each  volumetric  flask to a clean cen-
          trifuge tube or 10-mL vial.    Use  two additional 1 ml_  hexane
          rinses  to  ensure  quantitative  transfer  of  the  cartridge
          eluate.

4.3.4.9   Concentrate the  extract  to  1.0 ml_  using nitrogen blow-down
          (described in 4.3.2).

4.3.4.10  If crystals of sulfur are evident or sulfur is suspected to be
          present,  proceed to Section 4.4.

4.3.4.11  If the sulfur  is not  expected  to  be a problem, transfer the
          1.0-mL concentrate to a GC vial  and  label the vial.  The ex-
          tract is ready for GC  analysis,  proceed to Section 5.   Store
          the extracts at 4*C  in the dark until  analyses are performed.

4.4       SULFUR REMOVAL

4.4.1     Two options  are  available  for  the  removal  of sulfur from
          samples.   The mercury technique  appears  to be the most reli-
          able, but requires the use of  small volumes of mercury  in the
          Iaboratory.

4.4.2     CAUTION:   Mercury containing  waste  should  be segregated and
          disposed of properly.

4.4.3     Mercury Technique
                                   D-27

-------
4.4.3.1   Add 1 to 3 drops of mercury  for each 1-mL hexane extract in a
          clean vial.  Seal the vial  and agitate for 30 seconds.  Filter
          or centrifuge and decant  to  remove all solid precipitate and
          liquid mercury.  Analyze  the  extract  if the mercury appears
          shiny.   If  the  mercury  turns  black,  repeat as necessary.
          Dispose of the mercury waste properly.

4.4.3.2   If only a partial set  of  samples requires sulfur cleanup,  an
          additional reagent blank is not required.

4.4.4     Copper Technique

4.4.4.1   Bright (non-oxidized) granular copper can  be used in place of
          mercury in the procedure described in Section 4.4.3.1.
                                  D-28

-------
                        5.0  GC ANALYSIS-APOLAR

5.1       SUMMARY

5.1.1     Sample extracts are analyzed by both GC/ECD  for organochlorine
          parameters and by GC/FPD for organophosphorous parameters.

5.1.2     The primary column for both organochlorine and organophosphate
          analysis  is a 15 m x  53 mm  id DB-5 megabore capillary column
          (or equi valent) .

5.1.3     The secondary column  for  both organochlorine and organophos-
          phorous analyses is  a  15 m  x  0.53 mm  id SPB-608 or DB-608
          megabore capillary column (or equivalent).

5.2       GC CONDITIONS

5.2.1     Megabore  capillary  col-umns  can  be   installed  in  standard
          0.25-inch packed  column  injector  and  detector  ports using
          suitable glass adapters  and  graphite  ferrules.   Because the
          column flow used is 5 mL/minute,  it  is necessary to supply a
          suitable makeup gas to the detector.

5.2.2     Electron capture detectors  should  be  plumbed with helium or
          hydrogen carrier and P-10 (Argon/methane)  as a detector makeup
          gas,  the detector temperature should  be 275*C.

5.2.3     Flame photometric detectors should  be  plumbed with helium or
          hydrogen  carrier  and  nitrogen  as   a  detector   makeup,  the
          detector temperature should be  250*C.

5.2.4     The temperature program for organochlorine analysis  is:
                                 D-29

-------
            Tj  = 50*C
            Initial  time one minute
            Initial  temperature ramp 20*/min to 150*C
            Second temperature ramp   8*/min to 180*C
            Third temperature ramp    3*/min to 250*C
            Final hold 15 minutes

          Note: It may be  necessary  to adjust this temperature program
          for individual gas chromatographs.

5.2.5     The temperature program for organophosphorous analysis is:

            TJ  = 50*C
            Initial  time one minute
            Initial  temperature ramp 5*/min to 140*C, hold 10 minutes
            Second temperature ramp  10*/min to 250*C
            Five minute final hold.

          Note: It may be  necessary  to adjust this temperature program
          for individual gas chromatographs.

5.2.6     Injectors should be set at 260*C.

5.3       CALIBRATION

5.3.1     After establishing  the  appropriate  CC  operating conditions
          (5.2) for the method parameters, calibrate the GC system using
          the external standard technique.

5.3.2     For each parameter of   interest,  prepare working standards at
          three concentration levels over a  range of a least two orders
          of magnitude.  The  low  concentration  should be near to, but
                                   D-30

-------
          above, the method detection  limit  (Section 5.7).  The medium
          concentration must be at least  10 times the low concentration
          and the high  concentration  must  be  at   least  10 times the
          medium   concentration   (at   least   100   times   the   low
          concentration).  These  concentrations  define the calibration
          range in which analytes can be quantitated.

5.3.3     Three-point instrument  calibration  based  on  peak height or
          peak area is  required  for  each  single component pesticide.
          The laboratory has 3 choices  on  how to establish three point
          calibration.  Only one of the three calibration methods can be
          used  to  quantitate  samples  in  any  single  run  sequence.
          laboratories cannot  mix  calibration  techniques  for samples
          quantitated using a single initial calibration.

5.3.4     The  laboratory  can  use   a  mean  calibration  factor  (CF)
          determined from the three concentration  but only if the % RSD
          for the three points is <10 percent.
                    r  Peak area (or height of the standard)
                                     i njected

          SRSD = pB  x 100                                         (5.4)
                         N
                       i  i 1 (CFi
          where SO =   	rr-^r-

          N=3
                                  D-31

-------
5.3.5     The laboratory can use  a  calibration  line drawn through all
          three calibration points only  if  their value (coefficient of
          determination)  from  the  linear  regression  calculation  is
          >0.975.

5.3.6     Laboratories with electronic integrators  or data systems that
          automatically calculate  calibration  curves  as line segments
          between calibration points and the origin may use line segment
          calibration curves for  each  single  component analyte.  This
          technique may be  used  only  if  the  r value (coefficient of
          determination)  from  the  linear  regression  calculation  is
          >0.975 for all three points for each single component analyte.

5.3.7     Sample  analysis  may   not   proceed   until  a  satisfactory
          calibration has been demonstrated.

5.3.8     The working calibration  curve  or  calibration factor must be
          verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more
          calibration standards.    If  the  response  for any parameter
          varies from the predicted  response  by  more than *10%, a new
          calibration curve or calibration  factor  must be prepared for
          that parameter.

5.4       QUANTITATION OF ANALYSES

5.4.1     Analytes can be quantitated using either manual measurement of
          onscale chromatograms, with a modern electronic integrator, or
          with a  laboratory data  system.    The  analyst can use either
          peak height or peak area  as  the basis for quantitation.  The
          use of electronic  integration  or  a laboratory data system is
          strongly recommended.
                                  D-32

-------
5.4.2     If  manual  quantitation      is   used,  all   peaks   used   for
          calibration and for sample  analysis  must  be  onscale and  give
          at   least  20  percent  deflection  from  baseline  at maximum
          height.  Guidance  in the manual quantitation of  peaks is given
          i n the EPA MANUAL  OF  ANALYTICAL  METHODS  FOR THE ANALYSIS OF
          PESTICIDES IN HUMANS  AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES, EPA-600/8-80-
          038, or  in the FDA Pesticide Analytical Manual.

5.4.3     If electronic integration is used, it is the responsibility of
          the analyst to be sure that the integration parameters are  set
          properly and that off-scale chromatograms are  within  the dyna-
          mic range of the device.    The  analyst should  also  check  for
          data flags that indicate  improper quantitation  of peaks prior
          to reporting data to the EPA.   In addition, the peak  width of
          identified analytes must not be  more than 2.0 times  the width
          of the high  concentration  calibration  peak(s)  for  the same
          analyte.

5.4.4     The detector response (peak area or peak height) to all of the
          analytes must lie between  the  response  of  the low and high
          concentrations in the three-point initial  calibration  in order
          to be quantitated.

5.4.5     The  concentration  of  the   single  component  analytes  are
          calculated using the following equations:
5.4.5.1   Water
                                          0/t)
            concentration    /;g/L  = (CF)(V-)(V )                (5'10)

          Where:
            AX =  Response for the parameter to be measured.
            CF =  Calibration factor for the external  standard (5.3.3)
                                 D-33

-------
            V^ =  Volume of total  extract   (/;L)   (take  into  account  any
                  dilution).
            Vj =  Volume of extract injected  (/;!_) .
            Vx =  Volume of water extracted  (ml_) .

5.4.5.2   Sediment/SoiI

                                   (Ax) (Vt)
          Concentration   /*g/kg = (CF)(V-)(W  ) (D)                 (5-10)

          (Dry weight basis)

          Where:

          AX, CF, Vj = same as given above  in  5.3.4.1

          ,»   100 - percent weight loss   ,       .    . , .  .     ,     e   . .    _  _,
          D = 	c	TQQ	a	   (percent  weight  loss from  Section  3.3)

          Ws = Weight of sample extracted (g).

5.4.6     The  quantitation  of  muIticomponent  pesticide/PCBs   must be
          accomplished by comparing the sum   of  the  heights or the  areas
          of at  least three major peaks of the muIticomponent analyte in
          the sample compared with the same   peaks in the standard.   The
          concentration of muIticomponent  analytes  are also calculated
          using equations 5.10 and 5.11 where  AX  is  the sum of the  major
          peaks of the muIt!component analyte.

5.4.7     The identification and quantitation  of muIticomponent  analytes
          may be complicated by the environmental  alteration  of  the peak
          pattern of multicomponent pesticides/PCBs, and by the  presence
          of coeluting analytes and/or matrix  interference.
                                  D-34

-------
5.4.8     If more than one multicomponent   is  observed  in a sample,  the
          laboratory must chose separate peaks to quantitate the differ-
          ent multicomponent analytes.   A  peak common  to both analytes
          present in the  sample  must  not  be  used to quantitate both
          compounds  in the same sample.

5.5       Scheme of Analysis.

5.5.1     A flow scheme for  the  analysis  of samples by this procedure
          are given  in Figure 1.

5.6       Sample chromatograms.

5.6.1     Sample  chromatograms  of   mixtures   containing  all  single
          component analytes and of all multicomponent analytes for both
          columns are presented in Figures 2-23.

5.7       Method Detection limits.

5.7.1     Any method is dependent on the complexity of the sample matrix
          analyzed,  but this procedure can  be  used to determine all  of
          the single component apolar organochlorine analytes (Table 1),
          except dial late to a  detection  limit   of <5 ppb.   If greater
          sensitivity is required, the 9 mL  of extract not subjected  to
          Diol  cleanup (4.3)   can  be  blown  down   to  1 ml (4.3.2)  and
          cleaned on a 1 g Diol  column.  This  concentrate can be used  to
          give a method detection limit of  <0.5 ppb.

5.7.2     The procedure can   be   used  to  determine  all   of the  single
          component   apolar   organophosphate  analytes  (Table  2)   to   a
          detection   limit  of  <50 ppm.     If  greater   sensitivity   is
          required,  the 9 mL  of   extract  not   subjected  to  Diol cleanup
                                 D-35

-------
(4.3) can be blown  down  to  1 ml_  and  cleaned on a 1 g Diol
column.   This  concentrate  can  be  used  to  give  a method
detection limit of <5 ppb.
                         D-36

-------
                     6.0  EXTRACTION-PHENQXYACIDS

6.1     OVERVIEW

6.1.1   Phenoxyacids and their esters are extracted from acidified aque-
        ous samples using methylene  chloride  using a continuous  liquid
        extractor.

6.1.2   Acids and  esters  are  extracted  from  acidified solid samples
        using methylene chloride/acetone and a sonicator.

6.1.3   Most sludge samples are treated as  solid samples (6.3) and 30 g
        samples are  extracted  with  methylene  chloride/acetone with a
        sonicator.  Some sludge samples  may be treated as liquid  (6.2).
        In that case,  30  g  are  added  to  1  L  of reagent water and
        extracted using a continuous extractor.

6.1.4   The sample extracts are reduced in volume using a K-D apparatus,
        the free  phenoxyacid  herbicides  are  partitioned into aqueous
        base and the esters  into  methylene  chloride.   The esters are
        hydrolyzed using aqueous potassium  hydroxide and neutral  organ-
        ics are partitioned into methylene  chloride and discarded.  The
        two basic aqueous fractions  containing phenoxyacids are combin-
        ed,  acidified,  and  the  acids  are  extracted  into methylene
        chloride.  The phenoxyacids are then derivitized with diazometh-
        ane and analyzed by GC/ECD.

6.2       LIQUID SAMPLE EXTRACTION-PHENOXYACID

6.2.1   Liquid samples must  be  extracted  using continuous extraction.
        Using a 1 liter graduated cylinder,  measure out a 1  liter  sample
        aliquot and place it into the continuous extractor.
                                  D-37

-------
6.2.2   With some samples, it may be necessary to place a layer of glass
        wool between the  methylene  chloride  and  water  layers  in the
        extractor to prevent precipitation  of suspended solids into the
        methylene chloride  during  extraction.    Any  sample  in which
        solids precipitate through  the  glass  wool  must be treated as
        solids (6.3).

6.2.3   The  percent  weight  loss  of  volatiles  from  sludge  must be
        determined and reported according  to the procedure described in
        Section 6.3.1.3.

6.2.4   After the sample has been  transferred to the extractor, measure
        and record the pH of  the  sample  with  wide range pH paper and
        adjust to below 2 with  1:1 suIfuric acid, if required (Caution:
        some samples should  be  acidified  in  the  hood because of the
        potential for generating hydrogen sulfide).

6.2.5   Add sufficient methylene  chloride  to  the  distilling flask to
        ensure proper cycling during operation and extract for 18 hours.

6.2.6   If  solids  are  present   in   the  methylene  chloride,  after
        extraction, filter the organic phase through Watman #1 paper.

6.2.7   Transfer the methylene chloride  fraction to a 500 ml_ separatory
        funnel and proceed  to  the  separation  of the phenoxyacids and
        phenoxyesters (6.4).

6.3     SOLID SAMPLE EXTRACTION-PHENOXYACID

6.3.1   Sample Preparation
                                   D-38

-------
6.3.1.1 Mix samples thoroughly, especially  composited samples.  Discard
        any foreign objects such  as  sticks,   leaves, and rocks.  Also,
        decant and discard any  standing  aqueous  phase.   The  lab must
        estimate to the nearest  10  percent  (by  weight) the amount of
        water decanted (and discarded)  from  the sample and report that
        value on the data sheet.

6.3.1.2 Transfer 30g of sample to a  100 mL  beaker.  Add 50 ml_ of water
        and stir for 1  hour.    Determine  pH  of  sample using a glass
        electrode and pH meter while the  sample is stirring.  Report pH
        value with the data, then  determine  the amount of 1:1 sulfuric
        acid/water required to reduce the pH to <2.  Discard the portion
        of the sample used for pH determination.

6.3.1.3 Transfer 5 to 10 g  of  the  sediment   into a tarred crucible or
        aluminum weighing pan and weigh to the nearest 0.01 g.  Transfer
        the sediment and weighing  pan  into  an over monitored at 105*C
        and dry overnight.  Allow the sample and weighing pan to cool in
        a desiccator  before  weighing.    Concentrations  of individual
        analytes  will  be  reported  relative  to  the  dry  weight  of
        sediment.  (Caution:  Gases  volatilized from some soiI/sediment
        samples may require that this drying procedure be carried out in
        a hood.)
          wt of sample - wt of dry sample v inn   tr   •  U4- i      tc. i -v
          	c—-—T	;	:	e— X 100 = » weight loss  (6.1)
                    wt of sample                       *         ^   J
6.3.2     Extraction with Sonic Agitation
6.3.2.1   Weigh approximately 30 g of sample (to the nearest 0.1-g) into
          a 400-mL beaker.
                                  D-39

-------
6.3.2.2   Add  the  amount  of  1:1  suIfuric  acid/water  determined in
          6.3.1.2 (Caution: some samples  may  evolve toxic gases on the
          addition of acid).

6.3.2.3   Add 60 g of acidified sodium sulfate.

6.3.2.4   Some  wet  sludge  samples  may  require  more  than  60  g of
          acidified sodium sulfate.   The  laboratory is required to add
          sufficient acidified sodium sulfate to adsorb all of the water
          in the sample prior to adding organic solvent.

6.3.2.5   Immediately  add  80 mL   of  1:1  methylene  chloride:acetone
          mixture to the sample.

€.3.2.6   Place the sonicator probe about  1/2 inch below the surface of
          the solvent but above the sediment layer.

6.3.2.7   Sonicate for 3 min.,  using  the  3/4  inch horn at full power
          with pulse set at 50 percent.  Do not use a microtip.

6.3.2.8   Caution - the sonicator  horn  must  be  cleaned in 5% aqueous
          sodium bicarbonate and methanol  between  samples.  If acid is
          allowed to remain on the horn, it will be damaged.

6.3.2.9   Prepare a filtration/drying  bed  by  placing  a plug of glass
          wool  in the neck  of  a  10-cm  powder  funnel and filling the
          funnel to  approximately  half  its  depth  (4  or  5 cm) with
          acidified sodium sulfate.      Decant  the extract through the
          packed funnel and  collect   it  in   a 500-mL evaporation  (K-D)
          flask, or a 500 mL centrifuge bottle.
                                   D-40

-------
6.3.2.10  Repeat the extraction two more times with fresh 80 mL portions
          of the 1:1  methylene  chloride:acetone  mixture.   Decant the
          extraction solvent after  each  sonication.    After the final
          sonication, pour the entire  sample  into the funnel and rinse
          with a 60-mL  portion  of  the  1:1 methylene chloride:acetone
          mi xture.

6.3.2.11  If required, centrifuge the combined extract for 10 minutes to
          settle fine particles then filter the extracts through Whatman
          #1 filter paper into a 500 mL K-D flask.

6.3.2.12  Transfer  the  methylene   chloride   fraction   to  a  500 mL
          separatory funnel  prior to  the separation of the phenoxyacids
          and phenoxyesters.

6.4       ESTER HYDROLYSIS

6.4.1     Extract the organic phase  of  the phenoxyacid preparation two
          times with 100 mL portions of  0.1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide.
          Combine the  aqueous  (top)  layers  containing  the free acid
          herbicides in a beaker and  save.   The organic (bottom) layer
          contains the herbicide esters,  which must be hydrolyzed.

6.4.2     Transfer the  methylene  chloride  layer  into 500-mL Kuderna-
          Danish flask.  Add boiling chips to  the K-D and fit it with a
          three-ball Snyder columns.  Wet the Snyder column with 1 mL of
          methylene chloride  and  reduce  the  methylene  chloride to a
          volume of approximately 25 mL on the water bath.

€.4.3     Remove the flask from  the  water  bath  and allow it to cool.
          Then add 5 mL  of  37/5  aqueous  potassium hydroxide,  30 mL of
          distilled water and 40 mL of methanol  to the flask.
                                  D-41

-------
6.4.4     Add additional  boiling chips to the flask.  Reflux the mixture
          in the K-D on the water  bath  for  2 hours.  Remove the flask
          from the water bath and cool to room temperature.

6.4.5     Transfer hydrolysate from the K-D flask to a 250 mL separatory
          funnel.  Extract the  aqueous  residue with 50 mL of methylene
          chloride and  discard  the  methylene  chloride (bottom layer)
          which contains neutral interferents.

6.4.6     At this point the  two  aqueous  solutions containing the free
          herbicide salts from 6.4.1 and 6.4.5 can be combined (they can
          be analyzed separately, if required).

6.4.7     Add suIfuric acid to the basic aqueous solutions to adjust the
          pH to <1.

6.4.8     Transfer  the  acidified   aqueous   solution  into  a  500 mL
          separatory funnel and  extract  the  solution three times with
          100 mL portions of methylene chloride.

6.4.9     Combine the organic extracts  in 500 mL Kuderna-Danish flasks.
          Add boiling chips to the  extracts  in the flasks and fit them
          with three-ball Snyder columns.

6.-4.10    Evaporate the methylene  chloride  to  approximately 5 mL on a
          hot water bath (the samples may be stored at this stage).

6.4.11    Remove the flasks  from  water  bath.   Evaporate the extracts
          just to dryness under a stream of nitrogen.

6.4.12    Re-dissolve the extracts in 10 mL of iso-octane.
                                  D-42

-------
6.4.13    Transfer 1 ml_ of the iso-octane  solution  to a clean  vial  and
          add 0.5 ml_ of methanol  and 3 ml_  of  ether.  The sample  is  now
          ready for methyl at ion with diazomethane  (the sample should  not
          be stored overnight at this step).
                                  D-43

-------
                          7.0  ESTERIFICATION

7.1       The diazomethane derivatization procedure described below will
          produce an  efficient  reaction  with  all  of the chlorinated
          herbicides described in this method.    It should be used only
          by  an  experienced  analyst,  due  to  the  potential hazards
          associated with its use.

7.2       Diazomethane is a  carcinogen  and  can  explode under certain
          conditions.  The following precautions should be taken:

          • Use a safety screen.

          • Use mechanical pipetting  aides  to reduce potential contact
            with diazomethane.

          • Do not heat above 90'C - EXPLOSION may result.

          • Avoid  grinding   surfaces,   ground-glass   joints,  sleeve
            bearings, and glass stirrers - EXPLOSION may result.

          • Store away from alkali metals - EXPLOSION may result.

          • Solutions of diazomethane decompose  rapidly in the presence
            of solid materials such  as  copper power, calcium chloride,
            and boiIi ng chi ps.

7.3       Specific instructions for  preparing diazomethane are provided
          with the generator kit.  They must be followed precisely.

7.4       Add 2 mL of diazomethane solution and let the sample stand for
          10 minutes with  occasional  swirling.    The  yellow color of
                                  D-44

-------
          diazomethane should be  evident  and  should  persist for this
          period.  If the yellow  color disappears before 10 minutes has
          passed, add  an  additional  2  mL  of  diazomethane solution.
          Colored or highly complex  samples  will require at least 4 mL
          of  diazomethane  to  ensure   quantitative  reaction  of  all
          phenoxyacid herbicides.  For  these samples, diazomethane must
          be added until no evolution  of nitrogen is observed after the
          addition of etheriaI  diazomethane.

7.5       After 15 minutes  rinse  inside  wall   of  ampule with several
          hundred /il_ of ethyl ether.   Reduce the sample to approximately
          1 mL  under  a  stream   of   nitrogen.     Remove  any  excess
          diazomethane by reacting it with 10 mg silicic acid.

7.6       Remove all  of  the  solvent  under  a   stream  of dry nitrogen
          (4.3.2).  When  the  vial   is  just  dry,  remove  it from the
          nitrogen.

7.7       Immediately transfer  the phenoxyesters  to an autosampler vial
          using hexane and  adjust  the  final   sample volume to 1.00 mL
          prior to GC analysis.
                                 D-45

-------
                     8.0  GC ANALYSIS-PHENOXYACIDS

8.1       SUMMARY

8.1.1     Extracts  are  analyzed  by   GC/ECD   for  methyl  esters  of
          phenoxyacid herbicides.

8.1.2     The primary column for analysis is  a  15  m x 0.53 mm ID DB-5
          megabore capillary column (or equivalent).

8.1.3     The secondary column for analyses is a  15 m x 0.53 mm ID SPB-
          608 or DB-608 megabore capillary column (or equivalent).

8.2       GC CONDITIONS

8.2.1     Megabore  capillary  columns  can  be  installed  in 0.25-inch
          packed column injector and detector ports using suitable glass
          adapters and graphite ferrules.   Because the column flow used
          will be approximately 5 mL/minute, it is necessary to supply a
          suitable makeup gas to the detector.

8.2.2     ECD's should be plumbed  with  helium  or hydrogen carrier gas
          and P-10 as a detector makeup gas.

8.2.3     The  initial  temperature  program   to  use  for  phenoxyacid
          herbicide analysis on both columns is:

            TJ = 50'C
            Initial time one minute
            Initial temperature ramp 15*/min to 140*C
            Second temperature ramp   2*/min to 180*C
            Final temperature hold   10 minutes
                                  D-46

-------
          it may be  necessary  to  adjust  the  temperature program for
          individual gas chromatographs.

8.2.4     GC injectors should be set at 260*C.

8.3       CALIBRATION

8.3.1     After establishing  the  appropriate  GC  operating conditions
          (8.2) for the method parameters, calibrate the GC system using
          the external standard technique.

8.3.2     For each parameter of  interest,  prepare working standards at
          three concentration levels over a range of at least two orders
          of magnitude by  reacting  solutions  of phenoxyacid standards
          with diazomethane using the procedure described in Section 7.0
          (quantitative  yield  of  methyl  esters  from  standards  and
          samples is assumed).  The low concentration should be near to,
          but not above, the method  detection  limit (8.7).  The medium
          concentration must be at least  10 times the low concentration
          and the high  concentration  must  be  at  least  10 times the
          medium   concentration   (at    least   100   times   the   low
          concentration).  These  concentrations  define the calibration
          range in which analytes can be quantitated.

8.3.3     Three-point instrument  calibration  based  on  peak height or
          peak area is  required  for  each  single component pesticide.
          The laboratory has 3 choices  on  how to establish three point
          calibration.  Only one of the three calibration methods can be
          used  to  quantitate  samples   in  any  single  run  sequence.
          laboratories cannot  mix  calibration  techniques  for samples
          quantitated using a single initial calibration.
                                  D-47

-------
8.3.4     The  laboratory  can  use   a  mean  calibration  factor  (CF)
          determined from the three concentration  but only if the X RSD
          for the three points is <10 percent.
                    r  Peak area (or height of the standard)
                                     i njected

               = -$•  x 100                                         (5.4)
N
ill
L (CFj - CF)2
N-l
          where SD =
          N=3
8.3.5     The laboratory can use  a  calibration  line drawn through all
          three calibration points only  if  their value (coefficient of
          determination)  from  the  linear  regression  calculation  is
          >0.975.

8.3.6     Laboratories with electronic integrators  or data systems that
          automatically calculate  calibration  curves  as line segments
          between calibration points and the origin may use line segment
          calibration curves for  each  single  component analyte.  This
          technique may be  used  only  if  the  r value (coefficient of
          determination)  from  the  linear  regression  calculation  is
          >0.975 for all three points for each single component analyte.

8.3.7     Sample  analysis  may   not   proceed   until  a  satisfactory
          calibration has been demonstrated.
                                  D-48

-------
8.3.8     The working calibration  curve  or  calibration factor must be
          verified on each working day by the measurement of one or more
          calibration standards.    If  the  response  for any parameter
          varies from the predicted  response  by  more than *10fl, a new
          calibration curve or calibration  factor  must be prepared for
          that parameter.

8.4       QUANTITATION OF ANALYSES

8.4.1     Analytes can be quantitated using either manual measurement of
          onscale chromatograms, with a modern electronic integrator, or
          with a laboratory data  system.    The  analyst can use either
          peak height or peak area  as  the basis for quantitation.  The
          use of manual  integration is strongly discouraged.

8.4.2     If  manual   quantitation     is   used,  all  peaks  used  for
          calibration and for sample  analysis  must be onscale and give
          at  least  20  percent  deflection  from  baseline  at maximum
          height.  Guidance in the manual quantitation of peaks is given
          i n the EPA MANUAL  OF  ANALYTICAL  METHODS FOR THE ANALYSIS OF
          PESTICIDES IN HUMANS  AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES,  EPA-600/8-80-
          038, or in the FDA Pesticide Analytical Manual.

8.4.3     If electronic  integration is used, it is the responsibility of
          the analyst to be sure that the integration parameters are set
          properly  and   that  off-scale  chromatograms  are   within the
          dynamic range  of the  device.     The analyst should also check
          for data flags  that  indicate  improper quantitation of peaks
          prior to reporting data  to  the  EPA.    In addition,  the peak
          width of identified analytes must  not   be more than  2.0 times
          the width of  the  high  concentration  calibration  peak(s)  for
          the same analyte.
                                 D-49

-------
8.4.4     The detector response  (peak area  or  peak  height)  to all  of the
          analytes must  lie between  the   response   of  the low and high
          concentrations  in the  three-point initial  calibration in order
          to be quantitated.

8.4.5     The concentration of the surrogate and  of  the single component
          analytes are calculated using the following equations1
8.4.5.1   Water
                                       (Ax)(Vt)
            concentration    pg/L  =  (Cp-\ (VO fV ")                (5-10)

          Where:
            AX = Response  for  the  parameter  to be measured.
            CF = Calibration factor for  the  external  standard.
            V*. = Volume of  total extract (/il_)  (take into account any
                 xJi lution) .
            Vj = Volume of  extract injected  (/
-------
          n   100 - percent weight loss  ,      .    .  ,, ,     ,.    c   .    _ ,,
          D = 	c	TQQ	a	  (percent weight loss from Section 3.3)

          Ws = Weight of sample extracted (g)

8.5       FLOW SCHEME

8.5.1     A flow scheme for  the  analysis  of samples by this procedure
          are given in Figure 1.

8.6       SAMPLE CHROMATOGRAMS

8.6.1     Sample  chromatograms  of   mixtures   containing  all  single
          component analytes  and  of  all   multi-component analytes are
          presented in Figures 2-23.

8.7       METHOD DETECTION LIMIT

8.7.1     Any method is dependent on  the complexity of the sample matrix
          analyzed, but this procedure can  be  used to determine all  of
          the phenoxyacid analytes except  24-D (Table 3) to a detection
          limit of <5 ppb.    If  greater  sensitivity  is required,  the
          remaining 9 mL of iso-octane extract can be  blown down to 1  mL
          (3.3.2) and ester ified.  This  concentrate can be used to give
          a method detection burst of 0.5 ppb.
                                  D-51

-------
                         9.0  QUALITY CONTROL

9.1       Each time a set of samples  is  extracted or there is a change
          in reagents, a method blank should be processed to demonstrate
          that all  glassware and reagents are interference-free.  Method
          interferences  may  be  caused  by  contaminants  in solvents,
          reagents, glassware,  and  other  sample  processing hardware;
          these contaminants lead to discrete artifacts, and/or elevated
          baselines,  in gas  chrbmatograms.    Interferences by phthalate
          esters  especially  can  pose  a  major  problem  in pesticide
          analysis when using  the  electron  capture  detector.  Common
          flexible plastics contain varying  amounts of phthafates which
          are easily  extracted  during  laboratory  operations.  Cross-
          contamination  of  clean   glassware   routinely  occurs  when
          plastics are handled.   Interferences from phthalates can best
          be minimized by  avoiding  the  use  of  such  plastics in the
          laboratory.  Exhaustive cleanup  of reagents and glassware may
          be required to eliminate background phthalate contamination.

9.2       Standard quality assurance practices  should be used with this
          method.  Field replicates should  be collected to validate the
          precision of the  sampling  technique.    Laboratory replicates
          should be analyzed to validate  the precision of the analysis.
          It is suggested that the response of the external standards be
          plotted daily as a quality  control check.  Where doubt exists
          over  the  identification  of  a  peak   on  the  chromatogram,
          confirmatory techniques such as GC/MS should be used.

9.3       Waste samples spiked with  selected  analytes must be analyzed
          for at least 10% of  the  samples  to validate the accuracy of
          the analysis.  The results  of the recovery of spiked analytes
          must be reported with sample data.
                                  D-52

-------
9.4       At the option of  the  I.T.D.,  the requirement for spiking at
          least 10/5  of  the  samples  with  selected  herbicides may be
          replaced  with   a   requirement   for   analyzing   a  matrix
          spike/matrix  spike  duplicate  (MS/MSD)  pair  for  every  20
          samples ana lyzed.

9.5       The MS/MSD  pair  are  prepared  by  spiking  duplicate sample
          aliquots  with   the   particular   matrix  spiking  solutions
          described below.   The  MS/MSD  pair  as  we I I as the unspiked
          sample  are  analyzed  by  the  procedures  described  in this
          protocol.  The recoveries  of  the  matrix spike compounds are
          reported with the sample data using the formula below.
            u .  •     • i              o\~     .. — —
            Matrix spike recovery = — ^-r — x 100

          SSR = Sample spike results
          SR  = Sample result
          SA  = Spike added

9.5.1     The apolar MS/MSD samples are  each spiked with two solutions.
          One  for   organochlorine   compounds   and   the   other  for
          organophosphates.  The spiking solution for organochlor ines is
          the same one as is used  in the CLP analysis of organochlorine
          pesticides and is listed below.

                        Pesticide           /
-------
          The spiking solution  for  organophosphate pesticides is listed
          be Iow.

                         Pesticide            ^g/1.0 ml
                      Chlorpyriophos             100
                      Fenthion                    100
                      Ma lath ion                  100
                      Parathion,  ethyl            100
                      Carbofenthion              100

          The solutions are prepared in  acetone  and must be allowed to
          equilibrate at room temperature before they are spiked.

9.5.2     The phenoxyacid MS/MSD   samples  are  spiked  with the mixture
          Iisted below.

                        Herbicide     •      /*g/l .0 mL
                        2,4-D                  0.5
                        2,4,5-T                0.5

          The solution is prepared  in  acetone  and  must be allowed to
          equilibrate at room temperature before it is spiked.

9.6       It is critical that  analysts become proficient with capillary
          GC analysis before using  this method to generate quantitative
          results.

9.7       Store stock solutions  of  standards  at  4*C and protect from
          light.  AM  such  solutions  must  be  checked frequently for
          signs  of  degradation    or  evaporation.    Organophosphorous
          standards are particularly prone to hydrolysis during storage.
                                  D-54

-------
                           10.0  REFERENCES
10.1  Statement  of  Work   -   GC   Methods  for  Environment   Samples,
        Pesticides, PCP's  (proposed),  Prepared  for  J. Fisk,  Office of
        Remedial and Emergency  Response,  USEPA,  by  P. Marsden and D.
        BottrelI.

10.2  Single-Laboratory Validation of EPA  Method  8150 for  the Analysis
        of Chlorinated Herbicides in  Hazardous Waste, EPA 600/4-85-060,
        prepared for D.F.  Gurka, QAO,  EMSL-LV, by F. Shore, E.N. Amick,
        and S.T. Pan.

10.3  Single Laboratory Validation of  EPA  Method 8140 for  the Analysis
        of  Organophosphorous   Pesticides   in   Hazardous   Waste  (in
        manuscript), prepared  for  D.  Betowski,  QAD,  EMSL-LV,  by V.
        Taylor, D.  Mickey,  and P.  Marsden.

10.4  Methods for Organic Chemical  Analysis of Municipal and Industrial
        Waste Water,  EPA  600/4-82-057,   by  J.E.  Longbottom   and J.J.
        Lichtenberg.
                                 D-55

-------
                         TABLE 1
                   HFOLAR ORGHNQCHLORINE
          PARAMETERS OF THE CONSOLIDATED  METHOD
COMPOUND
                   METHOD
                                    RETENTION TIME
                                      DB-5    SFB-6CS
                         DB-608
Aldrin
Aroclor 1O16
Aroclor 1221
Aroclor 1232
Aroclor 1242
Aroclor 1248
Aroclor 1254
Aroclor 1260
BHC, alpha
BHC, beta
BHC , gamma
BHC, delta
Cc»ptan
Carbophenthion
Chlordane
Chi orobenzyl ate
ODD
DDE
DDT
Dibutylchlorendate
Dichloran
Dieldrin
Endosul-fan I
Endosul-fan II
Endosul-fan sulfate
Endr in
Endrin Aldehyde
Endr in ketone
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hex abr omob en z ene
Hexachl orobenzene
Isodnn
Methoxychl or
Mi rex
Ni tro-f en
PCNB
To::aphene
Tr t -f lural in
608,617
6O8 ,617
608,617
608,617
608 ,617
608,617
608,617
608,617
608 ,617
608,617
608,617
608 ,617
617
617,622
608,617
60S. 1
608,617
608,617
608,617
no
617
608,617
608,617
608,617
608,617
608,617
608,617
no
608,617
608,617
no
no
617
617
no
6O8. 1 ,617
617


19.77
mul tiple
fnul tiple
mul tiple
mul tiple
mul tipl e
mul tiple
multiple
13.77
14. 74
15.01
15.93
22.03
28.44
mul tiple
26.49
26 . 99
24.70
29.01
34.20
14.31
24.88
23.54
26.49
28.77
26.02
27.48
31.25
18. 14
21.69
31.85
14.24
21. 19
32. 17
34.49
25.99
15.24
mul tiple
12.95
18.33
mul tiple
mul tiple
multiple
mul tiple
mul tiple
mul tiple
multiple
1 3 . 70
15.04
15.22
17.15
24.24
26.69
mu 1 1 1 p 1 e
26.03
• 26.79
24. 16
28.75
32.61
14.30
24.35
22.81
27. 15
29.41
26. 11
28.32
33.27
16.87
21.01
31.54
13.37
20.33
33 . 37
33 . 59
26.35
14.73
mul tiple
1 1 . 0 1
*^"^ i.x.
L_ . OO
mul tipl s
mul tiple
mui tiple
mul ti pie
mu 1 t i p 1 e
mul tiple
mul tiple
13.48
20 . 4 1
20.09
21.86
nd
30. 43
mul ti pie
26.35
29. 17
27. 10
30 . 33
33.47
19.73
27 . 34
26. 17
29.38
31.21
28.69
31.21
31 .51
21 . 38
24.86
34. 79
nd
24.36
33 . 46
33.68
27.06
19.50
multiple
14.83
RELATED COMPOUNDS
COMPOUND
Capto-fol
Chloroneb
Chloropropylate
DBCP
Dico-f ol
Etridazole
Kepone
Perthane (Ethylan)
Propachlor
Strobane
METHOD
no
60S . 1
608. 1
608. 1
617
608. 1
no
no
617
608 ,617
DB-5
31.26
10.46
nd
5.91
32 . 35
9.82
28.04
26.23
nd
mu 1 1 i p 1 e
SPB-60S
26.33
10.67
nd
5.96
32.76
9.76
26.28
26. O9
nd
mul tiple




7.6





mul tiple
Diallata(cis,trans)
nd = not determined
13.57,13.91 12.89,13.20
                           D-56

-------
                     TABLE 2
                  APOLAR QRSANOPHOSPHORQUS
        PARAMETERS OF THE CONSOLIDATED METHOD
COMPOUND
METHOD
RETENTION TIME
DB-5      SPB-608
Az i nphos ethyl
A: i nphos methyl
Carbophenthi on
Ch 1 or i en vi nphos
Chlorpyrophos
Coumophos
Demeton (mixed ;
Di azi non
Dichlovos
Dicrotophos
Dimethoate
Dioxathion
Di sul •f oton
EPN
Ethi on
Famphur
Fensul -f at hi on
Fenthi on
HMPA
Leptophos
Malathion
Mevi nphos
Monocrotophos
Nal ed
P.arathion, ethyl
Parathion, methyl
Phorate
Phosmet
Phosphanu don
Sul •f otepp
TEPP
Terbuphos
Tetrachlorovi nphos
TOCP
Tr i ch loro f on
no
614,622
617,622
no
622
622
614,622
614,622,
622



614,622

614,701

622
622


61-1,701
622

622
614,701
014,622,
622








Trimethyl phosphate

COMPOUND
Bol star
Ch 1 or p vrophos , me
Crotoxyphos
Cn chlorf enthi on
Cthoorop
f''6"-pnas
NpthvJ trithion
Ranni-»i
Tok ut hi an
Trich 1 or en at. =
RELATED
METHOD
o22
622
no
701
622
622
701
no
no
no
39.04
38.34
25.25
33.57
31. 17
39.83
18.31 ,20.96
7 24.27
9.63
15.23
20.64
39.93
23.71
37. SO
36. 17
36.43
35.83
3 1 . S3
10.69
38.47
31.72
14. 19
20.04
1 9 . 0 1
31.85
7 31. 83
19. 94
37.56
27.05
20 . 1 i
6. 44
22. 63
34.65
38.79
11.91
2.35
COMPOUNDS
DB-5
36.34
nd
34 . 06
9.63
18.62
nd
nd
2". 23
34. 67
32. 19
38.49
38. O4
35. 10
31.86
26.88
38.87
15.90,18.84
20.OO
7.91
19. 12
20. 18
33.17
19.96
36.71
34.79
35.93
35.20
29.45
9.23
37.25
28.78
12.88
20. 1 1
17.40
27.62
23.71
17.52
37 . 20
24.46
18.02
5. 12
18.81
32.99
37.71
nd
nd

SPB-6O8
nd
nd
33.07
7.91
lo.4S
26.82
nd
22.98
no
nd
                      D-57

-------
                  TABLE 3
                     PHENOXYACID
            ANALYTES OF CONSOLIDATED METHOD
COMPOUND    METHOD       DB-S   SPB-608
D
'?
2
2
inc
,4-
,4.
,4,
sseb
-D
,5-T
,5-TP
6
6
6
6
15
15
15
15
30.
20.
26.
25.
28
84
95
73
26.
"?O
±.*L. «
29.
29.
25
91
13
33
RELATED COMPOUNDS
Dalapon          615
2,4-DB           615     29.7     32.1!
Dicarnba          615
Dichlorprop      615
MCPA             615
MCPP             615
                    D-58

-------
                         TABLE 4
         RECOVERY OF SINGLE  COMPONENT
       HALOGENATED PESTICIDES (50 nq/L;
COMPOUND
        DB-5
RECOVERY  C/.)
            SPB-608
r-Bd RECOVERY (7.)   rsd
Aldrin
BHC, alpha
BHC,beta
BHC , gamma
BHC, delta
Captan
Carbophenth i an
Chlorobeneyl ate
ODD
DDE
DDT
Dial late
Di chloran
Di el drin
Endosulfan I
Endosul-fan II
Endosul-fan 304
Endr in
Endrin Aldehyde
Endr in ketone
Heptachl or
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachl orobenzene
Isodri n
Methoxychlor
Mir ex
Ni tro-fen
PCNB
Tr i f lural in
3*n '~\
*i « ^.
105.9
94.2
1 09 . 9
* 30 . 4
nd
* 185.2
118.2
117.2
82. 1
97.3
nd
23.4
93.7
81.6
63.7
* 38.3
97.2
* 22.2
* 14. 1
* 59. 1
* 468.3
nd
54.9
104.9
90. 5
90.3
97.5
111.3
5. 1
7.9
9. 1
3.8
48

8
12
8.5
r*'~v
•-'*.
18

26
16
16
34

22

23
28


21
12
9.8
1 1
14
5.5
75.7
108.7
99.9
1 03 . 3
* 27 . 0
nd
*
86.5
113.2
39 . 0
89. 1
nd
28. 1
t
1U2.8
83.8
74.4
•* 14.5
1 OO . 6
*
*
* 60 . 4
85. 1
nd
59.2
1 06 . 6
1 08 . 5
1 1 5 . 0
93.3
123.8
1 0 . 3
5.4
6.5
5.7
16


8.3
1 0 . 6
25
a. 9

13
9.3
13
24
25
16


28
4.6

17
3.9
7. 1
6.5
16
2.9
Values  marked with a
nd =  not determined
    (*)  had  coeluting  peaks
                           D-59

-------
                    TABLE 5
          RECOVERY OF  PHOSPHATE PESTICDE:
           SPIKED AT 50 PF£

compound            recovery      r.s.d.
Asinphos ethyl
Asinphos methyl
Carbophenthi on
Chiarpyrcphos
Caumophos
Diaz inon
Dichl orvos
Dicrotophos
Di methoate
Dioxathion
EPN
Ethi on
Famphur
HMPA
Leptophos
Mai athi on
Parathion, ethyl
Parathion, methyl
Phorate
Sul f otepp
TEPP
Terbuphos
Tetrachl orovinphos
TOCP
Tr ichloro-f on
Trimethyi phosphate
77.0
83. 1
136. 6
84. 1
73.0
86.9
80 . 6
95.3
42.5
79.6
81.8
32 . 0
62.8
1 20 . 2
77.2
89.8
82.6
82.0
97.0
100.7
82.0
37.3
88.3
81.7
40.4
25.6
8.9V.
4.9V.
15.87.
4 . a1/.
9 . 37.
4 . 67.
4.57.
5 . 37.
3 1 . 47.
7.27.
6 . 07.
5 . 47.
1 4 . 57.
4.47.
8 . 97.
5.97.
7 . 47.
5.67.
5 . 07.
5 . 27.
18.27.
4.57.
1 1 . 07.
3.07.
27.97.
15. 17.
                      D-60

-------
          TABLE 6
RECOVERY OF PHENOXYACID
 HERBICIDES SPIKED AT 10 PPg
COMPOUND
Di noseb
2,4-D
'•) n cr_ T
A. , t , 0 1
2,4,5-TP
2,4-DB
PERCENT
RECOVERY
58
92
69
60
86
r . s. d .
9 . 37.
5.07.
9. IV.
7 . 67.
9.57.
           D-61

-------
39-d
•ss|diueg jo si
 JQJ. suraipg MOJJ  'i sjn6|-j
O314M 133COIM U110N |

313T*I03
SISJklYtn
0I3YAXON3HJ


fflfOSIO
3IWYWIO
1
w I

13»«lir731l W/<»l»
'32:j»»l»03» 'jirnio
~~Xp9Y10333V>
m \. ,/
^r



IO3IJJO 133TOIW iJIlOX |
OYMin3H HO/OHY

*wYTi3 TYWiiiooY 'aimio
Ol/l
CD 3/30 ii 37JL1WV U 	 1 5i31J«3D


5KYH1X02I10
HIM uimn
i
K3H13 an 10NVH19I
•>ni30-0»I
HI 3A-KJTSIOM
N390H1IN HIU
1K3ATOJ TTJ 3AOH3*
•^ t-t 01
1
0-»
S3MI1 f
lOIKntO 3NTUH1X
Hill 13HUO
T>W 01 uion»

S1TVI
OI3Y snosrtnr »n««n
	 1

30JWK3 3NTUH11*
HIU UYSnOMWI
xi unjja

sm>M i
3znO*aUI "NO**
an tain 'Mm OOY
•"•««•-»
3IWOW

^X^^ »-!*• ^»v
^"^^
v^



39 an (DJ/» it JUTvwr [~— J

i
3iI/WS/»»J DO — — <
'•) '*H Hit! WWTTB JAORM ni
'IKSSU*^
***jnrr&s^
1
| •* ft 01 3WTDA 3XI03W
•• * HIU utrn


i
-» fi 01 jwnot
isnrm 'jMnai
!
0-» Mill f »-t
01 UTIUMJX03
1 	
4MVJ U
1
JWHIJXOWTKDie
3«YS smnbY ^ ^mj, ltnroY

M0*« « T'»
Hill S3WI1 I 3SYHJ
3INV9K) Ml UTHin
Inarms mioos
C3IJIOI3Y MDflOIMl
wvtw 3iMV9«D miu

wiY3i«Di
XICT JN0133Y
/3WTH13"0«T»OJO Hit*
mtii i rtiun
z> 01 isnro»
on •»" jmtrm
^\
cnos (-^^

^V"
«131
snona
3HVH
HI

nun nnen
UWMC1K310 UQ^SS -
u u»Mua ««*•
z> 01 isnroY
 — »omf • *i IB
^ n*»n WIYI i i

[ oijYixomtu |

j





nod lonBriv ow sjsx^wff
, — - - 1
390I«iirr3 1010
» Oi -P ••! VUSNYU
1


•p »i 01 mnno*
ON 1
_/2^i\
»i\^2^x
e-x HIU
f t-t 01 UTKin

oinbn tnonNiAMO?
• sunn
HIU isnia
i
 tunsrm
\
¥31»1 1 t '
f •'» 01 iwno*
isnrof 'JMTUX
• 	 -L --
0-« Y HIU "P >-t
01 11VUIO3N03
1
4WVJ U
MD MOMM
1
HIU f fft
01 3MfnoA isnrw
BUVWMY
0-» Y K1U
•F >-t 01 uwin
UYUNDNn
HVJTrtS MnjQOS
ManoiMi aiiu
-owrioio HIU
nm i nvvia
XIR ONY HY/Tnt
miaos *t« OOY

IOXYM -* •» Y
1
n^m KUW i i | n*wt onoc
_/£
^
^
»TTOV» |
T



-------
   !

   I'"
             Died I oran
                    t
-------
                                                8HC,
  >_
  r~
                   Endrjn
                     Endovullan II
                              Endo^ul t
                              DOE Diffldrio
Figure 2B.  Sample Chromatogram of  Selected Apolar
      Organochlorine Pesticides on  the DB-5.
                         D-64

-------
                       tl.fl
                    CT.....
 BHC,alpha


 .'. Ma

frhC.beta
                                                           h nOOSLl I r
                                                            DCS
                                                            ui el 
-------

          xT: •i-uve .2 ' Cff

           12. tZ
                            Endrin
         f
Figure 38.  Sample  Chromatogram of Selected Apolar  Organochlorine
                    Pesticides on the SPB-608.
                                D-66

-------
                   v_
                   0
                            IT
                            C
                            r
                            D.
Is
fi o
u =
                      V-A)
Figure 4A.  Sample Chromatogram of Selected Apolar
     Organophosphorous Pesticides on the DB-5.
                      D-67

-------
                      a
                      a
                      a
     VI
01 jJ
6 a.
                                 c  c
                                 :"  0
     r.  *
     i  o
     6  •£

     *  c
Figure 4B.  Sample Chromatogram of Selected  Apolar

     Organophosphorous Pesticides on  the  DB-5.
                        D-68

-------
                       , c
Figure 5A.   Sample Chromatogram of Selected Apolar
   Organophosphorous Pesticides on the SPB-608.
                      D-69

-------
      UJ
Figure SB.  Sample Chromatogram of Selected Apolar
   Organophosphorous Pesticides on the SPB-608.
                       D-70

-------
              U-Q
'S~8Q 8M^ uo
                                      -g
•I  —

-------
•809-aa SM^ u°
• i sjn6i-j
  II
  J-

-------
Figure 8.  Toxaphene on the DB-5.
               D-73

-------

-------
Figure 10.  Chlordane on the DB-5.
               D-75

-------
Figure 11.  Chlordane on the SP8-608.
                D-76

-------
Figure 12.  Aroclor 1016/1260 on the DB-5,
                   D-77

-------
Figure 13.   Aroclor 1016/1260 on the SPB-608.
                      D-78

-------
J
              Figure 14.  Aroclor 1221 on the DB-5.
                              D-79

-------
00
o

-------
     18-d
'809-90
uo SSSI Jopojy  '91
          TIT

-------
Figure 17.  Aroclor 1232 on the SPB-608.
                   D-82

-------
Figure 18.  Aroclor 1242 on the DB-5.
                 D-83

-------
                                   I'M   £• .... -*JP
Figure 19.  Aroclor 1242 on the SPB-608.
                   D-84

-------
    S8-Q
'S-8Q
     jopojy  '03
ffl

-------
Figure 21.   Aroclor 1248 on the SPB-608.
                  D-86

-------
Figure 22.  Aroclor 1254 on the DB-5.
                 D~87

-------
Figure 23.  Aroclor 1254 on the SPB-608.
                  D-88

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 1624C
  D-89

-------
18 December 1986

Method 1624, Revision C
Volatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution GCMS

1  Scope and application
1.1  This method is designed to determine the volatile toxic organic
    pollutants associated with the 1976 Consent Decree; the Resource
    Conservation and Recovery Act; the Comprehensive Environmental
    Response,  Compensation and Liabilities Act; and other compounds
    amenable to purge and trap gas chromatography-mass spectrometry
    (GCMS).
1.2  The chemical compounds listed in tables 1 and 2 may be determined
    in waters, soils, and municipal sludges by this method.  The method
    is designed to meet the survey requirements of the Environmental
    Protection Agency.
1.3  The detection limit of this method is usually dependent on the
    level of interferences rather than instrumental limitations.   The
    levels in table 3 typify the minimum quantity that can be detected
    with no  interferences present.
1.4  The GCMS  portions of this method are for use only by analysts
    experienced with GCMS or under the close supervision of such quali-
    fied persons.  Laboratories unfamiliar with analyses of environmen-
    tal samples by GCMS should run the performance tests in reference 1
    before beginning.

2  Summary of method
2.1  The percent solids content of the sample is determined.  If the
                                    D-90

-------
    solids content is known or determined to be less than one percent,
    stable isotopically labeled analogs of the compounds of  interest
    are added to a 5 mL sample and the sample is purged with an  inert
    gas at 20 - 25 °C in a chamber designed for soil or water samples.
    If the solids content is greater than one percent, five  mL of
    reagent water and the labeled compounds are added to a 5 gram
    aliquot of sample and the mixture is purged at 40 °C.  Compounds
    that will not purge at 20 - 25 °C or at 40 °C are purged at  75 - 85
    °C.
    In the purging process, the volatile compounds are transferred from
    the aqueous phase into the gaseous phase where they are passed into
    a sorbent column and trapped.   After purging is completed,  the trap
    is backflushed and heated rapidly to desorb the compounds into a
    gas chromatograph (GC).  The compounds are separated by the GC and
    detected by a mass spectrometer (MS)  (references 2 and 3).   The
    labeled compounds serve to correct the variability of the analyti-
    cal technique.
2.2  Identification of a pollutant (qualitative analysis)  is performed
    in one of three ways:   (1)  For compounds listed in table 1 and
    other compounds for which authentic standards are available,  the
    GCMS system is calibrated and  the mass spectrum and retention time
    for each standard are stored in a user created library.   A compound
    is identified when its retention time and mass spectrum agree with
    the library retention time and spectrum.   (2)  For compounds listed
    in table 2 and other compounds for which standards are not avail-
    able,  a compound is identified when the retention time and mass
    spectrum agree with those specified in this  method.   (3)  For
    chromatographic peaks  which are not identified by (1)  and (2)
    above,  the background  corrected spectrum at  the peak  maximum  is
                                1624C D-91

-------
    compared with spectra in the EPA/NIH Mass Spectral File (reference
    4).   Tentative identification is established when the spectrum
    agrees.
2.3  Quantitative analysis is performed in one of four ways by GCMS
    using extracted ion current profile (EICP)  areas:  (1)  For com-
    pounds listed in table 1 and other compounds for which standards
    and labeled analogs are available, the GCMS system is calibrated
    and the  compound concentration is determined using an isotope
    dilution technique.  (2)  For compounds listed in table 1 and for
    other compounds for which authentic standards but no labeled
    compounds are available,  the GCMS system is calibrated and the
    compound concentration is determined using an internal standard
    technique.   (3)  For compounds listed in table 2 and other compounds
    for which standards are not available, compound concentrations are
    determined using known response factors.  (4) For compounds for
    which neither standards nor known response factors are available,
    compound concentration is determined using the sum of the EICP
    areas relative to the sum of the EICP areas of the nearest eluted
    internal standard.
2.4  Quality is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of
    the purge and trap and GCMS systems.

3  Contamination and interferences
3.1  Impurities in the purge gas, organic compounds out-gassing from
    the plumbing upstream of the trap, and solvent vapors in the
    laboratory account for the majority of contamination problems.  The
    analytical system is demonstrated to be free from interferences
    under conditions of the analysis by analyzing reagent water blanks
    initially and with each sample batch  (samples analyzed on the same
                                 1624C  D-92

-------
    8 hr shift), as described in section 8.5.
3.2  Samples can be contaminated by diffusion of volatile organic
    compounds (particularly methylene chloride)  through the bottle seal
    during shipment and storage.  A field blank prepared from reagent
    water and carried through the sampling and handling protocol serves
    as a check on such contamination.
3.3  Contamination by carry-over can occur when high level and low
    level samples are analyzed sequentially.   To reduce carry-over, the
    purging device (figure 1 for samples containing less than one
    percent solids; figure 2 for samples containing one percent solids
    or greater)  is cleaned or replaced with a clean purging device
    after each sample is analyzed.   When an unusually concentrated
    sample is encountered, it is followed by analysis of a reagent
    water blank to check for carry-over.  Purging devices are cleaned
    by washing with soap solution,  rinsing with tap and distilled
    water,  and drying in an oven at 100-125 °C.   The trap and other
    parts of the system are also subject to contamination; therefore,
    frequent bakeout and purging of the entire system may be required.
3.4  Interferences resulting from samples will vary considerably from
    source to source, depending on the diversity of the site being
    sampled.

4  Safety
4.1  The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used
    in this method has not been precisely determined; however, each
    chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard.
    Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest
    possible level.  The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a
    current awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe
                                 1624C D-93

-------
    handling of the chemicals specified in this method.   A reference
    file of data handling sheets should also be made available to all
    personnel involved in these analyses.   Additional information on
    laboratory safety can be found in references 5-7.
4.2  The following compounds covered by this method have been tenta-
    tively classified as known or suspected human or mammalian carci-
    nogens: benzene/ carbon tetrachloride, chloroform,  and vinyl
    chloride.  Primary standards of these  toxic compounds should be
    prepared in a hood,  and a NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator
    should be worn when high concentrations are handled.

5  Apparatus and materials
5.1  Sample bottles for discrete sampling
5.1.1  Bottle~25 to 40 mL with screw cap  (Pierce 13075, or equiva-
    lent) .  Detergent wash, rinse with tap and distilled water, and dry
    at >105 °C for one hr minimum before use.
5.1.2  Septum—Teflon-faced silicone (Pierce 12722, or equivalent),
    cleaned as above and baked at 100 - 200 °C for one hour minimum.
5.2  Purge and trap device—consists of purging device,  trap, and
    desorber.
5.2.1  Purging devices for water and soil  samples
5.2.1.1  Purging device for water samples—designed to accept 5 mL
    samples with water column at least 3 cm deep.  The volume of the
    gaseous head space between the water and trap shall be less than 15
    mL.  The purge gas shall be introduced less than 5 mm from the base
    of the water column and shall pass through the water as bubbles
    with a diameter less than 3 mm.  The purging device shown in figure
    1 meets these criteria.
5.2.1.2 Purging device for solid samples—designed to accept 5 grams of
                                 1624C  D-94

-------
    solids plus 5 mL of water.  The volume of the gaseous head space
    between the water and trap shall be less than 25 mL.  The purge gas
    shall be introduced less than 5 mm from the base of the sample and
    shall pass through the water as bubbles with a diameter less than 3
    mm.  The purging device shall be capable of operating at ambient
    temperature (20 - 25 °C) and of being controlled at temperatures of
    40 +/- 2 °C and 80 +/- 5 °C while the sample is being purged.  The
    purging device shown in figure 2 meets these criteria.
5.2.2  Trap—25 to 30 on x 2.5 mm i.d. minimum, containing the follow-
    ing:
5.2.2.1  Methyl silicone packing—one +/~ 0.2 cm, 3 percent OV-l on
    60/30 mesh Chromosorb W, or equivalent.
5.2.2.2  Porous polymer—15 +/~ 1-° cm? Tenax GC (2,6-diphenylene oxide
    polymer),  60/80 mesh, chromatographic grade, or equivalent.
5.2.2.3  Silica gel~8 +/- 1.0 cm, Davison Chemical, 35/60 mesh, grade
    15, or equivalent.  The trap shown in figure 3 meets these specifi-
    cations .
5.2.4  Desorber—shall heat the trap to 175 +/- 5 °C in 45 seconds or
    less.  The polymer section of the trap shall not exceed a tempera-
    ture of 180 °C and the remaining sections shall not exceed 220 °C
    during desorb, and no portion of the trap shall exceed 225 °C
    during bakeout.  The desorber shown in figure 4 meets these
    specifications.
5.2.5  The purge and trap device may be a separate unit or coupled to a
    GC as shown in figures 4 and 5.
5.3  Gas chromatograph—shall be linearly temperature programmable with
    initial and final holds, shall contain a glass jet separator as the
    MS interface,  and shall produce results which meet the calibration
    (section 7),  quality assurance (section 8), and performance tests
                                 1624C D-95

-------
    (section 11)  of this method.
5.3.1  Column—2.8 +/- 0.4 m x 2  +/- °-5 n™ i«d.  glass, packed with one
    percent SP-1000 on Carbopak B, 60/80 mesh,  or equivalent.
5.4  Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron impact ionization; shall
    repetitively scan from 20 to  250 amu every 2-3 seconds, and produce
    a unit resolution (valleys between m/z 174-176 less than 10 percent
    of the height of the m/z 175  peak),  background corrected mass
    spectrum from 50 ng 4-bromofluorobenzene (BFB) injected into the
    GC.  The BFB spectrum shall meet the mass-intensity criteria in
    table 4.  All portions of the GC column, transfer lines, and
    separator which connect the GC column to the ion source shall
    remain at or above the column temperature during analysis to
    preclude condensation of less volatile compounds.
5.5  Data system—shall collect and record MS data, store mass-
    intensity data in spectral libraries, process GCMS data and
    generate reports, and shall calculate and record response factors.
5.5.1  Data acquisition—mass spectra shall be collected continuously
    throughout the analysis and stored on a mass storage device.
5.5.2  Mass spectral libraries—user created libraries containing mass
    spectra obtained from analysis of authentic standards shall be
    employed to reverse search GCMS runs for the compounds of interest
    (section 7.2).
5.5.3  Data processing—the data  system shall be used to search,
    locate, identify, and quantify the compounds of interest in each
    GCMS analysis.  Software routines shall be employed to compute
    retention times and EICP areas.  Displays of spectra, mass chroma-
    tograms, and library comparisons are required to verify results.
5.5.4  Response factors and multipoint calibrations—the data system
    shall be used to record and maintain lists of response factors
                                 1624C  D-96

-------
    (response ratios for isotope dilution) and generate multi-point
    calibration curves  (section 7).  Computations of relative standard
    deviation (coefficient of variation) are useful for testing
    calibration linearity.  Statistics on initial and on-going perfor-
    mance shall be maintained (sections 8 and 11).
5.6  Syringes—5 mL glass hypodermic, with Luer-lok tips.
5.7  Micro syringes—10, 25, and 100 uL.
5.8  Syringe valves—2-way, with Luer ends (Teflon or Kel-F).
5.9  Syringe—5 mL, gas-tight, with shut-off valve.
5.10  Bottles~15 mL, screw-cap with Teflon liner.
5.11  Balances
5.11.1  Analytical, capable of weighing 0.1 mg.
5.11.2  Top loading,  capable of weighing 10 mg.
5.12  Equipment for determining percent moisture
5.12.1  Oven, capable of being temperature controlled at 110 +/- 5 °C.
5.12.2  Dessicator
5.12.3  Beakers—50 - 100 mL

6  Reagents and standards
6.1  Reagent water—water in which the compounds of interest and
    interfering compounds are not detected by this method (section
    11.7).  It may be generated by any of the following methods:
6.1.1  Activated carbon—pass tap water through a carbon bed (Calgon
    Filtrasorb-300, or equivalent).
6.1.2  Water purifier—pass tap water through a purifier (Millipore
    Super Q,  or equivalent).
6.1.3  Boil and purge—heat tap water to 90-100 °C and bubble contami-
    nant free inert gas through it for approx one hour.   While still
    hot,  transfer the water to screw-cap bottles and seal with a
                                 1624C D-97

-------
    Teflon-lined cap.
6.2  Sodium thiosulfate—ACS granular.
6.3  Methanol— pesticide quality or equivalent.
6.4  Standard solutions—purchased as solutions  or mixtures with
    certification to their purity, concentration,  and authenticity, or
    prepared from materials of known purity and  composition.  If
    compound purity is 96 percent or greater,  the weight may be used
    without correction to calculate the concentration of the standard.
6.5  Preparation of stock solutions—prepare in  methanol using liquid
    or gaseous standards per the steps below.  Observe the safety
    precautions given in section 4.
6.5.1  Place approx 9.8 mL of methanol in a 10 mL ground glass stop-
    pered volumetric flask.  Allow the flask to  stand unstoppered for
    approx 10 minutes or until all methanol wetted surfaces have dried.
    In each case, weigh the flask, immediately add the compound, then
    immediately reweigh to prevent evaporation losses from affecting
    the measurement.
6.5.1.1  Liquids—using a 100 uL syringe, permit 2 drops of liquid to
    fall into the methanol without contacting the neck of the flask.
    Alternatively, inject a known volume of the  compound into the
    methanol in the flask using a micro-syringe.
6.5.1.2  Gases (chloromethane, bromomethane, chloroethane, vinyl
    chloride)--fill a valved 5 mL gas-tight syringe with the compound.
    Lower the needle to approx 5 mm above the methanol meniscus. Slowly
    introduce the compound above the surface of  the meniscus. The gas
    will dissolve rapidly in the methanol.
6.5.2  Fill the flask to volume, stopper, then mix by inverting several
    times.  Calculate the concentration in mg/mL  (ug/uL) from the
    weight gain  (or density if a known volume was injected).
                                 1624C   D-98

-------
6.5.3  Transfer the stock solution to a Teflon sealed screw-cap bottle.
    Store,  with minimal headspace, in the dark at -10 to -20 °C.
6.5.4  Prepare fresh standards weekly for the gases and 2-chloroethyl-
    vinyl ether.  All other standards are replaced after one month, or
    sooner if comparison with check standards indicate a change in
    concentration.  Quality control check standards that can be used to
    determine the accuracy of calibration standards are available from
    the US Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring
    and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio.
6.6  Labeled compound spiking solution—from stock standard solutions
    prepared as above, or from mixtures, prepare the spiking solution
    to contain a concentration such that a 5-10 uL spike into each 5 mL
    sample, blank, or aqueous standard analyzed will result in a
    concentration of 20 ug/L of each labeled compound.  For the gases
    and for the water soluble compounds (acrolein, acrylonitrile,
    acetone, diethyl ether, and MEK), a concentration of 100 ug/L may
    be used.  Include the internal standards (section 7.5) in this
    solution so that a concentration of 20 ug/L in each sample, blank,
    or aqueous standard will be produced.
6.7  Secondary standards—using stock solutions, prepare a secondary
    standard in methanol to contain each pollutant at a concentration
    of 500 ug/mL.  For the gases and water soluble compounds (section
    6.6), a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL may be used.
6.7.1  Aqueous calibration standards—using a 25 uL syringe, add 20 uL
    of the secondary standard (section 6.7) to 50, 100, 200, 500, and
    1000 mL of reagent water to produce concentrations of 200,  100, 50,
    20, and 10 ug/L, respectively.  If the higher concentration
    standard for the gases and water soluble compounds was chosen
     (section 6.6), these compounds will be at concentrations of 1000,
                                1624C  D-99

-------
    500,  250,  100,  and 50 ug/L in the aqueous calibration standards.
6.7.2  Aqueous performance standard—an aqueous standard containing all
    pollutants, internal standards, labeled compounds,  and BFB is
    prepared daily,  and analyzed each shift to demonstrate performance
    (section 11).   This standard shall contain either 20 or 100 ug/L of
    the labeled and pollutant gases and water soluble compounds, 10
    ug/L BFB,  and 20 ug/L of all other pollutants,  labeled compounds,
    and internal standards.   It may be the nominal  20 ug/L aqueous
    calibration standard (section 6.7.1).
6.7.3  A methanolic standard containing all pollutants and internal
    standards  is prepared to demonstrate recovery of these compounds
    when syringe injection and purge and trap analyses are compared.
    This standard shall contain either 100 ug/mL or 500 ug/mL of the
    gases and  water soluble compounds, and 100 ug/mL of the remaining
    pollutants and internal standards (consistent with the amounts in
    the aqueous performance standard in 6.7.2).
6.7.4  Other standards which may be needed are those for test of BFB
    performance (section 7.1) and for collection of mass spectra for
    storage in spectral libraries  (section 7.2).

7  Calibration
    Calibration of the GCMS system is performed by  purging the com-
    pounds of interest and their labeled analogs from reagent water at
    the temperature to be used for analysis of samples.
7.1  Assemble the gas chromatographic apparatus and establish operating
    conditions given in table 3.  By injecting standards into the GC,
    demonstrate that the analytical system meets the minimum levels in
    table 3 for the compounds for which calibration is to be performed,
    and the mass-intensity criteria in table 4 for 50 ng BFB.
                                1624C  D-100

-------
7.2  Mass spectral libraries—detection and identification of the
    compounds of interest are dependent upon the spectra stored in user
    created libraries.
7.2.1  For the compounds in table 1 and other compounds for which the
    GCMS is to be calibrated, obtain a mass spectrum of each pollutant
    and labeled compound and each internal standard by analyzing an
    authentic standard either singly or as part of a mixture in which
    there is no interference between closely eluted components.  That
    only a single compound is present is determined by examination of
    the spectrum.  Fragments not attributable to the compound under
    study indicate the presence of an interfering compound.  Adjust the
    analytical conditions and scan rate (for this test only)  to produce
    an undistorted spectrum at the GC peak maximum.  An undistorted
    spectrum will usually be obtained if five complete spectra are
    collected across the upper half of the GC peak.  Software algo-
    rithms designed to "enhance" the spectrum may eliminate distortion,
    but may also eliminate authentic m/z's or introduce other distor-
    tion.
7.2.3  The authentic reference spectrum is obtained under BFB tuning
    conditions (section 7.1 and table 4)  to normalize it to spectra
    from other instruments.
7.2.4  The spectrum is edited by saving the 5 most intense mass
    spectral peaks and all other mass spectral peaks greater than 10
    percent of the base peak.  The spectrum may be further edited to
    remove common interfering masses.  If 5 mass spectral peaks cannot
    be obtained under the scan conditions given in section 5.4, the
    mass spectrometer may be scanned to an m/z lower than 20  to gain
    additional spectral information.  The spectrum obtained is stored
    for reverse search and for compound confirmation.
                                1624C D-101

-------
7.2.5  For the compounds in table 2 and other compounds for which the
    mass spectra,  quantitation m/z's,  and retention times are known but
    the instrument is not to be calibrated,  add the retention time and
    reference compound (table 3); the response factor and the quantita-
    tion m/z (table 5);  and spectrum (Appendix A)  to the reverse search
    library.  Edit the spectrum per section 7.2.4, if necessary.
7.3  Assemble the purge and trap device.  Pack the trap as shown in
    figure 3 and condition overnight at 170 - 180 °C by backflushing
    with an inert gas at a flow rate of 20 - 30 mL/min.  Condition
    traps daily for a minimum of 10 minutes prior to use.
7.3.1  Analyze the aqueous performance standard (section 6.7.2)
    according to the purge and trap procedure in section 10.  Compute
    the area at the primary m/z (table 5} for each compound.  Compare
    these areas to those obtained by injecting one uL of the methanolic
    standard (section 6.7.3) to determine compound recovery.  The
    recovery shall be greater than 20 percent for the water soluble
    compounds (section 6.6), and 60 - 110 percent for all other
    compounds.  This recovery is demonstrated initially for each purge
    and trap GCMS system.  The test is repeated only if the purge and
    trap or GCMS systems are modified in any way that might result in a
    change in recovery.
7.3.2  Demonstrate that 100 ng toluene (or toluene-d8)  produces an area
    at m/z 91 (or 99) approx one-tenth that required to exceed the
    linear range of the system.  The exact value must be determined by
    experience for each instrument.  It is used to match the calibra-
    tion range of the instrument to the analytical range and detection
    limits required.
7.4  Calibration by isotope dilution—the isotope dilution approach is
    used for the purgeable organic compounds when appropriate labeled
                                1624C

-------
    compounds are available and when interferences do not preclude the
    analysis.  If labeled compounds are not available, or interferences
    are present,  the internal standard method (section 7.5)  is used.  A
    calibration curve encompassing the concentration range of interest
    is prepared for each compound determined.  The relative response
    (RR)  vs concentration (ug/L) is plotted or computed using a linear
    regression.  An example of a calibration curve for toluene using
    toluene-d8 is given in figure 6.  Also shown are the +/- 10 percent
    error limits (dotted lines). Relative response is determined
    according to the procedures described below.  A minimum of five
    data points are required for calibration (section 7.4.4).
7.4.1  The relative response (RR) of pollutant to labeled compound is
    determined from isotope ratio values calculated from acquired data.
    Three isotope ratios are used in this process:
    Rx » the isotope ratio measured in the pure pollutant (figure
    7A) .
    Ry * the isotope ratio of pure labeled compound (figure 7B).
    Rm = the isotope ratio measured in the analytical mixture of the
    pollutant and labeled compounds (figure 7C)
    The correct way to calculate RR is:
    RR - (Ry - Rm) (Rx + D/(Rm - Rx) (Ry + 1)
    If Rm is not between 2Ry and 0.5RX, the method does not apply
    and the sample is analyzed by the internal standard method (section
    7.5).
7.4.2  In most cases, the retention times of the pollutant and labeled
    compound are the same and isotope ratios (R's) can be calculated
    from the EICP areas, where:
    R * (area at m]_/z)/(area at m2/z)
    If either of the areas is zero, it is assigned a value of one in
                                1624C
                                       D-103

-------
    the calculations; that is, if: area of it^/z = 50721, and area of
    m2/z - 0, then R - 50721/1 » 50720.  The m/z's are always
    selected such that Rx > Ry.
    When there is a difference in retention times (RT) between the
    pollutant and labeled compounds, special precautions are required
    to determine the isotope ratios.  Rx, Ry, and Rm are defined
    as follows:
    Rx » [area m^/z (at RT^)]/l
    Ry * l/[area m2/z (at RT2)]
    Rm = [area aij/z (at RT^/Carea m2/z (at RT2)]
7.4.3  An example of the above calculations can be taken from the data
    plotted in figure 6 for toluene and toluene-da.   For these data, Rx
    - 168920/1 » 168900, Ry » 1/60960 - 0.00001640,  and Rm »
    96868/82508 - 1.174.  The RR for the above data is then calculated
    using the equation given in section 7.4.1.  For the example, RR »
    1.174.
    Not all labeled compounds elute before their pollutant analogs.
7.4.4  To calibrate the analytical system by isotope dilution, analyze
    a 5 mL aliquot of each of the aqueous calibration standards
     (section 6.7.1) spiked with an appropriate constant amount of the
    labeled compound spiking solution  (section 6.6), using the purge
    and trap procedure in section 10.  Compute the RR at each concen-
    tration.
7.4.5  Linearity—if the ratio of relative response to concentration
    for any compound is constant  (less than 20 percent coefficient of
    variation) over the 5 point calibration range, an averaged relative
    response/concentration ratio may be used for that compound;
    otherwise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall
    be used over the 5 point calibration range.

                                1624C  D-104

-------
7.5  Calibration by internal standard—used when criteria for isotope
    dilution (section 7.4) cannot be met.  The method is applied to
    pollutants having no labeled analog and to the labeled compounds.
    The internal standards used for volatiles analyses are bromochloro-
    methane, 2-bromo-l-chloropropane, and 1,4-dichlorobutane.  Concen-
    trations of the labeled compounds and pollutants without labeled
    analogs are computed relative to the nearest eluted internal
    standard, as shown in tables 3 and 5.
7.5.1 Response factors—calibration requires the determination of
    response factors (RF) which are defined by the following equation:
    RF - (As x Cj_s)/(Ais x Cs) ,  where
    As is the EICP area at the characteristic m/z for the compound in
    the daily standard.
    Aj_s is the EICP area at the characteristic m/z for the internal
    standard.
    Cj_s is the concentration (ug/L)  of the internal standard.
    Cs is the concentration of the pollutant in the daily standard.
7.5.2  The response factor is determined at 10, 20, 50,  100, and 200
    ug/L for the pollutants (optionally at five times these concentra-
    tions for gases and water soluble pollutants—see section 6.7), in
    a way analogous to that for calibration by isotope dilution
    (section 7.4.4).  The RF is plotted against concentration for each
    compound in the standard (Cs)  to produce a calibration curve.
7.5.3  Linearity—if the response factor (RF) for any compound is
    constant (less than 35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5
    point calibration range, an averaged response factor may be used
    for that compound; otherwise,  the complete calibration curve for
    that compound shall be used over the 5 point range.
7.6  Combined calibration—by adding the isotopically labeled compounds
                                1624C

-------
    and internal standards (section 6.6)  to the aqueous calibration
    standards (section 6.7.1), a single set of analyses can be used to
    produce calibration curves for the isotope dilution and internal
    standard methods.  These curves are verified each shift (section
    11.5)  by purging the aqueous performance standard (section 6.7.2).
    Recalibration is required only if calibration and on-going perfor-
    mance (section 11.5) criteria cannot be met.
7.7  Elevated purge temperature calibration—samples containing greater
    than one percent solids are analyzed at a temperature of 40 +/- 2
    °C (section 10).  For these samples,  the analytical system may be
    calibrated using a purge temperature of 40 +/- 2 ° C in order to
    more closely approximate the behavior of the compounds of interest
    in high solids samples.

8  Quality assurance/quality control
3.1  Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a
    formal quality assurance program (reference 8).   The minimum
    requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of
    laboratory capability, analysis of samples spiked with labeled
    compounds to evaluate and document data quality, and analysis of
    standards and blanks as tests of continued performance.  Laboratory
    performance is compared to established performance criteria to
    determine if the results of analyses meet the performance charac-
    teristics of the method.
8.1.1  The analyst shall make an initial demonstration of the ability
    to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method.
    This ability is established as described in section 8.2.
8.1.2  The analyst is permitted to modify this method to improve
    separations or lower the costs of measurements,  provided all
                                1624C
                                        D-106

-------
    performance specifications are met.  Each time a modification is
    made to the method, the analyst is required to repeat the procedure
    in section 8.2 to demonstrate method performance.
8.1.3  Analyses of blanks are required to demonstrate freedom from
    contamination and that the compounds of interest and interfering
    compounds have not been carried over from a previous analysis
    (section 3).   The procedures and criteria for analysis of a blank
    are described in sections 8.5.
8.1.4  The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to
    monitor method performance.  This test is described in section 8.3.
    When results of these spikes indicate atypical method performance
    for samples,  the samples are diluted to bring method performance
    within acceptable limits (section 14.2).
8.1.5  The laboratory shall, on an on-going basis, demonstrate through
    the analysis of the aqueous performance standard (section 6.7.2)
    that the analysis system is in control.  This procedure is
    described in sections 11.1 and 11.5.
8.1.6  The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of
    data that is generated.  Development of accuracy statements is
    described in sections 8.4 and 11.5.2.
8.2  Initial precision and accuracy—to establish the ability to
    generate acceptable precision and accuracy, the analyst shall
    perform the following operations for compounds to be calibrated:
8.2.1  Analyze two sets of four 5-raL aliquots  (8 aliquots total) of the
    aqueous performance standard (section 6.7.2) according to the
    method beginning in section 10.
8.2.2  Using results of the first set of four analyses in section
    8.2.1, compute the average recovery  (X) in ug/L and the standard
    deviation of the recovery  (s) in ug/L for each compound, by isotope
                                1624C  D-107

-------
    dilution for pollutants with a labeled analog, and by internal
    standard for labeled compounds and pollutants with no labeled
    analog.
8.2.3  For each compound, compare s and X with the corresponding limits
    for initial precision and accuracy found in table 6.  If s and X
    for all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance
    is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may begin.  If,
    however, any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any
    individual X falls outside the range for accuracy, system perfor-
    mance is unacceptable for that compound.
        NOTE: The large number of compounds in table 6 present a
    substantial probability that one or more will fail one of the
    acceptance criteria when all compounds are analyzed.  To determine
    if the analytical system is out of control, or if the failure can
    be attributed to probability, proceed as follows:
8.2.4  Using the results of the second set of four analyses, compute s
    and X for only those compounds which failed the test of the first
    set of four analyses (section 8.2.3).  If these compounds now pass,
    system performance is acceptable for all compounds and analysis of
    blanks and samples may begin.  If, however, any of the same
    compounds fail again, the analysis system is not performing
    properly for the compound (s) in question.   In this event,  correct
    the problem and repeat the entire test (section 8.2.1).
8.3  The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to
    assess method performance on the sample matrix.
8.3.1  Spike and analyze each sample according  to the method beginning
    in section 10.
8.3.2  Compute the percent recovery (P)  of the  labeled compounds using
    the internal standard method (section 7.5).
                                1624C D-108

-------
8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery for each compound with the corre-
    sponding labeled compound recovery limit in table 6.  If the
    recovery of any compound falls outside its warning limit, method
    performance is unacceptable for that compound in that sample.
    Therefore, the sample matrix is complex and the sample is to be
    diluted and reanalyzed, per section 14.2.
8.4  As part of the QA program for the laboratory, method accuracy for
    wastewater samples shall be assessed and records shall be main-
    tained.  After the analysis of five wastewater samples for which
    the labeled compounds pass the tests in section 3.3.3, compute the
    average percent recovery (P) and the standard deviation of the
    percent recovery (sp) for the labeled compounds only. Express the
    accuracy assessment as a percent recovery interval from P - 2sp to
    P + 2Sp.  For example, if P » 90% and sp - 10%, the accuracy
    interval is expressed as 70 - 110%.  Update the accuracy assessment
    for each compound on a regular basis (e.g. after each 5-10 new
    accuracy measurements).
8.5  Blanks—reagent water blanks are analyzed to demonstrate freedom
    from carry-over (section 3) and contamination.
8.5.1  The level at which the purge and trap system will carry greater
    than 5 ug/L of a pollutant of interest (tables 1 and 2)  into a
    succeeding blank shall be determined by analyzing successively
    larger concentrations of these compounds.  When a sample contains
    this concentration or more, a blank shall be analyzed immediately
    following this sample to demonstrate no carry-over at the 5 ug/L
    level.
8.5.2  With each sample lot (samples analyzed on the same 8  hr shift),
    a blank shall be analyzed immediately after analysis of  the aqueous
    performance standard (section 11.1)  to demonstrate freedom from
                                1624C  D-109

-------
    contamination.   If any of the compounds of interest (tables 1 and
    2)  or any potentially interfering compound is found in a blank at
    greater than 10 ug/L (assuming a response factor of 1 relative to
    the nearest eluted internal standard for compounds not listed in
    tables 1 and 2),  analysis of samples is halted until the source of
    contamination is eliminated and a blank shows no evidence of
    contamination at this level.
3.6  The specifications contained in this method can be met if the
    apparatus used is calibrated properly, then maintained in a
    calibrated state.  The standards used for calibration (section 7),
    calibration verification (section 11.5)  and for initial (section
    3.2)  and on-going (section 11.5) precision and accuracy should be
    identical, so that the most precise results will be obtained.  The
    GCMS instrument in particular will provide the most reproducible
    results if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for
    the analyses of volatiles by this method.
3.7  Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may
    be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique,
    and spiked samples may be required to determine the accuracy of the
    analysis when the internal method is used.

9  Sample collection, preservation, and handling
9.1  Grab samples are collected in glass containers having a total
    volume greater than 20 mL.  For aqueous samples which pour freely,
    fill sample bottles so that no air bubbles pass through the sample
    as the bottle is filled and seal each bottle so that no air bubbles
    are entrapped.   Maintain the hermetic seal on the sample bottle
    until time of analysis.
9.2  Samples are maintained at 0 - 4 °C from the time of collection
                                1624C  D-110

-------
    until analysis.  If an aqueous sample contains residual chlorine,
    add sodium thiosulfate preservative  (10 mg/40 mL) to the empty
    sample bottles just prior to shipment to the sample site.  EPA
    Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used  for measurement of residual
    chlorine  (reference 9).  If preservative has been added, shake the
    bottle vigorously for one minute immediately after filling.
9.3  For aqueous samples, experimental evidence indicates that some
    aromatic compounds, notably benzene, toluene, and ethyl benzene are
    susceptible to rapid biological degradation under certain environ-
    mental conditions.  Refrigeration alone may not be adequate to
    preserve these compounds in wastewaters for more than seven days.
    For this reason, a separate sample should be collected, acidified,
    and analyzed when these aromatics are to be determined.  Collect
    about 500 mL of sample in a clean container.  Adjust the pH of the
    sample to about 2 by adding HC1 (1+1) while stirring.  Check pH
    with narrow range (1.4 to 2.8)  pH paper.   Fill a sample container
    as described in section 9.1.  If residual chlorine is present, add
    sodium thiosulfate to a separate sample container and fill as in
    section 9.1.
9.4  All samples shall be analyzed within 14  days of collection.

10  Purge,  trap,  and GCMS analysis—samples containing less than one
    percent solids are analyzed directly as aqueous samples (section
    10.4).   Samples containing greater one percent solids or greater
    are analyzed as solid samples (section 10.5).
10.1  Determination of percent solids
10.1.1  Weigh 5 - 10 g of sample into a tared beaker.
10.1.2  Dry overnight (12 hours minimum)  at 110 +/- 5  °C,  and cool in a
    dessicator.

                                1624C  D-lll

-------
10.1.3  Determine percent solids as follows:
    % solids = weight of sample drv x 100
               weight of sample wet

10.2  Remove standards and samples from cold  storage and bring to 20 -
    25 °C.
10.3  Adjust the purge gas flow rate to 40 +/~ 4 mL/min.
10.4  Samples containing less than one percent solids
10.4.1  Mix the sample by shaking vigorously.  Remove the plunger from a
    5 mL syringe and attach a closed syringe  valve.   Open the sample
    bottle  and carefully pour the sample into the syringe barrel until
    it overflows.  Replace the plunger and compress  the sample.  Open
    the syringe valve and vent any residual air while adjusting the
    sample  volume to 5.0 +/- 0-1 »L«  Because this process of taking an
    aliquot destroys the validity of the sample for  future analysis,
    fill a  second syringe at this time to protect against possible loss
    of data.
10.4.2  Add an appropriate amount of the labeled compound spiking
    solution (section 6.6) through the valve  bore, then close the
    valve.
10.4.3  Attach the syringe valve assembly to  the syringe valve on the
    purging device.  Open both syringe valves and inject the sample
    into the purging chamber.  Purge the sample per  section 10.6.
10.5  Weighing of samples containing one percent solids or greater.
10.5.1  Mix the sample thoroughly using a clean spatula.
10.5.2  Weigh 5 +/- 1 grams of sample into a  purging vessel (figure 2).
    Record  the weight to three significant figures.
10.5.3  Add 5.0 +/- 0«1 mL of reagent water to the vessel.
10.5.4  Using a metal spatula, break up any lumps of sample to disperse
    the sample in the water.
                                1624C  D-112

-------
10.5.5  Add an appropriate amount of the labeled compound spiking
    solution (section 6.6) to the sample in the purge vessel.  Place a
    cap on the purging vessel and and shake vigorously to further
    disperse the sample.  Attach the purge vessel to the purging
    device.
10.6  Purge the sample for 11.0 +/~ O-1 minutes at 20 - 25 °C for
    samples containing less than one percent solids.  Purge samples
    containing one percent solids or greater at 40 +/- 2 °C.   If the
    compounds in table 2 that do not purge at 20 - 40 °C are to be
    determined,  a purge temperature of 80 +/- 5 °C is used.
10.7  After the 11 minute purge time, attach the trap to the chromato-
    graph and set the purge and trap apparatus to the desorb mode
    (figure 5).   Desorb the trapped compounds into the GC column by
    heating the trap to 170 -ISO °C while backflushing with carrier gas
    at 20 - 60 mL/min for four minutes.  Start MS data acquisition upon
    start of the desorb cycle, and start the GC column temperature
    program 3 minutes later.  Table 3 summarizes the recommended
    operating conditions for the gas chromatograph.   Included in this
    table are retention times and minimum levels that can be achieved
    under these conditions.  An example of the separations achieved by
    the column listed is shown in figure 9.  Other columns may be used
    provided the requirements in section 8 are met.   If the priority
    pollutant gases produce GC peaks so broad that the precision and
    recovery specifications (section 8.2) cannot be met, the column may
    be cooled to ambient or sub-ambient temperatures to sharpen these
    peaks.
10.8  After desorbing the sample for four minutes, recondition the
    trap by purging with purge gas while maintaining the trap tempera-
    ture at 170 - 180 °C.  After approximately seven minutes, turn off

                                1624C

-------
    the trap heater to stop the gas flow through the trap.   When cool,
    the trap is ready for the next sample.
10.9  While analysis of the desorbed compounds proceeds,  remove and
    clean the purge device.  Rinse with tap water,  clean with detergent
    and water,  rinse with tap and distilled water,  and dry for one hour
    minimum in an oven at a temperature greater than 150 °C.

11  System performance
11.1  At the beginning of each 8 hr shift during which analyses are
    performed,  system calibration and performance shall be verified for
    the pollutants and labeled compounds (table 1) .   For these tests,
    analysis of the aqueous performance standard (section 6.7.2) shall
    be used to verify all performance criteria.  Adjustment and/or
    recalibration (per section 7) shall be performed until all perfor-
    mance criteria are met.  Only after all performance criteria are
    met may blanks and samples be analyzed.
11.2  BFB spectrum validity—the criteria in table 4 shall be met.
11.3  Retention times—the absolute retention times of the internal
    standards shall be as follows:  bromochloromethane: 653 - 782
    seconds; 2-bromo-l-chloropropane: 1270 - 1369 seconds;
    1,4-dichlorobutane: 1510 - 1605 seconds. The relative retention
    times of all pollutants and labeled compounds shall fall within the
    limits given in table 3.
11.4  GC resolution—the valley height between toluene and toluene-d8
    (at m/z 91 and 99 plotted on the same graph) shall be less than 10
    percent of the taller of the two peaks.
11.5  Calibration verification and on-going precision and accuracy—
    compute the concentration of each pollutant (table 1) by isotope
    dilution (section 7.4) for those compounds which have labeled

                                1624C   D-114

-------
    analogs.   Compute the concentration of each pollutant (table 1)
    which has no labeled analog by the internal standard method
    (section 7.5).   Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds
    by the internal standard method.  These concentrations are computed
    based on the calibration data determined in section 7.
11.5.1  For each pollutant and labeled compound, compare the concentra-
    tion with the corresponding limit for on-going accuracy in table 6.
    If all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance
    is acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may continue.  If
    any individual value falls outside the range given, system perfor-
    mance is unacceptable for that compound.
        NOTE: The large number of compounds in table 6 present a
    substantial probability that one or more will fail the acceptance
    criteria when all compounds are analyzed.  To determine if the
    analytical system is out of control, or if the failure may be
    attributed to probability, proceed as follows:
11.5.1.1  Analyze a second aliquot of the aqueous performance standard
    (section 6.7.2) .
11.5.1.2  Compute the concentration for only those compounds which
    failed the first test (section 11.5.1).  If these compounds now
    pass, system performance is acceptable for all compounds and
    analyses of blanks and samples may proceed.  If, however, any of
    the compounds fail again, the measurement system is not performing
    properly for these compounds.  In this event, locate and correct
    the problem or recalibrate the system (section 7), and repeat the
    entire test (section 11.1) for all compounds.
11.5.2  Add results which pass the specification in 11.5.1.2 to initial
    (section 8.2)  and previous on-going data.  Update QC charts to form
    a graphic representation of laboratory performance (figure 8).

                                1624C  D-115

-------
    Develop a statement of accuracy for each pollutant and labeled
    compound by calculating the average percent recovery (R)  and the
    standard deviation of percent recovery (sr).   Express the accuracy
    as a recovery interval from R - 2sr to R + 2sr.   For example, if R
    = 95% and sr = 5%, the accuracy is 85 - 105 percent.

12  Qualitative determination—identification is accomplished by
    comparison of data from analysis of a sample or blank with data
    stored in the mass spectral libraries.  For compounds for which the
    relative retention times and mass spectra are known, identification
    is confirmed per sections 12.1 and 12.2.   For unidentified GC
    peaks, the spectrum is compared to spectra in the EPA/NIH mass
    spectral file per section 12.3.
12.1  Labeled compounds and pollutants having no labeled analog  (tables
    1 and 2):
12.1.1  The signals for all characteristic m/z's stored in the spectral
    library (section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within
    the same two consecutive scans.
12.1.2  Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the
    corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two (0.5 to 2 times)
    for all masses stored in the library.
12.1.3  For the compounds for which the system has been calibrated
    (table 1),  the relative retention time shall be within the windows
    specified in table 3.
12.1.4  For the compounds for which the system has not been calibrated
    but the relative retention times and mass spectra are known (table
    2),  the retention time relative to the internal standard specified
    in table 3  shall be within +/- 20 scans or +/- 60 seconds,

                                1624C  D_116

-------
    whichever is greater, based on the nominal relative retention time
    specified in table 3.
12.2  Pollutants having a labeled analog (table 1):
12.2.1  The signals for all characteristic m/z's stored in the spectral
    library (section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within
    the same two consecutive scans.
12.2.2 Either (1)  the background corrected EICP areas, or (2)  the
    corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two for all masses
    stored in the spectral library.
13.2.3  The relative retention time between the pollutant and its
    labeled analog shall be within the windows specified in table 3.
12.3  Unidentified GC peaks
12.3.1  The signals for m/z's specific to a GC peak shall all maximize
    within the same two consecutive scans.
12.3.2  Either (1)  the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the cor-
    rected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two with the masses
    stored in the EPA/NIH Mass Spectral File.
12.4  M/z's present in the experimental mass spectrum that are not
    present in the reference mass spectrum shall be accounted for by
    contaminant or background ions.  If the experimental mass spectrum
    is contaminated, or if identification is ambiguous, an experienced
    spectrometrist (section 1.4)  is to determine the presence or
    absence of the compound.

13  Quantitative determination
13.1  Isotope dilution—by adding a known amount of a labeled compound
    to every sample prior to purging,  correction for recovery of the

                                1624C  D-117

-------
    pollutant can be made because the pollutant and its labeled analog
    exhibit the same effects upon purging,  desorption,  and gas chroma-
    tography.  Relative response (RR) values for sample mixtures are
    used in conjunction with calibration curves described in section
    7.4 to determine concentrations directly,  so long as labeled
    compound spiking levels are constant.  For the toluene example
    given in figure 7 (section 7.4.3), RR would be equal to 1.174.  For
    this RR value, the toluene calibration curve given in figure 6
    indicates a concentration of 31.8 ug/L.
13.2  Internal standard—calculate the concentration using the response
    factor determined from calibration data (section 7.5) for the
    compounds which were calibrated  (table 1),  or from table 5 for
    compounds which were not calibrated  (table 2), using the following
    equation:
    Concentration » (As x Cis)/(Aj_s x RF)
    where the terms are as defined in section 7.5.1.
13.3  The concentration of the pollutant in the solid phase of the
    sample is computed using the concentration of the pollutant
    detected in the aqueous solution, as follows:
    Concentration in solid  (ug/kg) - 0.005 L x aqueous cone  fua/I^
                                         0.01 x % solids  (g)
    where "% solids" is from section 10.1.3.
13.4  If the EICP area at the quantitation m/z exceeds the calibration
    range of the system, the sample  is diluted with reagent water by
    successive factors of 10 and the dilutions are analyzed until the
    area is within the calibration range.
13.5  For GC peaks which are to be identified  (per section 12.3), the
    sample is diluted by successive  factors of 10 when any peak in the
    uncorrected mass spectrum at the GC  peak maximum is  saturated.
13.6  Report results for all pollutants, labeled compounds, and
                                1624C  D-118

-------
    tentatively identified compounds found in all standards,  blanks,
    and samples,  in ug/L for samples containing less than one percent
    solids and in ug/kg for samples in which the undilute sample
    contains one percent solids or greater,  to three significant
    figures.  Results for samples which have been diluted are reported
    at the least dilute level at which the area at the quantitation m/z
    is within the calibration range (section 13.4)  or at which no m/z
    in the spectrum is saturated (section 13.5).  For compounds having
    a labeled analog, results are reported at the least dilute level at
    which the area at the quantitation m/z is within the calibration
    range (section 13.4) and the labeled compound recovery is within
    the normal range for the method (section 14.2).
y
14  Analysis of complex samples
14.1  Some samples may contain high levels (>1000 ug/kg) of the com-
    pounds of interest and of interfering compounds.  Some samples will
    foam excessively when purged; others will overload the trap/or GC
    column.
14.2  Dilute 0.5 mL of samples containing less than one percent solids
    or 0.5 gram of samples containing one percent solids or greater
    with 4.5 mL of reagent water and analyze this diluted sample when
    the recovery of any labeled compound is outside the range given in
    table 6.  If the recovery remains outside of the range for this
    diluted sample, the aqueous performance standard shall be analyzed
    (section 11)  and calibration verified (section 11.5).  If the
    recovery for the labeled compound in the aqueous performance
    standard is outside the range given in table 6, the analytical
    system is out of control.  In this case,  the instrument shall be
    repaired, the performance specifications in section 11 shall be

                                1624C  D-119

-------
    met,  and the analysis of the undiluted sample shall be repeated.
    If the recovery for the aqueous performance standard is within the
    range given in table 6, the method does not work on the sample
    being analyzed and the result may not be reported for regulatory
    compliance purposes.
14.3  Reverse search computer programs can misinterpret the spectrum of
    chromatographically unresolved pollutant and labeled compound pairs
    with overlapping spectra when a high level of the pollutant is
    present.  Examine each chromatogram for peaks greater than the
    height of the internal standard peaks.  These peaks can obscure the
    compounds of interest.

15  Method performance
15.1  The specifications for this method were taken from the interlabo-
    ratory validation of EPA Method 624 (reference 10).  Method 1624 has
    been shown to yield slightly better performance on treated efflu-
    ents than method 624.  Results of initial tests of this method at a
    purge temperature of 80 °C can be found in reference 11 and results
    of initial tests of this method on municipal sludge can be found in
    reference 12.
                                1624C  D-120

-------
References
1.  "Performance Tests for the Evaluation of Computerized Gas Chroma-
    tography/Mass Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories," USEPA, EMSL
    Cincinnati, OH 45263, EPA-600/4-80-025 (April 1980).
2.  Bellar, T. A. and Lichtenberg, J. J., "Journal American Water Works
    Association," ££, 739 (1974).
3.  Bellar, T. A. and Lichtenberg, J. J., "Semi-automated Headspace
    Analysis of Drinking Waters and Industrial Waters for Purgeable
    Volatile Organic Compounds," in Measurement of Organic Pollutants
    in Water and Wastewater. C. E. VanHall, ed., American Society for
    Testing Materials, Philadelphia, PA, Special Technical Publication
    686, (1978).
4.  National Standard Reference Data System, "Mass Spectral Tape
    Format", US National Bureau of Standards (1979 and later attach-
    ments) .
5.  "Working with Carcinogens," DREW, PHS, NIOSH, Publication 77-206
    (1977).
6.  "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry," 29 CFR 1910,
    OSHA 2206, (1976).
7.  "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," American Chemical
    Society Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety  (1979).
8.  "Handbook of Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater
    Laboratories," USEPA, EMSL Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-4-79-019
    (March 1979).
9.  "Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Residual Chlorine," USEPA, EMSL
    Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA-4-79-020 (March 1979).
10.  "Method 624—Purgeables", 40 CFR Part 136 (49 FR 43234), 26 October
    1984.
11.  "Narrative for SAS 106: Development of an Isotope Dilution GC/MS
    Method for Hot Purge and Trap Volatiles Analysis", S-CUBED Division
    of Maxwell Laboratories, Inc., Prepared for W. A. Telliard,
    Industrial Technology Division (WH-552), USEPA, 401 M St SW,
    Washington DC 20460 (July 1986).
12.  Colby, Bruce N. and Ryan, Philip W., "Initial Evaluation of
    Methods 1634 and 1635 for the analysis of Municipal Wastewater
    Treatment Sludges by Isotope Dilution GCMS", Pacific Analytical
    Inc., Prepared for W. A. Telliard, Industrial Technology Division
    (WH-552),  USEPA, 401 M St SW, Washington DC 20460  (July 1986).
                                1624C  D-121

-------
Table 1

Volatile Organic Compounds  Determined by Calibrated GCMS using  Isotope
Dilution and Internal Standard Techniques
                        Pollutant
                                           Labeled Compound
Compound
acetone
aerolein
acrylonttrile
benzene
bromodichloromethane
bromoform
bromomethene
carbon tetrachlorid*
chlorobenzene
chloroe thane
2-chloroethylvinyl ether
chloroform
ehloromethane
d i bromoch t oromethan*
1,1-dichloreethane
1,2-dichloroethane
1, 1 -diet) lor oethene
tran»- 1 ,2-df chlorethene
1,2-dicMoropropane
trans- 1,3-dichloropr open*
di ethyl ether
p-dioxane
ethyl benzene
methylene chloride
methyl ethyl ketone
1 ,1 ,2,2-tetrachloroethane
tetrachlorethene
toluene
1 , 1 , 1 • tr 1 ch I oroethane
1 , 1 ,2- trichloroethane
trichloroethene
vinyl chloride
Steret
31S52
34210
34215
34030
32101
32104
34413
32102
34301
34311
34576
32106
34418
32105
34496
32103
34501
34546
34541
34699
81576
81582
34371
34423
81595
34516
34475
34010
34506
34511
39180
39175
CAS Registry
67-64-1
107-02-8
107-13-1
71-43-2
75-27-4
75-25-2
74-83-9
56-23-5
108-90-7
75-00-3
110-75-8
67-66-3
74-87-3
124-48-1
75-34-3
107-06-2
75-35-4
156-60-5
78-87-5
10061-02-6
60-29-7
123-91-1
100-41-4
75-09-2
78-93-3
79-34-5
127-18-4
108-88-3
71-55-6
79-00-5
79-01-6
75-01-4
EPA-EGD
516 V
002 V
003 V
004 V
048 V
047 V
046 V
006 V
007 V
016 V
019 V
023 V
045 V
051 V.
013 V
010 V
029 V
030 V
032 V
033 V
515 V
527V
038 V
044 V
514 V
015 V
085 V
086 V
011 V
014 V
087 V
088 V
NPOES

001 V
002 V
003 V
012 V
005 V
020 V
006 V
007 V
009 V
010 V
011 V
021 V
008 V
014 V
015 V
016 V
026 V
017V



019 V
022 V

023 V
024 V
02S V
027V
028 V
029 V
031 V
Analog
d6
d4
d3
d6
13C
13C

-------
Table 2

Volatile Organic Compounds to be Determined by Reverse Search and Quantita-
tion using Known Retention Times, Response Factors, Reference Compounds,
and Mass Spectra

EGD                                         CAS
No.   Compound	  Registry
532   allyl alcohol*                        107-18-6
533   carbon disulfide                       75-15-0
534   2-chloro-1,3-butadiene (chloroprene)  126-99-8
535   chloroacetonitrile*                   107-14-2
536   3-chloropropene                       107-05-1
537   crotonaldehyde*                       123-73-9
538   1,2-dibromoethane (EDB)               106-93-4
539   dibromomethane                         74-95-3
540   trans-l,4-dichloro-2-butene           110-47-6
541   1,3-dichloropropane                   142-28-9
542   cis-1,3-dichloropropene             10061-01-5
543   ethyl cyanide*                        107-12-0
544   ethyl methacrylate                     97-63-2
545   2-hexanone     .                       591-78-6
546   iodomethane                            74-88-4
547   isobutyl alcohol*                      78-83-1
548   methacrylonitrile                     126-98-7
549   methyl methacrylate                    78-83-1
550   4-methyl-2-pantanone                  108-10-1
551   1,1,1,2-tetrachloroethane             630-20-6
552   trichlorofluoromethane                 75-69-4
553   1,2,3-trichloropropane                 96-18-4
554   vinyl acetate                         108-05-4

*determined at a purge temperature of 75 - 85 °C
                                1624C D-123

-------
Table 3
Gas Chromatography of Purgeable Organic Compounds
Mini-
mum
ECO
NO.
ill
245
345
246
346
288
388
216
316
244
344
546
616
716
202
302
203
303
533
552
543
229
329
536
532
181
213
313
615
715
230
330
614
714
223
323
535
210
310
539
548
547
211
311
627
727
206
306
554
248
Retention time

Comoound
chloromethane-d3
chloromethane
bromomethane- d3
bromomethane
vinyl chloride-d3
vinyl chloride
chloroethane-dS
chloroethane
methylene chloride-d2
methylene chloride
iodomethane
acetone- d6
acetone
acrolein-d4
acrolein
acrylonitrile-d3
acrylonitrile
carbon disulfide
trichlorof luoromethane
ethyl cyanide
1,1-dichloroethene-d2
1,1-dfchloroethene
3 • ch I oropropene
allyl alcohol
bronwchloromethane (I.S.)
1,1-dichloroethane-d3
1,1-dichloroethane
diethyl ether-d10
di ethyl ether
trans- 1 ,2-dichloroethene-d2
trans- 1,2-dichloroe then*
methyl ethyl ketone-d3
methyl ethyl ketone
ehloroform-13C1
chloroform
chloroacetonitrile
1,2-dichloroethane-d4
1,2-dichloroethane
dibromomethane
methacryloni tri le
isobutyl alcohol
1,1,1- trichloroethane-13C2
1,1,1- trichloroethane
p-dioxane-dfl
p-dioxane
carbon tetrachloride-13C1
carbon tetrachloride
vinyl acetate
bromodichloromethane-13C1
Mean
(sec)
147
148
243
246
301
304
378
386
512
517
498
554
565
564
566
606
612
631
663
672
696
696
69o
703
730
778
786
804
820
821
821
340
348
361
361
384
901
910
910
921
962
989
999
982
1001
1018
1018
1031
1045
EGO
ssi
181
245
181
246
181
288
181
216
181
244
181
181
616
181
202
181
203
181
181
181
181
229
181
181
181
181
213
181
61S
181
230
181
614
181
223
181
181
210
181
181
131
181
211
181
627
182
206
182
182
level
(3)
Relative (2) (ug/l)
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.

0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.



0.
0.


1.
1.
0.
1.
1.
1.
0.
0.
0.
1.
141
922
233
898
286
946
373
999
582
999
0
628
984
641
984
735
98S
0
0
0
903
999
0
0
000
031
999
067
010
056
996
646
992
092
0.961

1
1.187
0.973



1
1
1
1.293
0.989
1.262
1.008
0.754
0.938
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
- 0.
• 1.
.68
• 0.
• 1.
- 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
.86
.91
.92
• 0.
• 1.
.95
.96
270
210
423
195
501
023
620
060
813
017

889
019
903(5)
018(5)
926
030



976
011


• 1.000
• 1.
• 1.
• 1.
- 1.
• 1.
• 1.
• 1.
• 1.
• 1.
• 1.
.21
• 1.
- 1.
.25
.26
.32
119
014
254
043
228
011
202
055
322
009

416
032



- 1.598
• 1.044
• 1.448(5)
- 1.040(5)
• 0.805
• 1.005
50
50
50
50
50
10
50
50
10
10

50
50
50
50
50
50



10
10


10
10
10
50
50
10
10
50
50
10
10

10
10



10
10
10
10
10
10
Method Detection
Limit (4)
Lou
solids
tug/kg)

207*

148"

190*

789*

566*


3561*

377*

360*




31




16

63

41

241*

21


23




16

..

87
High
solids
(ug/kg)

13

11

11

24

280*


322*

18

9




5




1

12

3

80*

2


3




4

140*

9
0.79
0.766
• 0.825
10


                                 1624C  D-124

-------
348   bromodtchIoromethane          1045  248  0.978 • 1.013   10      28      3
534   2-chloro-1,3-butadiene         1084  182      0.83
537   cpotonatdehyde               1098  182      0.34
232   1,2-dichloropropane-do         1123  182  0.830 • 0.380   10
332   1,2-dichloropropane           1134  232  0.984 • 1.018   10      29      5
542   cis-1,3-dichloropropene        1138  182      0.87
287   trichloroethene-13C2          1172  182  0.897 • 0.917   10
387   trtchloroethene              1187  287  0.991 - 1.037   10      41      2
541   1,3-diehloropropane           1196  182      0.92
204   benzene-do                  1200  182  0.388 • 0.9S2   10
304   benzene                    1212  204  1.002 • 1.026   10      23      3
251   chlorodibromom«than«-13C1       1222  182  0.915 • 0.949   10
351   chlorodibrornomthan*          1222  2S1  0.989 • 1.030   10      15      2
214   1,1,2-trichloro«thane-13C2      1224  182  0.922 - 0.953   10
314   1,1,2-trichloroethane         1224  214  0.975 • 1.027   10      26      1
333   trans-1,3-dichtoroprop«n«-d4    1226  182  0.922 • 0.959   10
333   trans-1,3-dfchloropropene       1226  233  0.993 • 1.016   10      (6)*    (6)*
019   2-chloroethylvinyt ether       1278  182  0.983 • 1.026   10      122     21
538   1,2-dibromoethane             1279  182      0.98
182   2-bromo-l-chloropropane U.S.)   1306  182  1.000 • 1.000   10
549   methyl methaerylate           1379  182      1.06
247   bromoform-13C1               1386  182  1.048 • 1.087   10
347   broHwform                   1386  247  0.992 - 1.003   10      91      7
551   1,1,1,2-tetrichloroethane       1408  182      1.08
550   4-m«thyl-2-ptntanon«          143S  183      0.92
553   1,2,3-trichloropropane         1520  183      0.98
215   1,1.2,2-tttrachloro«than*-d2    1525  183  0.969 • 0.996   10
315   1,1,2,2-tttrachloroethane       1525  215  0.390 • 1.016   10      20      6
545   2-hexanone                  1525  183      0.98
285   tetrachloroethene-13C2         1528  183  0.966 • 0.996   10
385   tetrachloroethene             1528  285  0.997 • 1.003   10      106     10
540   trans-1,4-dichloro-2-butene     1551  183      1.00
183   1,4-dichlorobutane (int std)    1555  183  1.000 • 1.000   10
544   ethyl methacrylat*            1594  183      1.03
286   toluene-dS                  1603  183  1.016 • 1.054   10
386   toluene                    1619  286  1.001 - 1.019   10      27      4
207   chlorobenzene-dS              1679  183  1.066 • 1.135   10
307   chlorobeniene                1679  207  0.914 • 1.019   10      21     58*
233   ethylbenzene-d10              1302  183  1.144 • 1.293   10
333   ethylbenzene                1820  238  0.981 • 1.018   10      28      4
185   bromofluorobenzene            1985  183  1.255 • 1.290   10

 (1)   Reference  numbers  beginning  with  0,  1  or  5  indicate  a pollutant quan-
tified  by the internal  standard method; reference  numbers beginning  with 2
or  6  indicate a labeled compound  quantified by the  internal  standard
method; reference numbers  beginning with  3  or  7  indicate  a pollutant quan-
tified  by  isotope dilution.
 (2)   Based on data  from a  single  wastewater laboratory.
 (3)   This  is  a  minimum  level at which  the analytical  system  shall give  rec-
ognizable mass  spectra  (background corrected)  and  acceptable calibration
points  when  calibrated  using reagent water.  The concentration  in the
aqueous or solid phase  is  determined using  the equations  in  section  13.
 (4)   Method  detection limits determined in  digested sludge  (low solids)  and
in  filter cake  or compost  (high solids).
 (5)   Specification  derived from related compound.
 (6)   An unknown interference in the particular sludge studied precluded
measurement  of  the  Method  Detection Limit (MDL)   for this  compound.
*Background  levels  of these compounds  were  present  in the sludge resulting

                                         1624C   D-125

-------
in higher than expected MDL's.  The MDL for these compounds is expected to
be approximately 20 ug/kg (100 - 200 for the gases and water soluble com-
pounds)  for the low solids method and 5-10 ug/kg (25 - 50 for the gases
and water soluble compounds) for the high solids method, with no  interfer-
ences present.

Column:  2.4 m (8 ft) x 2 mm i.d. glass, packed with one percent SP-1000
coated on 60/80 Carbopak B.
Carrier gas: helium at 40 mL/min.
Temperature program: 3 min at 45 °C, 8 °C per min to 240 °C, hold at 240 °C
for 15 minutes.
Note:  The retention time specifications in this table were developed  from
data collected from four wastewater laboratories.
                                1624C   D-126

-------
Table 4

BFB Mass-intensity Specifications

M/z     Intensity required
 50     15 to 40 percent of m/z 95
 75     30 to 60 percent of m/z 95
 95     base peak, 100 percent
 96     5 to 9 percent of m/z 95
173     less than 2 percent of m/z 174
174     greater than 50 percent of m/z 95
175     5 to 9 percent of m/z
176     95 to 100 percent of m/z 174
177     5 to 9 percent of m/z 176
                                1624C  D-127

-------
Table 5
Volatile Organic Compound Characteristic M/z's
Response fac-


Comnound
acetone
acrolein
acrylonitrile
allyl alcohol
benzene
2-bromo-l-chloropropane (3)
bromochl or one thane (3)
bromodichloromethane
bromofonn
bromomethane
carbon disulfide
carbon tetrachloride
2 -chloro-1, 3 -butadiene
chloroacetonitrile
chlorobenzene
chloroethane
2-chloroethylvinyl ether
chloroform
chlorome thane
3 -chloropropene
crotonaldehyde
dibromochloromethane
1 , 2-dibromoethane
dibromomethane
1,4-dichlorobutane (3)
trans-1, 4-dichloro-2-butene
1, 1-dichloroethane
1, 2-dichloroethane
1, 1-dichloroethene
trans-1, 2-dichlorethene
1, 2-dichloropropane
1, 3-dichloropropane
cis-l, 3-dichloropropene
trans-1 , 3 -dichloropropene
diethyl ether
p-dioxane
ethyl cyanide
ethyl methacrylate
ethylbenzene
2-hexanone
iodomethane
isobutyl alcohol
methylene chloride
methyl ethyl ketone
methyl methacrylate
4 -methyl -2 -pentanone
methacrylonitrile
1,1,1, 2-tetrachloroethane
1,1,2, 2-tetrachloroethane
tetrachlorethene

Labeled
analog
d6
d4
d3

d6


"c
13C
d3

«C


d5
d5
*7
13C
d3

« 4*
13C




d3
d4
d2
d2
d6


d4
dlO
d8


dlO



d2
d3




d2
"C2

Primary
m/z's
58/64
56/60
53/56
57
78/84
77
128
83/86
173/176
96/99
76
47/48
53
75
112/117
64/71
106/113
85/86
50/52
76
70
129/130
107
93
55
75
63/66
62/67
61/65
61/65
63/67
76
75
75/79
74/84
88/96
54
69
106/116
53
142
74
84/88
72/75
69
58
67
131
83/84
166/172
Reference
compound
(I]



181






181

182
181





181
182

182
181

183





182
132



181
183

183
181
181


182
183
181
132


tor at purge
temo. of
10_2£



(2)






1.93

0.29
(2)





0.43
(2)

0.86
1.35

0.093





0.39
0.29



(2)
0.69

0.076
4.55
(2)


0.23
0.15
0.25
0.20



80 °-C



0.20






2.02

0.50
1.12





0.63
0.090

0.63
1.91

0.14





0.83
0.41



1.26
0.52

0.33
2.55
0.22


0.79
0.29
0.79
0.25


                                 1624C  D-128

-------
toluene
1,1,l-trichloroethane
1,1,2-trichloroethane
trichloroethene
trichlorofluoromethane
1,2,3-trichloropropane
vinyl acetate
vinyl chloride
(1)
                                d8
                                d3
                              "C2
                              13C2
                                d3
 92/99
97/102
 83/34
95/136
   101
    75
    86
 62/65
     181 = bromochloromethane
     182 » 2-bromo-l-chloropropane
     183 » 1,4-dichlorobutane
(2)   not detected at a purge temperature of 25 °C
(3)   internal standard
                                                    181
                                                    183
                                                    182
2.31
0,89
0.054
2.19
0.72
0.19
                                1624C  D-129

-------
Table 6

Acceptance Criteria  for Performance Tests
Compound
Acceotance criti
aria at
Initial precision
and accuracy
Section 8.2.3
s fucr/Ll
51.
72.
16.
9.0
3.2
7.0
25.
6.9
8.2
15.
36.
7.9
26.
7.9
6.7
7.7
12.
7.4
19.
22.
15.
44.
7.2
9.6
9.7
57.
9.6
6.6
6.3
5.9
7.1
8.9
228
X 0
77
32
70
13
7
7
d
16
14
d
d
12
d
11
11
12
d
11
d
d
d
75
13
16
d
66
11
15
15
11
12
17
d
20 uo/L or
labeled
compound
recovery
Sec 8 . 3
and_14.2
aa/H p f%)
- 153
- 168
- 132
- 28
- 32
- 35
- 54
- 25
- 30
- 47
- 70
- 26
- 56
- 29
- 31
- 30
- 50
- 32
- 47
- 51
- 40
- 146
- 27
- 29
- 50
- 159
- 30
- 29
- 29
- 33
- 30
- 30
- 59
35
37
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
42
ns
ns
ns
13
ns
16
23
12
ns
15
ns
ns
ns
44
ns
ns
ns
36
5
31
4
12
21
35
ns
- 165
- 163
- 204
- 196
- 99
- 214
- 414
- 165
- 205
- 308
- 554
- 172
- 410
- 185
- 191
- 192
- 315
- 195
- 343
- 381
- 284
- 156
- 239
- 203
- 316
- 164
- 199
- 181
- 193
- 200
- 184
- 196
- 452
as noted
On-going
accuracy
Sec 11.5
R Cucr/Ll
55 -
7 -
58 -
4 -
4 -
6 -
d -
12 -
4 -
d -
d -
3 -
d -
8 -
9 -
8 -
d -
8 -
d -
d -
d -
55 -
11 -
5 -
d -
42 -
7 -
11 -
6 -
8 -
9 -
12 -
d -
145
190
144
33
34
36
61
30
35
51
79
30
64
32
33
33
52
34
51
56
44
145
29
35
50
158
34
32
33
35
32
34
65
acetone*
acrolein*
acrylonitrile*
benzene
bromodichloromethane
bromoform
bromomethane
carbon tetrachloride
chlorobenzene
chloroethane
2-chloroethylvinyl ether
chloroform
chloromethane
dibromochloromethane
1,1-dichloroethane
1,2-dichloroethane
1,1-dichloroethene
trans-1,2-dichlorethene
1,2-dichloropropane
cis-1,3-dichloropropene
trans-l,3-dichloropropene
diethyl ether*
p-dioxane
ethylbenzene
methylene chloride
methyl  ethyl ketone*
1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane
tetrachlorethene
toluene
1,1,1-trichloroethane
1,1,2-trichloroethane
trichloroethene
vinyl chloride

* Acceptance criteria at 100 ug/L
d » detected; result must be greater than zero.
ns = no specification; limit would be below detection limit.
                                1624C  D-130

-------
                                           ffjuot imfT nrnno
                                           SMWUOUTICT
                                           i- i« MM ao ax* niwNa
Figure  1   Purging Device  for Waters
Figure  2   Purging Device for Soils or
Waters
                       *!**• 
-------
                                                   10-
                                                 > 1.0 •
                                                 ^

                                                 3!
                                                   0.1-
                                                        2       10   M  50  100 200
                                                            CONCENTRATION (tifl/U
 Figure 5  Schematic of Purge  and Trap
 Device—Desorb  Mode
                                  Figure 6  Relative Response  Calibra-
                                  tion Curve for  Toluene.  The Dotted
                                  Lines Enclose a +/- 10 Percent Error
                                  Window.
         (A)
                         AMA'IMHO
                              •MIZ M
AMCA
             'WMO —\fl
                              •u/zn
         (C)
                              •KUZ M

                              •M/Z92
t ™*»-
3

j 100.000
<
1 Ml/Ml


_____________________
* • •
1 0 •


I234»I7««10
                                                                              -3*
                                                 ANA4.TSISNUMMM
                                                  1.10
                                                  1.00
                                   12   &*>
                                                               TOLUIMC
                                                                               -3*
                                                         01 01  «/2 M « «
                                                             OATE ANALYZED
Figure 7  Extracted Ion Current Pro-
files for  (A)  Toluene,  (B) Toluene-dS,
and (C) a Mixture of Toluene  and
Toluene-dS.
                                 Figure 8  Quality Control Charts Show-
                                 ing Area  (top  graph)  and Relative
                                 Response of Toluene to Toluene-d8
                                 (lower graph)  Plotted as a  Function of
                                 Time or Analysis Number
                                  1624C   D-132

-------
Figure 9   Chromatogram of  Aqueous Performance Standard
SCONS   1 TO 12M
 u a, 3
                             WTA« uwioidtt n
                             «Ul UQAIOU4S II
    MHBEt C  U12H LMQj N I. 4.1  QUPMt It I. i.l J
                                                                             ZU9/S.
                                                                             258.375
                                                                          12W  SCAN
                                                                              T1?C
                              1S24C  D-133

-------
Appendix A:  Mass Spectra in the Form of Mass/intensity  Lists
532 allyl alcohol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 42    30     43    39     44   232     45     12
 56    58     57  1000     58   300     61     15
533 carbon disulfide
in/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z
 44   282     46    10     64    14     76

534 2-chloro-1,3-butadiene (chloroprene)
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z
 48    21     49    91     50   223     51
 54    41     61    30     62    54     63
 37    12     88   452     89    22     90
535 chloroacetonitrile
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 47   135     48  1000
 74    43     75   884

536 3-chloropropene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 35    39     36    40
 49   176     51    64
 76  1000     77    74

537 crotonaldehyde
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 35    26     40    28
 50    40     51    20
 69   511     70  1000
m/z  int.
 49    88
 76    39
m/z  int.
 40    44
 52    31
 78   324
m/z
 50
 77
                  int.
                  1000
                  int.
                   246
                    11
                   137
int.
 294
 278
m/z  int.
 42   206
 61    29
                          m/z  int.
                           53    13
             m/z  int.
              77    27
             m/z  int.
              52   241
              64    16
m/z  int.
 51    12
        m/z  int.
         47    40
         73    22
                          m/z   int.
                            55     59
                     m/z  int.
                      78    82
                     m/z  int.
                      53  1000
                      73    21
m/z  int.
 73    22
             m/z  int.
              58     35
              75    138
m/z
42
52
71
int.
339
21
43
m/z
43
53

int.
48
31

m/z
44
55

int.
335
55

m/z
49
68

int.
27
24

538 1,2-dibromoethane  (EDB)
m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.     m/z  int.
 79    50     80     13      31     51      82     15      93    54      95    42
105    32    106     29    107   1000     108     38     109   922     110    19
186    13    138     27    190     13

539 dibromomethane
m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.     m/z  int.
 43    99     44    101      45     30      79    184      80    35      81   175
 91   142     92     61      93   1000      94     64      95   875     160    13
172   375    173     14    174    719     175     12     176   342

540 trans-l,4-dichloro-2-butene
m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 49   166     50    171      51    289
 62   286     64     91      75   1000
 90    93     91    129    124    138

541 1,3-dichloropropane
m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.     ro/z  int.
 40    15     42     44      47     19      48     20      49   193      51    55
 61    18     62     22      63    131      65     38      75    47      76  1000
 77    46     78    310      79     12
m/z
52
77
126
int.
35
323
86
m/z
53
38
128
int.
878
246
12
ro/z
54
89

int.
273
415

                                 1624C   D-134

-------
542 cis-1,3-dichloropropene
 37   262     38   269    39    998
 77   328    110   254    112    161

543 ethyl cyanide
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 44   115     50    34     51   166
 55   193

544 ethyl methacrylate
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 42   127     43    48     45   155
 69  1000     70    83     71    25
 96    17     99    93    113    11

545 2-hexanone  (methyl butyl ketone)
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 42    61     43  1000     44    24
 59    21     71    36     85    37
546 iodomethane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 44    57    127   328
142  1000    143    12

547 isobutyl alcohol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 34    21     35    13
 43  1000     44    42
                   m/z  int.
                   128    17
                   m/z  int.
                    36    13
                    45    21
 59
25
73
12
74
63
548 methacrylonitrile
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 38    24     39    21
 51   214     52   446
 65    55     66   400

549 methyl methacrylate
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 42   127     43    52
 59   124     68    28
 98    20     99    89
                   m/z  int.
                    45    48
                    69  1000
                   100   442
                                 49   596
                                m/z  int.
                                 52   190
                                m/z  int.
                                 55    32
                                 85    14
                                114   119
                                m/z  int.
                                 55    12
                                100    56
                         m/z  int.
                         139    39
                         m/z  int.
                          37    11
                          55    40
                                       51   189
                                      m/z  int.
                                       53   127
                                      m/z  int.
                                       58    39
                                       86   169
                                      m/z  int.
                                       57   130
                                m/z  int.
                                140    34
                                m/z  int.
                                 39    10
                                 56    37
                         m/z  int.
                          53    30
                          70    51
                         101    22
                                m/z  int.
                                 55   100
                                 82    26
550 4-methyl-2-pentanone  (methyl isobutyl ketone; MIBK)
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 42    69     43  1000     44    54     53    11     55    15
 57   205     58   346     59    20     67    12     69    10
100    94

551 1,1,1,2-tetrachloroethane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 47   144     49   163     60   303     61   330     62    98
 84    31     95   416     96   152     97   270     98    84
121   236    131  1000    133   955    135   301
                                              75  1000
                                             m/z  int.
                                              54  1000
                                             m/z  int.
                                              68    60
                                              87    21
                                             m/z  int.
                                              58   382
                                      m/z  int.
                                      141   120
                                      m/z  int.
                                       42   575
                                       57    21
m/z
41
53
67
int.
26
19
1000
m/z
42
62
63
int.
100
24
51
m/z
49
63
int.
19
59
m/z
50
64
int.
60
136
                                      m/z
                                       56
                                       85
                                                          m/z
                                                           56
                                                           85
                                                          m/z
                                                           82
                                                          117
                                     int.
                                       49
                                       45
                                                        int.
                                                          13
                                                          96
                                                        int.
                                                          45
                                                         804
                                1624C  D-135

-------
552 trichlorofluoromethane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.
 44    95     47   153     49    43      51     21      52     14      66   162
 68    53     82    40     84    28    101   1000     102     10     103   671
105   102    117    16    119    14

553 1,2,3-trichloropropane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.
 49   285     51    87     61   300      62    107      63     98      75  1000
 76    38     77   302     83    23      96     29      97    166      98    20
 99   103    110   265    111    28    112    164     114     25

554 vinyl acetate
 36     5     42   103    43    1000      44     70      45      8      86    57
                                 1624C   D-136

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 1625C
     D-137

-------
31 October 1986   Draft

Method 1625,  Revision C
Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution GCMS

1   Scope and application
1.1  This method is designed to determine the semivolatile toxic
    organic pollutants associated with the 1976 Consent Decree; the
    Resource Conservation and Recovery Act; the Comprehensive Environ-
    mental Response, Compensation and Liability Act; and other com-
    pounds amenable to extraction and analysis by capillary column gas
    chromatography-mass spectrometry (GCMS).
1.2  The chemical compounds listed in tables 1 through 4 may be deter-
    mined in waters, soils, and municipal sludges by this method.  The
    method is designed to meet the survey requirements of the Environ-
    mental Protection Agency (EPA).
1.3  The detection limit of this method is usually dependent on the
    level of interferences rather than instrumental limitations.  The
    limits in tables 5 and 6 typify the minimum quantity that can be
    detected with no interferences present.
1.4  The GCMS portions of this method are for use only by analysts
    experienced with GCMS or under the close supervision of such quali-
    fied persons.  Laboratories unfamiliar with analyses of environmen-
    tal samples by GCMS should run the performance tests in reference 1
    before beginning.

2   Summary of method
2.1  The percent solids content of a sample is determined.
                                        D-138

-------
    Stable isotopically labeled analogs of the compounds of interest
    are added to the sample.
    If the solids content is less than one percent, a one liter sample
    is extracted at pH 12 - 13,  then at pH <2 with methylene chloride
    using continuous extraction techniques.  If the solids content is
    30 percent percent or less,  the sample is diluted to one percent
    solids with reagent water, homogenized ultrasonically, and
    extracted at pH 12-13, then at pH <2 with methylene chloride using
    continuous extraction techniques. If the solids content is greater
    than 30 percent, the sample is extracted using ultrasonic tech-
    niques.
    Each extract is dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated to a volume
    of five mL,  cleaned up using gel permeation chromatography (GPC),
    if necessary, and concentrated to one mL.  An internal standard is
    added to the extract, and a one uL aliquot of the extract is
    inj'ected into the gas chromatograph (GC) .  The compounds are separ-
    ated by GC and detected by a mass spectrometer (MS).   The labeled
    compounds serve to correct the variability of the analytical tech-
    nique.
2.2  Identification of a pollutant (qualitative analysis)  is performed
    in one of three ways:  (1)  For compounds  listed in tables 1 and 2,
    and for other compounds for which authentic standards  are avail-
    able,  the GCMS system is calibrated and the mass spectrum and
    retention time for each standard are stored in a user  created
    library.   A  compound is identified when its retention  time and mass
    spectrum agree with the library retention time and spectrum.   (2)
    For compounds listed in tables 3  and 4, and for other  compounds for
    which  standards are not available,  a compound is identified when
    the retention time and mass  spectrum spectrum agree with those spe-
                               1625C   D-139

-------
    cified in this method.  (3)  For chromatographic peaks which are not
    identified by (1)  and (2)  above,  the background corrected spectrum
    at the peak maximum is compared with spectra in the EPA/NIH Mass
    Spectral File (reference 2).   Tentative identification is estab-
    lished when the spectrum agrees.
2.3  Quantitative analysis is performed in one of four ways by GCMS
    using extracted ion current profile (EICP)  areas:   (1)  For com-
    pounds listed in tables 1 and 2,  and for other compounds for which
    standards and labeled analogs are available, the GCMS system is
    calibrated and the compound concentration is determined using an
    isotope dilution technique.   (2)  For compounds listed in tables 1
    and 2, and for other compounds for which authentic standards but no
    labeled compounds are available,  the GCMS system is calibrated and
    the compound concentration is determined using an internal standard
    technique.  (3)  For compounds listed in tables 3 and 4, and for
    other compounds for which standards are not available,  compound
    concentrations are determined using known response factors.  (4)
    For compounds for which neither standards nor known response fac-
    tors are available, compound concentration is determined using the
    sum of the EICP areas relative to the sum of the EICP areas of the
    internal standard.
2.4  Quality is assured through reproducible calibration and testing of
    the extraction and GCMS systems.

3   Contamination and interferences
3.1  Solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hard-
    ware may yield artifacts and/or elevated baselines causing misin-
    terpretation of chromatograms and spectra.   All materials used in
    the analysis shall be demonstrated to be free from interferences

                               1625C

-------
    under the conditions of analysis by running method blanks initially
    and with each sample lot (samples started through the extraction
    process on a given 8 hr shift, to a maximum of 20).   Specific
    selection of reagents and purification of solvents by distillation
    in all-glass systems may be required.  Glassware and, where pos-
    sible, reagents are cleaned by solvent rinse and baking at 450 °C
    for one hour minimum.
3.2  Interferences coextracted from samples will vary considerably from
    source to source, depending on the diversity of the site being
    sampled.

4   Safety
4.1  The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used
    in this method has not been precisely determined; however,  each
    chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard.
    Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest pos-
    sible level.   The laboratory is responsible for maintaining a cur-
    rent awareness file of OSHA regulations regarding the safe handling
    of the chemicals specified in this method.   A reference file of
    data handling sheets should also be made available to all personnel
    involved in these analyses.  Additional information on laboratory
    safety can be found in references 3 - 5.
4.2  The following compounds covered by this method have been tenta-
    tively classified as know or suspected human or mammalian carcinog-
    ens:  benzo(a)anthracene, 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine, benzo(a)pyrene,
    dibenzo(a,h)anthracene,  N-nitrosodimethylamine, and beta-naphthyla-
    mine.  Primary standards of these compounds shall be prepared in a
    hood, and a NIOSH/MESA approved toxic gas respirator should be worn
    when high concentrations are handled.
                               1625C  D-141

-------
5   Apparatus and materials
5.1  Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling.
5.1.1  Sample Bottles and Caps
5.1.1.1  Liquid Samples (waters,  sludges and similar materials that
    contain less than five percent solids)—Sample bottle,  amber glass,
    1.1 liters minimum, with screw cap.
5.1.1.2  Solid samples (soils, sediments, sludges, filter cake, com-
    post, and similar materials that contain more than five percent
    solids)—Sample bottle, wide mouth, amber glass, 500 mL minimum.
5.1.1.3  If amber bottles are not available, samples shall be protected
    from light.
5.1.1.4  Bottle caps—threaded to fit sample bottles.  Caps shall be
    lined with Teflon.
5.1.1.5  Cleaning
5.1.1.5.1  Bottles are detergent water washed, then solvent rinsed or
    baked at 450 °C for one hour minimum before use.
5.1.1.5.2  Liners are detergent water washed, then reagent water (sec-
    tion 6.5.1) and solvent rinsed, and baked at approx 200 °C for one
    hour minimum prior to use.
5.1.2  Compositing equipment—automatic or manual compositing system
    incorporating glass containers cleaned per bottle cleaning proce-
    dure above.  Sample containers are kept at 0 - 4 °C during samp-
    ling.  Glass or Teflon tubing only shall be used.  If the sampler
    uses a peristaltic pump, a minimum length of compressible silicone
    rubber tubing may be used in the pump only.  Before use,  the tubing
    shall be thoroughly rinsed with methanol, followed by repeated
    rinsings with reagent water (section 6.5.1) to minimize sample con-
    tamination.  An integrating flow meter is used to collect propor-
                               1625C   D-142

-------
    tional composite samples.
5.2  Equipment for determining percent moisture
5.2.1  Oven, capable of being temperature controlled at 110 +/- 5 °C.
5.2.2  Dessicator
5.3  Sonic disrupter—375 watt with pulsing capability and 3/4 in.
    disrupter horn (Ultrasonics, Inc, Model 375C, or equivalent).
5.4  Extraction apparatus
5.4.1  Continuous liquid-liquid extractor—Teflon or glass connecting
    joints and stopcocks without lubrication, 1.5-2 liter capacity
    (Hershberg-Wolf Extractor, Ace Glass 6841-10, or equivalent).
5.4.2  Beakers
5.4.2.1  1.5-2 liter, calibrated to one liter
5.4.2.2  400 - 500 mL
5.4.2.3  Spatulas—stainless steel
5.4.3  Filtration apparatus
5.4.3.1  Glass funnel—125 - 250 mL
5.4.3.2  Filter paper for above (Whatman 41, or equivalent)
5.5  Drying column—15 to 20 mm i.d. Pyrex chromatographic column
    equipped with coarse glass frit or glass wool plug.
5.6  Kuderna-Danish (K-D) apparatus
5.6.1  Concentrator tube—IQmL, graduated (Kontes K-570050-1025, or
    equivalent) with calibration verified.  Ground glass stopper (size
    19/22 joint) is used to prevent evaporation of extracts.
5.6.2  Evaporation flask—500 mL (Kontes K-570001-0500, or equivalent),
    attached to concentrator tube with springs (Kontes K-662750-0012).
5.6.3  Snyder column—three ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0232, or equi-
    valent) .
5.6.4  Snyder column—two ball micro (Kontes K-469002-0219, or equiva-
    lent) .

                               1625C  D-143

-------
5.6.5  Boiling chips~approx 10/40 mesh, extracted with methylene chlo-
    ride and baked at 450 °C for one hr minimum.
5.7  Water bath—heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of temper-
    ature control (+/- 2 °C), installed in a fume hood.
5.8  Sample vials—amber glass, 2 - 5 mL with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.9  Balances
5.9.1  Analytical—capable of weighing 0.1 mg.
5.9.2  Top loading—capable of weighing 10 mg.
5.10  Automated gel permeation chromatograph (Analytical Biochemical
    Labs, Inc, Model GFC Autoprep 1002, or equivalent)
5.10.1  Column—600 - 700 mm x 25 mm i.d., packed with 70 g of SX-3
    Bio-beads
5.11  Gas chromatograph—shall have splitless or on-column injection
    port for capillary column, temperature program with 30 °C hold, and
    shall meet all of the performance specifications in section 12.
5.11.1  Column—30 +/~5 m x 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm i.d. 5% phenyl, 94%
    methyl,  1% vinyl silicone bonded phase fused silica capillary col-
    umn (J & W DB-5, or equivalent).
5.12  Mass spectrometer—70 eV electron impact ionization, shall repeti-
    tively scan from 35 to 450 amu in 0.95 - 1.00 second,  and shall
    produce a unit resolution (valleys between m/z 441-442 less than 10
    percent of the height of the 441 peak),  background corrected mass
    spectrum from 50 ng decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP) introduced
    through the GC inlet.  The spectrum shall meet the mass-intensity
    criteria in table 7 (reference 6).  The mass spectrometer shall be
    interfaced to the GC such that the end of the capillary column ter-
    minates within one centimeter of the ion source but does not inter-
    cept the electron or ion beams.   All portions of the column which
    connect the GC to the ion source shall remain at or above the col-
                               1625C  D-144

-------
    umn temperature during analysis to preclude condensation of less
    volatile compounds.
5.13  Data system—shall collect and record MS data, store mass-
    intensity data in spectral libraries, process GCMS data, generate
    reports, and shall compute and record response factors.
5.13.1  Data acquisition—mass spectra shall be collected continuously
    throughout the analysis and stored on a mass storage device.
5.13.2  Mass spectral libraries—user created libraries containing mass
    spectra obtained from analysis of authentic standards shall be
    employed to reverse search GCMS runs for the compounds of interest
    (section 7.2).
5.13.3  Data processing—the data system shall be used to search,
    locate, identify, and quantify the compounds of interest in each
    GCMS analysis.  Software routines shall be employed to compute
    retention times and peak areas.  Displays of spectra, mass chroma-
    tograms, and library comparisons are required to verify results.
5.13.4  Response factors and multipoint calibrations—the data system
    shall be used to record and maintain lists of response factors
    (response ratios for isotope dilution)  and multi-point calibration
    curves  (section 7).  Computations of relative standard deviation
    (coefficient of variation) are used for testing calibration
    linearity.  Statistics on initial (section 8.2) and on-going (sec-
    tion 12.7) performance shall be computed and maintained.

6  Reagents and standards
6.1  Reagents for adjusting sample pH
6.1.1  Sodium hydroxide—reagent grade,  6N in reagent water.
6.1.2  Sulfuric acid—reagent grade, 6N in reagent water.
6.2  Sodium sulfate—reagent grade, granular anhydrous,  rinsed with
                               1625C  D-145

-------
    methylene chloride (20 mL/g),  baked at 450 °C for one hour minimum,
    cooled in a dessicator, and stored in a pre-cleaned glass bottle
    with screw cap which prevents moisture from entering.
6.3  Methylene chloride—distilled in glass (Burdick and Jackson, or
    equivalent).
6.4  GPC calibration solutions
6.4.1  Corn oil—200 mg/mL in methylene chloride
6.4.2  Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate)  and pentachlorophenol—4.0 mg/mL
    each in methylene chloride
6.5  Reference matrices
6.5.1  Reagent water—water in which the compounds of interest and
    interfering compounds are not detected by this method.
6.5.2  High solids reference matrix—playground sand or similar mate-
    rial in which the compounds of interest and interfering compounds
    are not detected by this method.
6.6  Standard solutions—purchased as solutions or mixtures with certi-
    fication to their purity, concentration, and authenticity, or pre-
    pared from materials of known purity and composition.  If compound
    purity is 96 percent or greater, the weight may be used without
    correction to compute the concentration of the standard.  When not
    being used, standards are stored in the dark at -20 to -10 °C in
    screw-capped vials with Teflon-lined lids.  A mark is placed on the
    vial at the level of the solution so that solvent evaporation loss
    can be detected.  The vials are brought to room temperature prior
    to use.  Any precipitate is redissolved and solvent is added if
    solvent loss has occurred.
6.7  Preparation of stock solutions—prepare in methylene chloride,
    benzene, p-dioxane, or a mixture of these solvents per the steps
    below.  Observe the safety precautions in section 4.  The large
                               1625C  D-146

-------
    number of labeled and unlabeled acid and base/neutral compounds
    used for combined calibration (section 7) and calibration verifica-
    tion (12.5) require high concentrations  (approx 40 mg/mL) when
    individual stock solutions are prepared, so that dilutions of mix-
    tures will permit calibration with all compounds in a single set of
    solutions.  The working range for most compounds is 10-200 ug/mL.
    Compounds with a reduced MS response may be prepared at higher con-
    centrations.
6.7.1  Dissolve an appropriate amount of assayed reference material in
    a suitable solvent.  For example, weigh 400 mg naphthalene in a 10
    mL ground glass stoppered volumetric flask and fill to the mark
    with benzene.  After the naphthalene is completely dissolved,
    transfer the solution to a 15 mL vial with Teflon-lined cap.
6.7.2  Stock standard solutions should be checked for signs of degrada-
    tion prior to the preparation of calibration or performance test
    standards.  Qaulity control check samples that can be used to
    determine the accuracy of calibration standards are available from
    the US  Environmental Protection Agency,  Environmental Monitoring
    and Support Laboratory,  Cincinnati,  Ohio 45268.
6.7.3  Stock standard solutions shall be replaced after six months,  or
    sooner  if comparison with quality control check standards indicates
    a change in concentration.
6.8  Labeled compound spiking solution—from stock standard solutions
    prepared as above,  or from mixtures,  prepare the spiking solution
    at a concentration of 200 ug/mL,  or at a concentration appropriate
    to the  MS response of each compound.
6.9  Secondary standard—using stock solutions (section 6.7),  prepare a
    secondary standard containing all of the compounds in tables 1 and
    2 at a  concentration of 400 ug/mL,  or higher concentration appro-
                              1625C  D-147

-------
    priate to the MS response of the compound.
6.10  Internal standard solution—prepare 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl  (DFB)
    at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in benzene.
6.11  DFTPP solution—prepare at 50 ug/mL in acetone.
6.12  Solutions for obtaining authentic mass spectra (section
    7.2)—prepare mixtures of compounds at concentrations which will
    assure authentic spectra are obtained for storage in libraries.
6.13  Calibration solutions—combine 0.5 mL of the solution in section
    6.8 with 25,  50, 125,  250, and 500 uL of the solution in section
    6.9 and bring to 1.00  mL total volume each.   This will produce cal-
    ibration solutions of  nominal 10,  20, 50,  100 and 200 ug/mL of the
    pollutants and a constant nominal 100 ug/mL of the labeled com-
    pounds.  Spike each solution with 10 uL of the internal standard
    solution (section 6.10).  These solutions permit the relative
    response (labeled to unlabeled)  to be measured as a function of
    concentration (section 7.4).
6.14  Precision and recovery standard—used for determination of ini-
    tial (section 8.2)  and on-going (section 12.7) precision and recov-
    ery.   This solution shall contain the pollutants and labeled com-
    pounds at a nominal concentration of 100  ug/mL.
6.15  Stability of solutions—all standard solutions (sections 6.8 -
    6.14)  shall be analyzed within 48 hours of preparation and on a
    monthly basis thereafter for signs of degradation.   Standards will
    remain acceptable if the peak area at the quantitation mass rela-
    tive to the DFB internal standard remains within +/- 15 percent of
    the area obtained in the initial analysis of the standard.

7  Calibration
7.1  Assemble the GCMS and establish the operating conditions in table
                              1625C  D-148

-------
    5.  Analyze standards per the procedure in section 11 to demon-
    strate that the analytical system meets the minimum levels in
    tables 5 and 6, and the mass-intensity criteria in table 7 for 50
    ng DFTPP.
7.2  Mass spectral libraries—detection and identification of compounds
    of interest are dependent upon spectra stored in user created
    libraries.
7.2.1  Obtain a mass spectrum of each pollutant, labeled compound, and
    the internal standard by analyzing an authentic standard either
    singly or as part of a mixture in which there is no interference
    between closely eluted components.  That only a single compound is
    present is determined by examination of the spectrum.   Fragments
    not attributable to the compound under study indicate the presence
    of an interfering compound.
7.2.2  Adjust the analytical conditions and scan rate (for this test
    only)  to produce an undistorted spectrum at the GC peak maximum.
    An undistorted spectrum will usually be obtained if five complete
    spectra are collected across the upper half of the GC peak.   Soft-
    ware algorithms designed to "enhance" the spectrum may eliminate
    distortion, but may also eliminate authentic masses or introduce
    other distortion.
7.2.3  The authentic reference spectrum is obtained under DFTPP tuning
    conditions (section 7.1 and table 7)  to normalize it to spectra
    from other instruments.
7.2.4  The spectrum is edited by saving the 5 most intense mass  spec-
    tral peaks and all other mass spectral peaks greater than 10  per-
    cent of the base peak.   The  spectrum may be further edited to
    remove common interfering masses.   If 5 mass spectral  peaks  cannot
    be obtained under the scan conditions given in section 5.12,  the

                              1625C  D-149

-------
    mass spectrometer may be scanned to an m/z lower than 35 to gain
    additional spectral information.  The spectrum obtained is stored
    for reverse search and for compound confirmation.
7.2.5  For the compounds in tables 3 and 4 and for other compounds for
    which the mass spectra, quantitation m/z's, and retention times are
    known but the instrument is not to be calibrated, add the retention
    time and reference compound (tables 5 and 6);  the responsefactor
    and the quantitation m/z (tables 8 and 9); and spectrum (Appendix
    A)  to the reverse search library.  Edit the spectrum per section
    7.2.4,  if necessary.
7.3  Analytical range—demonstrate that 20 ng anthracene or phenan-
    threne produces an area at m/z 178 approx one-tenth that required
    to exceed the linear range of the system.  The exact value must be
    determined by experience for each instrument.   It is used to match
    the calibration range of the instrument to the analytical range and
    detection limits required,  and to diagnose instrument sensitivity
    problems (section 15.3).  The 20 ug/mL calibration standard (sec-
    tion 6.13)  can be used to demonstrate this performance.
7.3.1  Polar compound detection—demonstrate that  unlabeled pentachlo-
    rophenol and benzidine are detectable at the 50 ug/mL level (per
    all criteria in section 13).  The 50 ug/mL calibration standard
    (section 6.13) can be used to demonstrate this performance.
7.4  Calibration with isotope dilution—isotope dilution is used when
    1)  labeled compounds are available, 2) interferences do not pre-
    clude its use, and 3) the quantitation m/z (tables 8 and 9)
    extracted ion current profile (EICP) area for  the compound is in
    the calibration range.  Alternate labeled compounds and quantita-
    tion m/z's may be used based on availability.   If any of the above
    conditions preclude isotope dilution, the internal standard method
                              1625C   D-150

-------
    (section 7.5) is used.
7.4.1  A calibration curve encompassing the concentration range is pre-
    pared for each compound to be determined.  The relative response
    (pollutant to labeled) vs concentration in standard solutions is
    plotted or computed using a linear regression.  The example in Fig-
    ure 1 shows a calibration curve for phenol using phenol-d5 as the
    isotopic diluent.  Also shown are the +/~ 10 percent error limits
    (dotted lines).  Relative Response (RR) is determined according to
    the procedures described below.  A minimum of five data points are
    employed for calibration.
7.4.2  The relative response of a pollutant to its labeled analog is
    determined from isotope ratio values computed from acquired data.
    Three isotope ratios are used in this process:
    Rx » the isotope ratio measured for the pure pollutant.
    Ry » the isotope ratio measured for the labeled compound.
    Rm » the isotope ratio of an analytical mixture of pollutant and
    labeled compounds.
    The m/z's are selected such that Rx > Ry.  If Rm is not
    between 2Ry and 0.5RX, the method does not apply and the sample
    is analyzed by the internal standard method.
7.4.3  Capillary columns usually separate the pollutant-labeled pair,
    with the labeled compound eluted first (figure 2).   For this case,
    Rx =» [area mj/zj/l, at the retention time of the pollutant
    (RT2).
    Ry = I/[area m2/z], at the retention time of the labeled
    compound RT^)
    Rm - [area at m^/z (at RT2)]/[area at m2/z (at RT^ ],  as
    measured in the mixture of the pollutant and labeled compounds
    (figure 2), and RR » Rm.

                              1625C  D-151

-------
7.4.4  Special precautions are taken when the pollutant-labeled pair is
    not separated,  or when another labeled compound with interfering
    spectral masses overlaps the pollutant (a case which can occur with
    isomeric compounds).   In this case,  it is necessary to determine
    the respective contributions of the pollutant and labeled compounds
    to the respective EICP areas.  If the peaks are separated well
    enough to permit the data system or operator to remove the contri-
    butions of the compounds to each other, the equations in section
    7.4.3 apply.  This usually occurs when the height of the valley
    between the two GC peaks at the same m/z is less than 10 percent of
    the height of the shorter of the two peaks.  If significant GC and
    spectral overlap occur, RR is computed using the following equa-
    tion:
    RR - (Ry - Rm)(Rx + l)/(Rm - Rx)(Ry + 1)/ where Rx is
    measured as shown in figure 3A, Ry is measured as shown in figure
    3B, and Rm is measured as shown in figure 3C.  For the example,
    Rx - 46100/4780 - 9.644, Ry » 26SO/43600 » 0.0608, Rm -
    49200/48300 » 1.019, and RR = 1.114.
7.4.5  To calibrate the analytical system by isotope dilution, analyze
    a 1.0 uL aliquot of each of the calibration standards (section
    6.13) using the procedure in section 11.  Compute the RR at each
    concentration.
7.4.6  Linearity—if the ratio of relative response to concentration
    for any compound is constant  (less than 20 percent coefficient of
    variation) over the 5 point calibration range, an averaged relative
    response/concentration ratio may be used for that compound; other-
    wise, the complete calibration curve for that compound shall be
    used over the 5 point calibration range.
7.5  Calibration by internal standard—used when criteria for isotope
                              1625C  D-152

-------
    dilution (section 7.4) cannot be met.  The internal standard to be
    used for both acid and base/neutral analyses is 2,2'-difluorobi-
    phenyl.  The internal standard method is also applied to determina-
    tion of compounds having no labeled analog, and to measurement of
    labeled compounds for intra-laboratory statistics  (sections 8.4 and
    12.7.4).
7.5.1  Response factors—calibration requires the determination of
    response factors (RF) which are defined by the following equation:
    RF - (As x Cis)/(Ais x Cs),  where
    As is the area of the characteristic mass for the compound in the
    daily standard
    AJ_S is the area of the characteristric mass for the internal
    standard
    Cj_s is the concentration of the internal standard  (ug/mL)
    Cs is the concentration of the compound in the daily standard
    (ug/mL)
7.5.1.1  The response factor is determined for at least five concentra-
    tions appropriate to the response of each compound  (section 6.13) ;
    nominally,  10, 20,  50, 100,  and 200 ug/mL.  The amount of internal
    standard added to each extract is the same (100 ug/mL) so that Cj_s
    remains constant.  The RF is plotted vs concentration for each com-
    pound in the standard (Cs) to produce a calibration curve.
7.5.1.2  Linearity—if the response factor (RF) for any compound is
    constant (less than 35 percent coefficient of variation) over the 5
    point calibration range, an averaged response factor may be used
    for that compound;  otherwise, the complete calibration curve for
    that compound shall be used over the 5 point range.
7.6  Combined calibration—by using calibration solutions (section
    6.13) containing the pollutants, labeled compounds, and the inter-
                              1625C  D-153

-------
    nal standard, a single set of analyses can be used to produce cali-
    bration curves for the isotope dilution and internal standard meth-
    ods.  These curves are verified each shift (section 12.5) by ana-
    lyzing the 100 ug/mL calibration standard (section 6.13). Recali-
    bration is required only if calibration verification (section 12.5)
    criteria cannot be met.

8  Quality assurance/quality control
8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method is required to operate a
    formal quality assurance program (reference 7).   The minimum
    requirements of this program consist of an initial demonstration of
    laboratory capability, analysis of samples spiked with labeled com-
    pounds to evaluate and document data quality,  and analysis of stan-
    dards and blanks as tests of continued performance.  Laboratory
    performance is compared to established performance criteria to
    determine if the results of analyses meet the performance charac-
    teristics of the method.
    If the method is to be applied routinely to samples containing high
    solids with very little moisture (e.g., soils,  filter cake, com-
    post), the high solids reference matrix (section 6.5.2)  is substi-
    tuted for the reagent water (6.5.1)  in all performance tests, and
    the high solids method (section 10)  is used for these tests.
8.1.1  The analyst shall make an initial demonstration of the ability
    to generate acceptable accuracy and precision with this method.
    This ability is established as described in section 8.2.
8.1.2  The analyst is permitted to modify this method to improve sepa-
    rations or lower the costs of measurements,  provided all  perfor-
    mance specifications are met.   Each time a modification is made  to
    the method,  the analyst is required to repeat  the procedure in sec-

                              1625C  D-154

-------
    tion 8.2 to demonstrate method performance.
8.1.3  Analyses of blanks are required to demonstrate freedom from con-
    tamination.  The procedures and criteria for analysis of a blank
    are described in section 8.5.
8.1.4  The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to
    monitor method performance.  This test is described in section 8.3.
    When results of these spikes indicate atypical method performance
    for samples, the samples are diluted to bring method performance
    within acceptable limits (section 15).
8.1.5  The laboratory shall, on an on-going basis, demonstrate through
    calibration verification and the analysis of the precision and
    recovery standard (section 6.14) that 'the analysis system is in
    control.  These procedures are described in sections 12.1, 12.5,
    and 12.7.
8.1.6  The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of
    data that is generated.  Development of accuracy statements is
    described in section 8.4.
8.2  Initial precision and accuracy—to establish the ability to gener-
    ate acceptable precision and accuracy,  the analyst shall perform
    the following operations:
3.2.1  For low solids (aqueous samples), extract, concentrate, and ana-
    lyze two sets of four one-liter aliquots (8 aliquots total) of the
    precision and recovery standard (section 6.14) according to the
    procedure in section 10.  For high solids samples, two sets of four
    30 gram aliquots of the high solids reference matrix are used.
8.2.2  Using results of the first set of four analyses, compute the
    average recovery (X) in ug/mL and the standard deviation of the
    recovery (s) in ug/mL for each compound, by isotope dilution for
    pollutants with a labeled analog, and by internal standard for
                              1625C  D-155

-------
    labeled compounds and pollutants with no labeled analog.
8.2.3  For each compound, compare s and X with the corresponding limits
    for initial precision and accuracy in table 10.  If s and X for all
    compounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is
    acceptable and analysis of blanks and samples may begin.  If, how-
    ever, any individual s exceeds the precision limit or any individ-
    ual X falls outside the range for accuracy, system performance is
    unacceptable for that compound.
    NOTE:  The large number of compounds in table 10 present a substan-
    tial probability that one or more will fail the acceptance criteria
    when all compounds are analyzed.  To determine if the analytical
    system is out of control, or if the failure can be attributed to
    probability,  proceed as follows:
8.2.4  Using the results of the second set of four analyses, compute s
    and X for only those compounds which failed the test of the first
    set of four analyses (section 8.2.3).  If these compounds now pass,
    system performance is acceptable for all compounds and analysis of
    blanks and samples may begin.  If,  however, any of the same com-
    pounds fail again, the analysis system is not performing properly
    for these compounds.   In this event,  correct the problem and repeat
    the entire test (section 8.2.1).
8.3  The laboratory shall spike all samples with labeled compounds to
    assess method performance on the sample matrix.
8.3.1  Analyze each sample according to the method beginning in section
    10.
8.3.2  Compute the percent recovery (P)  of the labeled compounds using
    the internal  standard method (section 7.5).
8.3.3  Compare the labeled compound recovery for each compound with the
    corresponding limits in table 10.   If the recovery of any compound

                              1625C  D-156

-------
     falls  outside  its  warning limit,  method  performance  is  unacceptable
     for  that  compound  in  that sample.   Therefore,  the  sample  is  com-
     plex.  Water samples  are  diluted,  and  smaller  amounts of  soils,
     sludges,  and sediments  are reanalyzed  per  section  15.
 8.4  As  part  of the QA program for  the laboratory, method accuracy  for
     samples shall  be assessed and records  shall be maintained. After
     the  analysis of five  samples or a given  matrix type  (water,  soil,
     sludge, sediment)  for which the labeled  compounds  pass  the tests  in
     section 8.3, compute  the  average  percent recovery  (P) and the stan-
     dard deviation of  the percent recovery (sp) for the  labeled  com-
     pounds only.   Express the accuracy assessment  as a percent recovery
     interval  from  P -2sp  to P + 2sp for each matrix.   For example,  if
     P -  90% and sp - 10%  for  five analyses of  compost, the  accuracy
     interval  is expressed as  70 - 110%.  Update the accuracy  assessment
     for  each  compound  in  each matrix  on a  regular  basis  (e.g. after
     each 5-10 new accuracy  measurements).
8.5  Blanks—reagent water and  high solids reference matrix blanks  are
    analyzed  to demonstrate freedom from contamination.
8.5.1  Extract and concentrate  a one  liter reagent water blank or a
    high solids reference matrix blank with  each sample lot (samples
    started through the extraction process on the same 8 hr shift, to a
    maximum of 20 samples).   Analyze the blank immediately after analy-
    sis of the precision and recovery standard (section 6.14)  to demon-
    strate freedom from contamination.
8.5.2  If any of the compounds of interest (tables 1 thru 4) or any
    potentially interfering compound is found in an aqueous blank at
    greater than 10 ug/L,  or in a high solids reference matrix blank at
    greater than 100 ug/kg (assuming a response factor of 1 relative to
    the internal standard for compounds not listed in tables 1 thru 4),

                              1625C D-157

-------
    analysis of samples is halted until the source of contamination is
    eliminated and a blank shows no evidence of contamination at this
    level.
8.6  The specifications contained in this method can be met if the
    apparatus used is calibrated properly, then maintained in a cali-
    brated state.  The standards used for calibration (section 7), cal-
    ibration verification (section 12.5), and for initial (section 8.2)
    and on-going (section 12.7) precision and recovery should be iden-
    tical, so that the most precise results will be obtained.  The GCMS
    instrument in particular will provide the most reproducible results
    if dedicated to the settings and conditions required for the ana-
    lyses of semi-volatiles by this method.
8.7  Depending on specific program requirements, field replicates may
    be collected to determine the precision of the sampling technique,
    and spiked samples may be required to determine the accuracy of the
    analysis when the internal standard method is used.

9  Sample collection, preservation,  and handling
9.1  Collect samples in glass containers following conventional samp-
    ling practices (reference 3).   Aqueous samples which flow freely
    are collected in refrigerated bottles using automatic sampling
    equipment.   Solid samples are collected as grab samples using wide
    mouth jars.
9.2  Maintain samples at 0 - 4 °C from the time of collection until
    extraction.   If residual chlorine is present in aqueous samples,
    add 80 mg sodium thiosulfate per liter of water.   EPA methods 330.4
    and 330.5 may be used to measure residual chlorine (reference 9).
9.3  Begin sample extraction within seven days of collection,  and ana-
    lyze all extracts within 40 days of extraction.

                              1625C  D-158

-------
10  Sample extraction, concentration, and cleanup—samples containing
    one percent solids or less are extracted directly using continuous
    liquid/liquid extraction techniques (section 10.2.1 and figure 4).
    Samples containing one to 30 percent solids are diluted to the one
    percent level with reagent water (section 10.2.2) and extracted
    using continuous liquid/liquid extraction techniques.  Samples con-
    taining greater than 30 percent solids are extracted using ultra-
    sonic techniques (section 10.2.5)
10.1  Determination of percent solids
10.1.1  Weigh 5 - 10 g of sample into a tared beaker.
10.1.2  Dry overnight (12 hours minimum) at 110 +/- 5 °C, and cool in a
    dessicator.
10.1.3  Determine percent solids as follows:
    % solids • weight of dry sample x 100
               weight of wet sample
10.2  Preparation of samples for extraction
10.2.1  Samples containing one percent solids or less—extract sample
    directly using continuous liquid/liquid extraction techniques.
10.2.1.1  Measure 1.00 +/- 0.01 liter of sample into a clean 1.5 - 2.0
    liter beaker.
10.2.1.2  Dilute aliquot—for samples which are expected to be diffi-
    cult to extract, concentrate,  or clean-up,  measure an additional
    100.0 +/- 1.0 mL into a clean 1.5 - 2.0 liter beaker and dilute to
    a final volume of 1.00 +/~ 0-1 liter with reagent water.
10.2.1.3  Spike 0.5 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (sec-
    tion 6.8)  into the sample aliquots.  Proceed to preparation of the
    QC aliquots for low solids samples (section 10.2.3).
10.2.2  Samples containing one to 30 percent solids
10.2.2.1  Mix sample thoroughly.
                              1625C  D-159

-------
10.2.2.2  Using the percent solids found in 10.1.3,  determine the
    weight of sample required to produce one liter of solution contain-
    ing one percent solids as follows:
    sample weight »   1000   grams
                    % solids

10.2.2.3  Place the weight determined in 10.2.2.2 in a clean 1.5 - 2.0
    liter beaker.  Discard all sticks,  rocks,  leaves and other foreign
    material prior to weighing.
10.2.2.4  Dilute aliquot—for samples which are expected to be diffi-
    cult to extract, concentrate, or clean-up', weigh an amount of
    sample equal to one-tenth the amount determined in 10.2.2.2 into a
    second clean 1.5 - 2.0 liter beaker.  When diluted to 1.0 liter,
    this dilute aliquot will contain 0.1 percent solids.
10.2.2.5  Bring the sample aliquot(s) above to 100 - 200 mL volume with
    reagent water.
10.2.2.6 Spike 0.5 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (section
    6.3) into each sample aliquot.
10.2.2.7  Using a clean metal spatula,  break any solid portions of the
    sample into small pieces.
10.2.2.3  Place the 3/4 in. horn on the ultrasonic probe approx 1/2 in.
    below the surface of each sample aliquot and pulse at 50 percent
    for three minutes at full power.  If necessary,  remove the probe
    from the solution and break any large pieces using the metal spat-
    ula or a stirring rod and repeat the sonication.  Clean the probe
    with methylene chloride:acetone (1:1)  between samples to preclude
    cross-contamination.
10.2.2.9  Bring the sample volume to 1.0 +/~ 0.1 liter with reagent
    water.
10.2.3  Preparation of QC aliquots for samples containing low solids

                              1625C  D-160

-------
     (<30 percent).
 10.2.3.1  For each sample or sample lot  (to a maximum of 20) to be
     extracted at  the same time, place three 1.0 +/~ 0.01 liter aliquots
     of reagent water in clean  1.5 - 2.0  liter beakers.
 10.2.3.2  Spike 0.5 mL of the  labeled compound spiking solution (sec-
     tion 6.3) into one reagent water aliquot.  This aliquot will serve
     as the blank.
 10.2.3.3  Spike 1.0 mL of the precision  and recovery standard (section
     6.14) into the two remaining reagent water aliquots.
 10.2.4  Stir and equilibrate all sample  and QC solutions for 1-2
    hours.   Extract the samples and QC aliquots per section 10.3.
 10.2.5  Samples containing 30 percent solids or greater
 10.2.5.1  Mix the sample thoroughly
 10.2.5.2  Weigh 30 +/- 0.3 grams into a clean 400 - 500 mL beaker.
    Discard all sticks, rocks,  leaves and other foreign material prior
    to weighing.
 10.2.5.3  Dilute aliquot—for samples which are expected to be diffi-
    cult to extract,  concentrate, or clean-up, weigh 3 +/- 0-03
    grams into a clean 400 - 500 mL beaker.
 10.2.5.4  Spike 0.5 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (sec-
    tion 6.3) into each sample aliquot.
 10.2.5.5  QC aliquots—for each sample or sample lot (to a maximum of
    20)  to be extracted at the same time, place three 30 +/- 0-3 gram
    aliquots of the high solids reference matrix in clean 400 - 500 mL
    beakers.
10.2.5.6  Spike 0.5 mL of the labeled compound spiking solution (sec-
    tion 6.3) into one high solids reference matrix aliquot.  This ali-
    quot will serve as the blank.
10.2.5.7  Spike 1.0 mL of the precision  and recovery standard (section

                              1625C  D-161

-------
    6.14) into the two remaining high solids reference matrix aliquots.
    Extract, concentrate, and clean up the high solids samples per sec-
    tions 10.4 through 10.8.
10.3  Continuous extraction of low solids (aqueous) samples—place
    100 - 150 mL methylene chloride in each continuous extractor and
    200 - 300 mL in each distilling flask.
10.3.1  Pour the sample(s), blank, and standard aliquots into the
    extractors.  Rinse the glass containers with 50 - 100 mL methylene
    chloride and add to the respective extractors.  Include all solids
    in the extraction process.
10.3.2  Base/neutral extraction—adjust the pH of the waters in the
    extractors to 12 - 13 with 6N NaOH while monitoring with a pH
    mater.  Begin the extraction by heating the flask until the methy-
    lene chloride is boiling.   When properly adjusted, 1-2 drops of
    methylene chloride per second will fall from the condenser tip into
    the water.  Test and adjust the pH of the waters during the first
    1 - 2 hr and during the fifth to tenth hr of extraction.  Extract
    for 24 - 48 hours.
10.3.3  Remove the distilling flask, estimate and record the volume of
    extract (to the nearest 100 mL), and pour the contents through a
    drying column containing 7 to 10 cm anhydrous sodium sulfate.
    Rinse the distilling flask with 30 - 50 mL of methylene chloride
    and pour through the drying column.  Collect the solution in a 500
    mL K-D evaporator flask equipped with a 10 mL concentrator tube.
    Seal, label as the base/neutral fraction, and concentrate per sec-
    tions 10.5 to 10.6.
10.3.4  Acid extraction—adjust the pH of the waters in the extractors
    to 2 or less using 6N sulfuric acid.  Charge clean distilling
    flasks with 300 - 400 mL of methylene chloride.  Test and adjust

                              1625C   D-162

-------
    the pH of the waters during the first 1 - 2 hr and during the fifth
    to tenth hr of extraction.  Extract for 24-48 hours.  Repeat sec-
    tion 10.3.3, except label as the acid fraction.
10.4  Ultrasonic extraction of high solids samples
10.4.1  Add 60 grains of anhydrous sodium sulfate the sample and QC ali-
    quot (s) (section 10.2.5) and mix thoroughly.
10.4.2  Add 100 +/- 10 mL of acetone:methylene chloride (1:1) to the
    sample and mix thoroughly.
10.4.3  Place the 3/4 in. horn on the ultrasonic probe approx 1/2 in.
    below the surface of the solvent but above the solids layer and
    pulse at 50 percent for three minutes at full power.  If necessary,
    remove the probe from the solution and break any large pieces using
    the metal spatula or a stirring rod and repeat the sonication.
10.4.4  Decant the extracts through Whatman 41 filter paper using
    glass funnels and collect in 500 - 1000 mL graduated cylinders.
10.4.5  Repeat the extraction steps (10.4.2 - 10.4.4) twice more for
    each sample and QC aliquot.  On the final extraction,  swirl the
    sample or QC aliquot, pour into its respective glass funnel, and
    rinse with acetone:methylene chloride.  Record the total extract
    volume.
10.4.6  Pour each extract through a drying column containing 7 to 10 cm
    of anhydrous sodium sulfate.  Rinse the graduated cylinder with
    30 - 50 mL of methylene chloride and pour through the drying col-
    umn.  Collect each extract in a 500 mL K-D evaporator flask
    equipped with a 10 mL concentrator tube.  Seal and label as the
    high solids semi-volatile fraction.  Concentrate and clean up the
    samples and QC aliquots per sections 10.5 through 10.8.
10.5  Macro concentration—concentrate the extracts in separate 500 mL
    K-D flasks equipped with 10 mL concentrator tubes.

                              1625C  D-163

-------
10.5.1  Add 1 to 2 clean boiling chips to the flask and attach a three-
    ball macro Snyder column.   Prewet the column by adding approx one
    mL of methylene chloride through the top.   Place the K-D apparatus
    in a hot water bath so that the entire lower rounded surface of the
    flask is bathed with steam.  Adjust the vertical position of the
    apparatus and the water temperature as required to complete the
    concentration in 15 to 20 minutes.  At the proper rate of distilla-
    tion,  the balls of the column will actively chatter but the cham-
    bers will not flood.  When the liquid has reached an apparent vol-
    ume of 1 mL,  remove the K-D apparatus from the bath and allow the
    solvent to drain and cool for at least 10 minutes. Remove the
    Snyder column and rinse the flask and its lowers joint into the
    concentrator tube with 1 - 2 mL of methylene chloride.  A 5 mL
    syringe is recommended for this operation.
10.5.2  For performance standards (sections 8.2 and 12.7) and for
    blanks (section 8.5), combine the acid and base/neutral extracts
    for each at this point.  Oo not combine the acid and base/neutral
    extracts for aqueous samples.
10.6  Micro-concentration~Add a clean boiling chip and attach a two
    ball micro Snyder column to the concentrator tube.  Prewet the col-
    umn by adding approx 0.5 mL methylene chloride through the top.
    Place the apparatus in the hot water bath.  Adjust the vertical
    position and the watar temperature as required to complete the con-
    centration in 5 - 10 minutes.  At the proper rate of distillation,
    the balls of the column will actively chatter but the chambers will
    not flood.  When the liquid reaches an apparent volume of approx
    0.5 mL, remove the apparatus from the water bath and allow to drain
    and cool for at least 10 minutes.  Remove the micro Snyder column
    and rinse its lower joint into the concentrator tube with approx
                              1625C

-------
    0.2 mL of methylene chloride.  Adjust the final volume to 5.0 mL if
    the extract is to be cleaned up by GPC, or to 1.0 mL if it has been
    cleaned up or does not require clean-up.
10.7  Transfer the concentrated extract to a clean screw-cap vial. Seal
    the vial with a Teflon-lined lid, and mark the level on the vial.
    Label with the sample number and fraction, and store in the dark at
    -20 to -10 °C until ready for analysis.
10.3  GPC setup and calibration
10.8.1  Column packing
10.8.1.1  Place 75 +/- 5 g of SX-3 Bio-beads in a 400 - 500 mL beaker.
10.8.1.2  Cover the beads and allow to swell overnight (12 hours mini-
    mum) .
10.8.1.3  Transfer the swelled beads to the column and pump solvent
    through the column, from bottom to top, at 4.5 - 5.5 mL/min.
10.8.1.4  After purging the column with solvent for 1-2 hours, adjust
    the column head pressure to 7 - 10 psig, and purge for 4-5 hours
    to remove air from the column.  Maintain a head pressure of 7 - 10
    psig.
10.3.2  Column calibration
10.3.2.1  Load 5 mL of the corn oil solution into sample loop number
    one, and 5 mL of the phthalate/phenol solution into sample loop
    number two.
10.3.2.2  Inject the corn oil and collect approx 10 mL fractions at two
    minute intervals for 36 minutes.
10.8.2.3  Inject the phthalate/phenol mixture and collect 15 mL frac-
    tions for 60 minutes.
10.8.2.4  Determine the corn oil elution pattern gravimetrically (by
    evaporation of each fraction and weighing the residue),  or by UV,
    IR, or other technique which will detect the corn oil.

                              1625C  D-165

-------
10.8.2.5  Determine the phthalate/phenol elution pattern by GC,  GCMS,
    UV,  IR,  or other technique which will detect these compounds.
10.8.2.6  Plot a normalized chromatogram of the corn oil and phthal-
    ate/phenol mixture.
10.8.2.7  Choose the "dump time" to allow >85 percent removal of the
    corn oil and >85 percent recovery of the phthalate.
10.8.2.8  Choose the "collect time" to extend at least 10 minutes past
    the elution of the phenol.
10.8.2.9  Verify the calibration with pentachlorophenol after every 20
    extracts.  Calibration is verified if the recovery of the pentach-
    lorophenol is greater than 85 percent.  If calibration is not veri-
    fied,  the system shall be recalibrated using the corn oil and
    phthalate/phenol mixture.
10.9  Extract cleanup
10.9.1  Filter the extract or load through the filter holder to remove
    particulates.  Load the 5.0 mL extract onto the column.  The maxi-
    mum capacity of the column is 0.5 - 1.0 gram.  If necessary, split
    the extract into multiple aliquots to prevent column overload.
10.9.2  Elute the extract using the calibration data determined in
   • 10.8.2.   Collect the eluate in a clean 400 - 500 mL beaker.
10.9.3  Concentrate the cleaned up extract per section 10.5.
10.9.4  Rinse the sample loading tube thoroughly with methylene chlo-
    ride between extracts to prepare for the next sample.
10.9.5  If a particularly dirty extract is encountered, a 5.0 mL
    methylene chloride blank shall be run through the system to check
    for carry-over.
10.9.6  Reconcentrate the extract to one mL and transfer to a screw-cap
    vial per sections 10.6 and 10.7.


                              1625C  D-166

-------
11  GCMS analysis
11.1  Establish the operating conditions given in tables 5 or 6 for
    analysis of the base/neutral or acid extracts, respectively.  For
    analysis of combined extracts (section 10.5.2 and 10.9.6), use the
    operating conditions in table 5.
11.2  Bring the concentrated extract (section 10.7)  or standard (sec-
    tions 6.13 - 6.14)  to room temperature and verify that any precipi-
    tate has redissolved.  Verify the level on the extract (sections
    6.6 and 10.7)  and bring to the mark with solvent if required.
11.3  Add the internal standard solution (section 6.10) to the extract
    (use 1.0 uL of solution per 0.1 mL of extract) immediately prior to
    injection to minimize the possibility of loss by evaporation,
    adsorption, or reaction.  Mix thoroughly.
11.4  Inject a volume of the standard solution or extract such that 100
    ng of the internal standard will be injected, using on-column or
    splitless injection.  For 1 mL extracts, this volume will be 1.0
    uL.  Start the GC column initial isothermal hold upon injection.
    Start MS data collection after the solvent peak elutes.  Stop data
    collection after the benzo(ghi)perylene or pentachlorophenol peak
    elutes for the base/neutral (or semi-volatile) or acid fraction,
    respectively.   Return the column to the initial temperature for
    analysis of the next sample.

12  System and laboratory performance
12.1  At the beginning of each 8 hr shift during which analyses are
    performed, GCMS system performance and calibration are verified for
    all pollutants and labeled compounds.  For these tests, analysis of
    the 100 ug/mL calibration standard (section 6.13) shall be used to
    verify all performance criteria.  Adjustment and/or recalibration

                              1625C  D-167

-------
    (per section 7) shall be performed until all performance criteria
    are met.  Only after all performance criteria are met may samples,
    blanks, and precision and recovery standards be analyzed.
12.2  DFTPP spectrum validity—inject 1 uL of the DFTPP solution (sec-
    tion 6.11) either separately or within a few seconds of injection
    of the standard (section 12.1)  analyzed at the beginning of each
    shift.  The criteria in table 7 shall be met.
12.3  Retention times—the absolute retention time of 2,2'-difluoro-
    biphenyl shall be within the range of 1078 to 1248 seconds and the
    relative retention times of all pollutants and labeled compounds
    shall fall within the limits given in tables 5 and 6.
12.4  GC resolution—the valley height between anthracene and phenan-
    threne at m/z 178 (or the analogs at m/z 188) shall not exceed 10
    percent of the taller of the two peaks.
12.5  Calibration verification—compute the concentration of each pol-
    lutant (tables 1 and 2)  by isotope dilution (section 7.4) for those
    compounds which have labeled analogs.  Compute the concentration of
    each pollutant which has no labeled analog by the internal standard
    method (section 7.5).  Compute the concentration of the labeled
    compounds by the internal standard method.  These concentrations
    are computed based on the calibration data determined in section 7.
12.5.1  For each pollutant and labeled compound being tested, compare
    the concentration with the calibration verification limit in table
    10.  If all compounds meet the acceptance criteria, calibration has
    been verified and analysis of blanks, samples, and precision and
    recovery standards may proceed.  If, however, any compound fails,
    the measurement system is not performing properly for that com-
    pound.  In this event, prepare a fresh calibration standard or cor-
    rect the problem causing the failure and repeat the test (section

                              1625C  D-168

-------
    12.1), or recalibrate (section 7).
12.6  Multiple peaks—each compound injected shall give a single,  dis-
    tinct GC peak.
12.7  On-going precision and accuracy.
12.7.1  Analyze the extract of one of the pair of precision and recov-
    ery standards (section 10) prior to analysis of samples from the
    same lot.
12.7.2  Compute the concentration of each pollutant (tables 1 and 2) by
    isotope dilution (section 7.4) for those compounds which have
    labeled analogs.  Compute the concentration of each pollutant which
    has no labeled analog by the internal standard method (section
    7.5).  Compute the concentration of the labeled compounds by the
    internal standard method.
12.7.3  For each pollutant and labeled compound, compare the concentra-
    tion with the limits for on-going accuracy in table 10.   If all com-
    pounds meet the acceptance criteria, system performance is accept-
    able and analysis of blanks and samples may proceed.  If, however,
    any individual concentration falls outside of the range given,  sys-
    tem performance is unacceptable for that compound.
         NOTE: The large number of compounds in table 10 present a
    substantial probability that one or more will fail when all com-
    pounds are analyzed.  To determine if the extraction/concentration
    system is out of control or if the failure is caused by probabil-
    ity, proceed as follows:
12.7.3.1  Analyze the second aliquot of the pair of precision and
    recovery standards (section 10).
12.7.3.2  Compute the concentration of only those pollutants or labeled
    compounds that failed the previous test (section 12.7.3).  If these
    compounds now pass, the extraction/concentration processes are in

                              1625C  D-169

-------
    control and analysis of blanks and samples may proceed.  If, how-



    ever,  any of the same compounds fail again, the extraction/concen-



    tration processes are not being performed properly for these com-



    pounds.  In this event, correct the problem,  re-extract the sample



    lot (section 10)  and repeat the on-going precision and recovery



    test (section 12.7).



12.7.4  Add results which pass the specifications in section 12.7.3 to



    initial and previous on-going data for each compound in each mat-



    rix.  Update QC charts to form a graphic representation of conti-



    nued laboratory performance (Figure 5).   Develop a statement of



    laboratory accuracy for each pollutant and labeled compound in each



    matrix type by calculating the average percent recovery (R) and the



    standard deviation of percent recovery (sr).   Express the accuracy



    as a recovery interval from R - 2sr to R + 2sr. For example, if R =



    95% and sr = 5%,  the accuracy is 85 - 105%.







13  Qualitative determination—identification is accomplished by



    comparison of data from analysis of a sample or blank with data



    stored in the mass spectral libraries.  For compounds for which the



    relative retention times and mass spectra are known, identification



    is confirmed per sections 13.1 and 13.2.  For unidentified GC



    peaks, the spectrum is compared to spectra in the EPA/NIH mass



    spectral file per section 13.3.



13.1  Labeled compounds and pollutants having no labeled analog (tables



    1 thru 4):



13.1.1  The signals for all characteristic m/z's stored in the spectral



    library  (section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within



    the same two consecutive scans.



13.1.2  Either (1) the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the





                              1625C  D-170

-------
    corrected relative  intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall  agree within a factor of two  (0.5 to  2 times)
    for all masses stored  in the library.
13.1.3  For the compounds  for which the system has been calibrated
    (tables 1 and 2), the  retention time shall be within the windows
    specified in tables 5  and 6, or within +/- 15 scans or +/-  15 sec-
    onds (whichever  is greater) for compounds for which no window is
    specified.
13.1.4  For the compounds  for which the system has not been calibrated
    but the relative retention times and mass spectra are known (tables
    3  and 4),  the retention time relative to the 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl
    internal standard shall be within +/- 30 scans or +/- 30 seconds
    (whichever is greater)  based on the nominal retention time speci-
    fied in tables 5 and 6.
13.2  Pollutants having a  labeled analog (tables 1 and 2):
13.2.1  The signals for all characteristic m/z's stored in the spectral
    library (section 7.2.4) shall be present and shall maximize within
    the same two consecutive scans.
13.2.2  Either (1)  the background corrected EICP areas, or (2) the
    corrected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two for all masses
    stored in the spectral library.
13.2.3  The relative retention time between the pollutant and its
    labeled analog shall be within the windows specified in tables 5
    and 6.
13.3  Unidentified GC peaks
13.3.1  The signals for masses specific to a GC peak shall all maximize
    within +/~ 1 scan.
13.3.2  Either (1)  the background corrected EICP areas, or (2)  the cor-

                              1625C D-171

-------
    rected relative intensities of the mass spectral peaks at the GC
    peak maximum shall agree within a factor of two with the masses
    stored in the EPA/NIH Mass Spectral File.
13.4  M/z's present in the experimental mass spectrum that are not pre-
    sent in the reference mass spectrum shall be accounted for by con-
    taminant or background ions.  If the experimental mass spectrum is
    contaminated, or if identification is ambiguous, an experienced
    spectrometrist (section 1.4) is to determine the presence or
    absence of the compound.

14  Quantitative determination
14.1  Isotope dilution—by adding a known amount of a labeled compound
    to every sample prior to extraction, correction for recovery of the
    pollutant can be made because the pollutant and its labeled analog
    exhibit the same effects upon extraction, concentration, and gas
    chromatography.   Relative response (RR)  values for sample mixtures
    are used in conjunction with calibration curves described in sec-
    tion 7.4 to determine concentrations directly, so long as labeled
    compound spiking levels are constant.  For the phenol example given
    in figure 1 (section 7.4.1), RR would be equal to 1.114.  For this
    RR value, the phenol calibration curve given in figure 1 indicates
    a concentration of 27 ug/mL in the sample extract (Cex).
14.2  Internal standard—compute the concentration in the extract using
    the response factor determined from calibration data (section 7.5)
    and the following equation:
    Cex (ug/mL) . (As x Cis)/(Ais x RF)
    where Cex is the concentration of the compound in the extract,
    and the other terms are as defined in section 7.5.1.
14.3  The concentration of the pollutant in the solid phase of the

                              1625C  D-172

-------
    sample is computed using the concentration of the pollutant in the
    extract and the weight of the solids (section 10),  as follows:
    Concentration in solid (ug/kg)  = (Cex x Vex)/Ws
    where Cex is the extract volume in mL and Ws is the sample weight
    in kg.
14.4  If the EICP area at the quantitation m/z for any compound exceeds
    the calibration range of the system, the extract of the dilute ali-
    quot (section 10)  is analyzed by isotope dilution;  otherwise, the
    extract is diluted by a factor of 10, 9 uL of internal standard
    solution (section 6.10) are added to a 1.0 mL aliquot, and this
    diluted extract is analyzed by the internal standard method  (sec-
    tion 14.2).
14.5  For GC peaks which are to be identified (per section 13.3), the
    sample is diluted by successive factors of 10 when any peak  in the
    uncorrected mass spectrum at the GC peak maximum is saturated.
14.5  Results are reported for all pollutants, labeled compounds, and
    tentatively identified compounds found in all standards, blanks,
    and samples, in units of ug/L for aqueous samples or in ug/kg dry
    weight of solids for high solids samples  (soils, sediments,  filter
    cake, compost), to three significant figures.  Results for samples
    which have been diluted are reported at the least dilute level at
    which the area at the quantitation m/z is within the calibration
    range (section 14.4) or at which no m/z in the spectrum is satu-
    rated (section 14.S).  For compounds having a labeled analog,
    results are reported at the least dilute level at which the area at
    the quantitation m/z is within the calibration range (section 14.4)
    and the labeled compound recovery is within the normal range for
    the method  (section 15.4).


                              1625C  D-173

-------
15  Analysis of complex samples
15.1  Some samples may contain high levels (>1000 ug/L)  of the com-
    pounds of interest, interfering compounds, and/or polymeric materi-
    als.  Some samples will not concentrate to one mL (section 10.6);
    others will overload the GC column and/or mass spectrometer.
15.2  Analyze the dilute aliquot (section 10) when the sample will not
    concentrate to 1.0 mL.  If a dilute aliquot was not extracted, and
    the sample holding time (section 9.3) has not been exceeded, dilute
    an aliquot of an aqueous sample with reagent water,  or weigh a
    dilute aliquot of a high solids sample and re-extract (section 10);
    otherwise, dilute the extract (section 14.4) and analyze by the
    internal standard method (section 14.2).
15.3  Recovery of internal standard—the EICP area of the internal
    standard should be within a factor of two of the area in the shift
    standard (section 12.1).  If the absolute areas of the labeled com-
    pounds are within a factor, of two of the respective areas in the
    shift standard,  and the internal standard area is less than one-
    half of its respective area, then internal standard loss in the
    extract has occurred.   In this case, use one of the labeled com-
    pounds (preferably a polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon) to compute
    the concentration of a pollutant with no labeled analog.
15.4  Recovery of labeled compounds—in most samples, labeled compound
    recoveries will  be similar to those from reagent water or from the
    high solids reference matrix (section 12.7).  if the labeled com-
    pound recovery is outside the limits given in table  10,  the extract
    from the dilute  aliquot (section 10) is analyzed as  in section
    14.4.  If the recoveries of all labeled compounds and the internal
    standard are low (per the criteria above), then a loss in instru-
    ment sensitivity is the most likely cause.  In this  case, the 100

                              1625C   D-174

-------
    ug/mL calibration standard (section 12.1) shall be analyzed and
    calibration verified (section 12.5).  If a loss in sensitivity has
    occurred, the instrument shall be repaired, the performance speci-
    fications in section 12 shall be met,  and the extract reanalyzed.
    If a loss in instrument sensitivity has not occurred, the method
    does not work on the sample being analyzed and the result may not
    be reported for regulatory compliance purposes.

16  Method performance
16.1  Interlaboratory performance for this method is detailed in refer-
    ence 10.  Reference mass spectra, retention times, and response
    factors are from references 11 and 12.  Results of initial tests of
    this method on municipal sludge can be found in reference 13.
16.2  A chromatogram of the 100 ug/mL acid/base/neutral calibration
    standard (section 6.13) is shown in figure 6.
                              1625C  D-175

-------
References
1.  "Performance Tests for the Evaluation of Computerized Gas Chroma-
    tography/Mass Spectrometry Equipment and Laboratories" USEPA, EMSL
    Cincinnati, Ohio 45268, EPA-600/4-80-025 (April 1980).
2.  National Standard Reference Data System, "Mass Spectral Tape
    Format", US National Bureau of Standards (1979 and later attach-
    ments) .
3.  "Working with Carcinogens," DHEW, PHS,  CDC,  NIOSH, Publication
    77-206,  (Aug 1977).
4.  "OSHA Safety and Health Standards, General Industry" OSHA 2206, 29
    CFR 1910 (Jan 1976).
5.  "Safety in Academic Chemistry Laboratories," ACS Committee on Chem-
    ical Safety (1979).
6.  "Interlaboratory Validation of U. S. Environmental Protection
    Agency Method 1625A, Addendum Report",  SRI International, Prepared
    for Analysis and Evaluation Division (WH-557), USEPA, 401 M St sw,
    Washington  DC  20460 (January 1985).
7.  "Handbook of Analytical Quality Control in Water and Wastewater
    Laboratories," USEPA, EMSL, Cincinnati, OH 45268,  EPA-600/4-79-019
    (March 1979).
8.  "Standard Practice for Sampling Water," ASTM Annual Book of Stan-
    dards, ASTM, Philadelphia, PA, 76 (1980).
9.  "Methods 330.4 and 330.5 for Total Residual Chlorine," USEPA, EMSL,
    Cincinnati, OH 45268, EPA 600/4-70-020 (March 1979).
10.  "Inter-laboratory Validation of US Environmental Protection Agency
    Method 1625," USEPA, Effluent Guidelines Division, Washington, DC
    20460 (June 15, 1984).
11.  "Narrative for Episode 1036: Paragraph 4(c) Mass Spectra, Reten-
    tion Times, and Response Factors", U S Testing Co, Inc, Prepared
    for W. A. Telliard,  Industrial Technology Division (WH-552), USEPA,
    401 M St SW, Washington DC 20460  (October 1985).
12.  "Narrative for SAS 109: Analysis of Extractable Organic Pollutant
    Standards by Isotope Dilution GC/MS",  S-CUBED Division of Maxwell
    Laboratories, Inc.,  Prepared for W. A.  Telliard, Industrial Tech-
    nology Division (WH-552),  USEPA, 401 M St SW,  Washington DC 20460
    (July 1986).
13.  Colby,  Bruce N. and Ryan, Philip W.,  "Initial Evaluation of
    Methods 1634 and 1635 for the analysis of Municipal Wastewater
    Treatment Sludges by Isotope Dilution GCMS", Pacific Analytical
    Inc., Prepared for W. A. Telliard, Industrial Technology Division
    (WH-552), USEPA, 401 M St SW, Washington DC 20460 (July 1986).
                              1625C  D-176

-------
Table 1

Base/Neutral  Extractable Compounds Determined by Calibrated GCMS Using
Isotope Dilution and Internal Standard Techniques
                           Pollutant
                                              Labeled Compound
Coffloouno
acenaphthene
acenaphthylene
anthracene
benzidine
benzo(a)anthracene
b*nzo( b) f 1 uor anthene
benzo( k ) f I uoranthene
benzo(a)pyrene
b«nze(ghi )perylene
biphenyl (Appendix C)
bis(2-chloroethyO ether
bis(2-chloroethoxy)methane
bis(2-chloroisopropyl) ether
bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthatate
4-bromophenyl phenyl ether
butyl benzyl phthalate
n-C10 (Appendix C)
n-C12 (Appendix C)
n-C14 (Appendix C)
n-C16 (Appendix C)
n-C18 (Appendix C)
n-C20 (Appendix C)
n-C22 (Appendix C)
n-C24 (Appendix C)
n-C26 (Appendix C)
n-C28 (Appendix C)
n-C30 (Appendix C)
carbazole (4c)
2-chloronaphthatene
4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether
chrysene
p-eymene (Appendix C)
di benzo( a , h ) anthracene
dibenzofuran (Appendix C & 4e)
dibenzothiophene (Synfuel)
di-n-butyl phthalate
1 , 2 • di eh I orobcnzene
1 ,3-dichlorobenzene
1 , 4-diehlorobenzene
3,3'-dichlorobenzidine
diethyl phthalate
2,4-dimethylphenol
dimethyl phthalate
2,4-dinitrotoluene
2,6-dinitrotoluene
di-n-octyl phthalate
di phenyl ami ne (Appendix C)
diphenyl ether (Appendix C)
1,2-diphenylhydrazine
fluoranthene
f luorene
Storet
34205
34200
34220
39120
34526
34230
34242
34247
34521
31513
34273
34278
34283
39100
34636
34292
77427
77588
77691
77757
77804
77830
77859
77886
77901
78116
78117
77571
34581
34641
34320
77356
34556
31302
77639
39110
34536
34566
34571
34631
34336
34606
34341
34611
34626
34596
77579
77587
34346
34376
34381
CAS Registry EPA-EGD NPDES Analog
83-32-9
208-96-3
120-12-7
92-87-5
56-55-3
205-99-2
207-08-9
50-32-3
191-24-2
92-52-4
111-44-4
111-91-1
108-60-1
117-81-7
101-55-3
85-68-7
124-18-5
112-40-3
629-59-4
544-76-3
593-45-3
112-95-8
629-97-0
646-31-1
630-01-3
630-02-4
638-68-6
36-74-8
91-58-7
7005-72-3
218-01-9
99-87-6
53-70-3
132-64-9
132-65-0
84-74-2
95-50-1
541-73-1
106-46-7
91-94-1
34-66-2
105-67-9
131-11-3
121-14-2
606-20-2
117-84-0
122-39-4
101-34-3
122-66-7
206-44-0
86-73-7
001
077
078
005
072
074
075
073
079
512
018
043
042
066
041
067
517
506
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
528
020
040
076
513
082
505
504
068
025
026
027
028
070
034
071
035
036
069
507
508
037
039
080
9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
3
B
B
B
B
8
8
B
8
3





8
B
B
3
3
8
3
3
A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
001
002
003
004
005
007
009
006
008

011
010
012
013
014
015












016
017
018

019


026
020
021
022
023
024
003
025
027
023
029


030
031
032
3
3
3
3
a
B
3
3
3

3
3
3
8
3
8












8
8
9

B


3
8
3
3
3
3
A
3
3
3
B


8
3
B
d10
d8
d10
d8
d12
d12
d12
d12
d12
d10
d8
d8
d12
d4
d5
d4
d22
d26

d34

d42

dSO


d62
oB
d7
cS
d12
d14
d14
dfl
d8
d4
d4
d4
d4
d6
d4
d3
d4
d3
d3
d4
d10
dIO
d10
d10
d10
CAS Begistrv
15067-20-2
93951-97-4
1719-06-8
92890-63-6
1718-53-2
93951-98-5
93952-01-3
63466-71-7
93951-66-7
1486-01-7
93952-02-4
93966-78-0
93951-67-3
93951-87-2
93951-33-8
93951-38-3
16416-29-8
16416-30-1

15716-08-2

62369-67-9

16416-32-3


93952-07-9
38537-24-5
93951-84-9
93951-85-0
1719-03-5
93952-03-5
13250-98-1
93952-04-6
33262-29-2
93952-11-5
2199-69-1
2199-70-4
3855-82-1
93951-91-8
93952-12-6
93951-75-3
93951-89-4
93951-68-9
93951-90-7
93952-13-7
37055-51-9
93952-05-7
93951-92-9
93951-69-0
81103-79-9
EPA -SCO
201
277
278
205
272
274
275
273
279
612
213
243
242
266
241
267
617
606
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
628
220
240
276
613
282
605
604
268
225
226
227
228
270
234
271
235
236
269
607
608
237
231
080
3
3
3
3
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A
3
3
3
3
8
3
3
3
B
                               1625C  D-177

-------
hexaehIorob«nzene
hexaehlorobutadi ene
haxachlaroethane
hexachIorocyeIopcntadi en*
id*no(1,2,3-cd)pyrene
i sophoron*
naphthalene
beta-naphthylamine (Appendix
nitrobenzene
M-ni trosodimethylamine
N-ni trosodi-n-proplyamine
N-nitrosodiphenylanitn*
phtnanthren*
phenol
alpha-ptcoline  (SynfueO
pyren*
styrene  (Appendix C)
alpha-terpineol  (Appendix C)
1,2,3-trichlorotwnzene (4e)
1,2,4-trichlorobenitne
39700
34391
34396
34386
34403
34408
34696
C) 82553
34447
34438
34428
34433
34461
34694
77088
34469
77128
77493
77613
34551
118-74-1
87-68-3
67-72-1
77-47-4
193-39-5
78-59-1
91-20-3
91-59-8
98-95-3
62-75-9
621-64-7
86-30-6
85-01-8
108-95-2
109-06-8
129-00-0
100-42-5
98-55-5
87-61-6
120-82-1
009
052
012
053
083
054
055
502
056
061
063
062
081
065
503
084
510
509
529
008
3
a
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
A
8
3
3
3
3
3
033
034
036
035
037
038
039

040
041
042
043
044
010

045



046
3
a
3
3
a
a
a

a
9
*
a
a
A

a



3
13C6
13C4
13C
13C4


-------
Table 2

Acid Extractable Compounds  Determined by Calibrated GCMS Using Isotope
Dilution and Internal Standard Techniques
                              Pollutant
                                                     Labeled Compound
Comoound
4-chtoro-3-methylphenol
2-chlorophenol
2,4-dichlorophcnol
2,4-dim'trophenol
2-n»thyl-4,6-dinitroph«nol
2-nitrophtnol
4-nitroph«nol
pentach I orophenol
2,3,6-trichlorophtnol (4c)
2,4,5-triehlorophenol (4e)
2,4,6-trichloroph«nol
Storet
34452
34586
34601
34616
34657
34591
34646
39032
77688

34621
CAS Registry
59-50-7
95-57-8
120-33-2
51-28-5
534-52-1
88-75-5
100-02-7
87-86-5
933-75-5
95-95-4
38-06-2
EPA- SCO
022 A
024 A
031 A
059 A
060 A
057 A
053 A
064 A
530 A
531 A
021 A
NPOES
008 A
001 A
002 A
005 A
004 A
006 A
007 A
009 A


011 A
Analog
d2
d4
o3
d3
d2
d4
d4
13C6
d2
d2
d2
CAS Registry
93951-72-5
93951-73-6
93951-74-7
93951-77-0
93951-76-9
93951-75-1
93951-79-2
85380-74-1
93951-81-6
93951-82-7
93951-80-5
EPA -EGO
222 A
224 A
231 A
259 A
260 A
257 A
258 A
264 A
630 A
631 A
221 A
                               1625C  D-179

-------
Table 3

Base/neutral Extractable Compounds to be Determined by Reverse Search and
Quantitation using Known Retention Times, Response Factors, Reference Com-
pound, and Mass Spectra
EGD
No.
555
556
557
553
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
563
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
534
535
536
587
588
539
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
900
901
902
903
904
ComDOund
acetophenone
4-aminobiphenyl
aniline
o-anisidine
aramite
benzan throne
1, 3-benzenediol (resorcinol)
benzene thiol
2 , 3 -benzof luorene
benzyl alcohol
2 -br omochlorobenz ene
3-bromochlorobenzene
4-chloro-2-nitroaniline
5-chloro-o-toluidine
4-chloroaniline
3 -chloronitrobenzene
o-cresol
crotoxyphos
2 , 6-di-tert-butyl-p-benzoquinone
2 , 4 -diamino toluene
1, 2-dibromo-3-chloropropane
2 , 6-dichloro-4-nitroaniline
1, 3-dichloro-2-propanol
2 , 3-dichloroaniline
2 , 3-dichloronitrobenzene
1,2:3, 4-diepoxybutane
3,3' -dimethoxybenzidine
dimethyl sulfone
p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
7 , 12-dimethylbenz (a) anthracene
N , N-dimethy If ormamide
3 , 6-dimethylphenanthrene
1, 3-dinitrobenzene
dipheny Idisul fide
ethyl methanesulfonate
ethylenethiourea
ethynylestradiol 3 -methyl ether
hexachloropropene
2-isopropylnaphthalene
isosafrole
longifolene
malachite green
methapyr il ene
methyl methanesulfonate
2-methylbenzothioazole
3 -me thy Icholanthrene
4,4' -methylenebis ( 2-chloroaniline)
4 , 5-methylenephenanthrene
1-me thy If luorene
2-methylnaphthalene
CAS
Reaistrv
98-86-2
92-67-1
62-53-3
90-04-0
140-57-9
82-05-3
108-46-3
108-98-5
243-17-4
100-51-6
694-80-4
108-37-2
89-63-4
95-79-4
106-47-8
121-73-3
95-48-7
7700-17-6
719-22-2
95-80-7
96-12-8
99-30-9
96-23-1
608-27-5
3209-22-1
1464-53-5
119-90-4
67-71-0
60-11-7
57-97-6
68-12-2
1576-67-6
100-25-4
882-33-7
62-50-0
96-45-7
72-33-3
1888-71-7
2027-17-0
120-58-1
475-20-7
569-64-2
91-80-5
66-27-3
120-75-2
56-49-5
101-14-4
203-64-5
1730-37-6
91-57-6
                                1625C  D-180

-------
905   1-methylphenanthrene                  832-69-9
906   2-(methylthio)benzothiazole           120-75-2
907   1,5-naphthalenediamine               2243-62-1
908   1,4-naphthoquinone                    130-15-4
909   alpha-naphthylamine                   134-32-7
910   5-nitro-o-toluidine                    99-55-8
911   2-nitroaniline                         88-77-4
912   3-nitroaniline                         99-09-2
913   4-nitroaniline                        100-01-6
914   4-nitrobiphenyl                        92-93-3
915   N-nitrosodi-n-butylamine              924-16-3
916   N-nitrosodiethylamine                  55-18-5
917   N-nitrosomethylethylamine           10595-95-6
918   N-nitrosomethylphenylamine            614-00-6
919   N-nitrosomorpholine                    59-89-2
920   N-nitrosopiperidine                   100-75-4
921   pentachlorobenzene                    608-93-5
922   pentachloroethane                      76-01-7
923   pentamethylbenzene                    700-12-9
924   perylene                              198-55-0
925   phenacetin                             62-44-2
926   phenothiazine                        .  92-84-2
927   1-phenylnaphthalene                   605-02-7
928   2-phenylnaphthalene                   612-94-2
929   pronamide                           23950-58-5
930   pyridine                              110-86-1
931   safrole                                94-59-7
932   squalene                             7683-64-9
933   1,2,4,5-tetrachlorobenzene             95-94-3
934   thianaphthene (2,3-benzothiophene)     95-15-8
935   thioacetamide                          62-55-5
936   thioxanthone                          492-22-8
937   o-toluidine                            95-53-4
938   1,2,3-trimethoxybenzene               634-36-6
939   2,4,5-trimethylaniline                137-17-7
940   triphenylene                          217-59-4
941   tripropyleneglycol methyl ether     20324-33-8
942   1,3,5-trithiane                       291-21-4
                                1625C
                                       D-181

-------
Table 4

Acid Extractable Compounds to be Determined by Reverse Search and Quanti-
tation using Known Retention Times, Response Factors, Reference Compound,
and Mass Spectra

EGD                                        CAS
No.   Compound	   Registry
943   benzoic acid                           65-85-0
944   p-cresol                              106-44-5
945   3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile    1689-84-5
946   2,6-dichlorophenol                     87-65-0
947   hexanoic acid                         142-62-1
948   2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol              58-90-2
                                1625C   D-182

-------
Table  5
Gas Chromatography of Base/neutral  Extractable  Compounds
                                           Mini-   Method Detection
                                           nun    Limit (4)
EGO
No.
HI
164
930
261
361
585
530
603
703
917
598
610
710
916
577
589
582
562
922
557
613
713
265
365
218
318
617
717
226
326
227
327
225
325
935
564
242
342
571
263
363
555
212
312
937
919
575
256
356
566
Retention time

Mean
Comoound (see)
2,2'-difluorobiphenyl (int std)
pyridine
N-nitro«odfmethylamine-d6 (5)
N-nitrosodimethylamine (5)
N,M-diiMthylf ormonde
1,2:3,4-diepoxybutane
alpha picoline-d7
alpha picoline
N-nitrosomethylethylamine
methyl methanesulfonate
styrene-d5
styrene
N-nitrosodiethylamine
1,3-d1chtoro-2-propanol
ethyl methanesulfonate
dimethyl suUone
benzenethiol
pentach I oroethan*
aniline
p-cymerwdU
p-cymam
phenol-dS
phenol
bis<2-ehloroethyl) ether -d8
bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
n-decarwd22
n-decane
1 ,3-d1chlorobenzene-d4
1 ,3-dichlorobenzene
1 ,4-dichlorobenzene-d4
1 ,4-dichlorobenzerw
1 ,2-diehlorobenzene-d4
1 ,2-dichlorobenzene
thioacetamid*
benzyl alcohol
bis(2-chloroisopcopyl) «ther-d12
bis(2-chloroisopropyl) ether
o-cresol
N-nitrosodi-n-propyla»)in«-d14 (5)
N-ititrosodi-n-propylaaine> (5)
acetophenone
hexachloroethane- 13C
hexachloroethane
o-toluidtne
N-nitrosomorpholine
1 ,2-dibromo-3-chloropropan«
nitrobenzene-d5
nitrobenzene
3 - bromoch I orobenzene
1163
378
378
385
407
409
417
426
451
511
546
549
570
589
637
649
667
680
694
742
755
696
700
696
704
698
720
722
724
737
740
758
760
768
785
788
799
814
817
330
318
319
823
330
834
339
345
849
354
EGO
Re!
164
164
164
261
164
164
164
603
164
164
164
610
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
164
613
164
265
164
218
164
617
164
226
164
227
164
225
164
164
164
242
164
164
263
164
164
212
164
164
164
164
256
164




Relative (2)
1
.000
• 1.000
Lev-
el (3)
Lou high
solids solids
(ug/mU (ug/Vg) (ug/kg)
10

0.325
0.286
1
.006
• 0.364
• 1.028
50
50

16 27
0.350
0.352
0.326
1
.006
• 0.393
• 1.028
50
50

25 37
0.338
0.439
0
1
.450
.002
• 0.488
• 1.009
10
10

149* 17
0.490
0.506
0.548
0.558



0
1
0
0.
0.
0.
.624
.008
.584
0.995
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0


0
1

0
1

.584
.007
.585
.022
.605
.998
.601
.997
.632
.995
0.
0.
.664
.010
0.
.689
.008
0.
0.690
0.999



0.
0.
0.
0.706
1

.002
0.
574
585
597
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
• 0.
• 1.
660
675
• 0.
• 1.
700
• 0.
- 1.
703
• 0.
• 1.
714
717
721
• 0.
• 1.
734



652
023
613
010
607
016
615
038
636
008
666
009
667
008


691
016

716
023

717
001



727
007




10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10


10
10

20
20

10
10



10
10





426* 912*

2501» 757*

32 22

299* 1188*

46 26

35 20

63 16



24 39


46 47


53 55




39 28

                                 1625C  D-183

-------
565   2•bromochtorobenzene               880  164      0.757
941   tripropylerw glycol methyl ether   821  164      0.758
254   isophoror*-d8                      881  164  C.747 • 0.767    10
354   isopnororw                         889  254  0.999 • 1.017    10         8        5
942   1,3,5-trithiane                    889  164      0.764
920   N-nitrosopiperidine                895  164      0.770
234   2,4-diraethylphenol-d3              921  164  0.781 • 0.803    10
334   2,4-dinwthylphenol                 924  234  0.999 • 1.003    10        26       13
243   bis<2-chloroethoxy) methane-d6 (5) 933  164  0.792 • 0.807    10
343   bis<2-chloroethoxy) methane (5)    939  243  1.000 • 1.013    10        26       23
208   1,2.4-trichlorobenzen«-d3          955  164  0.313 • 0.830    10
308   1,2,4-trichlorobenzen*             958  208  1.000 • 1.005    10        49       24
558   o-anisidfn*                        962  164      0.327
255   naphthttene-dS                     963  164  0.319 • 0.336    10
355   naphthalene                        967  255  1.001 • 1.006    10        62       42
934   thianapthene                       971  164      0.335
609   alpha-terpineol-d3                 973  164  0.329 • 0.844    10
709   alpha-terpirwol                    975  609  0.998 • 1.008    10        nd       nd
606   n-dodecan«-d26                     953  164  0.730 • 0.908    10
706   n-dodecane                         981  606  0.986 • 1.051    10       860*    3885*
629   1,2,3-tricMorobenzen*-d3 (5)     1000  164  0.352 • 0.868    10
729   1,2,3-trichlorobenzer* (5)        1003  629  1.000 • 1.005    10       260*     164*
252   hexachlorobutadiene-13C4          1005  164  0.356 • 0.371    10
352   hexacMoroftutadiene               1006  252  0.999 • 1.002    10        46       22
918   N-nitrosomethylphenylaoine        1006  164      0.365
592   hexachloropropene                 1013  164      0.371
569   4-cMoroaniline                   1016  164      0.374
570   3-chloronitrobenzene              1018  164      0.375
915   M-nitro»odi-n-butyli»ir»          1063  164      0.914
923   pentamethylbenzene                1083  164      0.931
561   1,3-benzenediol                   1088  164      0.936
931   safrole                           1090  164      0.937
939   2,4,5-trimthytanilin*            1091  164      0.938
904   2-methylnaphthalene               1098  164      0.944
599   2-methylbenzothtazole             1099  164      0.945
568   5-chloro-o-toluidine              1101  164      0.947
938   1,2,3-tpimethoxybenzene           1128  164      0.970
933   1,2,4,5-tttrachlorotMfuerw        1141  164      0.981
253   hexachloroeyclopentadferw-13C4    1147  164  0.976 - 0.986    10
353   hexachlorocyclopentadier*         1142  253  0.999 • 1.001    10        nd       nd
594   iso»afrole (cis or trans)         1147  164      0.986
594   isosafpole (cis or trans)         1190  164      1.023
573   2,3-diehloreanUirm               1160  164      0.997
574   2,4-dianinotoluene                1187  164      1.021
220   2-chIoronaphthaI»ne-d7            1185  164  1.014 - 1.024    10
320   2-chloronaphthaler*               1200  220  0.997 • 1.007    10        30       59
518   n-tetradeeane                     1203  164      1.034        10       256     3533
612   biphenyl-d10                      1195  164  1.016 • 1.027    10
712   biphenyl                          1205  612  1.001 • 1.006    10        67       55
608   diphenyl ether-d10                1211  164  1.036 - 1.047    10
708   diphenyl ether                    1216  608  0.997 • 1.009    10        44       12
579   2,3-dichloronitrobefizene          1214  164      1.044
911   2-nitroaniline                    1218  164      1.047
908   1,4-naphthoquinone                1224  164      1.052
595   longifolene                       1225  164      1.053
277   actnaphthylene-dfl                 1265  164  1.080 - 1.095    10
377   aeenaphthylene                    1247  277  1.000 - 1.004    10        57       18
593   2-isopropylnaphthalene            1254  164      1.078

                                                   1625C   D-184

-------
S
                                                              ray!il^fitH1!M^io*4-sj 8 5  i

                           In!
                           6 o o  >
                           — •» I  H.

                           •Hi
                              * r
                              * ?
                                                        r 3 fl
                              5
                                                   I
                                          **ZZO.a.->-»3 3
                                          era D -jj -5' »o 1\» :T

                                          ' ? ? S | ft ft
                                              t8 i1* ¥
                                              a s i 3 3
                                            -• -• -• -• •< •<
• —•S-tra'rtS-S-
X rt r» »- M  3*3''—"
9"310n-t-

«~ V

Q. a


?. 2! 2
rt »*
11
O O r* O
                             «« •> -jj  a. a. o. •
                             *  ^~ 5  -"•-*• n n
a. a • •
•*• •*• • o
                                                                                                                o o
                                                                                                                -4l -4h
                                                                                                                c c
                                                                                   as-
                                                                                             a
rj w M o. a. isj _*


T * * 1* 1 f V
a. Q. a. « « a.a


i i I i ^ 5 a
rt rt •     •— rt
1 1 ff "D "D O 1
o o C  !r !r i o
                                                                                                                  &   I
                                                                                                                      i i
                                                                                                         •O M • 3 0
                                                                                                           r» n — 3
                                                                                                           • » rt l>


                                                                                                             i s
                                                i
                       UI UI UI UI
                       UI (VJ |«J -»
                       _» KJ -» *^
                                                          ~ s s
                                            £.
                                               a
                                                o to o to o **
                                            -_ -p«-Of*fv)«J

                                            NIVI^*O*OO0OOB
                    00

                    Ln   -. IM
                        o o
                                   o o o o o o o
                                                                           --
                                                            oooooooooo
                                                                                                            ss^^-.-.cs-.^s^^aa
                                                                                    o -• o -*
                                                                                    ouiorj
                                                                                    •>j ut 
-------
721
907
902
90S
268
368
928
586
597
926
239
339
572
936
234
384
205
305
522
559
559
583
563
623
723
932
267
367
276
376
901
272
372
581
228
328
940
560
266
366
524
591
269
369
525
534
274
374
275
375
924
273
373
626
726
596
900
083
n-eicosane
1 , 5 • naphtha I enedi ami ne
4 , 5 -nwthy lcnephenanthr«n«
1 -methyl phenanth pen*
di-n-butyt phthalat*-d4
di-n-butyt phthalat*
2-phenylnaphthalen*
3,6-di(n*thylph*nartthren«
mtthapyrf Lena
phenothiazin*
fluoranth*n«-d10
fluoranthen*
crotoxyphos
thioxanthorw
pyrerwdIO
pyren*
benzidine-dfl
benzidin*
n-doco$an«
aranitt
arami tt
p- di imthy I affli noazobenzen*
2,3-b*nzofluoren«
n- tetracosanc-dSO
n- tetraco»an«
squalerw
butylbtnzyl phthalatfd* (5)
butylbtnzyl phthalatt (5)
chrys*n«-d12
chryserw
4,4'methyl*n«bis<2-chloroanilin«>
b*nzo< a ) anthracene- d1 2
benzo< a ) anthracene
3,3' -dimthoxybcnzidirw
3,3' -diehlorobenztdine-^
3,3' •dichlorobenzidin*
triphenylerw
benzanthren*
bis<2-«thylh*xyl) phth«late-d4
bis(2-«thylh«xyl) phthalat*.
n-h«xaco«an«
ethynyiestradiol 3-fMthyl ether
di-n-octyl phthalata-d4
di-n-octyl phthalat*
n-octacosan*
7, 12-dim*thylb*nzanthr»c*rw
benzo(b)f Iuoranthen*-d12
benzo
-------
282  dibenzo(a,h)anthraeene-d14 (5)   2649  164  2.107 - 2.445  20
382  dibenzo(a,h)anthracen« (5)     2660  282  1.000 • ,1.007  20      49    125
279  benzo(ghi)p«rylen«-d12        2741  i64  2.187 • 2.524  20
379  b*nzo(ghi)p«rylene          2750  279  1.001 • 1.006  20      44    nd

 (1)  Reference numbers beginning with 0,  1, 5, or 9 indicate a pollutant
quantified by the internal  standard method; reference  numbers beginning
with 2  or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by  the  internal standard
method;  reference numbers beginning with 3  or 7 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified  by isotope dilution.
 (2)  Single values in this  column are based on single  laboratory data.
 (3)  This is a minimum level at which the analytical system shall give
recognizable mass spectra  (background corrected) and acceptable calibration
points.   The concentration  in  the aqueous or solid phase is determined
using the equations in section 14.
 (4)  Method detection limits determined in digested sludge (low solids) and
in  filter cake or compost  (high solids).
 (5)  Specification derived  from related compound.
 (6)  Detected as azobenzene
 (7)  Detected as diphenylamine
nd  - not detected when spiked  into the sludge tested
*Background levels of these compounds were present in  the  sludge tested,
resulting in higher than expected MDL's.   The MDL for  these compounds is
expected to be approximately 50 ug/kg with no interferences present.

Column:  30 +/- 2 m x 0.25 +/-  0.02 mm i.d.  94% methyl, 4%  phenyl, 1% vinyl
bonded phase fused silica capillary
Temperature program: 5 min  at  30 °C;  30 - 280 °C at 8  °C per min; iso-
thermal  at 280 °C until benzo(ghi)perylene elutes
Gas velocity:  30 +/- 5 cm/sec  at-30 °C
                               1625C  D-187

-------
Table 6

Gas chromatography of Acid Extractable
Compounds
 Mini-  Method Detection
 nun   Limit (4)	
ECO
No.
in
164
224
324
947
944
257
357
231
331
943
946
222
322
221
321
631
731
530
259
359
258
358
948
260
360
945
264
364
Retention time

Mean
Comoound (sec)
2,2'-difluorobiphenyl (int std)
2-chlorophenol -64
2-chlorophenol
hexanoic acid
p-cresol
2-ni trophenol -d4
2-nitrophenol
2,4-dichlorophenel-d3
2,4-dichlorophenol
benzoic acid
2,6-dichlorophenol
4-chloro-3-methylphenol-d2
4-chloro-3-methylphenol
2,4,6-trichlorophenol-d2
2.4,6-trichlorophenol
2,4,5-trichlorophenol-d2 (5)
2,4,5-trichlorophenol
2,3,6-trichlorophenol
2,4-dinitrophenel-o3
2,4-dini trophenol
4-ni trophenol -d4
4-nitrophenol
2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
2-methyl -4,6-dini trophenol -d2
2-Mthyl -4,6-dfnf trophenol
3,5-dibrc*o-4-hydroxybenxonitrile
pentachlorophenol- 13C6
pentach lorophenol
1163
701
705
746
834
898
900
944
947
971
981
1086
1091
1162
1165
1167
1170
1195
1323
1325
1349
1354
1371
1433
1435
1481
1559
1561
EGO
Ref
164
164
224
164
164
164
257
164
231
164
164
164
222
164
221
164
631
164
164
259
164
258
164
164
260
164
164
264



Relative
1
0
0


0
0
0
0


0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
.000
.587
.997
0.
0.
.761
.994
.802
.997
0.
0.
.930
.998
.994
.998
.998
.998
1.
.127
.000
.147
0.997

1
1

1
1.
.216
.000
1.
.320
0.998
• 1
- 0
• 1
641
717
• 0
• 1
• 0
• 1
835
844
• 0
- 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
028
• 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
179
• 1
• 1
273
• 1
• 1

Level
(3)
(?) (ug/ml)
.000
.618
.010


.783
.009
.322
.006


.943
.003
.005
.004
.009
.004

.149
.005
.175
.006

.249
.002

.363
.002
10
10
10


20
20
10
10


10
10
10
10
10
10
10
50
SO
50
50

20
20

50
50
low
solids
(ug/kg)


18



39

24



41
46


32
58

565

287


385


51
high
solids
(U9/lt9


10



44

116



62
111


55
37

642

11


83


207
(1)  Reference numbers beginning with 0, 1, 5, or 9  indicate a pollutant
quantified by the internal standard method; reference  numbers beginning
with 2 or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by  the  internal standard
method; reference numbers beginning with 3 or 7  indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by isotope dilution.
(2)  Single values in this column are based on single  laboratory data
(3)  This is a minimum level at which the analytical system shall give
recognizable mass spectra (background corrected) and acceptable calibration
points.  The concentration in the aqueous or solid phase is determined
using the equations in section 14.
(4)  Method detection limits determined in digested  sludge (low solids)  and
in filter cake or compost (high solids).
*Background levels of these compounds were present in  the  sludge resulting
in higher than expected MDL's.  The MOL for these compounds is expected to
be approximately 50 ug/kg with no interferences  present.
(5)  Specification derived from related compound.

Column: 30 +/- 2 m x 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm i.d. 94% methyl, 4%  phenyl,  1% vinyl
bonded phase fused silica capillary
Temperature program: 5 min at 30 °C; 30 - 250 °C or until  pentachlorophenol
elutes

                              1625C  D-188

-------
Gas velocity: 30 +/- 5 cm/sec at  30  °C
                              1625C  D-189

-------
Table 7

DFTPP Mass-intensity Specifications*

Mass    Intensity required	
 51     8-82 percent of m/z 198
 68     less than 2 percent of m/z 69
 69     11 - 91 percent of m/z 198
 70     less than 2 percent of m/z 69
127     32 - 59 percent of m/z 198
197     less than 1 percent of m/z 198
198     base peak, 100 percent abundance
199     4-9 percent of m/z 198
275     11 - 30 percent of m/z 198
441     44 - 110 percent of m/z 442
442     30 - 86 percent of m/z 198
443     14 - 24 percent of m/z 442

^Reference 6
                              1625C  D-190

-------
Table 8

Base/neutral Extractable Compound Characteristic m/z's  and Response
Factors

                                 Labeled      Primary       Response
Compound	   analog      m/z	       Factor  U
acenaphthene                        dlO       154/164
acenaphthylene                      d8        152/160
acetophenone                                  105*             0.79
4-aminobiphenyl                               169              0.81
aniline                                         93              1.04
o-anisidine                                   108              0.43
anthracene                          dlO       178/188
aramite                                       185              0.19
benzanthrone                                  230              0.15
1,3-benzenediol                               110              0.78
benzenethiol                                  110              0.18
benzidine                           d8        184/192
benzo(a)anthracene                  d!2       228/240
benzo(b)fluoranthene                dl2       252/264
benzo(k)fluoranthene                d!2       252/264
benzo(a)pyrene                      d!2       252/264
benzo(ghi)perylene                  d!2       276/288
2,3-benzofluorene                             216              0.35
benzoic acid                                  105              0.16
benzyl alcohol                                  79              0.47
biphenyl                            dlO       154/164
bis(2-chloroethyl) ether            d8          93/101
iis(2-chloroethoxy)methane          d8          93/97
bis(2-chloroisopropyl) ether        dl2       121/131
bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate         d4        149/153
2-bromochlorobenzene                          111              0.33
3-bromochlorobenzene                          192              0.40
4-bromophenyl phenyl ether          d5        248/255
butyl benzyl phthalate              d4        149/153
n-CIO                               d22         55/66
n-C12                               d26         55/66
n-C14                                           55
n-C16                               d34         55/66
n-C18                                           55
n-C20                               d42         55/66
n-C22                                           55
n-C24                               d50         55/66
n-C26                                           55
n-C28                                           55
n-C30                               d62         55/66
carbazole                           d8        167/175
4-chloro-2-nitroaniline                       172              0.20
5-chloro-o-toluidine                          106              0.50
4-chloroaniline                               127              0.73
2-chloronaphthalene                 d7        162/169
3-chloronitrobenzene                          157              0.18
4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether         d5        204/209
3-chloropropionitrile                           54              0.42
chrysene                            d!2       228/240
o-cresol                                      108              0.59
crotoxyphos                                   127              0.017

                              1625C  D-191

-------
p-cymene                            dl4
2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-benzoquinone
di-n-butyl phthalate                d4
2,4-diaminotoluene
dibenzo(a,h)anthracene              d!4
dibenzofuran                        da
dibenzothiophene                    d8
1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane
2,6-dichloro-4-nitroaniline
1,3-dichloro-2-propanol
2,3-dichloroaniline
1,2-dichlorobenzene                 d4
1,3-dichlorobenzene                 d4
1,4-dichlorobenzene                 d4
3,3'-dichlorobenzidine              d6
2,2'-difluorobiphenyl (int std)
2,3-dichloronitrobenzene
1,2:3,4-diepoxybutane
diethyl phthalate                   d4
3,3'-dimethoxybenzidine
dimethyl phthalate                  d4
dimethyl sulfone
p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
7,12-dimethylbenz(a)anthracene
N,N-dimethylfonnamide
3,6-dimethylphenanthrene
2,4-dimethylphenol                  d3
1,3-dinitrobenzene
2,4-dinitrotoluene                  d3
2,6-dinitrotoluene                  d3
di-n-octyl phthalate                d4
diphenylamine                       dlO
diphenyl ether                      dlO
diphenyldisulfide
1,2-diphenylhydrazine (2)           dlO
ethyl methanesulfonate
ethylenethiourea
ethynylestradiol 3-methyl ether
fluoranthene                        dlO
fluorene                            dlO
hexachlorobenzene                 13C6
hexachlorobutadiene               13C4
hexachloroethane                  13C
hexachlorocyclopentadiene         13C4
hexachloropropene
indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene
isophorone                          d8
2-isopropyInaphthalene
isosafrole
longifolene
malachite green
methapyrilene
methyl methanesulfonate
2-methylbenzothiazole
3-methylcholanthrene
4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
4,5-methylenephenanthrene
1-methylfluorene
119/130
220
149/153
122
278/292
168/176
184/192
157
124
 79
161
146/152
146/152
146/152
252/258
190
191
 55
149/153
244
163/167
 79
120
256
 73
206
122/125
168
165/168
165/167
149/153
169/179
170/180
218
 77/82
109
102
227
202/212
166/176
284/292
225/231
201/204
237/241
213
276
 82/88
170
162
161
330
 97
 80
149
268
231
190
180
0.078

0.059
0.22
0.019
0.68
0.47
0.11
0.27

0.19

0.40
0.23
0.58
0.51
0.72

0.24
0.25

0.28
0.22
0.28
0.23
0.32
0.33
0.14

0.43
0.20
0.59
0.59
0.21
0.44
0.37
                              1625C  D-192

-------
2-methylnaphthalene                           142
1-methylphenanthrene                          192
2-(methylthio)benzothiazole                   181
naphthalene                         d8        128/136
1,5-naphthalenediamine                        158
1,4-naphthoquinone                            158
alpha-naphthylamine                           143
beta-naphthylamine                  d7        143/150
5-nitro-o-toluidine                           152
2-nitroaniline                                138
3-nitroaniline                                138
4-nitroaniline                                138
nitrobenzene                        d5        128/128
4-nitrobiphenyl                               199
N-nitrosodi-n-butylamine                       84
N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine           dl4        70/78
N-nitrosodiethylamine                         102
N-nitrosodimethylamine              d6         74/80
N-nitrosodiphenylamine (3)          d6        169/175
N-nitrosomethylethylamine                      88
N-nitrosomethylphenylamine                    106
N-nitrosomorpholine                            56
N-nitrosopiperidine                           114
pentachlorobenzene                            248
pentachloroethane                             117
pentamethylbenzene                            148
perylene                                      252
phenacetin                                    108
phenanthrene                        dio       178/188
phenol                              d5         94/71
phenothiazine                                 199
1-phenylnaphthalene                           204
2-phenylnaphthalene                           204
alpha-picoline                      d7         93/100
pronamide                                     173
pyrene                              dlO       202/212
pyridine                                       79
safrole                                       162
squalene                                       69
styrene                             d5        104/109
alpha-terpineol                     d3         59/62
1,2,4,5-tetrachlorobenzene                    216
thianaphthene                                 134
thioacetamide                                  75
thioxanthone                                  212
o-toluidine                                   106
1,2,3-trichlorobenzene              d3        180/183
1,2,4-trichlorobenzene              d3        180/183
1,2,3-trimethoxybenzene                       168
2,4,5-trimethylaniline                        120
triphenylene                                  228
tripropylene glycol methyl ether               59
1,3,5-trithiane                               138

(1)  referenced to 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl
(2)  detected as azobenzene
(3)  detected as diphenylamine
0.99
0.65
0.42

0.085
0.021
0.89

0.31
0.39
0.27
0.11

0.35
0.47

0.45
0.33
0.024
0.49
0.41
0.25
0.20
0.42
0.30
0.38
0.15
0.48
0.73

0.31
0.
0.
68
45
0.042
0.43
1.52
0.28
0.23
1.04
0.48
0.28
1.32
0.092
0.15
                              1625C  D-193

-------
Table 9

Acid Extractable Compound Characteristic m/z's
Compound
benzoic acid
4-chloro-3-methylphenol
2-chlorophenol
p-cresol
3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile
2,4-dichlorophenol
2,6-dichlorophenol
2,4-dinitrophenol
hexanoic acid
2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol
2-nitrophenol
4-nitrophenol
pentachlorophenol
2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
2,3,6-trichlorophenol
2,4,5-trichlorophenol
2,4,6-trichlorophenol
Labeled
 analog

   d2
   d4
   d3

   d3

   d2
   d4
   d4
   d2
   d2
   d2
Primary m/z
  105
  107/109
  128/132
  108
  277
  162/167
  162
  184/187
   60
  198/200
  139/143
  139/143
  266/272
  232
  196/200
  196/200
  196/200
Response
Factor
  0.16


  0.61
  0.12

  0.42

  0.62
                            0.17
(1)  referenced to 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl
                              1625C  D-194

-------
Table 10
Acceptance Criteria for Performance Tests
                                   Acceptance criteria
EGD
No.
( 1 ) Comnound
301 acenaphthene
201 acenaphthene-dlO
377 acenaphthylene
277 acenaphthylene-d8
378 anthracene
278 anthracene-dlO
305 benzidine
205 benzidine-d8
372 benzo( a) anthracene
272 benzo(a) anthracene-d!2
374 benzo(b) fluoranthene
274 benzo(b) fluoranthene-d!2
375 benz o ( k ) f luor anthene
275 benzo(k) fluoranthene-d!2
373 benzo(a)pyrene
273 benzo(a)pyrene-d!2
379 benzo(ghi)perylene
279 benzo(ghi)perylene-d!2
712 biphenyl (Appendix C)
612 biphenyl-dlO
318 bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
218 bis(2-chloroethyl) ether-d8
343 bis (2-chloroethoxy ) methane
Initial
precision
and accuracy
Section 8.2.3
rucr/IO
labeled
compound
recovery
Sec 8.3
and 14.2
s X P (%)
21
38
38
31
41
49
119
269
20
41
183
168
26
114
26
24
21
45
41
43
34
33
27
243 bis ( 2-chloroethoxy )methane-d8 (3) 33
342 bis (2-chloroisopropyl) ether
242 bis (2-chloroisopropyl) ether-d!2
366 bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate
266 bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate-d4
341 4-bromophenyl phenyl ether
241 4-bromophenylphenyl ether-d5(3)
367 butyl benzyl phthalate
267 butyl benzyl phthalate-d4 (3)
717 n-ClO (Appendix C)
617 n-C10-d22
706 n-C12 (Appendix C)
606 n-C12-d26
518 n-C14 (Appendix C) (3)
719 n-C16 (Appendix C)
619 n-C16-d34
520 n-C18 (Appendix C) (3)
721 n-C20 (Appendix C)
621 n-C20-d42
522 n-C22 (Appendix C) (3)
723 n-C24 (Appendix C)
623 n-C24-d50
524 n-C26 (Appendix C) (3)
525 n-C28 (Appendix C) (3)
17
27
31
29
44
52
31
29
51
70
74
53
109
33
46
39
59
34
31
11
28
35
35
79
38
69
39
58
31
16
ns
65
25
32
11
59
15
62
35
72
29
75
28
55
29
43
29
81
35
69
32
44
40
19
32
24
ns
35
ns
ns
30
37
42
53
34
45
80
27
35
35
-
-
-
-
—
-
-
(2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
—
134
147
186
146
174
194
518
ns
168
298
545
577
143
514
195
181
160
268
148
165
196
196
153
196
138
149
220
205
140
161
233
205
195
298
369
331
ns
162
162
131
263
172
152
139
211
193
193

20

23

14

ns

12

ns

ns

21

14

ns

15

15

20

18

19

18

ns

ns


18


19


15



- 270

- 239

- 419

ns

- 605

- ns

ns

- 290

- 529

- ns

- 372

- 372

- 260

- 364

- 325

- 364

ns

- ns


- 308


- 306


- 376


calibra-
tion
verifi-
cation
Sec 12.5
(ua/mL)
80
71
60
66
60
58
34
ns
70
28
61
14
13
13
78
12
69
13
58
52
61
52
44
52
67
44
76
43
52
57
22
43
42
44
60
41
37
72
54
40
54
62
40
65
50
26
26
-
—
—
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
-
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
—
-
-
—
—
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
—
125
141
166
152
168
171
296
ns
142
357
164
ns
ns
ns
129
ns
145
ns
171
192
164
194
228
194
148
229
131
232
193
175
450
232
235
227
166
242
268
138
186
249
184
162
249
154
199
392
392
On-going
accuracy
Sec 12.7
R (ua/L)
72
30
61
33
50
23
11
ns
62
22
20
ns
53
ns
59
32
58
25
62
17
50
25
39
25
77
30
64
28
35
29
35
28
19
ns
29
ns
ns
71
28
35
46
29
39
78
25
31
31
- 144
- 180
- 207
- 168
- 199
- 242
- 672
ns
- 176
- 329
- ns
ns
- 155
- 685
- 206
- 194
- 168
- 303
- 176
- 267
- 213
- 222
- 166
- 222
- 145
- 169
- 232
- 224
- 172
- 212
- 170
- 224
- 237
- 504
- 424
- 408
ns
- 181
- 202
- 167
- 301
- 198
- 195
- 142
- 229
- 212
- 212
                              1625C  D-195

-------
726 n-C30 (Appendix C)
626 n-C30-d62
728 carbazole (4c)
628 carbazole-d8 (3)
320 2-chloronaphthalene
220 2-chloronaphthalene-d7
322 4-chloro-3-methyIphenol
222 4-chloro-3-methylphenol-d2
324 2-chlorophenol
224 2-chlorophenol-d4
340 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether
240 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether-d5
376 chrysene
276 chrysene-d!2
713 p-cymene (Appendix C)
613 p-cymene-d!4
332 dibenzo(a,h)anthracene
282 dibenzo(a,h)anthracene-d!4 (3)
705 dibenzofuran (Appendix C)
605 dibenzofuran-d8
704 dibenzothiophene (Synfuel)
604 dibenzothiophene-d8
368 di-n-butyl phthalate
268 di-n-butyl phthalate-d4
325 1,2-dichlorobenzene
225 l,2-dichlorobenzene-d4
326 1,3-dichlorobenzene
226 l,3-dichlorobenzene-d4
327 1,4-dichlorobenzene
227 l,4-dichlorobenzene-d4
328 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine
228 3,3'-dichlorobenz idine-d6
331 2,4-dichlorophenol
231 2,4-dichlorophenol-d3
370 diethyl phthalate
270 diethyl phthalate-d4
334 2,4-dimethyIphenol
234 2,4-diaethyIphenol-d3
371 dimethyl phthalate
271 dimethyl phthalate-d4
359 2,4-dinitrophenol
259 2,4-dinitrophenol-d3
335 2,4-dinitrotoluene
235 2,4-dinitrotoluene-d3
336 2,6-dinitrotoluene
236 2,6-dinitrotoluene-d3
369 di-n-octyl phthalate
269 di-n-octyl phthalate-d4
707 diphenylamine  (Appendix C)
607 diphenylamine-dlO
708 diphenyl ether  (Appendix C)
608 diphenyl ether-dlO
337 1,2-diphenylhydrazine
237 1,2-diphenylhydrazine-dlO
339 fluoranthene
239 fluoranthene-dio
380 fluorene
280 fluorene-dlO
32
41
38
31
100
41
37
111
13
24
42
52
51
69
18
67
55
45
20
31
31
31
15
23
17
35
43
48
42
48
26
80
12
28
44
78
13
22
36
108
18
66
18
37
30
59
16
46
45
42
19
37
73
35
33
35
29
43
61 -
27 -
36 -
48 -
46 -
30 -
76 -
30 -
79 -
36 -
75 -
40 -
59 -
33 -
76 -
ns -
23 -
29 -
85 -
47 -
79 -
48 -
76 -
23 -
73 -
14 -
63 -
13 -
61 -
15 -
68 -
ns -
85 -
38 -
75 -
ns -
62 -
15 -
74 -
ns -
72 -
22 -
75 -
22 -
80 -
44 -
77 -
12 -
58 -
27 -
82 -
36 -
49 -
31 -
71 -
36 -
81 -
51 -
200
242
165
130
357
168
131
174
135
162
166
161
186
219
140
359
299
268
136
136
150
130
165
195
146
212
201
203
194
193
174
562
131
164
196
260
153
228
188
640
134
308
158
245
141
184
161
383
205
206
136
155
308
173
177
161
132
131
13
29
15
ns
23
19
13
ns
14
28
29
13
ns
ns
ns
ns
24
ns
ns
ns
ns
10
17
ns
11
19
17

20

27
- 479
- 215
- 324
- 613
- 255
- 325
- 512
ns
- 529
- 220
- 215
- 346
- 494
- 550
- 474
- ns
- 260
ns
- 449
- ns
- ns
- 514
- 442
- ns
- 488
- 281
- 316

- 278

- 238
66 -
24 -
44 -
69 -
58 -
72 -
85 -
68 -
78 -
55 -
71 -
57 -
70 -
24 -
79 -
66 -
13 -
13 -
73 -
66 -
72 -
69 -
71 -
52 -
74 -
61 -
65 -
52 -
62 -
65 -
77 -
18 -
67 -
64 -
74 -
47 -
67 -
58 -
73 -
50 -
75 -
39 -
79 -
53 -
55 -
36 -
71 -
21 -
57 -
59 -
83 -
77 -
75 -
58 -
67 -
47 -
74 -
61 -
152
423
227
145
171
139
115
147
129
180
142
175
142
411
127
152
761
ns
136
150
140
145
142
192
135
164
154
192
161
153
130
558
149
157
135
211
150
172
137
201
133
256
127
187
183
278
140
467
176
169
120
129
134
174
149
215
135
164
56
23
31
40
35
24
62
14
76
33
63
29
48
23
72
ns
19
25
79
39
70
40
74
22
70
11
55
ns
53
11
64
ns
83
34
65
ns
60
14
67
ns
68
17
72
19
70
31
74
10
51
21
77
29
40
26
64
30
70
38
- 215
- 274
- 188
- 156
- 442
- 204
- 159
- 314
- 138
- 176
- 194
- 212
- 221
- 290
- 147
- 468
- 340
- 303
- 146
- 160
- 168
- 156
- 169
- 209
- 152
- 247
- 225
- 260
- 219
- 245
- 185
ns
-135
- 182
- 222
ns
- 156
- 242
- 207
ns
- 141
- 378
- 164
- 275
- 159
- 250
- 166
- 433
- 231
- 249
- 144
- 186
- 360
- 200
- 194
-•187
- 151
- 172
                              1625C  D-196

-------
309 hexachlorobenzene
209 hexachlorobenzene-13C6
352 hexachlorobutadiene
252 hexachlorobutadiene-13C4
312 hexachloroethane
212 hexachloroethane-13Cl
353 hexachlorocyclopentadiene
253 hexachlorocyclopentadiene-13C4
083 ideno(l,2,3-cd)pyrene (3)
354 isophorone
254 isophorone-d8
360 2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol
260 2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol-d2
355 naphthalene
255 naphthalene-dS
702 beta-naphthylamine (Appendix C)
602 beta-naphthylamine-d7
356 nitrobenzene
256 nitrobenzene-d5
357 2-nitrophenol
257 2-nitrophenol-d4
358 4-nitrophenol
258 4-nitrophenol-d4
361 N-nitrosodimethylamine
261 N-nitrosodimethylamine-d6 (3)
363 N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine
263 N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine (3)
362 N-nitrosodiphenylamine
262 N-nitrosodiphenylamine-d6
364 pentachlorophenol
264 pentachlorophenol-13C6
381 phenanthrene
281 phenanthrene-dlO
365 phenol
265 phenol-d5
703 alpha-picoline (Synfuel)
603 alpha-picoline-d7
384 pyrene
284 pyrene-dlO
710 styrene (Appendix C)
610 styrene-d5
709 alpha-terpineol (Appendix C)
609 alpha-terpineol-d3
729 i,2,3-trichlorobenzene  (4c)
629 l,2,3-trichlorobenzene-d3 (3)
308 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene
208 l,2,4-trichlorobenzene-d3
530 2,3,6-trichlorophenol (4c)  (3)
731 2,4,5-trichlorophenol (4c)
631 2,4,5-trichlorophenol-d2  (3)
321 2,4,6-trichlorophenol
221 2,4,6-trichlorophenol-d2

(1)  Reference numbers beginning with 0, 1 or 5 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by the internal standard method; reference numbers beginning with 2
or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by the internal standard
method; reference numbers beginning with 3 or 7 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by isotope dilution.
16
81
56
63
227
77
15
60
55
25
23
19
64
20
39
49
33
25
28
15
23
42
138
49
33
45
37
45
37
21
49
13
40
36
161
38
138
19
29
42
49
44
48
69
57
19
57
30
30
47
57
47
90
36
51
ns
21
ns
69
ns
23
76
49
77
36
80
28
10
ns
69
18
78
41
62
14
10
ns
65
54
65
54
76
37
93
45
77
21
59
11
76
32
53
ns
42
22
15
15
82
15
58
58
43
59
43
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
124
228
251
316
ns
400
144
ns
299
156
133
133
247
139
157
ns
ns
161
265
140
145
146
398
ns
ns
142
126
142
126
140
212
119
130
127
210
149
380
152
176
221
281
234
292
229
212
136
212
137
137
183
205
183

13

ns

ns

ns


33

16

14

ns

ns

27

ns

ns

26

26

18

24

ns

ns

18

ns

ns

ns

ns


21

21

- 595

ns

ns

ns


- 193

- 527

- 305

- ns

ns

- 217

ns

ns

- 256

- 256

- 412

- 241

ns

ns

- 303

- ns

- 672

- 592

- 592


- 363

- 363
78
33
74
68
71
47
77
47
13
70
52
69
56
73
71
39
44
85
46
77
61
55
35
39
44
63
59
63
59
77
42
75
67
65
48
60
31
76
43
65
44
54
20
60
61
78
61
56
56
69
81
69
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
128
265
135
148
141
212
129
211
761
142
194
145
177
137
141
256
230
115
219
129
163
183
287
256
230
148
170
148
170
130
237
133
149
155
208
165
324
132
210
153
223
186
502
167
163
128
163
180
180
144
123
144
85
23
43
ns
13
ns
67
ns
19
70
44
72
28
75
22
ns
ns
65
15
75
37
51
ns
ns
ns
53
40
53
40
71
29
87
34
62
ns
50
ns
72
28
48
ns
38
18
11
10
77
10
51
51
34
48
34
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
132
321
287
413
ns
563
148
ns
340
168
147
142
307
149
192
ns
ns
169
314
145
158
175
ns
ns
ns
173
166
173
166
150
254
126
168
154
ns
174
608
159
196
244
348
258
339
297
282
144
282
153
153
226
244
226
                              1625C D-197

-------
(2)   ns  = no specification:  limit  is outside the range  that can be measured
reliably.
(3)   This compound  is to be  determined  by  internal  standard; specification
is  derived  from related compound.
       10-
    ui
    K
    IU
    > 1.0-
      0.1-
                          I	I	I    I
             2        10   20   90   100 200
                  CONCENTRATION (ug/mU
                                                              <3A)

                                                              AREA -48100
                                                                            AREA -4780
                                                              (3Q

                                                              AREA. 49800
                     AREA .43600
                                                                            AREA-48300
    FIGURE 1  Relative Response Calibration Curve
    for  Phenol. The Dotted Lines Enclose  a ± 10
    Percent Error Window.
FIGURE 3  Extracted Ion Current Profiles for (3A)
Unlabeled  Compound, (38) Labeled Compound,
and (3C) Equal Mixture of Unlabeled and Labeled
Compounds.
                               FIGURE 2  Extracted Ion  Current  Profiles  for
                               Chromatographically Resolved Labeled (m^z) and
                               Unlabeled (mjz) Pairs.
                                      1625C   D_198

-------
 [10.2.1  &
 10.2.3]
 [10.2.1.3 &
 10.2.3.2]
 [10.2.3.3]
 [10.2.4]
                    STANDARD
        1 L REAGENT
          WATER
                         BLANK
        SPIKE 500 uL
        OF 200 ug/mL
         ISOTOPES
 [10.3 &
 10.3.2]
 [10.3.4]
 [10.5]
 [10.6]
    111.31
    [11.41
        SPIKE 1.0 mL
       OF STANDARDS
         STIR AND
        EQUILIBRATE
1 L REAGENT
WATER
«!
s
SPIKE 500 uL
OF 200 ug/mL
ISOTOPES
\
t
STIR AND
EQUILIBRATE
                         SAMPLE
                       1 L ALIQUOT
                       SPIKE 500 uL
                       Of 200 pg/mL
                        ISOTOPES
                        STIR AND
                       EQUILIBRATE
                 STANDARDOR BLANK
       EXTRACT BASE/
         NEUTRAL
                      EXTRACT BASE/
                        NEUTRAL
              ORGANIC   I    AQUEOUS
                                ORGANIC
                                                          AQUEOUS
               EXTRACT ACID
CONCENTRATE
  TO 2-4 mL
CONCENTRATE
  TO 2-4 mL
        CONCENTRATE
          TO 1.0 mL
                                             EXTRACT ACID
               CONCENTRATE
                 TO 1.0 mL
        ADD INTERNAL
         STANDARD
CONCENTRATE
  TOLOmL
               ADD INTERNAL
                 STANDARD
           INJECT
ADO INTERNAL
  STANDARD
                                             INJECT
                                                            INJECT
FIGURE 4  Flow Chart for Extraction/Concentration of Precision and Recovery Standard, Blank,
and Sample by Method 1629. Numbers In Brackets [ ] Refer to Section Numbers in the Metnod.

                        1625C   D-199

-------




MWM
1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1
, ANTHRACENE-OW
> * * *
•






      K

      2*000
               123456789   10
                            ANALYSIS NUMBER
      O
      3
    ui ui   1.10-
    II
    C X   0-M
                              ANTHRACENE
                   I    I    I    I    I    I    I    I    I
              an  an  an  an  as a/2  aa aa SM   ass
                             DATE ANALYZED
                                                         + 3»


                                                         -3»
   FIGURE 5  Quality Control Charts Showing Area (top graph) and
   Relative Response of Anthracene to Anthracene-d10 (lower graph)
   Plotted as a Function of Time or Analysis Number.
»IC                     0»T(N aWIOtlCC II      SCCMC   1 TO
H-lSs* Jl24tW            Cm.li iMMIOUiC II
»4»LEl W.C.UO.MIN.W.C.NMW.NM
COOS.: IS25«.».».»• »3t,*-2MM.I3tMi.3«^f
MWCl C  1.33W UHLt H  :. J.t MM *  2. 2.» J « IMSt U 2t. 3
                   I
                     ,
                   ISlW
                                                             MM     SCW
                                                             47:3*    TII«
FIGURE  6  Chromatogram of  Combined  Acid/base/neutral Standard.
                   1625C   D-200

-------
Appendix A:  Mass Spectra  in  the  Form of Mass/Intensity Lists
555
m/z
42
61
75
105
acetophenone
int. m/z
21 43
13
36
1000
62
76
106
int.
245
26
62
87
m/z
49
63
77
120
int.
19
422
941
479
m/z
50
65
78
121
int.
221
31
11
38
m/z
51
73
89

int.
524
13
12

m/z
52
74
91

int.
75
64
22

556 4-aminobiphenyl
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 51    55     63    65
139    65    141   132

557 aniline
m/z  int.
 72    82
167   163
m/z  int.
 83    73
168   280
/z int.
40 65
51
63
91
47
59
10
m/z
41
52
64
92
int.
66
54
33
136
m/z
42
53
65
93
int.
16
12
226
1000
m/z
46
54
66
94
int.
11
40
461
73
IDZ2. .
47
61
74

int.
75
17
11

m/z
50
62
78

int.
40
28
14

558 o-anisidine
m/z
40
53
65
80
108
int.
22
286
142
915
1000
m/z
41
54
66
81
109
int.
43
39
20
41
55
m/z
42
61
76
92
122
int.
10
12
13
47
123
m/z
50
62
77
93
844
int.
60
25
36
14
124
m/z
51
63
68
94
56
int.
106
43
32
18

m/z
52
64
79
105

int.
202
24
25
18

559 aramite
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   606     57   758
 77   155     91   339
163   143    175   182
319   270    334   137

560 benzanthrone
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 74    69     75    71
101   278    150    58
202   762    203   126

561 1,3-benzenediol
m/z
59
105
185
int.
328
153
1000
m/z
63
107
187
int.
782
239
328
m/z
65
121
191
int.
235
107
346
m/z
74
123
197
int.
113
120
191
m/z
87
174
230
int.
97
67
1000
m/z
88
199
231
int.
160
63
177
m/z
99
200

int.
69
350

m/z
100
201

int.
215
236

m/z
40
51
62
71
111
int.
64
54
27
16
51
m/z
41
52
63
81

int.
19
29
74
201

m/z
52
53
64
32

int.
42
184
61
251

m/z
43
54
65
95

int.
36
89
13
13

m/z
49
55
68
109

int.
11
97
56
11

m/z
50
61
69
110

int.
43
15
119
1000

m/z
51
73
89
m/z
85
169
m/z
47
61
74
m/z
51
63
68
94
56
m/z
65
121
191
m/z
99
200
m/z
49
55
68
109
int.
524
13
12
int.
163
1000
int.
75
17
11
int.
106
43
32
18

int.
235
107
346
int.
69
350
int.
11
97
56
11
562 benzenethiol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 45   128     50   149     51   205     65   175      66    505
 77   161     84   259    109   316    110   1000    111    102
m/z  int.
115   142
170   216
                                       m/z  int.
                                        69   114
                                1625C  D-201

-------
563 2,3-benzofluorene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.
 74    52     81    69     94   143     95    253     106     60     107   205
108   491    187    75    189    90    213    233     214     60     215   987
216  1000    217   166

943 benzoic acid
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.
 45    29     50   221     51   413     52    45      66     11      74    53
 75    25     76    81     77   778     78    76     105   1000     122   868

564 benzyl alcohol
m/z
40
61
75
89
108
int.
17
11
13
65
737
m/z
59
62
76
90
109
int.
16
31
18
64
43
m/z
50
63
77
91

int.
155
70
565
125

m/z
51
64
78
105

int.
319
12
116
38

m/z
52
65
79
106

int.
78
75
1000
18

m/z
53
74
80
107

int.
84
35
73
523

565 2-bromochlorobenzene
m/z.  int.    2L/2.  int.    m/£   int.
 49   237     50   890      51    183
 76   202    111   961    113    287

566 3-bromochlorobenzene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 49   201     50   834      51    174
 76   197    111  1000    113    301

567 4-chloro-2-nitroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 49   119     50   174      51    260
 63  1000     64   315      65    192
 76   127     78   152      90    724
126   766    128   234    142    211

568 5-chloro-o-toluidine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 50   115     51   261      52    257
 79   140     89   152    106   1000
143   313

569 4-chloroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 41    60     62    55      63    147
 91    63     92   186      99     67
129   292

570 3-chloronitrobenzene
m/2L  int.    m/z  int.    i/i   int.
 50   619     51   189      73    144
 85   101     99   258    111    851

571 o-cresol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 50   102     51   181      53    144
 89   114     90   231    107    783
m/z.  int.
 73   158
190   638
m/z  int.
 73   169
190   625
m/z  int.
 53   137
140   599
m/z  int.
 64   135
100   115
     int.
 74   330
113   266
m/z  int.
 77   358
108  1000
m/z
 74
192
m/z
 74
192
                   int.
                    506
                    809
                   int.
                    509
                    802
                                                                  m/z
                                                                   75
                                                                  194
                                                                  m/z
                                                                   75
                                                                  194
                   int.
                   1000
                    193
                   int.
                    914
                    191
m/z
52
73
91
172
int.
531
290
253
915
m/z
61
74
101
174
int.
205
105
232
289
m/z
62
75
114

int.
394
156
312

m/z
 77
141
                                                          int.
                                                          420
                                                          964
             m/z
              78
             142
                                int.
                                 134
                                 265
m/z  int.
 65   329
127  1000
m/z  int.
 75  1000
157   424
m/z  int.
 79   380
                                                                  m/z   int.
                                                                   73     51
                                                                  128     81
                                                                 m/z   int.
                                                                   76    169
                                                                 159    137
                                                                 m/z   int.
                                                                  80    159
                                1625C  D-202

-------
944 p-cresol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50   136     51   224     52   106     53   196
 80   145     90   122    107   822    108  1000
572 crotoxyphos
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 40   633     44   448     67    42
105   484    109   21     127  1000

573 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-benzoquinone
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 51   392     53   586     55   325
 77   376     79   308     91   456
135   538    136   240    149   429
220   410

574 2,4-diaminotoluene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 40    70     42    55     51    76
 67    50     77   147     78    69
105   134    106    67    121   958

575 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane
             m/z  int.
              77   420
             m/z  int.
              79   308
                          m/z   int.
                          104   100
                          194   20
m/z
57
95
163
int.
668
322
292
m/z
65
107
177
int.
416
248
1000
m/z
67
121
205
int.
927
255
203
m/z  int.
 52    70
 93    63
122  1000
m/z
 53
 94
123
int.
  51
 224
  79
m/z  int.
 61    91
104   128
m/z
42
77
106
159
int.
38
331
17
204
m/z
59
81
119
187
int.
341
43
74
10
m/z
51
93
121

int.
104
117
66

m/z
61
95
155

int.
38
106
635

m/z
75
97
157

int.
1000
12
784

m/z
76
105
158

int.
75
67
20

m/z
62
97
178
int.
328
458
134
m/z
63
124
206
int.
588
954
378
m/z
73
126

int.
470
401

945 3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 53   148     61   193     62   222     88   632    117   137    168    152
170   141    275   489    277  1000    279   451

576 2,6-dichloro-4-nitroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   206     52  1000     61   523
 65   137     89   218     90   443
133   218    160   401    176   431

577 l,3-dichloro-2-propanol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 40    14     42    55     43   503
 49   113     50    15     51    37
 78    11     79  1000     80    25

578 2,3-dichloroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z
 52   138     61   151     62   265     63   455     64   142      65
 73   130     90   460     99   202    125   108    126   149    161
163   626    165   101
m/z
44
57
81
int.
22
10
310
m/z
47
61

int.
12
12

m/z
58
75

int.
15
14

                               int.
                                105
                               1000
                                1625C  D-203

-------
 579  2,3-dichloronitrobenzene
 m/z   int.
  49    220
  74    976
 110    204
 161    190
m/z  int.
 50   257
 75   743
111   303
163   121
 946  2,6-dichlorophenol
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
  49    111      62    160
 126    260    162   1000
m/z  int.
 61   150
 84   351
133   701
191   411
             m/z  int.
              63   714
             164   613
 580  l,2:3,4-diepoxybutane
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  40    37      41     29      42     83
  57    155      58     16      85     13

 581  3,3'-dimethoxybenz idine
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  65    44      79   222      85     69
 122    115    158   154     186    144
 245    152

 582 dimethyl sulfone
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  44    10      45    94      46     29
  63    69      64    22      65     19
  96    23

 583 p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  42   483      51   181      77    447
 104   142    105   190     120   1000

 584 7,12-dimethylbenzo(a)anthracene
m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
 101    24    112    34     113    112
 125    46    126    81     127     60
 237    23    239   313     240    230
 252    68    253    33     255     84

 585 N,N-dimethylformamide
m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  40    58      41    79      42    497
  57    17      58    83      72     89

586 3,6-dimethyIphenanthrene
m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  76   113      89   129      94    179
 190   193    191   430     205    246

 587 1,3-dinitrobenzene
m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
  50   1000      51   131      63    228
 76   664      92   240     122    166
m/z  int.
 62   120
 85   166
135   435
193   263
             m/z  int.
              73   132
             166   101
                          m/z  int.
                           43    60
                          m/z  int.
                           93    84
                          201   552
                          m/z  int.
                           47    18
                           79  1000
                          m/z  int.
                           78   120
                          148   160
                          m/z  int.
                          114    38
                          128    76
                          241   433
                          256  1000
                          m/z  int.
                           43   115
                           73   994
                          m/z  int.
                          101   142
                          206  1000
                          m/z  int.
                           64   218
                          168   399
m/z  int.
 63   173
 86   125
145   580
             m/z  int.
              98   293
                          m/z  int.
                           55  1000
                          m/z  int.
                          107    46
                          229   162
                          m/z  int.
                           48    69
                           81    36
                          m/z  int.
                           79   147
                          225   676
                          m/z  int.
                          119   212
                          215    24
                          242    61
                          257   180
                          m/z  int.
                           44  1000
                           74    35
                          m/z  int.
                          102   151
                          207   159
                          m/z  int.
                           74   311
m/z  int.
 73   336
109  1000
147   368
             m/z  int.
              99   117
                          m/z  int.
                           56    67
                          m/z  int.
                          115   110
                          244  1000
                          m/z
                           62
                           94
                          m/z
                           91
                          m/z
                          120
                          226
                          250
                          m/z
                           45
                          m/z
                          189
                  int.
                    14
                   528
                  int.
                   109
                  int.
                   296
                    47
                    32
                  int.
                    19
                  int.
                   388
                          m/z  int.
                           75   623
                                1625C  D-204

-------
588 diphenyldisulfide
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  i,nt.
 50   153     51   293     65   671
110   132    154   191    185   117

589 ethyl methanesulfonate
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 42    16     43    72     45   208
 64    22     65    93     79  1000
 97   206    109   579    111    18

590 ethylenethiourea
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41    46     42   126     45    97
 73   151    102  1000

591 ethynylestradiol 3-methyl ether
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   155     53   101     91   157
160   115    173   199    174   313
310   516 '

592 hexachloropropene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 47   131     71   333    106   334
141   206    143   196    211   631

947 hexanoic acid
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   627     42   535     43   214
 56    90     57   102     60  1000
 73   412     74    56     87    98

593 2-isopropylnaphthalene
 m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 51   100     63   111     76   157
128   216    152   133    153   184
170   368

594 isosafrole
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50   110     51   222     63   127
104   441    131   371    132   107

595 longifolene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 53   438     55   719     65   346
 91  1000     93   611     94   546
119   394    133   338    161   568

596 malachite green
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
118   113    126   313    165   369
237   158    253  1000    254   160
m/z  int.
 46    42
m/z  int.
115   143
227  1000
m/z  int.
108   200
213  1000
m/z  int.
 45   186
 61    66
 m/z  int.
 77   129
154   114
m/z  int.
 77   277
135   129
m/z  int.
 67   453
 95   404
204   172
m/z  int.
208   135
329   189
             m/z  int.
              77   141
             m/z  int.
              59    19
              81    42
             124    33
m/z  int.
 59    14
m/z  int.
147   226
228   149
m/z  int.
117   329
215   623
m/z  int.
 46    19
 69    21
 m/z  int.
115   147
155  1000
m/z  int.
 78   208
161   250
m/z  int.
 77   566
105   614
m/z  int.
209   233
330   775
             m/z
             109
                  int.
              63    23
              96    16
m/z  int.
 72    89
m/z  int.
159   132
242   153
m/z  int.
119   320
217   186
m/z  int.
 55   128
 70    20
 m/z  int.
127   131
156   139
m/z  int.
103   355
162  1000
m/z  int.
 69   713
107   475
m/z  int.
210   181
331   170
                                 1625C D-205

-------
597 methapyriline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 42    72     45    47     53    40      58   1000
 78    54     79    48     97   516    190     40

598 methyl methanesulfonate
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 45   178     56    15     48   108      50     26
 65   285     78    27     79   821      80   1000
 95   137    109    59    110    60

599 2-methylbenzothiozole
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 45   152     50   133     58   153      62    106
 82   204    108   392    109   102    148    279

900 3-methylcholanthrene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
113    58 '   119    55    125    83    126    305
134   160    250    56    252   322    253    271
266    50    267   192    268   1000    269    185

901 4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 77   190     84   107     98   299    104    133
195   352    229   228    231   1000    233    227
267   144    268   358
902 4,5-methylenephenanthrene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50    50     62    55     63    95
 87    60     94   255     95   659
189   900    190  1000

903 1-methylfluorene
m/z
 71
191
 133
  67
m/z  int.
 63    35
 81    44
m/z
 63
149
m/z
132
263
m/z
115
265
int.
 309
1000
int.
  99
  59
int.
 226
 171
m/z
50
76
139
166
181
intT
66
196
54
136
99
m/z
51
83
151
176

int.
87
135
73
96

m/z
62
87
152
177

int.
57
53
124
52

m/z
63
88
163
178

int.
137
78
57
202

m/z
74
89
164
179

int.
64
203
58
182

m/z
75
90
165
180

int.
85
58
1000
686

904 2-methylnaphthalene
m/z
50
65
76
114
141
int.
29
19
14
13
748
m/z
51
69
77
115
142
int.
39
56
15
303
1000
m/z
57
70
36
116
143
int.
28
25
13
25
105
m/z
58
71
87
126

int.
47
126
18
13

SL/s
62
74
89
139

int.
26
25
42
98

m/z
63
75
113
140

int.
65
23
19
24

905 1-methylphenanthrene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 51    54     63    86     70    62
 96   132    163    55    165   217
193   152
m/z
74
163
m/z
63
88
163
178
m/z
58
71
87
126
m/z
74
189
int.
69
80
int.
137
78
57
202
int.
47
126
18
13
int.
51
165
m/z  int.
 81   145
187   213
m/z
 81
191
int.
  52
 532
m/z  int.
 72   225
        m/z  int.
         64    48
         82    33
m/z
 69
150
m/z
133
265
m/z
140
266
        m/z
         86
        188
int.
 513
 110
int.
 122
 106
int.
 316
 631
     int.
       53
      137
m/z
 83
192
int.
 164
1000
                                1625C  D-206

-------
       m/z  int.
        69   578
       181  1000
       m/z  int.
        79    111
       157    89
       m/z  int.
        66    69
       103    52
m/z  int.
 82   233
m/z  int.
103    86
158  1000
m/z  int.
 74   189
104   550
m/z  int.
108   627
m/z  int.
118    52
159   117
m/z  int.
 75   205
130   433
m/z
57
72
142
int.
36
104
53
m/z
59
89
143
int.
46
62
1000
m/z
62
113
144
int.
28
22
101
m/z
63
114

int.
59
34

906 2-(raethylthio)benzothiazole
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 45   790     50   212     63   383
136   239    148   938    180   250

907 1,5-naphthalenediamine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 51    48     65    83     77    75
130   262    131    40    141    43

908 1,4-naphthoquinone
m/z  int.    ro/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50   445     51    62     52    52
 76   590    101    51    102   613
158  1000    159   100

909 alpha-naphthylamine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50    25     51    31
 65    27     71    58
115   401    116   212

910 5-nitro-o-toluidine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z  int.
 51   194     52   159     53   121      77    766      78    176      79   619
 94   168    104   120    106   691    152   1000

911 2-nitroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41    64     50    51
 63   181     64   155
 92   566    108   170

912 3-nitroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z
 41   101     52   120     53    59      62     58      63    143      64
 65  1000     66   114     80   169      91     62      92    764      93
108    87    138   717    139    51

913 4-nitroaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.     m/z
 52   228     53   160     62   110      63    216      64    164      65
 66   124     80   266     92   300    108    636     138    520

914 4-nitrobiphenyl
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/g   int.     m/z   ijlt_._
 51   131     63   104     76   179    115    134     141    277
152   902    153   284    169   374    199   1000     200    125

915 N-nitroso-di-n-butylamine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.     m/z   int.
 41  1000     42   536     43   570      44    313      55    129
 57   994     84   985     86   103      99    197     115    158
158   161
m/z
51
65
138
int.
89
960
1000
m/z
52
66
139
int.
207
96
63
m/z
53
80

int.
74
212

m/z
62
91

int.
58
86

                                      int.
                                       121
                                        62
                                      int.
                                      1000
                                 m/z
                                  56
                                 116
                  int.
                   167
                   237
1625C  D-207

-------
916 N-nitrosodiethylamine
m/2  int.    m/2  int.    m/2
 41   170     42   079     43
 56   525     57   492     70
102   807    103    35
917 N-nitrosomethylethylamine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 40   117     42  1000     43   667
 57    99     59    13     71    60

918 N-nitrosomethylphenylamine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50   181     51   434     52   104
 79   331    104   147    106   673

919 N-nitrosomorpholine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   181     42   192     43    52
 56  1000     57    49     85    13

920 N-nitrosopiperidine
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41   320     42  1000     43    43
 54    58     55   444     56   224
 83    28     84    47    114   491

921 pentachlorobenzene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 73   160    108   239    125   102
217   106    248   648    250  1000
922 pentachloroethane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 47   203     60   398
 95   165    117  1000
165   716    167   901
923 pentamethylbenzene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  irjt.
 51   126     53    84     63     61
 91   218    105   128    115    120
147    60    148   420

924 perylene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 74    33    111    43    112     70
126   243    224    49    248     75
252  1000    253   219

925 phenacetin
m/z  int..    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 43   443     51    33     52    112
 65    47     79    31     80    179
110    50    137   461    138     40
m/z  int.
 44  1000
 71    28
m/z  int.
 44    26
 73    57
m/z  int.
 63   110
107   220
m/z  int.
 44    17
 86   333
m/2  int.
 51    14
 57    17
115    26
m/z  int.
178   102
252   642
m/2  int.
 45    20
 85    25
m/z  int.
 54    17
 88   772
m/z  int.
 77  1000
212   137
m/z  int.
 54    85
 87    14
m/z  int.
 52    12
 67    21
m/z  int.
213   179
254   199
m/2  int.
 65    99
117    91
m/z  int.
113   111
249    52
m/z  int.
 53   164
 31   154
179   672
m/z  int.
 77   145
133  1000
m/z  int.
124   132
250   284
m/z  int.
 63    39
108  1000
180    64
m/z  int.
 54    18
 87    31
m/z  int.
 56   189
 89    20
m/z  int.
 78   194
m/z  int.
 55    95
116   337
m/z  int.
 53    32
 82    26
m/2  int.
215   218
m/z
62
119
169
int.
119
979
422
m/z
83
121

int.
378
306

m/z
85
130

int.
218
293

m/z
94
132

int.
114
272

m/z
 79
134
m/2
125
251
int.
  64
 105
int.
 251
  36
m/2  int.
 64    30
109   196
                                 1625C  D-208

-------
 926 phenothiazine
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 50   145      51    120
 166   240    167    607

 927 1-phenylnaphthalene
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 50   132      51    156
 87   101      88    183
 200   144    201    136

 928 2-phenyInaphthalene
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 51   108      63    101
 102   188    202    398

 929 pronamide
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 41   270      66    109
 145   334    147    198
 256   102    257    122

 930 pyridine
 m/z   int.    m/z   int.
 40    45      48    11
 53   112      54    12
 78   151      79   1000
931 safrole
m/z  int.
 50   132
104   477
163   109
m/z  int.
 51   369
105   130
932 squalene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 53    62     55    94
 79    43     81   465
109    47    121    46
             m/z   int.
               63    134
             198    186
             m/z   int.
               63    148
               89    162
             202    643
             m/z  int.
              76   136
             203   270
             m/z  int.
              74   112
             173  1000
             m/z  int.
              49    62
              55    16
              80   101
m/z  int.
 63   108
131   437
             m/z  int.
              67   105
              82    52
             137    41
933 1,2,4,5-tetrachlorobenzene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 47   125     49   176     61    127
 84   197    108   284    109    231
181   224    214   791    216   1000

948 2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 61   234     65   167     66    105
 97   107    131   463    133    270
196   164    230   793    232   1000

934 thianaphthene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.
 45    80     50    91     51    65
 69   139     74    55     89    191
135   104    136    52
             m/z  int.
              69    190
             199  1000
             m/z  int.
              74   124
             100   155
             203  1000
             m/z  int.
              88   133
             204  1000
             m/z  int.
              75   137
             175   615
             m/z
              50
              75
              81
m/z
 77
132
             m/z
              68
              93
     int.
      324
       21
       58
int.
 391
 166
     int.
      119
       70
        100
        200
                   int.
                    128
                    143
                          m/z  int.
                           72   183
                          143   194
                          218   482
             m/z  int.
              75   142
             101   527
             204   999
             m/z  int.
              89   158
             205   157
             m/z  int.
              84   194
             254   133
        m/z  int.
         51   414
         76    19
m/z  int.
 78   228
161   298
        m/z  int.
         69  1000
         95   104
                          m/z  int.
                           73   332
                          145   117
                          220   101
             m/z  int.
             154    149
                     m/z  int.
                      76   136
                     102   111
                     205   159
                     m/z  int.
                     101   333
                     m/z  int.
                     109   186
                     255   211
             m/z  int.
              52   879
              77    22
m/z  int.
103   348
162  1000
             m/z
              70
             107
                          m/z
                           74
                          179
     int.
       57
       43
                          int.
                           448
                           237
m/z
83
166
234
int.
134
298
471
m/z
84
168

int.
178
273

m/z
96
194

int.
202
168

                          m/z  int.
                           62    82
                           90   136
                          m/z  int.
                           63   162
                          108    82
                          m/2  int.
                           67    78
                          134  1000
                                1625C  D-209

-------
935 thioacetamide
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z  int.     ro/z  int,.
 40   225     42   485     43    44      46     18      57    36      58    93
 59   165     60   437     75   1000      76     25      77    43

936 thioxanthone
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z   int.    m/z   int.     m/z  int.     m/z  int.
 50   262     63   180     69    320      74    116      69   176      82   121
 92   188    108   129    139    385    152    227     183   112     184   951
185   137    212  1000    213    145
937 o-toluidine
m/z int. m/z
40 51 41
52
65
78
104
164
59
113
45
53
66
79
106
int.
38
192
24
243
1000
                          m/z   int.
                           42    35
                           53    86
                                 19
 74
 80
107
                                 80
                                 90
938 1,2,3-trimethoxybenzene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 50   257     51   459     52   139
 67   114     77   246     79   132
107   190    108   144    110   898

939 2,4,5-trimethylaniline
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 41    80     52    58     51    63
 79    62     91   167     93    51
120  1000    121    87    134   670

940 triphenylene
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 74    52     87    55    100   107
114   181    200    67    202    56
227   132    228  1000    229   184

941 tripropylene glycol methyl ether
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.
 45   492     46    15     47    19
 59  1000     60    34     71    16
103    57    117    92    161    21

942 1,3,5-trithiane
m/z  int.    m/z  int.    m/z  int.,
 46  1000     47    150    48    98
 73   102     91    92     92   111
m/z  int.
 49    10
 62    26
 65    14
 89   107
             m/z  int.
              53   276
              82   117
             125   578
             m/z  int.
              53    66
             117    54
             135   978
             m/z  int.
             101   108
             224    84
             m/z  int.
              55    17
              72    44
             m/z  int.
              59    93
             110    58
m/z  int.
 50    88
 63    68
 76    21
 90    76
             m/z  int.
              63   112
              93   483
             153   759
             m/z  int.
              65   150
             118    65
             136    99
             m/z  int.
             112   131
             225    56
             m/z   int.
              57     68
              73    363
             m/z   int.
               60     76
             138    259
m/z  int.
 51   169
 64    30
 77   313
 91    52
             m/z   int.
              65   341
              95   801
             168   1000
             m/z   int.
              67    74
             119    93
             m/z   int.
             113    244
             226    313
             m/z   int.
               58     43
               74     232
             m/z   int.
               64    136
                                 1625C  D-210

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 613M
     D-211

-------
                                                                                       instrumental chemistry
                                                                    	         _     trace analysis
  United States Testing Company, Inc.         |       l^^l  analyticalchemistr*
                                                                   9       M/S*? lilB  methods development
  Metals and Environmental Chemistry Division                  | .      f (g^ Jig  chemical
                                                                                       quality control
  1419 PARK AVENUE                                                 flBESfiBRS&HRBiaSB  failure analyse
  HOSOKEN. NEW JERSEY O7O3O (2O1) 792-24OO (212) 943-O488                     '                    "
                                                          August 22, 1986  RUG 2 5 1986
                     Sample Control Center
                    300 North Lee Street
                    Alexandria, VA 22314

                    Attention:  Jim King

                    Reference: Episodes  1055, 1082, and 1084

                    Jim,

                    Enclosed please find the results of analysis for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
                    and Total Tetra, Penta, Hexa and Hepta Dioxins and Furans for
                    the above referenced  episodes which include samples 15045, 15097,
                    and 15099.

                    The following masses  were used for identification and quantitation:

                               Compounds or Class             Masses

                             Total Tetra Dioxin                  320,322
                             Total Tetra Furan                   304,306
                             Total Penta Dioxin                  354,356
                             Total Penta Furan                   338,340

                             Total Hexa  Dioxin                   390,392
                             Total Hexa  Furan                    374,376
                             Total Hepta Dioxin                  424,426
                             Total Hepta Furan                   408,410
                           * Total Octa Dioxin                   458,460

                             2,3,7,8-TCDD                       320, 322, 257
                             2,3,7,8-TCDD Internal Std.           332, 334
                             2,3,7,8-TCDD Surrogate             328
                             OCDD Internal std.                  472

                   * Octa Dioxins and Furans are no longer required  but we  have
                   included this data  for your information.
                                              D-212
OUR REPORTS AND LETTERS ARE FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF THE CLIENT TO WHOM THEY ARE ADDRESSED. AND THEY AND THE NAME OF THE UNITED STATES TESTING
COMPANY. INC. OR ITS SEALS OR INSIGNIA. ARE NOT TO BE USED UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES IN ADVERTISING 1O THE GENERAL PUBLIC AND MAT NOT BE USED IN
ANY OTHER MANNER WITHOUT OUR PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL. SAMPLES NOT DESTROYED IN TESTING ARE RETAINED A MAXIMUM OF THIRTY DAYS
                           A Memoer of the SGS Group (Societe Generate ae Surveil'ance)

-------
United States Testing Company, Inc.
                A sample was considered positive for a given isomer class only
                if both of the characteristic ions were present within two scans
                of each other.

                Detection limits were calculated using the following formula:


                         DL = (M.  + MJ xI-S x 2.5
                              (M^TMp x RF x V

                         M. = Peak Height of Noise for First Characteristic Mass
                              of Anaiyte
                         M- = Peak Height of Noise for Second Characteristic Mass
                              of Anaiyte
                         IS = ng Internal Standard
                         M, = Peak Height of First Characteristic Mass of
                              Internal Standard
                         M^ = Peak Height of Second Characteristic Mass of
                             Internal Standard
                         RF = Response Factor
                         V = Volume of Sample Extracted (liters)

                The response factor for TCDD was taken from the  initial calibration
                of the instrument used for the analyses.  Response  factors for TCDF,
                PCDD, PCDF, HxCDD and HxCDF were calculated by analyzing a mixed
                standard of one isomer from each class and determining the ratio of the
                response of the anaiyte to the response of 1,2,3,4-TCDD. This ratio was
                then applied to the known response factor of 2,3,7,8-TCDD (it was assumed
                that 2,3,7,8-TDCC and 1,2,3,*-TCDD have the same response) relative to
                the internal standard, and a response factor  of each anaiyte relative to the
                internal standard was determined.

                Response factors for HpCDD, HpCDF and OCDD were determined by
                analysis of a  mixed standard containing each of the analytes  and OCDD
                internal standard.

                All samples were subjected to the  carbopak/celite clean-up described
                in the CLP TCDD procedure.

                If you have any questions feel free to call.

                                                    Sincerely,

                                                    UNITED STATES TESTING CO., INC.
                                                    Jane M. Dunn
                                                    Manager
                                                    Environmental Chemistry

               3MD/sm                  D-213

-------
  136
Federal  Register / Vol. 49, No. 209 /  Friday,  October 26, 1984  /  Rules and  Regulations
 Method 813—2J.73-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-
 Dioxin

 ;. Scope and Application
   1.1  This method coven the determination
 of 2.3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (2.3.7.8-
 TCDD). The following parameter may be
 determined by this method:
PvWMf
2 3 7,8-TCOO 	

STORE!
NO.
34*75

GAS No.
174S-01-6

   1.2  This is a gas chromatographic/mass
 spectrometer (GC/MS) method applicable to
 the determination of 2.3,7,8-TCDD in
 municipal and industrial discharges as
 provided under 40 CFR 138.1. Method 825
 may be used to screen samples for 2.3,7.8-
 TCDD. When the screening test is positive,
 the final qualitative confirmation and
 quantification mlust be made using Method
 813.
   1.3  The method detection limit (MDL,
 defined in Section 14.1)' for 2,3.7,8-TCDD is
 listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific
 wastewater may be different from that listed.
 depending upon the nature of interferences in
 the sample matrix.
   1.4  Because of the extreme toxicity of this
 compound, the analyst must prevent
 exposure to himself, of to others, by materials
 knows or believed to contain 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
 Section 4 of this method contains guidelines
 and protocols that serve as minimum safe-
 handling standards in a limited-access
 laboratory.
   1.5  Any modification  of this method,
 beyond those expressly permitted, shall be
 considered as a major modification subject to
 application and approval of alternate test
 procedures under 40 CFR 138.4 and 136.5.
   1.8  This method is restricted to use by or
 under the supervision of analysts
 experienced in the use of a gas
 chromatograph/maas spectrometer and in the
 interpretation of mass spectra. Each analyst
 must demonstrate the ability to generate
 acceptable results with this method using the
 procedure described in Section 8-2.

 2. Summary of Method
   2.1  A measured volume of sample.
 approximately 1-L. is spiked with an internal
 standard of labeled 2J.7.8-TCDD and
 extracted with methylene chloride using a
 separatory funnel The methylene chloride
 extract is exchanged to hexane during
 concentration to a volume of 1.0 mi or less.
 The extract is then analyzed by capillary
 column GC/MS to separate and measure
 2.3,7,8-TCDD."
   2.2  The method provides selected column
 chromatographic cleanup proceudres to aid in
 the elimination of interferences that may be
 encountered.

3. Interferences
  3.1  Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents,
glassware, and other sample processing
hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/
or elevated backgrounds at the masses (m/z)
monitored. All of these materials must be
routinely demonstrated to be free from
                               interferences under the conditions of the
                               analysis by running laboratory reagent
                               blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
                                 3.1.1  Glassware must be scrupulously
                               cleaned.' Clean all glassware as soon as
                               possible after use by rinsing with the last
                               solvent used in it. Solvent nnsing should be
                               followed by detergent washing with hot
                               water, and rinses with tap water and distilled
                               water. The glassware should then be drained
                               dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 'C
                               for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable
                               materials, such as PCBs. may not be
                               eliminated by the treatment. Solvent rinses
                               with acetone and pesticide quality hexane
                               may be substituted for the muffle furnace
                               heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents
                               usually eliminates PCB interference.
                               Volumetric ware should not be heated in a
                               muffle furnace. After drying and cooling.
                               glassware should be sealed and stored in a
                               dean environment to prevent any
                               accumulation of dust or other contaminants.
                               Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.
                                 3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents  and
                               solvents helps to mininmize interference
                               problems. Purification of solvents by
                               distillation in all-glass systems may be
                               required.
                                 3.2  Matrix interferences may be caused
                               by contaminants that are coextracted from
                               the sample. The extent of matrix
                               interferences will vary considerably from
                               source to source, depending upon the nature
                               and diversity of the industrial complex or
                               municipality being sampled. 2,3,7,8-TCDD is
                               often associated with other interfering
                               chlorinated compound* which are at
                               concentrations several magnitudes higher
                               than that of 2.3.7.8-TCDD. The cleanup
                               producers in Section 11 can be used to
                               overcome many of these interferences, but
                               unique samples may require additional
                               cleanup approaches L*' to eliminate false
                               positives and achieve the MDL listed in Table

                                3.3  The primary column. SP-2330 or
                               equivalent resolves 2.3,7,8-TCDD from the
                               other 21 TCDD imomers. Positive results
                               using any other gas chromatographic column
                               must be confirmed using the primary column.

                               * Safety
                                4.1   The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each
                               reagent used in this method has not been
                              precisely defined; however, each chemical
                              compound should be treated as a potential
                              health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure
                               to these chemical* must be reduced to the
                              lowest possible level by whatever means
                              available. The laboratory is responsible for
                              maintaining a current awareness file of
                              OSHA regulations regarding the safe
                              handling of the chemicals specified in this
                              method. A reference file of material data
                              handling sheets should also be made
                              available to all personnel involved in the
                              chemical analysis. Additional references to
                              laboratory safety are available and have
                              been identified '"'• for the information of the
                              analyst. Benzene and 2,3.7,8-TCDD have been
                              identified as  suspected human or mammalian
                              carcinogens.
                               4.2  Each laboratory must develop a strict
                              safety program for handling 2.3,7.8-TCDD.
                              The following laboratory practices are
                              recommended:

                                           D-214
   4.2.1  Contamination of the laboratory will
 be minimized by conducting all
 manipulations in a hood.
   4.2.2  The effluents of sample splitters for
 the gas chromatograph and roughing pumps
 on the GC/MS should pass through either a
 column of activated charcoal or be bubbled
 through a trap containing oil or high-boiling
 alcohols.
   4.2.3  Liquid waste should be dissolved in
 methanol or ethanol and irradiated with
 ultraviolet light with a wavelength greater
 than 290 nm for several days. (Use F 40 BL
 lamps or equivalent).  Analyze liquid wastes
 and dispose of the solutions when 2.3.7,8-
 TCDD can no longer be detected.
   4.3  Dow Chemical U.S.A. has issued the
 following precautions (revised November
 1978) for safe  handling of 2.3,7,8-TCDD in the
 laboratory:
   4.3.1  The following statements on safe
 handling are as complete as possible on the
 basis of available lexicological information.
 The precautions for safe  handling and use are
 necessarily general in nature since detailed.
 specific recommendations can be made only
 for the particular exposure and circumstances
 of each individual use. Inquiries about
 specific operations or uses may be addressed
 to the Dow Chemical  Company. Assistance in
 evaluating the health  hazards of particular
 plant conditions may  be obtained from
 certain consulting laboratories and from
 State Departments of Health or of Labor.
 many of which have an industrial health
 service. 2,3,7,8-TCDD  is extremely toxic to
 laboratory animals. However, it has been
 handled for years without injury in analytical
 and biological laboratories. Techniques used
 in handling radioactive and infectious
 materials are applicable to 2.3,7,8,-TCDD.
   4.3.1.1  Protective equipment—Throw-
 away plastic gloves, apron or lab coat safety
 glasses, and a lab hood adequate for
 radioactive work.
   4.3.1.2  Training—Workers must be
 trained in the proper method of removing
 contaminated  gloves and clothing without
 contacting the exterior surfaces.
   4.3.1.3  Personal hygiene—Thorough
 washing of hands and forearms after each
 manipulation and before breaks (coffee.
 lunch, and shift).
   4.3.1.4 Confinement—Isolated work area.
 posted with signs, segregated glassware and
 tools, plastic-backed absorbent paper on
 benchtop*.
   4.3.1.5  Waste—Good technique includes
 minimising contaminated waste. Plastic bag
 linen should be used in waste can*. Janitors
 must be trained in the  safe handling of waste.
   4.3.1.6  Disposal of  wastes—2.3.7,8-TCDD
 decomposes above 800 °C Low-level waste
 such as absorbent paper, tissues, animal
 remains, and plastic gloves may be burned in
 a good incinerator. Gross quantities
 (milligrams) should be packaged securely and
 disposed through commercial or
governmental channels which are capable of
 handling high-level radioactive wastes or
extremely toxic wastes. Liquids should  be
allowed to evaporate in a good hood and in a
disposable container. Residues may then be
handled as above.

-------
               Federal  Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 /  Friday,  October 26, 1984 /  Rules and  Regulations	137
    4.3.1.7  Decontamination—For personal
  decontamination, use any mild soap with
  plenty of scrubbing action. For
  decontamination of glassware, tools, and
  surfaces. Chlorothene NU Solvent
  (Trademark of the Dow Chemical Company)
  is the least toxic solvent shown to be
  effective. Satisfactory cleaning may be
  accomplished by nnsing with Chlorothene.
  then washing with any detergent and water.
  Dishwater may be disposed to the sewer. It is
  prudent to minimize solvent wastes because
  they may require special disposal through
  commercial sources which are expensive.
    4.3.1.8  Laundry—Clothing known to be
  contaminated should be disposed with the
  precautions described under Section 4.3.1.8.
  Lab coats or other clothing worn in 2.3.7,8-
  TCDD work areas may be laundered.
    Clothing should be collected in plastic
  bags. Persons who convey the bags and
  launder the clothing should be advised of the
  hazard and trained in proper handling. The
  clothing may be  put into a washer without
  contact if the launderer knows the problem.
  The washer should be run through a cycle
  before being used again for other clothing.
   4.3.1.9  Wipe  tests—A useful method of
  determining cleanliness of work surfaces and
  tools is to wipe the surface with a piece of
  filter paper. Extraction and analysis by gas
  chromatography can achieve a limit of
  sensitivity of 0.1  pg per wipe. Less than 1 jig
  of 2.3.7.8-TCDD per sample indicates
  acceptable cleanliness; anything higher
  warrants further cleaning. More than 10 jig
  on a wipe sample constitutes an acute hazard
  and requires prompt cleaning before further
  use of the equipment or work space. A high
  (>10 jig) 2.3.7.8-TCDD level indicates that
  unacceptable work practices have been
  employed in the past.
   4.3.1.10  Inhalation—Any procedure that
  may produce airborne contamination must be
  done with good ventilation. Gross losses to a
  ventilation system must not be allowed.
  Handling of the dilute solutions normally
  used in analytical and animal work presents
  no inhalation hazards except in the case of
  an accident
   4.3.1.11  Accidents—Remove
 contaminated clothing immediately, taking
 precautions not to contaminate skin or other
 articles. Wash exposed skin vigorously and
 repeatedly until medical attention is
 obtained

 5. Apparatus and Materials
   5.1  Sampling equipment for discrete or
 composite sampling.
   5.1.1  Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt
 amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
 with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for
 Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
 bottles are not available, protect samples
 from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
 washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
 chloride, and  dried before use to minimize
 contamination.
  5.1.2  Automatic sampler (optional)—The
 sampler must incorporate glass sample
 containers for the collection of a minimum of
 250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
 light during compositing. If the sampler uses a
peristaltic pump, a minimum length of  _     -
  compressible silicone rubber tubing may be
  used. Before use. however, the compressible
  tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with
  methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
  distilled water to minimize the potential for
  contamination of the sample. An integrating
  flow meter is required to collect flow
  proportional composites.
    5.1.3  Clearly label all samples as
  "POISON" and ship according to U.S.
  Department of Transportation regulations.
    5.2  Glassware (All specifications are
  suggested. Catalog numbers are  included for
  illustration only.):
    5.2.1  Separatory funnels—2-L and 125-mL
  with Teflon stopcock.
    5.2.2  Concentrator tube. Kudema-
  Danish—lOmL. graduated (Kontes  K-570050-
  1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be
  checked at the volumes employed in the test.
  Ground glass stopper is used to prevent
  evaporation of extracts.
    5.2.3  Evaporative flask. Kuderna-
  Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
  equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with
  springs.
    5.2.4  Snyder column, Kudema-Danish—
  Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121  or
  equivalent).
    5.2.5  Snyder column. Kuderna-Danish—
  Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
  equivalent).
    5.2.6  Vials—10 to 15-mL. amber glass.
  with Teflon-lined screw cap.
    5.2.7  Chromatographic column—300 mm
  long X 10 mm ID. with Teflon stopcock and
  coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
    5.2.8  Chromatographic column—400 mm
  long X 11 mm ID. with Teflon stopcock and
  coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
   5.3  Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40
  mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 nun or Soxhlet
  extract with methylene chloride.
   5.4  Water bath—Heated, with concentric
 ring cover, capable of temperature control
 (±2 *C). The bathishould be used in a hood.
   5.5  GC/MS system:
   5.5.1  Gas chromatograph—An analytical
 system complete  with'a temperature
 programmable gas* chromatograph and all
 required accessories including syringes.
 analytical columns, and gases. The  infection
 port must be designed for capillary  columns.
 Either split splitless, or on-column injection
 techniques may be employed, as long as the
 requirement* of Section 7.1.1 are achieved.
   5.5.2 Column—«0 m long x 0.25 mm ID
 glass or fused silica, coated with SP-2330 (or
 equivalent) with a film thickness of 0.2 ^m.
 Any equivalent column must resolve 2, 3. 7.
 8-TCDD from the other 21 TCDD isomers.'•
   5.5.3  Mass spectrometer—Either a low
 resolution mass spectrometer (LRMS) or a
 high resolution mass spectrometer (HRMS)
 may be used. The mass spectrometer must be
 equipped with a 70 V (nominal) ion source
 and be capable of aquiring m/i abundance
 data in real time selected  ion monitoring
 (SIM) for group* of four or more masses.
  5.5.4  GC/MS interface—Any GC to MS
 interface can be used that achieves the
 requirements of Section 7.1.1. GC to  MS
 interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-
lined material* are recommended. Glass
surfaces can be deactivated by silanizing
with dichlorodimethylsilane. To achieve

              D-215
  maximum sensitivity, the exit end of the
  capillary column should be placed in the ion
  source. A short piece of fused silica capillary
  can be used as the interface to overcome
  problems associated with straightening the
  exit end of glass capillary columns.
    5.5.5  The SIM data acquired during the
  chromatographic program is defined as the
  Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP). The SICP
  can be acquired under computer control or as
  a real time analog output. If computer control
  is used, there must be software available to
  plot the SICP and report peak height or area
  data for any m/z in the SICP between
  specified time or scan number limits.
    5.8   Balance—Analytical, capable of
  accurately weighing 0.0001 g.

  6.  Reagents
    8.1   Reagent water—Reagent water is
  defined as a water in which an interferent  is
  not observed at the MDL of 2, 3, 7, 8-TCDD.
    8.2   Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—
  Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS)  in reagent
  water and dilute to 100 mL Wash the
  solution with methylene chloride and hexane
  before use.
    8.3   Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
    8.4   Sulfuric acid—Concentrated (ACS, sp.
  gr. 1.84).
   8.5   Acetone, methylene chloride, hexane.
  benzene, ortho-xylene, tetradecane—
  Pesticide quality or equivalent.
   8.6   Sodium sulfate-—(ACS) Granular.
  anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 *C for 4 h
  in a shallow tray.
   8.7   Alumina—Neutral. 80/200 mesh
  (Fisher Scientific Co.. No. A-540 or
  equivalent). Before  use. activate for 24 h at
  130 *C in a foil-covered glass container.
   8.8  Silica gel—High purity grade. 100/120
  mesh (Fisher Scientific Co.. No. S-879 or
  equivalent).
   6.9  Stock standard solutions (1.00 Mg/
 )iL)—Stock standard solutions can be
 prepared from pure standard materials or
 purchased as certified solutions. Acetone
 should be used as the solvent for spiking
 solutions; ortho-xylene is recommended for
 calibration standards for split injectors: and
 tetradecane is recommended for splitless or
 on-colum injectors. Analyze stock  internal
 standards to verify the absence of native
 2.3,7,8-TCDD.
  8.9.1   Prepare stock standard solution* of
 2,3,7,8-TCDD (mol wt 320) and either "Cl,
 2.3,7,8-TCDD (mol wt 328) or IJC1,, 2,3.7,8-
 TCDD (mol wt 332) in an isolated area by
 accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
 material. Dissolve the material in pesticide
 quality solvent  and dilute to volume in a 10-
 mL volumetric flask. When compound punty
 is assayed to be fO% or greater, the weight
 can be used without correction to calculate
 the concentration of the stock standard.
 Commercially prepared stock standards can
 be used at any concentration if they are
 certified by the manufacturer or by an
 independent source.
  6.9.2  Transfer the stock standard
 solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap
 bottle*. Store in an isolated refrigerator
protected from light Stock standard solutions
should be checked frequently for signs of
degradation or evaporation,  especially just

-------
  138         Federal Register /  Vol. 49.  No.  209  / Friday. October  26.  1984 /  Rules  and Regulations
  prior to preparing calibration standards or
  spiking solutions from them.
    6.9.3  Stock standard solutions must be
  replaced after six months, or sooner if
  comparison with check standards indicates a
  problem.
    6.10  Internal standard spiking solution (25
  ng/mLJ—Using stock standard solution.
  prepare a spiking solution in acetone of
  either 13Cl,i or "Cl. 2.3.7.8-TCDD at a
  concentration of 25 ng/mL. (See Section 10.2)
    8.11  Quality  control check sample
  concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.

  7.  Calibration
    7.1   Establish gas chromatograhic
  operating conditions equivalent to those
  given in Table 1  and SIM conditions for the
  mass spectrometer as described in Section
  12.2 The GC/MS system must be calibrated
  using the internal standard  technique.
    7.1.1   Using stock standards, prepare
  calibration standards that will allow
  measurement of relative response factors of
  at least three concentration ratios of 24,7,8-
  TCDD to internal standard. Each calibration
  standard must be prepared  to contain the
  internal standard at a concentration of 25 ng/
  mi. If any interferences are contributed by
  the internal standard at m/z 320 and 322. its
  concentration  may be reduced in the
  calibration standards and in the internal
  standard spiking solution (Section 6.10). One
  of the calibration standards should contain
  2.3,7,8-TCDD at a concentration near, but
  above, the MOL and the other 2.3,7,8-TCDD
  concentrations should correspond to the
  expected range of concentrations found in
  real samples or should define the working
  range of the GC/MS system.
   7.1.2  Using injections of  2 to 5 jiL, analyze
 each calibration standard according to
 Section  12 and tabulate peak height or area
 response against  the concentration of 2,3,7,8-
 TCDD and internal standard. Calculate
 response factors (RF) for 2,3,7,8-TCDD using
 Equation 1.
   Equation 1.
             RF=
                   (AJ (CJ
 where:
   A, a SIM response for 2.3,7,8-TCDD m/z
     320.
   Au -SIM response for the internal
     standard, m/z 332 for "Cu 2.3,7,8-TCDD
     m/z 328 for "O, 2J.73-TCDD.
   Q.= Concentration of the internal standard
  C,= Concentration of 24,7,8-TCDD (jig/L).
If the RF value over the working range is a
constant ( < 10% relative standard deviation.
RSD). the RF can be assumed to be invariant
and the average RF can be used for
calculations. Alternatively, the results can be
used to plot a calibration curve of response
ratios. A./A* vs. RF.
  7.1.3  The working calibration curve or RF
must be verified on each working day by the
measurement of one or more 2.3,7,8-TCDD
calibration standards. If the response for
2.3,7,8-TCDD varies from the predicted
response by more than ±15*, the test must ~*
  be repeated using a fresh calibration
  standard. Alternatively, a new calibration
  curve must be prepared.
    7.2  Before using any cleanup procedure.
  the analyst must process a series of
  calibration standards through the procedure
  to validate elution patterns and the absence
  of interferences from the reagents.

  8. Quality Control
   8.1  Each laboratory that uses this method
  is required to operate a formal quality control
  program. The minimum requirements of this
  program consist of an initial demonstration of
  laboratory capability and an ongoing
  analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
  document data  quality. The laboratory must
  maintain records to document the quality of
  data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
  checks are compared with established
  performance criteria to determine if the
  results of analyses meet the performance
  characteristics of the method. When results
  of sample spikes indicate atypical method
  performance, a  quality control check
  standard must be analyzed to confirm that
  the measurements were performed in an in-
  control mode of operation.
   8.1.1  The analyst must make an  initial.
  one-time, demonstration of the ability to
  generate acceptable accuracy and precision
  with this method. This ability is established
  as described in  Section 8.2.
   8.1-2  In recognition of advances  that are
  occurring in chromatography, the analyst is
  permitted certain options (detailed in
  Sections 10.5,11.1. and 12.1) to improve the
  separation* or lower the cost of
 measurements. Each time such a modification
 is made to the method, the analyst is required
  to repeat the procedure in Section 8J
   8.1.3  Before processing any samples, the
 analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
 to demonstrate that interferences from the
 analytical system and glassware are under
• control. Each ttaje a set of samples is
 extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent
 water blank must be processed as a
 safeguard against laboratory contamination.
  8.1.4  The laboratory must, on an ongoing
 basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of
 all samples with native 2.3,7,8-TCDD to
 monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality.
 This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
  8.1.5 The laboratory must on an  ongoing
 basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
 quality control check standards that the
 operation of the  measurement system is in
 control. This procedure is described in
 Section 8.4. The frequency of the check
 standard analyses is equivalent to 1051 of ail
 samples analyzed but may be reduced if
spike recoveries  from samples (Section 8.3)
meet all specified quality control criteria.
  8.1.8  The laboratory must maintain
performance records to document the quality
of data that is generated. This procedure is
described in Section 8.5.
  &2  To establish the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the
analyst must perform the following
operations.
  8.2.1  A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing 24,7,8-
TCDD at a concentration of 0.100 pg/mL in
acetone. The QC  check sample concentrate

            D-216
  must be obtained from the U.S.
  Environmental Protection Agency.
  Environmental Monitoring and Support
  Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If
  not available from that source, the QC check
  sample concentrate must be obtained from
  another external source. If not available from
  either source above, the QC check sample
  concentrate must be prepared by the
  laboratory using stock standards prepared
  independently from those used for
  calibration.
   8.2.2  Using a pipet. prepare QC check
  samples at a concentration of 0.100 fig/L (100
  ng/L) by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample
  concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of
  reagent water.
   8.2.3  Analyze the well-mixed QC check
  samples according to the method beginning in
  Section 10.
   8.2.4  Calculate the average recovery (X)
  in fig/L. and the standard deviation of the
  recovery (s) in fig/L, for 24.7,8-TCDD  using
  the four results.
   8.2.5  Compare s and (X) with the
  corresponding acceptance criteria for
  precision and accuracy, respectively, found in
  Table 2. If s and X meet the acceptance
  criteria, the system performance is
  acceptable and analysis of actual samples
  can begin. If s exceeds the precision limit or
  X falls outside the range for accuracy, the
  system performance is unacceptable for
  2.3,7,8-TCDD. Locate and correct the source
  of the problem and repeat the test beginning
  with Section azz
   84  The laboratory must on an ongoing
 basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
 each sample site being monitored to assess
 accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
 ten samples per month,  at least one spiked
 sample per month is required.
   8.3.1  The concentration of the spike in the
 sample should be determined as follows:
   84.1.1  If. as in compliance monitoring, the
 concentration of 24,7,8-TCDD in the sample
 is being  checked against a regulatory
 concentration limit, the spike should be it
 that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the
 background concentration determined  in
 Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
 be larger.
   84.1.2 If the concentration of 2,3,7,8-
 TCDD In the sample is not being checked
 against a limit specific to that parameter, the
 spike should be at 0.100 pg/L or 1 to 5 times
 higher than the background concentration
 determined in Section 84-2, whichever
 concentration would be  larger.
   8.3.14  If it is impractical to determine
 background levels before spiking (e.g-
 maximum holding times  will be exceeded}.
 the spike concentration should  be (1) the
 regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if
 none (2) the larger of either S times higher
 than the expected background concentration
 or 0.100 jig/L.
  84.2  Analyze one sample aliquot to
 determine the background concentration (B)
 of 2.3,7,8-TCDD. If necessary, prepare a new
 QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.Z1)
appropriate for the background concentration
in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot
with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the

-------
               Federal Register  /  Vol.  49, No. 209 / Friday.  October 26, 1984 /  Rules and Regulations
                                      139
  concentration after spiking (A) of 2,3.7,8-
  TCDD. Calculate percent recovery (P) as
  100(A-B)%T. where T is the known true value
  of the spike.
   8.3.3  Compare the percent recovery (P) for
  2.3.7.8-TCDD with the corresponding QC
  acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
  acceptance criteria were calculated to
  include an allowance for error in
  measurement of both the background and
  spike concentrations, assuming a spike to
  background ratio of 5:1. This error will be
  accounted for to the extent that the analyst's
  spike to background  ratio approaches 5:1." If
  spiking was performed  at a concentration
  lower than 0.100 MS!/1- the analyst must  use
  either the QC acceptance criteria in Table 2,
  or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated
  for the specific spike  concentration. To
  calculate optional acceptance criteria for the
  recovery of 2.3.7.8-TCDD: (1) calculate
  accuracy (X'J using the  equation in Table 3,
  substituting the spike concentration (T) for C;
  (2)  calculate overall precision (S') using the
  equation in Table 3. substituting X' for X: (3)
  calculate the range for recovery at the spike
  concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100 S'/
  T)%. "
   8.3.4  If the recovery of 2,3,7,8-TCDD falls
  outside the designated range for recovery, a
  check standard must  be analyzed as
  described in Section 8.4.
   8.4  If the recovery of 2.3,7,8-TCDD fails
  the acceptance criteria for recovery in
  Section 8.3, a QC check standard must be
  prepared and analyzed.
   Note.—The frequency for the required
  analysis of a QC check  standard will depend
  upon the complexity of the sample matrix
  and the performance'of the laboratory.
   8.4.1   Prepare the QC check standard by
 adding 1.0 mi, of QC check sample
 concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of
 reagent water.
   8.4.2   Analyze the  QC check standard to
 determine the concentration measured (A) of
 2,3.7.8-TCDD. Calculate the percent recovery
 (P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true value
 of the standard concentration.
   8.44   Compare the percent recovery (P.)
 with the corresponding QC acceptance
 criteria found in Table 2. If the recovery of
 2.3,7,8-TCDD falls outside the designated
 range, the laboratory performance is judged
 to be out of control, and the problem must be
 immediately identified and corrected. The
 analytical result for 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the
 unspiked sample  is suspect and may not  be
 reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
   8.5  As part of the QC program for the
 laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater
 samples must be assessed and records must
 be maintained. After the analysis of five
 spiked wastewater sample* a* in Section 8.3.
 calculate the average percent recovery (P)
 and  the spandard deviation of the percent
 recovery (s.J. Express  the accuracy
 assessment as a percent recovery interval
 from P-2S, to P+2S,.  If P-90* and s,=10*.
 for example, the accuracy interval is
 expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy
 assessment on a regular  basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
  8.6 It is recommended that the
laborataory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this method.
 The specific practices that are most
 productive depend upon the needs of the
 laboratory and the nature of the samples.
 Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess
 the precision of the environmental
 measurements. Whenever possible, the
 laboratory should analyze standard reference
 materials and participate in relevant
 performance evaluation studies.

 9. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
 Handling
   9.1   Grab samples must be collected in
 glass containers. Conventional sampling
 practices " should be followed, except that
 the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
 before collection. Composite samples should
 be collected in refrigerated glass containers
 in accordance with the requirements of the
 program. Automatic sampling equipment
 must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
 and other potential sources of contamination.
   9.2   Ail samples must be iced or
 refrigerated at 4 'C and protected from light
 from the time of collection until extraction.
 Fill the sample bottles and. if residual
 chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
 thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well.
 EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for
 measurement of residual chlorine." Field test
 kits are available for this purpose.
   9.3   Label all samples and containers
 "POISON" and ship according to applicable
 U.S. Department  of Transportation
 regulations.
   9.4  All samples must be extracted within
 7 days of collection and completely analyzed
 within 40 days of extraction.1

 10. Sample Extraction
   Caution: When using this method to
 analyze for 2.3.7,8-TCDD, all of the following
 operations must be performed in a  limited-
 access laboratory with the analyst wearing
 full  protective covering for all exposed skin
 surfaces. See Section 4.2.
   10.1  Mark the Ttater meniscus on the side
 of the sample bottle for later determination of
 sample volume. Pour Uje entire sample into a
 2-L separatory funnel.
   10.2  Add 1.00 mL of internal standard
 spiking solution to the sample in the
 separatory funnel. If the final extract will be
 concentrated to a fixed volume below 1.00
 mL (Section 12.3), only that volume of spiking
 solution should be added to the sample so
 that the final extract will contain 25 ng/mL of
 internal standard at the time of analysis.
   10.3   Add 80 mL of methylene chloride to
 the sample battle, seal, and shake 30 s to
 rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
 to the separatory  runnel  and extract the
 sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with
 periodic venting to release excess pressure.
 Allow the organic layer to separate from the
 water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
 emulsion interface between layers is more
 than one-third the volume of the solvent
 layer, the analyst  must employ mechanical
 techniques to complete the phase separation.
 The optimum technique depends upon the
 sample, but may include  stirring, filtration of
 the emulsion through glass wool.
centrifugation. or other physical methods.
Collect the methylene chloride extract in a
250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
   10.4  Add a second 80-mL volume of
 methylene chloride to the sample bottle and
 repeat the extraction procedure a second
 time, combining the extracts in the
 Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction
 in the same manner.
   10.5  Assemble a Kudema-Danish (K-D)
 concentrator by attaching a 10-mL
 concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative
 flask. Other concentration devices or
 techniques may be  used in place of the K-D
 concentrator if the requirements of Section
 8.2 are met.
   10.8  Pour the combined extract into the
 K-D concentrator. Rinse  the Erlenmeyer flask
 with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
 complete the quantitative transfer.
   10.7  Add one or two clean boiling chips to
 the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
 Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by
 adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to
 the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a  hot
 water bath (60 to 65 'C} 30 that the
 concentrator tube is partially immersed in the
 hot water, and the entire lower rounded
 surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.
 Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
 and the water temperature as required to
 complete the concentration in  15 to 20 mm. At
 the proper rate of distillation the balls of the
 column will actively chatter but the chambers
 will not flood with condensed  solvent When
 the apparent volume of liquid reaches  1 mL.
 remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
 drain and cool for at least 10 mm.
   10.8  Momentarily remove the Snyder
 column, add SO mL of hexane and a new
 boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column.
 Raise the temperature of  the water bath to 35
 to 90'G Concentrate the extract as in Section
 10.7, except use hexane to prewet the column.
 Remove the Snyder column and rinse the
 flask and its lower joint into the concentrator
 tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane.  A 5-mL  synnge
 is recommended for this operation. Set aside
 the K-D glassware for reuse in Section 10.14.
   10.9  Pour the hexane extract from the
 concentrator tube into a 125-mL separatory
 runnel. Rinse the concentrator tube four times
 with 10-mL aliquots of hexane. Combine all
 rinses in the 125-mL separatory funnel.
   10.10   Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide
 solution to the funnel and shake for 30 to 60 s.
 Discard the aqueous phase.
   10.11   Perform a second wash  of the
 organic layer with 50 mL of reagent  water.
 Discard the aqueous phase.
   10.12  Wash the hexane layer with a least
 two 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfunc
 acid. Continue washing the hexane layer with
 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric acid
 until the acid layer remains colorless. Discard
 all acid fractions.
   10.13  Wash the hexane layer with two 50-
 mL aliquots of reagent water. Discard the
 aqueous phases.
  10.14  Transfer the hexane extract into a
 125-mL Erlenmeyer flask containing 1 to 2 g
 of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Swirl the flask
 for 30 s and decant the hexane extract into
 the reassembled K-D apparatus. Complete
 the quantitative transfer with two 10-mL
hexane rinses of the Erlenmeyer flask.
                                                         D-217

-------
  140	Federal  Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 /  Friday,  October 26. 1984 /  Rules and Regulations
    10.15  Replace the one or two clean boiling
  chips and concentrate the extract to 6 to 10
  mL as in Section 10.8.
    10.16  Add a clean boiling chip to the
  concentrator tube and attach a two-ball
  micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by
  adding about 1 mL of hexane to the top. Place
  the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath
  so that the concentrator tube is partially
  immersed in the hot water. Adjust the
  vertical position of the apparatus and the
  water temperature as required to complete
  the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the
  proper rate of distillation the balls of the
  column will actively chatter but the chambers
  will not flood. When the apparent volume of
  liquid reaches about 0.5 mL remove the K-D
  apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for
  at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder
  column and rinse its lower joint into the
  concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane.
    Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL with
  hexane. Stopper the concentrator tube and
  store refrigerated and protected from light if
  further processing will not be performed
  immediately. If the extract will be stored
  longer than two days, it should be transferred
  to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the
  sample extract requires no further cleanup.
  proceed with GC/MS analysis (Section 12). If
  the sample requires further cleanup, proceed
  to Section 11.
   10.17  Determine the original sample
  volume by refilling the sample bottle to the
  mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL
  graduated cylinder. Record the sample
  volume to the nearest 5 mL.

  11. Cleanup and Separation
   11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be
  necessary for a relatively dean sample
  matrix. If particular circumstances demand
  the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst
 may use either procedure below or any other
 appropriate procedure.1-*'However, the
 analyst first must demonstrate that the
 requirements of Section 8-2 can be met using
 the method as revised to incorporate the
 cleanup procedure. Two cleanup column
 options are offered to the analyst in this
 section. The alumina column should  be used
 first to overcome interferences. If background
 problems are still encountered, the silica gel
 column may be helpful.
   11.2  Alumina column cleanup for 2.3.7,8-
 TCDD:
   11.2.1  Fill a  300 mm long x 10 mm ID
 chromatographic column with activated
 alumina to the ISO mm level. Tap the column
 gently to settle the alumina and add 10 mm of
 anhydrous sodium sulfata to the top.
   11.12  Preeiute the column with SO mL of
 hexane. Adjust the elution rat* to 1 mL/min.
 Discard the eluate and just pnor to exposure
 of the sodium sulfate layer to the air.
 quantitatively transfer the 1.0-mL sample
 extract onto the column using two 2-mL
 portions of hexane to complete  the transfer.
  11.2.3  Just prior to exposure of the sodium
 sulfate layer to the air. add SO mL of 3%
 methylene chloride/97% hexane (V/V) and
 continue the elution of the column. Discard
 the eluate.
  11.2.4  Next, elute the column with 50 mL
of 20%  methylene chloride/80% hexane (V/V)
into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-
  mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the
  collected fraction to 1.0 mL as in Section
  10.16 and analyze by GC/MS (Section 12).
    11.3  Silica gel column cleanup for 2,3,7,8-
  TCDD:
    11.3.1  Fill a 400 mm long x 11 mm ID
  chromatographic column with silica gel to the
  300 mm level. Tap the column gently to settle
  the silica gel and add 10 mm of anhydrous
  sodium sulfate to the top.
    11.3.2  Preeiute the column with 50 mL of
  20% benzene/80% hexane (V/V). Adjust the
  elution rate to 1 mL/min. Discard the eluate
  and just prior to exposure of the sodium
  sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer
  the 1.0-mL sample extract onto the column
  uaing two 2-mL portions of 20% benzene/80%
  hexane to complete the transfer.
    11.3.3  Just prior to exposure of the sodium
  sulfate layer to the air. add 40 mL of 20%
  benzene/80% hexane to the column. Collect
  the eluate in a clean 500-mL K-D flask
  equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube.
  Concentrate the collected fraction to 1.0 mL
  as in Section 10.16 and analyze by GC/MS.

  12. GC/MS Analysis
   12.1   Table 1 summarizes the
  recommended operating conditions for the
  gas chromatograph. Included in this table are
  retention times and MDL that can be
  achieved under these conditions. Other
  capillary columns or chromatographic
  conditions may be used if the requirements of
  Sections 5.5.2 and 8.2 are met.
   12.2  Analyze standards and samples with
  the mass spectrometer operating in the
  selected ion monitoring (SIM] mode using a
 dwell time to give at least seven  points per
 peak. For LRMS, use masses at m/z 320, 322.
 and 257 for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and either m/z 328
 for  "CL. 2.3,7.8-TCDD or m/z 332 for 1SC,,
 2.3.7.8-TCDD. For HRMS, use masses at m/z
 319.8965 and 321.8936 for 2.3,7.8-TCDD and
 either m/z 327.8847 for ^Cl, 2.3,7,8-TCDD or
 m/z 331.9367 for "C., 2.3,7,8-TCDD.
   12.3  If lower Selection limits are required.
 the  extract may be carefully evaporated to
 dryness under a gentle  stream of nitrogen
 with the concentrator tube in a water bath at
 about 40 *C Conduct this operation
 immediately before GC/MS analysis.
 Redissolve the extract in the desired final
 volume of ortho-xylene or tetradecane.
   12.4  Calibrate the system daily as
 described in Section 7.
   12.5  Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
 into the gas chromatograph. The volume of
 calibration standard injected must be
 measured, or be the same as all sample
 injection volumes.
   12.8  The presence of 2.3.7,3-TCDD is
 qualitatively  confirmed if all of the following
 criteria  are achieved:
   12.8.1  The gas chromatographic column
 must resolve 2.3.7.8-TCDD from the other 21
 TCDD isomera.
   12.6.2  The masses for native 2.3,7.8-TCDD
 (LRMS-m/z 320, 322, and 257 and HRMS-ra/z
 320 and 322) and labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD (m/z
 328 or 332) must exhibit a simultaneous
 maximum at a retention time that matches
 that  of native 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the calibration
standard, with the performance specifications
of the analytical system.
    12.8.3  The chlorine isotope ratio at m/z
  320 and m/z 322 must agree to within±10% of
  that in the calibration standard.
    12.8.4  The signal of all peaks must be
  greater than 2.5 times the noise level.
    12.7  For quantitation. measure the
  response of the m/z 320 peak for 2.3.7.8-
  TCDD and the m/z 332 peak for 13C,i 2,3.7.8-
  TCDD or the m/z 328 peak for "CL, 2.3,7.8-
  TCDD.
    12.8  Co-eluting impurities are suspected if
  all criteria are achieved except those in
  Section 12.6.3. In this case, another SIM
  analysis using masses at m/z 257, 259, 320
  and either m/a 328 or m/z 322 can be
  performed. The masses at m/z 257 and m/z
  259 are indicative of the loss of one chlorine
  and one carbonyl group from 2.3,7,8-TCDD. If
  masses m/z 257 and m/z 259 give a chlorine
  isotope ratio that agrees  to within  ±10% of
  the same cluster in the calibration  standards.
  then the presence of TCDD can be confirmed.
  Co-eluting DDD. DDE. and PCB residues can
  be confirmed, but will require another
  injection using the appropriate SIM masses or
  full repetitive mass scans. If the response for
  31Cl4 2.3.7,8-TCDD at m/z 328 is too large.
  PCB contamination is suspected and can be
  confirmed by examining  the response at both
  m/z 328 and m/z 328. The "CU 2.3.7.8-TCDD
  internal standard gives negligible response at
  m/z 328. These pesticide residues can be
  removed using the alumina column cleanup
  procedure.
   12.9  If broad background interference
  restricts the sensitivity of the GC/MS
  analysis, the analyst should employ
  additional cleanup procedures and reanalyze
  by GC/MS.
   12.10  In those circumstances where these
 procedures do not yield a definitive
 conclusion,  the use of high resolution mass
 spectrometry is suggested.*

 13. Calculations
   13.1  Calculate the concentration of 2.3.7.8-
 TCDD in the sample using the response factor
 (RF) determined in Section 7.1.2 and Equation
 2.
   Equation 2:
    Concentration (Mg/L)<
   (AJ(LJ

(AJ(RF)fV.)
where:
  A, = SIM response for 2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z
    320.
  AU=SIM response for the internal
    standard at m/z 328 or 332.
  I,=Amount of internal standard added to
    each extract (jig).
  V. = Volume of water extracted (L).
  13.2   For each sample, calculate the
percent  recovery of the internal standard by
comparing the area of the m/z peak
measured in the sample to the area of  the
same peak in the calibration standard. If the
recovery is below 50%, the analyst should
review all aspects of his analytical technique.
  13.3   Report results in ng/L without
correction for recovery data. All QC data
                                                       D-218

-------
               Federal  Register /  Vol.  49. No. 209  /  Friday, October  26. 1984  /  Rules  and Regulations	141
 obtained should be reported with the sample
 reaulta,

 14. Method Performance
   14.1   The method detection limit (MDL) is
 defined as the minimum concentration of a
 substance that can be measured and reported
 with 99% confidence that the value is above
 zero.' The MDL concentration listed in Table
 1 was obtained using reagent water.14 The
 MDL actually achieved in a given analysis
 will vary depending on instrument sensitivity
 and matrix effects.
   14.2   This method was tested by 11
 laboratories using reagent water, drinking
 water, surface water, and three industrial
 wastewaters spiked at six concentrations
 over the range 0.02 to 0.20 ng/L." Single
 operator precision, overall precision, and
 method accuracy were found to be directly
 related to  the concentration of the parameter
 and essentially independent of the sample
 matrix. Linear equations to describe these
 relationships are presented in Table 3.

 References
   1. 40 CFR Part 136. Appendix B.
   2. "Determination of 2.3.7,8-TCDD in
 Industrial and  Municipal Wastewaters,"
 EPA-800/4-82-028. U.S.  Environmental
 Protection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
 and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
 45268. June 1962.
   3. Buser, H.R.. and Rappe. C. "High
 Resolution Gas Chromatography of the 22
 Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers,"
 Analytical Chemistry. 52. 2257 (1980).
   4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
 31, D3694-78. "Standard  Practices for
 Preparation of Sample Containers and for
 Preservation of Organic Constituents,"
 American Society for Testing and Materials,
 Philadelphia.
   5. Harless. R. L. Oswald. E. O.. and
 Wilkinson, M. K. "Sample Preparation and
 Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry
 Determination of 2,3,7.8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-
 p-dioxin." Analytical Chemistry, 52. 1239
 (1980).
   6. Lamparski, L. L. and Nestnck. T.).
 "Determination of Tetra-, Hepta-. and
 Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers in
 Paniculate Samples at Parts per Trillion
 Levels," Analytical Chemistry, 52. 2045
 (1980).
   7. Longhorst. M. L., and Shadoff, L A.
 "Determination of Parts-per-Tnllion
 Concentrations of Tetra-, Hexa-.  and
 Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxins in Human
 Milk," Analytical Chemistry. 52.  2037 (1980).
   8. "Carcinogens—Working with
 Carcinogens." Department of Health.
 Education, and Welfare. Public Health
 Service. Center for Disease Control, National
 Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
 Publication No. 77-208, August 1977.
   9. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards.
 General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
 Occuptional Safety and Health
 Administration, OSHA 2208 (Revised,
 January 1978).
   10. "Safety  in Academic Chemistry
 Laboratories," American Chemical Society
 Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety,
 3rd Edition. 1979.
   11. Provost L P., and Elder, R.  S..
 "Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,"
 American Laboratory, IS, 58-83 (1983). (The
 value 2.44 used in the equation in Section
 8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 derived in
 this report)
   12. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
 31. D3370-78.  "Standard Practices for
 Sampling Water." American Society for
 Testing and Materials. Philadelphia.
   13. "Methods. 330.4 (Titrimetric. DPD-FAS)
 and 330.5 (Spectrophotometnc DPD) for
 Chlorine, Total Residual." Methods for
 Chemical Analysis of Water and  Wastes.
 EPA-800/4-79-02DJU.S. Environmental
                   Protection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
                   and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati. Ohio
                   45268. March 1979.
                     14. Wong. A.S. et al. "The Determination of
                   2.3,7.8-TCDD in Industrial and Municipal
                   Wastewaters, Method 813. Part 1—
                   Development and Detection Limits." G.
                   Choudhay. L Keith, and C. Ruppe. ed..
                   Butterworth Inc., (1983).
                     15. "EPA Method Validation Study 23.
                   Method 613 (2.3.7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-
                   dioxinj," Report for EPA Contract 68-03-2863
                   (In preparation).

                    TABLE 1.—Chromatograprwc Conditions and
                             Method Detection Limit
PVVTMMr
2.3,7,8,- TCDO 	
Retention
time
(mm)
131
Mainod
detemmi
Imw t^g/
L)
0002
                    Column conations: SP-2330 coated on • 80 m long x
                  0 25 mm !0 glaaa column with Hydrogen earner gaa at 40
                  cm/see  linear v«loaty. spttlesa miectnn using latraoacane
                  Column temperature nett aotnarmal at 200'C tor 1 mm. tnen
                  programmed at 8'C/rrwi to 240 'C and tutu U» of nafcum
                         is  writ  appronmatery douole  (ne retention nme.
                   TABLE 2.—QC Acceptance Criteria—Method
                                      613
Parameter
2.3,7,8-TCDO 	
Tot
cone
,--EipecMd angle enelyet HanJerd oavletkxi of meeauremei
S'- Expected nterteoaraiory ttandenl devaUan of meeeneiiia
?-True value tor the coneennaon, n ofl/L
x-Avereoe recovery found for meeaurenmiui of samilea com


mpte uuitieifang t concentnaon of C n M/L.
ita al en awxge conoannaon taund of SL t\ «/l-
n at an average conoematton found of X, n |ig/L
anna a concerenaon of C. n ua/L.
Accuracy. aa
recovery. X'
Oifl/L)
0.86C + 0.00145
Single analyet, Overa*
precaeon. ^ ' pracaaon. S '
0.13X4-0.00129 018X+OOO02S

M«thed 824

1. Scope and Application
  1.1   This method coven the determination
of a number of purgeable organic*. The
following parameters may be determined by
this method:
Pmnwtv



QflDJTLnjITaTJthiWM


CMomtMhaVf*

STORE!
NO.
34030

32104


34301
34311
34576
3210B
CAS No.
71-43-2

75-25-2


108-90-7
75-00-3
110-75-S
«7-achtaoeln«ne..
                                             Te»«ufeuiue
-------
                              SAS APPENDIX B
            Modification of Method  613 to Form Method  613A and
                     for application in Method 613E*
*Developed for use in the  EPA Effluent  Guidelines  Division  Sampling and
 Analysis Program
                                     D-220

-------
Modifications of Method 613 to Form Method 613A and for Application in Method 613E

      The following information is provided to clarify Methods 613A and Method
  613E.  Paragraph numbers in brackets [] reference paragraph numbers in EPA
  Method 613.

  1.  Compound Levels and Numbers

      a.  The compound to be used for quantification by isotope dilution shall
          be carbon-13 labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD (13C12).  Fifty nanograms of   C12~
          2,3,7,8-TCDD shall be spiked into all water samples to result in a
          concentration of 50 ng/L for one liter samples and 5 ng/L for 10 liter
          samples.  A labelled compound spiking solution replaces the "internal
          standard" spiking solution [613: 6.10] and is prepared using   C12~
          2,3,7,8-TCDD at 50 ug/mL.  When extracted and concentrated to a
          volume of 50 uL, the extract concentration will be 1.0 ug/mL (1.0
          ng/uL), assuming a 100 percent extraction efficiency.

                                                           13
      b.  The EGD compound number to be used for reporting   C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD
          shall be 429.

      c.  Chlorine-37 labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD shall be spiked into each extract to
          yield a concentration of 1.0 ug/mL (1.0 ng/uL).  the most efficient
          way to spike the extract is to prepare a solution of   Cl^-2,3,7,8-
          TCDD at a concentration of 1.0 ug/mL in isooctane, o-xylene, or
          tetradecane, and use 50 uL of this solution to redissolve the extract
          [613: 12.3].  3^Cl^-2,3,7,8-TCDD is used as the internal standard for
                          1 O
          analysis of the   C,2-2,3,7,8-TCDD so that recovery can be measured.

                                                           17
      d.  The EGD compound number to be used for reporting   C1^2,3,7,8-TCDD
          shall be 184.
  2.  Final Extract Volume
          The final extract volume for all samples shall be 0.05 mL (50 uL),
                                        D-221

-------
    If the extract method cannot be concentrated to this  volume,  all  cleanup
    steps in Method 613 [613:  section 11]  plus  the  additional  cleanup step  in
    Method 613E [613E: section 10]  shall be  employed.   If  the  extract cannot
    then be concentrated to 50 uL,  the Contractor shall notify the  Sample Con-
    trol Center by telephone (703/557-5040)  within  two  working days.

3.  Injection Volume

        The injection volume for all calibration solutions [613:  7.1.2]  and
    extracts [613: 12.5] shall be 2.0 + 0.2  uL.

A.  Interferences

        If an interference precludes rigorous identification or quantitation
    of 2,3,7,8-TCDD at a level equal to or greater  than 1 ug/mL (1  ng/uL) in
    an extract after all cleanup steps (see  item 2, above) and alternate
    masses [613: 12.8} have been tried, the  Contractor  shall notify the Sam-
    ple Control Center by telephone within two working  days.

5.  Calibration and Calibration Verification

    a.  A five-point calibration supercedes  the three-point calibration in
        the Method [613: sections 6 and 7].   The calibration solutions to be
        used are as follows:
                     Concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD  (ug/mL and ng/uL Isotopically
Solution
   1
   2
   3
   A
   5
                                                                         13
    b.  The response of 2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z 320 is tabulated relative to   C12"
        2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z 332 [613: 7.1.2].  The coefficient of variation
        (relative standard deviation) of the RF shall be less than 10 percent;
        otherwise a calibration curve is to be used.

                                         D-222
Labeled)
13c
12
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Native
0.2
1.0
5.0
20
AO

-------
    c.  The response of 13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD is tabulated relative to 37C1^-
        2,3,7,8-TCDD for all 5 calibration solutions.  The coefficient  of
        variation (relative standard deviation) of the RF shall be less than
        20 percent; otherwise variables need better control and the test
        repeated.

    d.  Calibration verification [613:  7.1.3] is performed at 1 ug/mL (Ing/uL)
        for all TCDD isotopes once per  8-hour shift.

6.  Initial and Ongoing Precision and Recovery

                                                                   13
    a.  The QC check sample concentrate [613: 8.2.1]  shall contain   C]?~
        2,3,7,8-TCDD and a native 2,3,7,8-TCDD at 50 ng/mL each.

    b.  The specifications for initial  precision and  recovery from reagent
        water [613: 8.2-8.3] must be met and are as follows.  For native
        2,3,7,8-TCDD, the initial precision of the percent recoveries shall
        be less than 20 percent relative standard deviation, and the initial
        recoveries shall be between 75  and 116 percent by isotope dilution.
        For 1 C^-2,3,7,8-TCDD, the initial precision of the percent recoveries
        shall be less than 25 percent relative standard deviation, and  the
        initial recoveries shall be between 50 and 130 percent by internal
        standard (37Cl4-2,3,7,8-TCDD).

    c.  Delete the requirement to spike and analyze 10 percent of all samples
        with native 2,3,7,8-TCDD [613:  8.1.2 and 8.4].

    d.  A test of ongoing precision and recovery is to be made by spiking 1  mL
        of reagent water for each set of samples started through the extraction
        process on a given 8-hour shift, to a maximum of six samples.  Recovery
        of l3C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD [613: section 13] shall be measured using 37C14~
        2,3,7,8-TCDD as the internal standard.  The ongoing precision and
        recovery shall be within the control limits specified [613: 8.3.1].

                                         D-223

-------
7.  Final Extract Concentration

        Change the final extract  concentration [613:  10.2]  to  1  mg/mL (1  ng/uL),

8.  Accuracy Statements

        Accuracy statements shall be developed using  l^Cj2-2,3,7,8-TCDD [613:
    8.3.2] consisting  of N, the average  percent recovery  of    C,2-2,3,7,8-
    TCDD in all wastewater  samples,  and  M,  the coefficient  of  the  percent
    recoveries of 1^C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD in  all wastewater samples.
                                       D-224

-------
                                   APPENDIX C
                              EXTENDED METHOD 613*
                                (EGD METHOD 613E)
*Extended method  developed  for  the analysis of  10 liter samples for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
 for use in the EPA Effluent  Guidelines Division water and wastewater sampling
 and analysis  program.
                                     D-225

-------
                  Appendix C     01 September 1983     Draft

    Extension of EPA Method 613A to 10 Liter Samples to Detect Parts per Quad-
    rillion (ppq) of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in Water*

1.  Scope and Application

        This procedure extends Method 613A to the ppq level for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
    in water by extraction of  a 10 liter sample.   The procedure is applied
    to relatively clean waters (drinking water,  treated effluents, surface
    water) which yield extracts that can be concentrated to a final volume
    of 50-100 uL.  Unless specified otherwise by  this procedure, all require-
    ments and specifications in Method 613A shall be met.  Numbers in brackets
    [] reference paragraph numbers in Method 613, July 1982 Revision.

2.  Apparatus and Materials [613: 5]

    2.1. Sample bottle(s) [613: 5.1.1 and 5.1.2]—any combination of bottles
         which will result in  collection of 10 liters of sample may be used.

    2.2  Extraction apparatus—replace the separatory funnel [613: 5.2.1]
         with the following:

         5.2.IE    Extraction bottle or flask—11 to 19 liter glass vessel
                   capable of  being stirred by a  magnetic stirring bar.

         5.2.1.IE  Magnetic stirrer and bar capable of stirring water in the
                   vessel in 5.2.IE.

    2.3  Change the volume of  the K-D flask [613: 5.2.3] to 1000 mL.

3.  Regeants [613:6]

    3.1  Change the concentration of the 25 ng/mL internal standard spiking
         solution [613: 6.10]  to 50 ng/mL.
                                     D-226
*Adapted from EPA Region V "Dow Task Force Report" Appendix B.

-------
4.  QA/QC [613: 8]

    A.I  Change the concentration of the QC check sample concentrate [613:
         8.2.1] to 50 ng/mL.

    4.2  Change the volume of the initial 1000 mL aliquots [613: 8.2.2] to
         10 liters.

    4.3  Change the volume of the 1 liter blank [613: 8.5] to 10.0 liters.

B.  Extraction and Concentration [613: 10]

    5.1  Change "two liter separatory funnel" [613: 10.1 and 10.2] to "extrac-
         tion vessel" (section 5.2.IE).

    5.2  Change "25 ng/mL" [613: 10.2] to "one ug/mL".

    5.3  Replace the extraction and transfer procedures [613: 10.3, 10.4 and
         10.6] with the following:

         10.3E    Extraction by magnetic stirring

         10.3.IE  Stir the sample plus internal standard at 50-150 rpm for
                  25-35 minutes.

         10.3.2E  Add one liter of hexane to the extraction vessel.

         10.3.3E  Stir the mixture at 50-150 rpm for  16-24 hours.

         10.4E    Transfer the hexane to a  1.5-3 liter bottle or flask using
                  a 100-500 mL pipet.  If necessary,  add reagent water to the
                  extraction vessel to force the extract into the neck for easy
                  withdrawal.  If residual water is present in the extract, add
                  sufficient sodium sulfate to remove the water.
                                     D-227

-------
         10.6E    Pour the extract into the K-D concentrator.   Rinse the bottle
                  or flask (10.4E) with 50-100 mL hexane and add to the K-D
                  flask.

    5.4  Prewet the column [613:  10.7]  with hexane.

    5.5  Change the bath  temperature [613:10.7] to 85-95°C.

    5.6  Change the time  for concentration [613: 10.7]  to 30-60 minutes.

  '  5.7  Change the apparent volume [613:  10.7] to 5 mL.

    5.8  Delete the hexane exchange [613:  10.8].

    5.9  Delete the extract adjustment  to  1.0 ml [613:  10.16].
                       »

    5.10 Change the 1000  mL graduated cylinder and 5 mL requirements [613:
         10.7] to any vessel which will perit accurate  measurement of 10
         liters within *5 percent.

6.  Cleanup and Separation [613:11}

    6.1  Change the final volume  requirement [613: 11.3.4] to 0.5 to 2 mL and
         delete analysis  of the extract at this volume.

7.  GC/MS Analysis [613:  12]

    7.1  Use the blowdown procedure [613:  12.3] to bring the final volume of
         extract to 50 uL.

8.  Calculations [613: 13]

    8.1  Change the recovery specification [613: 13.2]  to 20 percent.
                                    D-228

-------
9.  Method Performance [613: 14]

    9.1  Change the detection limit [613: 14.1 and table 1] to 100 pg/L (ppq).

    9.2  Change the recovery and relative standard deviation [613: 14.2 and
         tables 2 and 3]  to 84 percent and 9 percent, respectively for reagent
         water.

10. Additional Cleanup*

        This cleanup procedure is to be used for extracts which do not concen-
    trate to 50 uL or when an interference is present at m/z 320, 328, or 332
                      0-7              1 -1
    for 2,3,7,8-TCDD,   Cl^-TCDD, or   Cj2~TCDD as evidenced by improper
    isotope ratios, and only after all other cleanup procedures in the method
    have been shown to be ineffective.

    10.1  Prepare 18 percent Carbopak C on Celite 545 by thoroughly mixing
          3.6 grams of Carbopak C (80/100) mesh and 16.4 grams of Celite
          545 in a 40 mL  vial.   Activate at 130°C for six hours.   Store in
          a dessicator.

    10.2  Prepare a column using a 5-3/4 in.  x 5 mm i.d. disposable pipet
          fitted with a  small plug of glass wool.

    10.3  Using a vacuum  aspirator attached to the pointed end of the plpet,
          add Carbopak/Celite mix until a 2 cm column is obtained.

    10.4  Pre-elute the column with 2mL of tolune followed by one mL of cyclo-
          hexane:methylene chloride (1:1) and 2 mL hexane.  While the column
          is still wet with hexane, add the extract.   Elute with  two 1-mL
          aliquots of hexane, one mL cyclohexane:methylene chloride (1:1), and
          one mL methylene chloride:methanol:benzene (75:20:5).

*Adapted from EPA Region  VII procedure for "Determination of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in
 Soil  and Sediment.
                                     D-229

-------
10.5  Elute with the  TCDD fraction with  2 mL toluene.

10.6  Store the  2mL extract in a freezer until ready for analysis.

10.7  Just before analysis, reduce the volume to near dryness and add
      isooctane  to obtain a final volume of 50 uL.

      NOTE:  For quality assurance purposes, the initial  [613: 8.2.2] and
             on-going [613: 8.4] reagent water aliquots shall be taken
             through  the entire cleanup  procedure used with samples.  Re-
             coveries for 2,3,7,8-TCDD by isotope dilution shall be 70-130
             percent, and recoveries for labelled TCDD shall be 20-200 per-
             cent by  the internal standard method using  37C1^-2,3,7,8-TCDD
             spiked into the extract as  the internal standard for reference.
             Each batch of cleanup material (silica gel, alumina, Carbopak./
             Celite,  etc) shall be tested to insure recovery within the
             limits above.
                                 D-230

-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 8280M
    D-231

-------
                          GC/MS Conditions
Gas Chroraatography:

Capillary Column:  a.  Manufacturer       -  J&V Scientific
                   b.  Liquid  phase       -  DB-5
                   c.  Length             -  60  m
                   d.  I. D                -  0.25 ram
                   e.  film  thickness     -  0.25 microns

Carrier gas      :  Helium
Head pressure    :  28 psi
Flow thru column:  1 to  2 ral/min.
Injection type   :  Splitless for  30  sec.
Initial isothermal temperature   :150  deg  C for 30  sec.
Initial temperature program  rate:  to  190  deg  C  ballistically
Final temperature program rate   :  to  300  deg  C 
-------
            SLUDGE SAMPLES
 D100ML  round bottom flask  + boiling  chip  +  sample  <~2g)  + 200ul
 water + 200ul spiking solution  + 50ml  toluene.
 2)  Connect Dean/stark trap  and heat apparatus  to  lOOdeg C  until
 volume of water collected  in the resevolr is  a  constant  value.
 3)  Disconnect apparatus ,    pipet toluene in  side  tube to   sample
 round bottom flask, discard  water.
 Rinse apparatus with 2 X 5ml toluene.
 4)  Filter  sample though  #54 Vhatman  into  a  clean round   bottom
 flask.   Rinse 1 st flask + filter with 2 X  5  ml toluene  .   Rotary
 evaporate to ~lml.
 5) go to step  #9)


           WATER SAMPLES

 DMark the water meniscus on the side of the  sample battle  for later
 determination  of sample volume.  Pour the  entire  sample into a  2-L
 separatory funnel.
 2)  Add  internal  standard spiking solution  to the  sample  in  the
 separatory funnel.
 3) Add 60ml  methylene chloride to the sample  bottle, seal,   and shake
 for  30 s to rinse  the inner surface.  Transfer the solvent  to  the
 separatory  funnel  and extract the  sample by  shaking the funnel  for
 two minutes  with periodic venting to release  e:ccess pressure.  Allow
 the  organic layer  to separate from the water phase for  a  minimum of
 10 min.   If  the  emulsion interface  between  layers  is more  than,  one-
 third  the  volume   of  the  solvent  layer,    the analyst   must  employ
 mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation.  The optimum
 technique  depends on  the  sample,  but may include stirring,   filtering
 at the  emulsion  though  glass wool,   cent ifugation,  or ether  physical
 methods.
 Collect  the  methylene chloride extract in a 250ml  Erlenmeyer flask.
 4)   Added  a  second  60 ml  volume  of  methylene chloride to the  sample
 bottle  and repeat the extraction procedure,  combining the  extract in
 the erlenmeycr flask.  Perform a  third extraction in the  saire ranner
 5)   Assemble  a Kuderna-Danish   concentrator bv attaching a 10 mi
 concentrator  tube to  a  500  ml evaporative flask.
 6i   Pour  the  combined extract into  the KD  concentrator.    Rinse  th^
 •erlenraeyer   flask  with  3 X 10ml of  methylene chloride   to  complete
 the quantitative  transfer.
 7)  Add  one or more  clean  boiling chips to the evaporator and  attach
 a  three-ball  Snyder column.  Prewet  the Snyder column by adding about
 1   ml of methylene  chloride to  the  top.   Place the  KD apparatus an a
 hot  water   bath   'x»50-65  deg C)  .so  that  the  ccncentator   tube  is
 partially  immersed  in  the  hot  water,   and the entire lower  rounded
 surface  of  the  r laslc is  bathed  with hot vapor.   Adjust  the vertical
 position  of  the  apparatus  and  the  water temperature as required  to
 complete the  concentration  in 15 to  20 minutes.   At the proper  rate
 of   distillation  the balls of  the  column will actively chatter  but
 the  chambers  will   not  flood  with   condensed  solvent.    When   the
apparent  volume of the  liquid reaches 1  ml  remove  the KD  apparatus
and  allow to cool and drain for  at  least  10  rain.
8)   Add 50 ml hexane and concentrate  to  1  ml.

                               D-233

-------
           PURIFICATION

 9)Transfer to  250  ml  separatory funnel with 5 X 5 ml hexane.  Add 50
 ml   5% tfaCl solution,   shake for 2 min and. discard aqueous  (bottom)
 layer.
 10)   Add  40 ml 20% KOH (w/v)  ,   shake for 2 min  .   discard  aqueous
 layer  <   bottom)  repeat  the base washing until no color is  visible
 the  the bottom layer— a  maximum of 4 times
 11)  Add 40 ml  water shake for 2 min ,  discard aqueous layer
 12)  Add 40 ml  concentrated sulfuric acid,   shake for 2 min  , discard
 bottom layer.   Repeat acid washing until no visible color is in  the
 bottom layer.  A maximum or 4 times.
 13)  Add 40 ml  water (care) shake for 2 min ,  discard bottom layer.
 14 Filter  upper layer though anhydrous sodium sulfate.   Rinse with 2
 X 5  ml hexane  into 50 ml  round bottom flask.
 14)  Rotary evaporate  to near dryness a <35 deg C
 15)  Add 2  ml hexane to sample and have ready to load
           25 ml  pipet  column with glasswool plug
           + 4g  purified sodium sulfate      (next page)
          •f- 4g  Voelm super neutral alumnia (desiccated)
          + 4g  sodium  sulfate
 Vash  with 10  ml hexane
 When   hexane   layer reaches  surface add sample the  add 4  ml  hexane
 rinse ( 2 X 2>    'NOTE.. NEVER ALLOV SOLUTIONS TO GO BELOW SURFACE OF
 SODIUM SULFATE.
 Discard all the  above  elutants

 Fr #1 = (into  scintillation  vial)
       10 ml 8%(v/v) methylene chloride/ hexane  —(hold.)
 Fr  #2  15ml 60%(v/v)  methylene  chloride/ hexane  into a 50 ml rcur.d
 bottom flask
 Rotary evaporate to near  dryness.
 16> Prepare carbon  column
   9.5g 3iosil A silica Gel  24  hrs ® 225 deg C
   +0.5g AX-21 carbon
      mi:-:  for  1 hour
   2ml disposable  pipet-broken  at  1.3ml mark- glasswool plug at  0.0
 mark
 + Biosil A silica  gel  to  O.lml  mark
 + carbon/Biosil A  mixture  to  0. 45ral  mark
 + glasswool plug
  Prewash  column with  :-  0.5ml  50% benzene/ methvlene chloride ,
 9.5 ml 50% benzene/  methylene  chloride,
 10 ml toluene
add Iral hexane
 17)  add 1  ml hexane
 load sample 0.2-0.4 ml  in hexane
 rinse with 2 X 0.2  ml  hexane
add 5.0 ml  hexane
add 10 ml  50 % benzene/ hexane
 18)  Turn column upside  down
Elute with  10  ml toluene
transfer to sample  tube and evaporate  to near dryness with nitrogen


                                D-234

-------
Cgl A     50 gr A-540 basic alumina  , activated  16-72hrs  <2  130deg C
    ~     purified sodium sulfate on top  
          2gni Silica gel
          1 era sodium sulfate on top


'_jjl 2     Directly under col 1
          25ial pipet with glasswool plug
          6gra  A-948 Alumina with 10% water  activated   16-72   hr-3
          130deg C.
          1cm sodiun sulfater on top

          Load sample onto column 1
          Rinse 2 X iral hexane
          Wash with 162ml hexane —discard.
          Remove column I .
          Onto column 2 add 20ml 1% methylene chloride/hexane--save
          Add 20ral  20% raethylene chloride/  hexane.
          Evaporate	Finished	
                                D-235

-------
                                 METHOD 8280

              THE ANALYSIS OF POLYCHLORINATED  DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS
                      AND POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS
1.0  SCOPE AND APPLICATION

     1.1  This method 1s appropriate for  the determination  of tetra-,  penta-,
hexa-,  hepta-,  and  octachlorinated  dibenzo-p-diox1ns   (PCDD's)  and dibenzo-
furans   (PCDF's)  in  chemical   wastes  including  still   bottoms,   fuel  oils,
sludges, fly ash, reactor residues,  soil and water.

     1.2  The sensitivity  of  this   method  is  dependent  upon  the level  of
interferents within a given matrix.   Proposed quantification levels for target
analytes were 2 ppb in soil samples, up to 10 ppb in other solid wastes and
10 ppt  in water.  Actual values  have  been shown to vary by homologous series
and, to a lesser degree, by individual  isomer.  The total detection limit for
each CDD/CQF homologous  series  is   determined  by  multiplying the detection
limit of a given isomer within  that  series by the number of peaks which can be
resolved under the gas chromatographic conditions.

     1.3  Certain   2,3,7,8-substituted   congeners   are   used   to  provide
calibration and method  recovery  information.    Proper  column selection and
access  to reference Isomer  standards,  may  in  certain cases, provide isomer
specific data.    Special  Instructions  are  included  which measure 2,3,7,8-
substituted congeners.

     1.4  This method is recommended for use only by analysts experienced with
residue analysis and skilled in mass spectral analytical techniques.

     1.5  Because of the extreme toxicity of these compounds, the analyst must
take necessary precautions to prevent  exposure  to  himself, or to others, of
materials known or believed to  contain  PCDD's or PCDF's.  Typical infectious
waste incinerators  are  probably  not  satisfactory
materials highly contaminated with PCOO's or PCDF's.
use these compounds should prepare a disposal plan to
by EPA's Dioxin Task Force (Contact  Conrad  Kleveno,
Street S.W., Washington,  D.C.  20450).    Additional
outlined in Appendix B.
       devices   for disposal  of
       A  laboratory planning  to
       be reviewed  and approved
       WH-548A,  U.S.  EPA,  401 M
        safety  instructions are
2.0  SUMMARY OF THE METHOD

     2.1   This procedure  uses  a  matrix-specific extraction, analyte-specifie
cleanup,   and   high-resolution   capillary   column   gas  chromatography/low
resolution mass spectrometry  (HRGC/LRMS)  techniques.
      2.2   If   interferents   are   encountered,
 cleanup procedures  to  aid the  analyst  in  their
 chart is  shown in Figure  1.
the  method
elimination.
provides  selected
 The analysis flow
                                   8280   D-236
                                                          Revision   	0_
                                                          Date   September
                          1986

-------
                      Complex
                       Waste
                      Sample
                            (1)   Add Internal  Standards:   13C12-PCDO's
                                 and I3C12-PCDF's.

                            (2)   Perform matrix-specific extraction.
                      Sample
                      Extract
                            (1)
                            (2)
                            (3)
                            (4)
                            (5)
                            (6)
                            (7)
Wash with 20% KOH
Wash with 51 Nad
Wash with cone.
Wash with 51 NaCl
Dry extract
Solvent exchange
Alumina column
                  601 CH2C12/nexane
                     Fraction
                            (1)  Concentrate eluate
                            (2)  Perform carbon column cleanup
                            (3)  Add recovery standard(s)-13C12-l,2,3,4-TCDO
                  Analyze by GC/MS
Flyure 1.  Method 8280 flow chart for sample extraction and cleanup as
 used for the analysis of PCOO's and PCDF's In complex waste samples.
                          8280   D-237
                                                  Revision       o
                                                  Date   September 1986

-------
3.0  INTERFERENCES

     3.1  Solvents, reagents, glassware,  and  other sample processing hardware
may  yield  discrete  artifacts  and/or  elevated  baselines  which  may cause
misinterpretation of chromatographic data.     All  of  these materials must be
demonstrated to be free from Interferents  under the conditions of analysis by
running laboratory method blanks.

     3.2  The use of  high  purity  reagents  and  solvents  helps to minimize
interference problems.  Purification of  solvents by distillation in all glass
systems may be required.

     3.3  Interferents co-extracted  from  the  sample  will vary considerably
from source to source,  depending  upon  the industrial process being sampled.
PCDD's and PCDF's  are  often  associated  with  other interfering chlorinated
compounds such as PCB's and polychlorinated diphenyl ethers which may be found
at concentrations several orders of magnitude higher than that of the analytes
of interest.   Retention  times  of  target  analytes  must  be verified using
reference standards.   These  values  must  correspond  to  the retention  time
windows established 1n  Section  6-3.    While  certain cleanup techniques are
provided as part of this method, unique samples may require additional  cleanup
techniques to achieve  the  method  detection  limit   (Section 11.6)  stated in
Table 8.

     3.4  High resolution capillary columns are  used  to resolve  as  many  PCOD
and  PCDF isomers as possible;  however,  no  single column  is  known  to  resolve
all  of  the isomers.

     3.5  Aqueous  samples cannot  be  aliquoted  from  sample  containers.  The
entire  sample must be  used  and the  sample container washed/rinsed  out with the
extracting solvent.


4.0  APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

     4.1  Sampling equipment  for discrete or composite sampling;

          4.1.1  Grab  sample  bottle—amber  glass,   1-liter or 1-quart  volume.
     French or Boston  Round design  1s recommended.   The container  must  be  acid
     washed and  solvent  rinsed before use to minimize  interferences.

          4.1.2   Bottle  caps—threaded to screw  onto the  sample  bottles.   Caps
     must be  lined with  Teflon.  Solvent washed  foil,  used  with  the  shiny  side
     toward the  sample,  may be   substituted  for  Teflon   if  the  sample is not
     corrosive.   Apply tape around  cap to completely seal  cap  to  bottom.

          4.1.3   Compositing   equipment—automatic    or    manual   compositing
      system.   No tygon  or   rubber   tubing  may   be  used,  and the system  must
      incorporate glass sample containers   for  the  collection of a minimum of
      250 ml.   Sample  containers  must  be  kept  refrigerated after sampling.

      4.2 Water  bath—heated,   with   concentric   ring    cover,   capable of
 temperature  control  (+2*C).  The bath should  be used in  a hood.

                                   8280  D-238
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
4.3  Gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer data system;

     4.3.1  Gas chromatograph:  An  analytical system with a temperature-
programmable gas  chromatograph  and  all  required accessories including
syringes, analytical columns, and gases.

     4.3.2  Fused silica capillary  columns  are  required.   As shown in
Table 1, three columns  were  evaluated  using a column performance check
mixture   containing   1,2,3,4-TCDD,   2,3,7,8-TCDD,   1,2,3,4,7   PeCDD,
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO, 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD, OCDD, and 2,3,7,8-TCDF.

The columns include the  following:    (a) 50-m CP-Sil-88 programmed 60*-
190* at 20Vminute, then 19CT-240* at SVminute; (b) DB-5 (30-m x 0.25-mm
I.D.; 0.25-um film thickness) programmed  170* for 10 minutes, then 17CT-
320* at  SVminute,  hold  at  3204C  for  20  minutes;  (c) 30-m SP-2250
programmed 70*-320* at  10'/minute.    Column/conditions (a) provide good
separation of 2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other TCDD's at the expense of longer
retention times for higher homologs.    Column/conditions (b) and (c) can
also  provide  acceptable  separation  of  2,3,7,8-TCDD.    Resolution of
2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other TCDD's  is  better  on column (c), but column
(b) is  more  rugged,  and  may  provide  better  separation  from certain
classes of interferents.  Data presented 1n Figure 2 and Tables 1 to 8 of
this  Method    were  obtained  using  a  DB-5  column  with  temperature
programming described in (b) above.   However, any capillary column which
provides  separation  of  2,3,7,8-TCDD   from   all  other  TCDD  isomers
equivalent to that specified in Section  6.3 may be used; this separation
must be demonstrated and  documented  using  the performance test mixture
described in Paragraph §.3.

     4.3.3  Mass spectrometer:  A low resolution Instrument is specified,
utilizing 70  volts  (nominal)  electron  energy  in  the electron impact
ionization mode.  The system  must  be capable of selected ion monitoring
(SIM) for at least 11 ions simultaneously,  with a cycle time of 1 sec or
less.  Minimum integration time for  SIM  is  50  ms per m/z.  The use of
systems not capable of monitoring 11 ions simultaneously will require the
analyst to make multiple injections.

     4.3.4  GC/MS  Interface:    Any  GC-to-MS  interface  that  gives an
acceptable calibration  response  for  each  analyte  of  interest at the
concentration  required  and  achieves  the  required  tuning performance
criteria (see Paragraphs  6.1.-6.3)  may  be  used.   GC-to-MS interfaces
constructed of all glass  or  glass-lined  materials are required.  Glass
can be deactivated by  silanlzing with dichlorodimethylsilane.  Inserting
a fused silica column directly  into  the  MS source is recommended;  care
must be taken not to expose the end of the column to the electron beam.

     4.3.5  Data system:  A  computer  system  must  be interfaced to the
mass spectrometer.  The system  must allow for the continuous acquisition
and storage on machine-readable media of all data obtained throughout the
duration of the chromatographic program.  The computer must have software
that can search any GC/MS data file  for  ions of a specific mass and can
plot such ion abundances versus time  or  scan number.  This type of plot


                             8280  D-239
                                                    Revision      0
                                                    Date  September 1986

-------
     1s defined as an Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP).   Software must also
     be able to Integrate the  abundance,   1n any SICP,  between specified time
     or scan number limits.

     4.4  P1pets-01sposable,  Pasteur,  150-mm   long   x  5-mm  I.D.  (Fisher
Scientific Company, No. 13-678-6A, or equivalent).

          4.4.1  P1pet,  disposable,   serologlcal  10-mL  (American Scientific
     Products No.  P4644-10,  or  equivalent)  for  preparation  of the carbon
     column specified 1n Paragraph 4.19.

     4.5  Amber glass bottle (500-mL, Teflon-lined screw-cap).

     4.6  Reacti-vial 2-mL,  amber  glass  (Pierce  Chemical  Company).  These
should be sllanized prior to use.

     4.7  500-mL Erlenmeyer flask (American Scientific Products Cat. No. f4295
SOOfO) fitted with Teflon stoppers (ASP No. S9058-8, or equivalent).

     4.8  Wrist Action Shaker (VWR No. 57040-049, or equivalent).

     4.9  125-mL  and  2-L  Separatory  Funnels   (Fisher  Scientific  Company,
No. 10-437-5b, or equivalent).

     4.10  500-mL Kuderna-Oanlsh  fitted with a 10-mL concentrator tube and
3-ball Snyder column  (Ace Glass No. 6707-02, 6707-12, 6575-02, or equivalent).

     4.11  Teflon boiling chips  (Berghof/American Inc., Main  St., Raymond, New
Hampshire 03077, No,  15021-450,   or   equivalent).    Wash with hexane prior to
use.

     4.12  300-mHi x  10.5-mm glass  chromatographic  column fitted  with  Teflon
stopcock.

     4.13  15-mL   conical   concentrator   tubes   (Kontes   No.  K-288250,  or
equivalent).

     4.14  Adaptors  for  concentrator   tubes   (14/20  to  19/22)  (Ace Glass No.
9092-20, or  equivalent).

     4.15  Nitrogen  blowdown  apparatus  (N-Evap (reg.  trademark)  Analytical
Evaporator    Model    111,     Organomatlon   Associates   Inc.,   Northborough,
Massachusetts  or  equivalent).     Teflon   tubing connection   to  trap  and gas
regulator  is required.

     4.16  Microflex conical  vials 2.0-mL (Kontes K-749000, or equivalent).

      4.17   Filter paper  (Whatman No.  54,   or equivalent).   Glass fiber filters
or glass wool  plugs  are  also  recommended.

      4.18   Solvent reservoir  (125-mL)  Kontes;     (special  order item)  12.5-cm
diameter,  compatible with  gravity carbon  column.


                                   8280  D-240
                                                         Revision       0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
     4.19  Carbon column (gravity  flow);    Prepare carbon/silica gel packing
material bymixing5  percent  (byweight)  active  carbon  AX-21  (Anderson
Development Co., Adrain,  Michigan),  pre-washed  with  methanol  and dried i_n
vacuo at 110*C and 95 percent (by  weight)  Silica gel (Type 60, EM reagent 70
to 230 mesh, CMS No. 393-066)  followed  by  activation of the mixture at 130*
for 6 hr.  Prepare a  10-mL  disposable  serological pi pet by cutting off each
end to achieve a  4-1n.  column.    F1re  polish  both ends; flare 1f desired.
Insert a glass-wool plug at one end and pack with 1 g of the carbon/silica gel
mixture.  Cap the packing with a glass-wool plug.  (Attach reservoir to column
for addition of solvents).

     Option:  Carbon column (HPLC):  A  silanized glass HPLC column (10 mm x 7
cm), or equivalent, which  contains  1  g  of  a  packing prepared by mixing 5
percent (by weight) active  carbon  AX-21,  (Anderson Development Co., Adrian,
Michigan), washed with methanol  and  dried  1_n  vacuo at 110*C, and 95 percent
(by weight)  10  urn  silica  (Spherisorb  S10W  from  Phase Separations, Inc.,
Norwalk, Connecticut).  The mixture must  then be stirred and sieved through a
38-um screen (U.S. Sieve  Designation  400-mesh, American Scientific Products,
No. S1212-400, or equivalent) to remove any clumps.1

     4.20  HPLC pump with loop  valve  (1.0  ml)  injector  to  be used in the
optional carbon column cleanup procedure.

     4.21  Dean-Stark trap, 5-  or  10-mL  with  T  joints, (Fisher Scientific
Company, No. 09-146-5, or equivalent) condenser and 125-mL flask.

     4.22  Continuous liquid-liquid extractor (Hershberg-Wolfe type, Lab Glass
No. LG-6915; or equivalent.).

     4.23  Roto-evaporator, R-110.   Buchi/Brinkman  - American Scientific No.
£5045-10; or equivalent.


5.0  REAGENTS

     5.1  Potassium hydroxide (ASC):  20 percent (w/v) in distilled water.

     5.2  Sulfuric acid  (ACS), concentrated.

     5.3  Methylene  chloride,  hexane,  benzene,  petroleum  ether, methanol,
tridecane, Isooctane, toluene,  cyclohexane.    Distilled  in glass or highest
available purity.

     5.4  Prepare stock  standards   in  a  glovebox  from  concentrates or neat
materials.  The stock solutions (50  ppm)  are  stored in the dark at 4*C, and
checked frequently for signs  of  degradation  or evaporation, especially just
prior to the preparation of working standards.
1    The carbon column preparation and  use  is adapted from W. A. Korfmacher,
 L. G. Rushing, D. M. Nestorick, H. C. Thompson, Jr., R. K. Mitchum, and J. R.
 Kominsky,  Journal  of  High  Resolution  Chromatography  and  Chromatography
 Communications, 8, 12-19  (1985).

                                  8280  D-241
                                                         Revision      0
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
     5.5  Alumina,  neutral,  Super 1,  Woelm,   80/200   mesh.    Store in  a  sealed
container at room temperature 1n a desiccator over self-Indicating silica gel.

     5.6  Prepurifled nitrogen gas.

     5.7  Anhydrous sodium  sulfate  (reagent  grade):     Extracted  by  manual
shaking with several portions of hexane and  dried at 100*C.
water.
     5.8  Sodium chloride - (analytical  reagent),  5 percent (w/v)  in distilled
6.0  CALIBRATION

     6.1  Two types of calibration procedures are required.   One type,  initial
calibration, is required  before  any  samples  are  analyzed  and is required
intermittently throughout sample analyses  as  dictated  by  results of routine
calibration procedures described below.   The other type, routine calibration,
consists  of  analyzing   the   column   performance   check  solution  and  a
concentration calibration solution of 500  ng/ml  (Paragraph 6.2).  No samples
are to be analyzed until acceptable calibration as described in Paragraphs 6.3
and 6.6 1s demonstrated and documented.

     6.2  Initial calibration:

          6.2.1     Prepare multi-level calibration  standards^ keeping one of
the recovery standards and the  internal standard at fixed concentrations (500
ng/mL).    Additional   Internal   standards   (^Ci2-OCDD  1,000  ng/ml)  are
recommended when quantification of  the  hepta-  and octa-isomers is required.
The use of separate  internal  standards  for  the PCDF's is also recommended.
Each calibration standard should contain the following compounds:
2,3,7,8-TCDQ,
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD

2,3,7,8-TCOF
l,2,3,7,8,PeCOF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCOF
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF
                or any available
                or any available
                or any available
                or any available
                or any available
                or any available
OCDO, OCOF, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO,
                                        2,3,7,8,X-PeCDD isomer,
                                        2,3,7,8,X,Y-HxCOD isomer,
                                        2,3,7,8,X,Y,Z-HpCDD isomer,
                                        2f3,7,8,X-PeCDF Isomer,
                                        2,3,7,8,X,Y,HxCDF isomer,
                                        2f3,7,8,X,Y,Z-HpCDF Isomer,
                                                        and  13C12-OCOO.
 2     13Ci2~labeled  analytes  are  available   from Cambridge  Isotope  Laboratory,
 Woburn,  Massachusetts.   Proper quantification  requires  the  use  of a  specific
 labeled  isomer for each  congener  to  be  determined.  When labeled PCOO's and
 PCDF's of each homolog are   available,   their  use will be  required consistent
 with the technique of isotopic dilution.
                                   8280   D-242
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
Recommended concentration levels for  standard  analytes  are 200, 500,  1,000,
2,000, and 5,000 ng/mL.  These values  may be adjusted 1n order to Insure that
the  analyte  concentration  falls  within  the  calibration  range.    Two uL
Injections of calibration  standards  should  be  made.    However, some GC/MS
instruments may require the use of  a 1-uL Injection volume; if this Injection
volume is used then  all  Injections  of  standards, sample extracts and blank
extracts must also be made at  this Injection volume.  Calculation of relative
response factors is described 1n Paragraph 11.1.2.  Standards must be analyzed
                              used  1n  the  final  sample  extract.   A wider
                              for  higher  level  samples  provided  it can be
                               range  of  the  method,  and the Identification
criteria defined in Paragraph 10.4 are  met.   All standards must be stored in
an isolated  refrigerator  at  4*C  and  protected  from  light.   Calibration
standard solutions must be replaced routinely after six months.
using the  same  solvent  as
calibration range is  useful
described within  the  linear
     6.3  Establish operating parameters for  the GC/MS system; the instrument
should be tuned to meet  the  Isotopic  ratio  criteria  listed in Table 3 for
PCOD's and PCDF's.   Once  tuning  and  mass  calibration procedures have been
completed, a column performance  check  mixture^ containing the isomers listed
below should be injected into the GC/MS system:

TCDD      1,3,6,8; 1,2,8,9; 2,3,7,8; 1,2,3,4; 1,2,3,7; 1,2,3,9
PeCDD     1,2,4,6,8; 1,2,3,8,9
HxCDO     1,2,3,4,6,9; 1,2,3,4,6,7
HpCDD     1,2,3,4,6,7,8; 1,2,3,4,6,7,9
OCDD      1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9

TCOF      1,3,6,8; 1,2,8,9
PeCDF     1,3,4,6,8; 1,2,3,8,9
HxCOF     1,2,3,4,6,8; 1,2,3,4,8,9
HpCDF     1,2,3,4,6,7,8; 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
OCDF      1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9

     Because of the known  overlap  between the late-eluting tetra-isomers and
the early-eluting penta-isomers  under  certain  column  conditions, it may be
necessary to perform two  injections  to  define the TCOD/TCOF and PeCDO/PeCOF
elution windows, respectively.   Use  of  this  performance check mixture will
enable the following parameters to be  checked:  (a) the retention windows for
each of the homologues,  (b)  the  GC  resolution of 2,3,7,8-TCDO and 1,2,3,4-
TCOO, and (c) the relative 1on abundance criteria listed for PCDD's and PCDF's
in Table 3.  GC column performance  should be checked daily for resolution and
peak shape using this check mixture.

     The chromatographic peak separation between 2,3,7,8-TCDD  and 1,2,3,4-TCDD
must be resolved with a valley of £25 percent, where

          Valley Percent *  (x/y)  (100)

     x = measured as  in Figure 2
     y = the peak height of 2,3,7,8-TCOD
 3     Performance  check  mixtures   are   available   from Brehm Laboratory, Wright
 State  University,  Dayton,  Ohio.
                                   8280   D-243
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
     It 1s the  responsibility  of  the  laboratory  to  verify  the conditions
suitable for maximum resolution of  2,3,7,8-TCOO  from all  other TCOD isomers.
The peak representing 2,3,7,8-TCDD should be labeled and Identified as such  on
all chromatograms.

     6.4  Acceptable  SIM  sensitivity  is  verified  by  achieving  a minimum
signal-to-nolse ratio of 50:1  for  the  m/z  320 ion of 2,3,7,8-TCDD obtained
from injection of the 200 ng/mL calibration standard.

     6.5  From  injections  of  the  5  calibration  standards,   calculate the
relative response factors  (RRF's)  of  analytes  vs. the appropriate internal
standards, as described in  Paragraph  11.1.2.   Relative response factors for
the hepta- and octa-chlorinated CDD's and CDF's are to be calculated using the
corresponding ^c^-octachlorinated standards.

     6.6  For each analyte calculate the  mean relative response factor (RRF),
the standard  deviation,  and  the  percent  relative  standard deviation from
triplicate determinations of  relative  response  factors for each calibration
standard solution.

     6.7  The  percent  relative  standard  deviations   (based  on   triplicate
analysis) of  the  relative   response  factors   for  each calibration standard
solution should not exceed 15  percent.     If this condition is not  satisfied,
remedial action should be taken.

     6.8  The Laboratory must  not  proceed  with  analysis  of samples before
determining and documenting acceptable calibration with  the criteria specified
in Paragraphs 6.3 and 6.7.

     6.9  Routine calibration;

          6.9.1   Inject  a  2-uL  aliquot   of   the   column  performance   check
     mixture.  Acquire at least five data   points  for  each GC peak and use  the
     same data acquisition time for each of the  ions being monitored.
          NOTE:   The  same  data  acquisition   parameters  previously used to
                  analyze concentration  calibration  solutions  during initial
                  calibration  must be used   for  the performance  check solution.
                  The column performance  check   solution  must  be   run at  the
                  beginning and end  of  a   12   hr  period.   If the  contractor
                  laboratory    operates   during    consecutive   12-hr periods
                  (shifts), analysis of the  performance  check  solution at  the
                  beginning of each  12-hr period  and  at the end  of  the final
                  12-hr  period is  sufficient.

     Determine  and   document   acceptable   column  performance   as  described in
     Paragraph  6.3.

           6.9.2   Inject  a  2-uL aliquot of  the calibration  standard solution at
      500 ng/mL  at the   beginning   of   a   2-hr  period.  Determine  and document
      acceptable   calibration   as   specified   1n   Paragraph   6.3,   i.e.,  SIM
      sensitivity  and relative ion abundance  criteria.   The measured RRF's of
                                   8280  D-244
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
     all  analytes must be within +30 percent of the mean values established  by
     initial  analyses of the calibration standard solutions.


7.0  QUALITY CONTROL

     7.1  Before processing any samples,  the analyst must demonstrate through
the  analysis  of  a  method  blank   that  all  glassware  and  reagents  are
interferent-free at the  method  detection  limit  of  the matrix of interest.
Each time a set of samples is  extracted,  or there is a change in reagents, a
method  blank  must   be   processed   as   a   safeguard  against  laboratory
contamination.

     7.2  A laboratory "method blank" must  be  run along with each analytical
batch (20 or fewer samples).  A  method blank is performed by executing all  of
the specified extraction and cleanup  steps,  except for the introduction of a
sample.  The method blank  is  also  dosed  with  the internal standards.  For
water samples, one liter of deionized and/or distilled water should be used as
the method blank.  Mineral  oil  may  be  used  as  the method blank for other
matrices.

     7.3  The laboratory will  be  expected  to analyze performance evaluation
samples as provided by the EPA on  a periodic basis throughout the course of a
given project.   Additional  sample  analyses  will  not  be  permitted if the
performance criteria are not achieved.    Corrective  action must be taken and
acceptable performance must be demonstrated before sample analyses can resume.

     7.4  Samples may be split  with  other  participating  labs on a periodic
basis to ensure  interlaboratory consistency.   At  least one sample per set of
24 must be run in duplicate to determine  intralaboratory precision.

     7.5  Field  duplicates  (individual  samples taken from the same location at
the  same  time)  should  be  analyzed   periodically  to  determine  the total
precision (field and lab).

     7.6  Where  appropriate, "field blanks"  will  be  provided  to monitor for
possible cross-contamination of  samples  in   the  field.   The  typical "field
blank" will consist of uncontaminated soil  (background soil taken off-site).

     7.7  GC column performance  must   be  demonstrated initially and verified
prior to analyzing any sample in   a  12-hr  period.  The GC column performance
check solution   must  be  analyzed  under  the  same  chromatographic and mass
spectrometric conditions used for  other samples and standards.

     7.8  Before using  any  cleanup  procedure,   the  analyst   must process a
series of  calibration  standards   (Paragraph  6.2)  through  the procedure to
validate elution patterns and the  absence of Interferents from reagents.  Both
alumina column and carbon column performance must  be checked.  Routinely check
the 8 percent CH2Cl2/hexane eluate  of  environmental extracts  from the alumina
column for presence of target analytes.
     NOTE:  This fraction is intended to  contain  a high  level of interferents
            and  analysis near the  method  detection limit may not be possible.


                                   8280  D-245
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
8.0  SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION,  AND HANDLING

     8.1  Grab and composite samples  must  be  collected in glass containers.
Conventional sampling practices must  be  followed.     The  bottle must not be
prewashed  with  sample  before  collection.    Composite  samples  should  be
collected in glass containers.    Sampling  equipment  must  be free of tygon,
rubber tubing, other potential sources  of  contamination which may absorb the
target analytes.

     8.2  All samples must be  stored   at  4*C,   extracted  within 30 days and
completely analyzed within 45 days of  collection.


9.0  EXTRACTION AND. CLEANUP PROCEDURES

     9.1  Internal standard addition.   Use a sample aliquot of 1 g to 1,000 mL
(typical sample size requirements  for  each  type  of  matrix are provided in
Paragraph 9.2) of the chemical  waste  or  soil   to be analyzed.  Transfer the
sample to a tared  flask  and  determine  the  weight  of  the sample.  Add an
appropriate quantity of 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD, and any other material which  is to
be used as an  internal  standard,  (Paragraph  6.2).    All samples should be
spiked with at least  one  internal standard, for example, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD,
to give a concentration of 500 ng/mL  1n the final concentrated extract.   As an
example, a  10 g sample concentrated to  a   final volume of 100 uL requires the
addition of 50 ng of 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD,  assuming 100% recovery.  Adoption of
different   calibration  so>ution   sets    (as    needed  to  achieve  different
quantification  limits  for different   congeners)  will  require a change  in the
fortification  level.    Individual  concentration  levels   for each  homologous
series must be  specified.

      9.2   Extracti on

           9.2.1   Sludge/fuel  oil.   Extract  aqueous sludge samples  by refluxing
      a  sample  (e.g.  2  g) with  50  mL  of  toluene (benzene)  in  a  125-mL flask
      fitted with  a Dean-Stark water   separator.   Continue refluxing  the  sample
      until  all  the   water   has been   removed.    Cool   the  sample,  filter the
      toluene  extract through   a  fiber  filter,   or   equivalent,  into  a  100-mL
      round bottom flask.   Rinse the filter with 10  mL of toluene,  combine the
      extract  and  rinsate.   Concentrate  the  combined solution  to  near dryness
      using a rotary  evaporator at  50*C.     Use   of an inert  gas  to concentrate
      the  extract  is  also  permitted.   Proceed  with Step 9.2.4.

           9.2.2  Still  bottom.    Extract  still  bottom  samples  by mixing  a
      sample (e.g.,  1.0 g)  with 10   mL  of  toluene  (benzene)  in  a small  beaker
      and  filtering  the solution through  a glass fiber  filter (or equivalent)
      into a 50-mL round bottom flask.   Rinse the beaker and filter with 10 mL
      of toluene.   Concentrate  the combined  toluene solution to near dryness
      using a rotary  evaporator at   50'C  while  connected to a water aspirator.
      Proceed with Step 9.2.4.
                                   8280   D-246
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
     9.2.3  Fly ash.  Extract fly  ash  samples by placing a sample (e.g.
10 g) and an equivalent amount  of  anhydrous sodium sulfate 1n a Soxhlet
extraction apparatus charged with 100 mL of toluene (benzene) and extract
for 16 hr using a three cycle/hour schedule.  Cool and filter the toluene
extract through a glass  fiber  filter  paper  Into a 500-mL round bottom
flask.  Rinse the filter with 5  mL of toluene.  Concentrate the combined
toluene solution to  near  dryness  using  a  rotary  evaporator at 50*C.
Proceed with Step 9.2.4.

     9.2.4  Transfer the  residue  to  a  125-mL  separatory funnel using
15 mL of hexane.  Rinse  the  flask  with two 5-mL aliquots of hexane and
add the rinses to  the  funnel.    Shake  2  min  with  .50  mi of 5% NaCI
solution, discard the aqueous layer and proceed with Step 9.3.

     9.2.5  Soil.  Extract soil samples by placing the sample (e.g. 10 g)
and  an  equivalent  amount  of  anhydrous  sodium  sulfate  in  a 500-mL
Erlenmeyer flask fitted with a Teflon stopper.  Add 20 mL of methanol and
80 mL of petroleum ether, in that order, to the flask.  Shake on a wrist-
action shaker for two hr.  The solid portion of sample should mix freely.
If a smaller soil  aliquot  is  used,  scale  down the amount of methanol
proportionally.

          9.2.5.1  Filter the  extract  from  Paragraph  9.2.5  through a
     glass funnel  fitted  with  a  glass  fiber  filter  and filled with
     anhydrous  sodium  sulfate   into   a   500-mL  Kuderna-Oanish  (KO)
     concentrator fitted with a 10-mL  concentrator  tube.   Add 50 mL of
     petroleum ether to  the  Erlenmeyer  flask,  restopper  the flask and
     swirl the sample gently, remove the stopper  carefully and decant the
     solvent through the funnel as above.  Repeat this procedure with two
     additional 50-mL  aliquots  of  petroleum  ether.    Wash the sodium
     sulfate 1n the funnel with two additional  5-mL portions of petroleum
     ether.

          9.2.5.2  Add a Teflon  or  PFTE  boiling  chip  and a three-ball
     Snyder column to the KQ  flask.   Concentrate in a 70*C  water  bath to
     an  apparent volume of  10 ml.    Remove the  apparatus  from the water
     bath and allow 1t to cool for 5 min.

          9.2.5.3  Add 50 mL  of hexane  and   a   new boiling  chip to the KD
      flask.  Concentrate in a water bath  to an apparent  volume of 10 ml.
      Remove the  apparatus from the  water   bath  and  allow  to cool  for 5
     min.

          9.2.5.4   Remove and invert the Snyder  column  and  rinse  it down
      into the KO with two 1-mL  portions  of hexane.  Decant the  contents
      of  the KD  and  concentrator  tube   into   a 125-mL  separatory  funnel.
      Rinse the  KD with  two  additional   5-mL portions of  hexane,  combine.
      Proceed with Step  9.3.

      9.2.6  Aqueous samples:   Mark the  water   meniscus  on the  side of the
 1-L  sample bottle for   later   determination  of  the  exact  sample  volume.
                              8280   D-247
                                                     Revision      0
                                                     Date   September  1986

-------
    Pour the entire sample (approximately  1-L)  Into a 2-L separatory funnel.
    Proceed with Step 9.2.6.1.
         NOTE:  A continuous liquid-liquid extractor may  be used 1n place of
                a separatory funnel   when  experience  with  a  sample from a
                given source Indicates that  a  serious emulsion problem will
                result or  an  emulsion  1s  encountered  using  a separatory
                funnel.   Add  60  ml  of  methylene  chloride  to the sample
                bottle, seal,  and  shake  for  30  sec  to  rinse  the Inner
                surface.  Transfer the solvent  to the extractor.  Repeat the
                sample bottle rinse with an  additional 50- to 100-mL portion
                of methylene chloride  and  add  the  rinse to the extractor.
                Add 200 to 500  mL  of  methylene  chloride to the distilling
                flask;  add  sufficient   reagent   water  to  ensure  proper
                operation, and extract for 24 hr.   Allow to cool, then detach
                the distilling flask.    Dry  and  concentrate the extract as
                described in Paragraphs  9.2.6.1  and  9.2.6.2.  Proceed with
                Paragraph 9.2.6.3.

              9.2.6.1  Add 60 ml  methylene  chloride  to  the sample bottle,
         seal and shake 30  sec  to  rinse  the  inner surface.  Transfer the
         solvent to the separatory funnel  and  extract the sample by shaking
         the funnel for 2 m1n with periodic venting.  Allow the organic layer
         to separate from the water phase  for  a  minimum of 10 min.  If the
         emulsion interface between layers is  more than one-third the volume
         of the solvent layer, the  analyst must employ mechanical techniques
         to complete the phase separation.  Collect the methylene chloride
         (3 x  60  mL)  directly  Into  a  500-mL Kuderna-Oanish concentrator
         (mounted with  a  10-mL  concentrator  tube)  by  passing the sample
         extracts through a filter funnel packed with  a glass wool plug and
         5 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate.   After the  third extraction, rinse
         the sodium sulfate with an additional 30 ml of methylene chloride to
         ensure quantitative  transfer.

              9.2.6.2   Attach a Snyder column and  concentrate  the extract on
         a water bath  until  the apparent  volume  of  the  liquid  reaches 5 mL.
         Remove the K-D apparatus and allow  it to drain and cool  for at least
         10 min.   Remove  the  Snyder  column,  add 50  ml hexane,  re-attach  the
         Snyder column and  concentrate   to   approximately  5   mL.    Add a  new
         boiling chip  to  the  K-D  apparatus  before  proceeding with  the  second
         concentration step.

         Rinse  the flask and the  lower  joint with 2 x 5 mL hexane and combine
          rinses with  extract to  give a  final  volume of about  15 mL.

              9.2.6.3   Determine  the original sample  volume  by refilling the
          sample  bottle to the mark  and   transferring the  liquid to a 1,000-mL
          graduated cylinder.  Record the  sample   volume  to the nearest 5 mL.
          Proceed  with Paragraph  9.3.

     9.3  In a 250-mL Separatory  funnel,   partition  the solvent (15 mL hexane)
against 40  mL of  20  percent  (w/v)   potassium  hydroxide.   Shake for 2 min.
                                  8280  D-248
                                                         Revision      Q
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
Remove and discard the aqueous layer  (bottom).   Repeat the base washing until
no color is visible in the  bottom  layer  (perform base washings a maximum of
four times).   Strong  base  (KOH)  is 'known  to degrade certain PCOD/PCDF's,
contact time must be minimized.

     9.4  Partition the solvent (15  ml  hexane)  against  40  ml of 5 percent
(w/v) sodium chloride.  Shake  for  2  m1n.   Remove and discard aqueous layer
(bottom).
     NOTE:  Care  should  be  taken  due  to  the  heat  of neutralization and
     hydration.

     9.5  Partition the solvent (15 ml  hexane)   against 40 ml of concentrated
sulfuric acid.   Shake  for  2  min.    Remove  and  discard the aqueous layer
(bottom).  Repeat the acid  washings  until  no  color  is visible in the acid
layer.  (Perform acid washings a maximum of four times.)

     9.6  Partition the  extract  against  40  ml  of  5  percent (w/v) sodium
chloride.  Shake for 2 min.    Remove  and discard the aqueous layer  (bottom).
Dry the organic layer by pouring  through a funnel containing anhydrous sodium
sulfate into a 50-mL round bottom  flask,  wash the separatory funnel with two
15-mL portions of hexane,  pour  through  the  funnel,  and combine the hexane
extracts.  Concentrate  the  hexane  solution  to  near  dryness with a rotary
evaporator  (35'C water bath), making  sure  all  traces of toluene are removed.
(Use of  blowdown  with  an  inert  gas  to  concentrate  the  extract is also
permitted).

     9.7  Pack a gravity column (glass 300-mm x 10.5-mm), fitted with a Teflon
stopcock, in the following manner:

     Insert a glass-wool plug into the bottom  of the column.  Add a 4-g layer
of sodium sulfate.  Add a 4-g layer of Woelm super 1 neutral alumina.  Tap the
top of the column gently.  Woelm super 1 neutral alumina need not be activated
or cleaned prior to use but should be stored 1n a sealed desiccator.  Add a 4-
g layer of  sodium sulfate to cover  the  alumina.   Elute with 10 ml of hexane
and close the stopcock just prior to  the exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
to air.  Discard the eluant.   Check the column for channeling.  If channeling
is present discard the column.  Do not tap a wetted column.

     9.8  Dissolve the residue from Step 9.6  in  2 ml of hexane and  apply the
hexane  solution to the top of the  column.   Elute with enough hexane  (3-4 mL)
to complete the transfer of the sample  cleanly to the surface of the alumina.
Discard  the eluant.

          9.8.1   Elute with 10 ml  of  8   percent   (v/v) methylene chloride in
     hexane.  Check by GC/MS  analysis  that  no PCOD's or  PCDF's are  eluted in
     this  fraction.   See  Paragraph 9.9.1.

           9.8.2   Elute  the  PCDD's  and  PCDF's from   the  column with  15 mL of 60
     percent  (v/v) methylene  chloride  1n hexane and collect  this fraction  in a
     conical  shaped  (15-mL) concentrator tube.
                                   8280   D-249
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
    9.9  Carbon column cleanup;

         Prepare a carbon column as described In Paragraph 4.18.

         9.9.1  Using a  carefully  regulated  stream  of nitrogen  (Paragraph
    4.15),  concentrate  the  8  percent  fraction  from  the  alumina column
    (Paragraph 9.8.1) to about 1 ml.  Wash the sides of the tube with a small
    volume of hexane  (1 to 2 ml) and  reconcentrate to about 1 ml.  Save this
    8 percent concentrate for  GC/MS  analysis  to  check for breakthrough of
    PCDO's and PCDF's.  Concentrate the 60 percent fraction (Paragraph 9.8.2)
    to about 2 to 3  ml.    Rinse  the carbon with 5 ml cyclohexane/methylene
    chloride (50:50 v/v) 1n the  forward  direction  of  flow and then in the
    reverse direction of flow.  While still  in the reverse direction of flow,
    transfer the sample concentrate to  the  column  and  elute with 10 ml of
    cyclohexane/methylene  chloride   (50:50  v/v)   and  5  ml  of  methylene
    chloride/methanol/benzene  (75:20:5, v/v).    Save  all  above eluates and
    combine  (this fraction may be used as a  check on column efficiency).  Now
    turn the column over  and  in  the  direction  of  forward  flow elute the
    PCDD/PCDF fraction with 20 ml toluene.
         NOTE:  Be sure no carbon fines are  present in the eluant.

         9.9.2  Alternate carbon column cleanup.  Proceed as in Section 9.9.1
    to obtain the 60  percent  fraction  re-concentrated  to  400 ul which  is
    transferred to an  HPLC  Injector loop   (1  ml).    The Injector  loop  is
    connected to the  optional  column  described   1n Paragraph 4.18.  Rinse the
    centrifuge tube with  500  ul  of hexane  and  add  this   rinsate to the
    injector loop.    Load  the  combined  concentrate  and  rinsate onto the
    column.  Elute the column  at 2 ml/min, ambient temperature, with 30 ml  of
    cyclohexane/methylene chloride 1:1  (v/v).  Discard the eluant.  Backflush
    the  column with 40  ml  toluene   to  elute   and collect PCDO's  and PCDF's
     (entire  fraction).    The  column  is    then  discarded  and   30  ml   of
    cyclohexane/methylene chloride 1:1  (v/v)   is  pumped through a  new column
    to prepare 1t for the next sample.

         9.9.3  Evaporate the  toluene fraction  to  about  1   ml on a rotary
    evaporator using  a water bath at  50*C.   Transfer to a 2.0-ml Reacti-vial
    using  a  toluene   rinse  and  concentrate  to  the  desired  volume  using  a
    stream of N£.  The final volume should be  100 ul for soil samples  and
    500  ul for sludge, still   bottom,  and   fly  ash samples; this  is provided
     for  guidance, the correct  volume  will   depend on the relative  concentra-
    tion of  target analytes.   Extracts which are determined to  be outside the
    calibration range for  Individual  analytes   must  be diluted or a  smaller
    portion  of the sample must be   re-extracted.  Gently  swirl  the  solvent  on
     the  lower portion of   the   vessel  to   ensure complete dissolution of  the
     PCDO's and  PCDF's.

     9.10  Approximately  1  hr  before   HRGC/LRMS  analysis,  transfer  an  aliquot
of the extract  to   a   micro-vial   (Paragraph   4.16).     Add  to  this  sufficient
recovery  standard  (13Ci2l,2,3,4-TCDO)  to   give  a  concentration of 500 ng/ml.
(Example:  36 ul  aliquot  of  extract  and   4 ul of  recovery  standard solution.
Remember to adjust the final  result   to   correct for this  dilution.   Inject  an
appropriate aliquot  (1 or 2 ul) of the sample into  the  GC/MS  instrument.


                                  8280  D-250
                                                         Revision      0
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
10.0  6C/MS ANALYSIS

     10.1  When toluene 1s employed as the final  solvent use of a bonded phase
column from Paragraph 4.3.2 1s  recommended.   Solvent exchange into tridecane
1s required for other liquid phases or nonbonded  columns (CP-S11-88).
     NOTE:  Chromatographic conditions must be adjusted to account for solvent
            boiling points.

     10.2  Calculate response factors for  standards  relative to the Internal
standards, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO  and  13c12-OCOD  (see  Section  11).    Add the
recovery standard (13Ci2-l»2,3,4-TCDD) to the samples prior to injection.  The
concentration of the recovery standard 1n  the sample extract must be the same
as that 1n the calibration standards used to measure the response factors.

     10.3  Analyze samples with selected ion monitoring, using all of the ions
listed in Table 2.  It 1s recommended  that the GC/MS run be divided into five
selected 1on monitoring sections, namely:   (1) 243, 257,, 304, 306, 320, 322,
332, 334, 340, 356, 376   (TCOO's,  TCDF's,  "C^-labeled internal and recovery
standards, PeCDO's, PeCDF's, HxCOE);  (2)  277,  293,  306, 332, 338, 340, 342,
354, 356, 358, 410 (peCDD's,  PeCDF's,  HpCOE);  (3)  311, 327, 340, 356, 372,
374, 376, 388, 390, 392,  446,   (HxCOD's,   HxCDF's,  OCDE);  (4) 345, 361, 374,
390, 406, 408, 410, 422,  424,  426,  480 (HpCOD's, HpCOF's, NCOE) and (5) 379,
395, 408, 424, 442,  444,  458,  460,  470,  472, 514  (OCDO, OCDF,  13Ci2-OCOD,
DCDE).  Cycle time not  to  exceed  1  sec/descriptor.  It 1s  recommended that
selected 1on monitoring section  1  should  be  applied  during   the GC  run to
encompass the retention window (determined  1n Paragraph 6.3) of the  first- and
Iast-elut1ng tetra-chlorlnated Isomers.  If a  response 1s observed  at m/z 340
or 356, then the  SC/MS   analysis  must  be repeated;  selected ion  monitoring
section 2 should then  be applied  to  encompass  the  retention  window  of the
first- and Iast-elut1ng penta-chlorinated isomers.   HxCDE, HpCDE,  OCDE, NCOE,
DCDE, are abbreviations for  hexa-,   hepta-, octa-, nona-, and decachlorinated
diphenyl ether, respectively.

     10.4  Identfffcation criteria for PCDD's and PCDF's;

          10.4.1  All  of the  characteristic  ions,   i.e.  quantisation ion,
     confirmation Ions, listed 1n Table  2  for  each   class of PCDD and PCDF,
     must be present in the  reconstructed  1on chromatogram.  It is desirable
     that the  M  -  COC1  1on  be  monitored  as  an   additional  requirement.
     Detection limits will be based   on quantitation ions within  the molecules
     in cluster.

          10.4.2  The maximum  intensity  of  each  of  the  specified charac-
     teristic Ions must coincide within 2 scans or 2 sec.

          10.4.3  The relative intensity of the selected, isotopic  ions  within
     the molecular ion cluster of a homologous series  of  PCDD's of  PCDF's must
     lie within the range specified in Table 3.

          10.4.4  The GC  peaks assigned to  a given homologous  series must have
     retention times within  the  window  established   for   that  series  by the
     column performance solution.


                                  8280  D-251
                                                          Revision     0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
     10.5  Quantltate the PCDO and  PCDF  peaks  from the response relative to
the appropriate Internal  standard.    Recovery  of each Internal  standard)  vs.
the recovery standard must be greater than 40 percent.  It Is recommended that
samples with recoveries of less than 40 percent or greater than 120 percent be
re-extracted and re-analyzed.
     NOTE:  These  criteria  are  used  to  assess  method  performance;   when
            properly applied, Isotope  dilution  techniques are Independent of
            internal standard recovery.

In those  circumstances  where  these  procedures  do  not  yield a definitive
conclusion, the use  of  high  resolution  mass  spectrometry or HRGC/MS/MS is
suggested.


11.0  CALCULATIONS

      NOTE:  The relative response  factors  of  a  given  congener within any
             homologous series  are  known  to  be  different.    However, for
             purposes of these  calculations,  1t  will  be assumed that every
             congener within a  given  series  has  the same relative response
             factor.  In order to  minimize  the  effect of this assumption on
             risk   assessment,   a   2,3,7,8-substltuted   Isomer   that   1s
             commercially  available  was  chosen  as  representative  of each
             series.  All relative  response  factor  calculations for a given
             homologous series are based on that compound.

     11.1   Determine the concentration of Individual  Isomers of tetra-,  penta,
and hexa-CDD/CDF according to  the equation:

                                    Qis x A
           Concentration, ng/g  =  G x  A^ x RRF

where:

     Qis   = ng of  internal  standard   HCi2-2,3,7,8-TCDO,   added  to the  sample
             before extraction.

        G   = g of sample extracted.

       As   = area of quantltation ion  of  the  compound of  interest.

     Ajs   = area of quantltation   ion   (m/z   334)   of  the Internal standard,
             !3Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD.

     RRF   = response  factor  of  the  quantltation   ion   of   the  compound of
             interest  relative to m/z  334 of  13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO.

     NOTE:  Any dilution   factor  Introduced   by  following  the   procedure in
             Paragraph  9.10  should be  applied  to  this calculation.
                                   8280   D-252
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September 1986

-------
          11.1.1  Determine the concentration of  individual  isomers  of hepta-
     CDD/CDF and the concentration of OCDD and OCDF according to the  equation:

                                    Q1s x As
          Concentration,  ng/g  =  G x A1$ x RRF
where:
     Qis  *  "9 of Internal standard  13Ci2-°cDDf   added  to the sample before
             extraction.

       G  »  g of sample extracted.

      AS  =  area of quantisation ion of the compound of interest.

     Ais  =  area of quantitation  ion  (m/z  472)   of  the internal  standard,
             13c12-OCDO.

     RRF  =  response factor  of  the  quantitation  ion  of  the  compound of
             interest relative to m/z 472 of 13Ci2-OCDD.

     NOTE:  Any dilution   factor  introduced  by  following  the  procedure in
            Paragraph 9.10 should be applied to this calculation.

          11.1.2  Relative response factors are calculated using data obtained
     from the analysis of  multi-level  calibration standards according to the
     equation:
           RRF  s  A   x  C
                 Ais x  Ls

where:

      AS   =  area of quantitation  ion of the compound of interest.

      Ais   *  area °f quantitation   ion  of  the  appropriate  internal standard
              (m/z 334 for  13c12-2,3,7,8-TCDD: m/z 472 for  13c12-OCDD).

      Cfs   =  concentration  of  the  appropriate internal standard,
              13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD or "c^-OCDO)

      Cs   =  concentration  of  the  compound of interest.

           11.1.3  The concentrations  of  unknown   isomers  of  TCDD  shall be
      calculated  using the  mean RRF determined for 2,3,7,8-TCDD.

           The  concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of PeCDD  shall  be calculated
      using the  mean  RRF   determined  for  1,2,3,7,8-PeCDO  or   any available
      2,3,7,8,X-PeCDD  isomer.
                                   8280  D-253
                                                          Revision
                                                         Date  September  1986

-------
     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of HxCDD shall be calculated
using the mean  RRF  determined  for  1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO  or any available
2,3,7,8,-X,Y-HXCDD Isomer.

     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of HpCDO shall be calculated
using the mean RRF  determined  for  1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCOO or any available
2,3,7,8,X,YlZ-HpCDD isomer.

     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of  TCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 2,3,7,8-TCOF.

     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of PeCDF shall be calculated
using the  mean  RRF  determined  for  1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF  or  any available
2,3,7,8,X-PeCDF isomer.

     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of HxCDF shall be calculated
using the  mean  RRF  determined  for  1,2,4,7,8-HxCDF  or  any available
2,3,7,8-X.Y-HxCDF isomer.

     The concentrations of unknown  Isomers  of HpCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF  determined  for  1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCQF or any available
2,3,7f8,X,Y,Z-HpCDF Isomer.

     The concentration of the  octa-CDO  and octa-COF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for each.

     Mean relative response factors  for  selected  PCDD's and PCDF's are
given in Table 4.

     11.1.4  Calculate  the  percent  recovery,  Rjs,   for  each  internal
standard in  the sample extract, using the equation:

              A.     Q
     "   -   —!s_._x__rs—  _
      "is     Ars  x  RFp  x Qis

 where:

      Ars   =   Area  of quantitation  1on  (m/z  334)  of  the  recovery  standard,
              l3Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD.
      Qrs  =  ng  of  recovery    standard,     ^2-1,2, 3, 4-TCDD,   added   to
              extract.

 The response factor  for  determination   of   recovery is calculated using
 data obtained from the analysis   of the  multi -level  calibration standards
 according to the equation:
                     's
                              8280  D-254
                                                     Revision
                                                     Date  September 1986

-------
     where:

          Crs  =  Concentration of the recovery standard,

          11.1.5  Calculation of  total   concentration  of  all  Isomers within
     each homologous series of PCDD's and PCDF's.

     Total concentration  ,  Sum of the concentrations of the Individual
     of PCOO's or PCOF's     PCDO or PCDF Isomers

     11.4  Report results 1n  nanograms  per  gram;   when duplicate and spiked
samples are reanalyzed, all data obtained should be  reported.

     11.5  Accuracy and Precision.    Table  5  gives  the  precision data for
revised Method 8280 for  selected  analytes  In  the  matrices shown.  Table 6
lists recovery data for the same analyses.  Table 2  shows the linear range and
variation of  response  factors  for  selected  analyte  standards.    Table 8
provides the method detection limits as measured in  specific sample matrices.

     11.6  Method Detection  Limit.    The  Method  Detection  Limit  (MDL) is
defined as the minimum concentration of  a  substance that can be measured and
reported with 99  percent  confidence  that  the  value  is  above  zero.  The
procedure used to determine the  MDL  values  reported 1n Table 8 was obtained
from Appendix  A  of  EPA  Test  Methods  manual,   EPA-600/4-82-057 July 1982,
"Methods  for  Organic   Chemical   Analysis   of   Municipal  and  Industrial
Wastewater."

     11.7  Maximum Holding Time (MHT).   Is  that  time  at which a 10 percent
change in the analyte  concentration  (C^io)  occurs  and the precision of the
method of  measurement  allows  the  10  percent  change  to  be statistically
different from the 0 percent change  (Cto) at the 90 percent confidence level.
When  the  precision  of  the   method  is  not  sufficient  to  statistically
discriminate a 10 percent change  in  the concentration from 0 percent change,
then the maximum holding time  1s  that  time  where the percent change in the
analyte concentration  (Ctn) is  statistically different than the concentration
at 0 percent change (Cto) and greater than 10 percent change at the 90 percent
confidence level.
                                  8280   D-255
                                                         Revision      0
                                                         Date  September  1986

-------
TABLE 1.  REPRESENTATIVE GAS CHROMATOGRAPH RETENTION TIMES* OF ANALYTES
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCOF
2,3,7,8-TCDO
1,2,3,4-TCOO
1,2,3,4.7-PeCDD
1,2,3, 4,7, 8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCOD
OCDO
50-ra
CP-Sn-88
25.2
23.6
24.1
30.0
39.5
57.0
NM
30-m
OB-5
17.8
17.4
17.3
20.1
22.1
24.1
25.6
3— m
SP-2250
26.7
26.7
26.5
28.1
30.6
33.7
NM
*Retention time in min, using temperature programs shown below.

NM  =  not measured.

Temperature Programs;

          CP-S11-88           60'C-190'C at 20'/m1n; 190*-240* at SVmln.

          D8-5                170*, 10 min; then at 8*/min to 320*C, hold
          30 m x 0.25 mm      at 320*C 20 min (until OCDD elutes).
          Thin film  (0.25 um)

          SP-2250             70*-320* at lOVmtnute.

                            Column Manufacturers

CP-S11-88            Chrompack, Incorporated, Brldgewater, New Jersey
OB-5,                J  and   W   Scientific,   Incorporated,  Rancho  Cordova,
                     California
SP-2250              Supelco,     Incorporated,     Bellefonte,    Pennsylvania
                                   8280  D-256
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                    TABLE 2.   IONS SPECIFIED3 FOR SELECTED ION MONITORING
                            FOR PCDD'S AND PCDF'S
                        Quantltation
                            1on
                    Confirmation
                        ions
                      M-COC1
PCDD'S

13c12-Tetra
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
PCDF's
334
322
356
390
424
460
472
332
320
354;358
388,-392
422;426
458
470
257
293
327
361
395
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
306
340
374
408
444
304
338; 342
372;376
406; 410
442
243
277
311
345
379
alons at m/z 376  (HxCDE), 410  (HpCDE), 446  (OCOE), 480  (NCDE) and 514  (DCDE)
 are also Included in the scan monitoring sections (1)  to  (5), respectively.
 See Paragraph 10.3.
  TABLE 3.  CRITERIA FOR ISOTOPIC RATIO MEASUREMENTS FOR  PCDO'S AND  PCDF'S
                        Selected ions  (m/z)
                                Relative  intensity
PCDD'S

Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa

PCDF's

Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
 320/322
 358/356
 392/390
 426/424
 458/460
 304/306
 342/340
 376/374
 410/408
 442/444
             0.65-0.89
             0.55-0.75
             0.69-0.93
             0.83-1.12
             0.75-1.01
              0.65-0.89
              0.55-0.75
              0.69-0.93
              0.83-1.12
              0.75-1.01
                                  8280   D-257
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
     TABLE 4.  MEAN RELATIVE RESPONSE FACTORS OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD
l,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDOb
OCDDb
2,3,7,8-TCDF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
1, 2,3.4,6, 7,8-HpCDFb
OCDFb
13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD
13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD
13C12-OCDD
RRFa
1.13
0.70
0.51
1.08
1.30
1.70
1.25
0.84
1.19
1.57
1.00
0.75
1.00
RSDX
(n - 5)
3.9
10.1
6.6
6.6
7.2
8.0
8.7
9.4
3.8
8.6
-
4.6
-
Quantisation ion
(m/z)
322
356
390
424
460
306
340
374
444
408
334
334
472
aThe RRF value is the mean of the five determinations made.   Nominal  weights
 injected were 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 ng.

bRRF values for these analytes were determined relative to 13Ci2-OCDD.   All
 other RRF's were determined relative to 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD.

Instrument Conditions/Tune - GC/MS system was  tuned as specified in
                             Paragraph 6.3.   RRF data was acquired under
                             SIM control, as specified in Paragraph 10.3.

GC Program - The GC column temperature was programmed as specified in
             Paragraph 4.3.2(b).
                                  8280   D-258
                                                         Revision
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
TABLE 5.  PRECISION DATA FOR REVISED METHOD 8280
Compound
2,3,7,8-TCDD




1,2,3,4-TCOD




1,3,6,8-TCDD




1,3,7,9-TCDD




1,3,7,8-TCDD




1,2,7,8-TCDD




1,2,8,9-TCDD


-

Analyte
Matrix3
clay
son
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native
N0b
378
NO
NO
487
NO
NO
NO
38.5
NO
NO
NO
NO
19.1
227
NO
NO
NO
58.4
NO
ND
NO
ND
16.0
422
NO
NO
ND
2.6
NO
ND
NO
NO
NO
ND
Native
+ spike
5.0
378
125
46
487
5.0
25.0
125
38.5
2500
2.5
25.0
125
19.1
2727
2.5
25.0
125.0
58.4
2500
5.0
25.0
125
16.0
2920
5.0
25.0
125
2.6
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
N
4
4
4
2
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
4
2
2
Percent
RSO
4.4
2.8
4.8
-
24
1.7
1.1
9.0
7.9
-
7.0
5.1
3.1
-
-
19
2.3
6.5
-
-
7.3
1.3
5.8
3.5
-
7.7
9.0
7.7
23
-
10
0.6
1.9
-
-
                     8280  D-259
                                            Revision
                                            Date  September 1986

-------
TABLE 5  (Continued)
Compound
1, 2,3,4, 7-PeCDD




1,2,3, 7,8-PeCDD




1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD




1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDO




1,2,7,8-TCDF




1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF




1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF


*

Analyte
Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge0
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom3
clay
v >»j
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native
NO
NO
NO
25.8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
8760
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
7.4
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
25600
NO
NO
13.6
24.2
NO
Native
+ spike
5.0
25.0
125
25.8
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
8780
_
-
5.0
25.0
125
7.4
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
28100
5.0
25.0
139
24.2
2500
N
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
_
-
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
Percent
RSO
10
2.8
4.6
6.9
-
25
20
4.7
_
-
38
8.8
3.4
_
-
.
_
_
_
-
3.9
1.0
7.2
7.6
-
6.1
5.0
4.8
_
-
26
6.8
5.6
13.5
-
      8280  D-260
                             Revision      0
                             Date  September  1986

-------
                            TABLE 5.   (Continued)


Compound
OCDF




Analyte

Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native Percent
Native + spike N RSD
NO -
NO -
192 317 4 3.3
NO -
NO ...
amatrix types:

 clay:  pottery clay.

 soil:  Times Beach,  Missouri,  soil  blended  to  form a homogeneous sample.
This sample was analyzed as  a  performance evaluation sample for the Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP)  in  April  1983.    The  results  from EMSL-LV and 8
contract laboratories using  the  CLP  protocol  were  305.8 ng/g 2,3,7,8-TCDD
with a standard deviation of 81.0.

 fly ash:  ash from a municipal incinerator; resource recovery ash No. 1.

 still bottom:  distillation bottoms (tar) from 2,4-dichlorophenol production.

sludge:    sludge  from  cooling   tower  which  received  both  creosote  and
pentachlorophenolic wastewaters.

Cleanup of clay, soil and fly ash samples was  through alumina column only.
(Carbon column not used.)
    - not detected at concentration injected  (final volume 0.1 mL or greater).

 cEstimated concentration out of calibration range of standards.
                                   8280   D-261
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
TABLE 6.  RECOVERY DATA FOR REVISED METHOD 8280
Compound
2,3,7,8-TCDD




1,2,3,4-TCDO




1,3,6,8-TCDD




1,3,7,9-TCDD




1,3,7,8-TCDD




1,2,7,8-TCDD




1,2,8,9-TCDD




Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
Nativeb
(ng/g)
NO
378
NO
NO
487
NO
NO
NO
38.5
NO
NO
NO
NO
19.1
227
NO
NO
NO
58.4
NO
NO
NO
NO
16.0
615
NO
NO
NO
2.6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Sp1kedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
-
125
46
-
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
2.5
25.0
125
46
2500
2.5
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
Mean
percent
recovery
61.7
-
90.0
90.0
-
67.0
60.3
73.1
105.6
93.8
39.4
64.0
64.5
127.5
80.2
68.5
61.3
78.4
85.0
91.7
68.0
79.3
78.9
80.2
90.5
68.0
75.3
80.4
90.4
88.4
59.7
60.3
72.8
114.3
81.2
                    8280  D-262
                                           Revision      0
                                           Date  September 1986

-------
TABLE 6.  (Continued)
Compound
1,2,3,4,7-PeCDD




1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD




1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD




1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD




2,3,7,8-TCDD
(C-13)



1,2,7,8-TCOF




1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF




Matrix2
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludged
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash — .-
still bottom
Native13
(ng/g)
NO
NO
NO
25.8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO •
ND
NO
8780
ND
NO
ND
ND
ND
NO
NO
NO
ND
ND
7.4
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
25600
Spikedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
-
-
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
Mean
percent
recovery
58.4
62.2
79.2
102.4
81.8
61.7
68.4
81.5
104.9
84.0
46.8
65.0
81.9
125.4
89.1
NO
ND

-
-
64.9
78.8
78.6
88.6
69.7
65.4
71.1
80.4
90.4
104.5
57.4
64.4
84.8
105.8
-
       8280   D-263
                              Revision       Q
                              Date   September 1986

-------
                           TABLE 6.   (Continued)

Compound
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF




OCDF





Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
Nat1veb
(ng/g)
NO
NO
13.6
24.2
NO
NO
NO
192
NO
NO
Sp1kedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
.
-
125
-
—
Mean
percent
recovery
54.2
68.5
82.2
91.0
92.9
_
-
86.8
-
-
amatrix types:

clay:  pottery clay,

soil:  Times Beach, Missouri soil  blended  to form a homogeneous sample.  This
sample was  analyzed  as  a  performance  evaluation  sample  for the Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP)  in  April  1983.    The  results  from EMSL-LV and 8
contract laboratories using  the  CLP  protocol  were  305.8 ng/g 2,3,7,8-TCOO
with a standard deviation of 81.0.

fly ash:  ash from a municipal incinerator:  resource recovery ash No. 1.

still bottom:  distillation bottoms (tar) from 2,4-dichlorophenol production.

sludge:    sludge  from  cooling   tower  which  received  both  creosote  and
pentachlorophenol wastewaters.

The clay, soil and fly ash  samples  were subjected to alumina column cleanup,
no carbon column was used.
       volume of concentrate 0.1 mL  or greater, NO means below quantification
limit, 2 or more samples analyzed.

cAmount of analyte added to sample, 2 or more samples analyzed.

^Estimated concentration out of calibration range of standards.
                                  8280  D-264
                                                         Revision       0
                                                         Date  September  1986

-------
          TABLE 7.   LINEAR RANGE AND VARIATIOIN  OF RESPONSE FACTORS
Analyte Linear range tested (pg) nb
l,2,7,8-TCOFa
2,3,7,8-TCDOa
2,3,7,8-TCDF
50-6000
50-7000
300-4000
8
7
5
Mean RF
1.634
0.721
2.208
XRSO
12.0
11.9
7.9
aResponse factors for these analytes were calculated using 2,3,7,8-TCDF as the
internal  standard.  The response  factors for 2,3,7,8-TCDF were calculated vs.
13C12-1,2,3,4-TCDD.

bEach value of n represents a different concentration level.
                                   8280  D-265
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
    TABLE 8.   METHOD DETECTION LIMITS OF I3C12  - LABELED PCDD'S and PCDF'S

              IN REAGENT WATER (PPT)  AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES (PPB)
13C .-Labeled
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6, 7,8-HpCDD
OCDD
2,3,7,8-TCDF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
Reagent
Water
0.44
1.27
2.21
2.77
3.93
0.63
1.64
2.53
Missouri
Soil5
0.17
0.70
1.25
1.87
2.35
0.11
0.33
0.83
??
Ash
0.07
0.25
0.55
1.41
2.27
0.06
0.16
0.30
Industrial
Sludge0
0.82
1.34
2.30
4.65
6.44
0.46
0.92
2.17
Stilly
Bottom
1.81
2.46
6.21
4.59
10. 1
0.26
1.61
2.27
Fuel
Oil*
0.75
2.09
5.02
8.14
23.2
0.46
0.83
2.09
Fuel Oil/
Sawdust
0.13
0.18
0.36
0.51
1.48
0.4'J
0.43
2.22
.Sample size I ,000 mL.
 Sample size 10 g.
 .Sample size 2 g.
 Sample size 1 g.
Note:  The final sample-extract volume was 100 uL for all samples.

Matrix types used in MDL Study:

     - Reagent water:  distilled, deionized laboratory water.
     - Missouri soil:  soil blended to form a homogeneous sample.
     - Fly-ash:  alkaline ash recovered from the electrostatic precipitator of
       a coal-burning power plant.
     - Industrial sludge:  sludge from  cooling tower which received creosotic
       and pentachlorophenolic wastewaters.  Sample  was ca. 70 percent water,
       mixed with oil and sludge.
     - Still-bottom:    distillation  bottoms  (tar)  from  2,4-dichlorophenol
       production.
     - Fuel oil:  wood-preservative solution from the modified Thermal Process
       tanks.  Sample  was  an  oily  liquid  (>90  percent oil) containing no
       water.
     - Fuel oil/Sawdust:   sawdust was obtained  as a very fine powder from the
       local lumber yard.   Fuel  oil  (described  above)  was  mixed ac che 4
       percent (w/w) level.

Procedure used for the Determination  of  Method Detection Limits was obtained
from "Methods  for  Organic  Chemical  Analysis  of  Municipal  and Industrial
Uastewater" Appendix A,  EPA-600/4-82-057,   July  1982.   Using this procedure,
the method detection  limit  is  defined  as  the  minimum  concentration of a
substance that can be measured  and  reported  with 99 percent confidence tnat
the value is above zero.
                                  8280  D_266
                                                         Revision      0	
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
           100.0-1

   a

   a>
O 73
(vi n>
rt <
 O
n> =>
              50-
0)
*-•
c
                0
               15:00
                  18:00       21:00       24:00

                           Retention Time
27:00
                       Figure 2.  Mass Chromatogram of Selected PCOD and PCOF Congeners,

-------
                            METHOO 8290

               oi8ENzo-p-oroxiiNs ANO POLYCHI_OPIN*TEO
 6. 1
                                                        o
Perform Initial
callBratlon on
 CC/MS «»«t*«"
 6.9
                                                     10.2
     Calculate
     resoonse
   factor* for
    stanaaras
  Oo rout in*
  calioratlon
                                                     to. 3
      Analyze
   •a«ol*s wttn
   •elected ion
    monitor ma
 ». a
       Extract
   •amole uitng
   aooroorlate
 xetnoa for tn*
  ••••te matrix
 9.9
      Preoare
 caroan column:
    do caroon
 column cleanuc
                                                     10.3
Quantltate PCOO
 and PCQP ocakc
    O
    O«termln«
 concentrations
   and reoort
    reault*
                                                   f     Stoo       J
                                  8280   D-268
                                                             Revision        o	
                                                             Date  September 1986

-------
                                APPENDIX A

                   SIGNAL-TO-NOISE DETERMINATION METHODS
MANUAL DETERMINATION

     This method corresponds to a manual determination of the S/N from a GC/MS
signal, based on the measurement of  Its  peak height relative to the baseline
noise.  The procedure 1s composed of  four steps as outlined below.  (Refer to
Figure 1 for the following discussion).

     1.
     2.


     3.
          Estimate  the  peak-to-peak  noise  (N)  by  tracing  the  two  lines  (EI  and
          £2)  defining  the noise  envelope.    The  lines  should pass  through  the
          estimated statistical mean  of  the  positive  and  the  negative peak
          excursions as shown  1n  Figure  1.   In addition,  the  signal  offset  (0)
          should be set high enough  such that negative-going  noise  (except  for
          spurious  negative spikes)  is recorded.
          Draw the  line   (C)  corresponding  to  the  mean
          segments defining the noise envelope.
noise between the
          Measure the height of the GC/MS  signal   (S) at the apex of the peak
          relative to the mean noise C.   For noisy GC/MS signals, the average
          peak height should be measured from the estimated mean apex signal D
          between £3 and £4.
     4.   Compute the S/N.

     This method of  S/N  measurement  1s  a
noise measurement in analytical chemistry.
                                               conventional,  accepted method  of
INTERACTIVE COMPUTER GRAPHICAL METHOD

     This method calls for the  measurement  of  the GC/MS peak area using the
computer data system and Eq. 1:
                                    A/t
                         S/N » A:/2t f Ar/2t
where t is the elution time window  (time  interval,  t2~t2, at the base of the
peak used to measure the peak area A).   (Refer to Figure 2, for the following
discussion) .
 left
        and Ar correspond to the areas  of  the noise level in a region to the
          and to the right (Ar) of the GC peak of interest.
                                8280  D-269
                                                         Revision      0
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
     The procedure to determine  the  S/N  1s  as  follows:

     1.    Estimate the average negative   peak   excursions   of the noise (I.e.,
          the low segment-E£-of   the  noise envelope).     Line  £3 should  pass
          through the estimated  statistical  mean   of the  negative-going noise
          excursions.  As  stated earlier,   It   1s  Important to have the signal
          offset  (0)  set  high  enough such  that   negative-going  noise  1s
          recorded.

     2.    Using the cross-hairs   of   the video display terminal,  measure the
          peak area (A)  above a  baseline   corresponding  to the mean  negative
          noise value (£2) and between the  time tj  and  t2  where  the GC/MS  peak
          Intersects the baseline, £3.  Make note  of  the time width t^tg-ti.

     3.    Following a similar procedure   as described  above, measure  the  area
          of the noise 1n  a region to the   left (Aj) and  to the right (Ar)  of
          the GC/MS signal using a time  window twice  the size of t, that is,
          2 x t.

     The analyst must sound  judgement  in   regard  to the proper selection  of
interference-free regions   in  the  measurement  of  Aj and  Ar.    It is not
recommended to perform these noise measurements  (Aj  and Ar) in  remote regions
exceeding ten time widths  (lOt).

     4.    Compute the S/N  using Eq.  1.

     NOTE:  If the noise does not occupy  at  least  10 percent of the vertical
            axis  (I.e., the noise envelope  cannot be defined accurately),  then
            it is necessary to  amplify  the  vertical  axis so that the noise
            occupies 20 percent of the terminal display (see Figure 3).
                                8280    D-270
                                                         Revision
                                                         Date  September  1986

-------
                               FIGURE CAPTIONS

Figure l.  Manual determination of S/N.
           The peak height (S) 1s measured between the mean noise (lines C and
           D).  These mean  signal  values  are  obtained  by tracing the line
           between the baseline average  noise extremes, EI and £2. and between
           the apex average noise  extremes,  £3  and  £4,  at the apex of the
           signal.  Note,  1t  is  Imperative  that the Instrument's Interface
           amplifier electronic's zero  offset  be  set  high enough such that
           negative-going baseline noise is recorded.

Figure 2.  Interactive determination of  S/N.
           The peak area (A) is  measured  above the baseline average negative
           noise £2 and between times tj  and  t£.  The noise is obtained from
           the areas AI and Ar measured   to  the  left and to the right of the
           peak of interest using time windows Tj and Tr (TjsTr=2t).

Figure 3.  Interactive determination of  S/N.
           A) Area measurements  without  amplification  of the vertical axis.
           Note that  the  noise  cannot  be  determined  accurately by visual
           means.   8)  Area  measurements  after  amplification  (10X) of the
           vertical axis so  that  the  noise  level occupies approximately 20
           percent of the display, thus  enabling a better visual estimation of
           the baseline noise, EI, £2, and C.
                                8280   D-271
                                                         Revision      Q
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
                           (fllZ
                                                      *UJ
o
o
 I  I
o
GO
o
10
                           o    o
o
n
                                                                 (/I
                                                                 c
                                                                 o
                                                                 
-------
           = 558.10
                                  = Tr = 2T
                                      14.7
                                N
25:30  26:00  26:30
27:00   27:30  28:00
              17 S8C.
  Figure 2.  Interactive Determination of S/N.
              8280 D-273
                                 Revision    0
                                 Date  September 1986

-------
100-
90-
80-
70-
60-
60-
40-
30-
20-
10-





A— *


A^ = 17.18
A^"^r
.. '
A = 686. 41

®




Ar= 13.32
.
LL
1 • 1 1 T" 1
  25:30  26:00  36:30  27:00  27:30  28:00
                       = 706.59
  25:30  26:00  26:30  27:00  27:30  28:00
Figure  3.  Interactive Determination of S/N.
             8280
                                     Revision      0
                                     Date  September 1986

-------
                                 APPENDIX B

        RECOMMENDED SAFETY AND HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR PCDD'S/PCDF'S


     1.  The human toxicology  of  PCDD/PCDF  1s  not well defined at present,
although the 2,3,7,8-TCOO Isoraer has been found to be acnegenlc, carcinogenic,
and teratogenlc 1n the course of  laboratory animal studies.  The 2,3,7,8-TCDD
Is a solid at room temperature, and  has a relatively low vapor pressure.  The
solubility of this compound in water is only about 200 parts-per-trillion, but
the solubility in various organic  solvents  ranges from about 0.001 perent to
0.14 percent.  The physical properties  of  the 135 other tetra- through octa-
chlorinated PCDD/PCDF have not been  well established, although it is presumed
that the physical properties of these congeners are generally similar to those
of the 2,3,7,8-TCDD isomer.  On  the  basis of the available toxicological and
physical property data for TCOO, this compound,  as well as the other PCDD and
PCDF, should be handled only  by  highly  trained personnel who are thoroughly
versed in the appropriate procedures, and who understand the associated risks.

     2.  PCDD/PCDF and samples  containing these are handled using essentially
the same techniques as  those  employed  1n handling radioactive or infectious
materials.  Well-ventilated, controlled-access  laboratories are required, and
laboratory personel entering these laboratories should wear appropriate safety
clothing, including disposable coveralls,  shoe  covers,  gloves, and face and
head masks.  During analytical operations  which  may give rise to aerosols or
dusts,  personnel  should  wear  respirators  equipped  with  activated carbon
filters.  Eye protection equipment (preferably full face shields) must be worn
at all  times  while  working  1n  the  analytical  laboratory with PCDD/PCDF.
Various  types  of  gloves  can  be  used  by  personnel,  depending  upon the
analytical operation being accomplished.  Latex gloves are generally utilized,
and when handling samples thought  to be particularly hazardous, an additional
set of gloves are also  worn  beneath  the  latex gloves  (for example, Playtex
gloves supplied by American Scientific  Products, Cat. No. 67216).  Bench-tops
and other work surfaces  in  the  laboratory  should  be covered with plastic-
backed absorbent paper during all  analytical processing.  When finely divided
samples  (dusts, soils, dry  chemicals)  are  processed,   removal of these from
sample  contaners,  as   well   as   other   operations,   including  weighing,
transferring, and mixing with   solvents,  should  all be accomplished within  a
glove  box.   Glove boxes, hoods  and  the effluents from mechanical vacuum  pumps
and gas chromatographs  on  the  mass  spectrometers  should  be vented to the
atmosphere preferably only after passing  through HEPA particulate  filters and
vapor-sorfaing charcoal.

      3.   All  laboratory  ware,  safety   clothing,   and other  items  potentially
contaminated with   PCDD/PCOF   in  the  course   of   analyses   must be  carefully
secured  and  subjected to proper disposal.    When  feasible,  liquid wastes are
concentrated, and  the residues  are  placed   in  approved  steel  hazardous  waste
drums  fitted with   heavy   gauge polyethylene   liners.    Glass  and  combustible
items  are  compacted using  a dedicated  trash  compactor  used only  for  hazardous
waste  materials  and then placed in   the   same  type  of disposal  drum.  Disposal
of  accumulated  wastes   is  periodically  accomplished   by   high   temperature
incineration at  EPA-aproved  facilities.


                                8280  D-275
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
     4.   Surfaces of laboratory benches,  apparatus  and other appropriate areas
should be periodically subjected  to  surface  wipe tests using solvent-wetted
filter paper which Is then  analyzed  to   check for PCOD/PCOF contamination 1n
the laboratory.  Typically,  if the detectable  level  of TCOO or TCDF from such
a test is greater than 50  ng/m2,   this Indicates the need for decontamination
of the laboratory.  A typical  action  limit in terms of surface contamination
of the other PCOO/PCDF (summed) 1s 500 ng/m2.   In  the event of a spill  within
the laboratory, absorbent paper is  used   to  wipe  up the spilled material and
this 1s then placed Into a hazardous  waste drum.  The contaminated surface is
subsequently  cleaned  thoroughly   by   washing   with  appropriate  solvents
(methylene chloride followed by methanol)  and laboratory detergents.  This is
repeated until wipe tests  indicate  that  the levels of surface contamination
are below the limits cited.

     5.  In  the  unlikely  event  that  analytical  personnel experience skin
contact with PCOO/PCDF   or  samples  containing  these, the contaminated skin
area should immediately  be  thoroughly  scurbbed  using  mild soap and water.
Personnel involved in any such  accident   should  subsequently be taken to the
nearest medical facility, preferably  a  facility whose staff is knowledgeable
in  the  toxicology  of   chlorinated   hydrocarbons.     Again,  disposal  of
contaminated clothing is accomplished by  placing it in hazardous waste drums.

     6.    It  Is  desirable  that  personnel  working  1n  laboratories where
PCOD/PCDF are  handled  be  given  periodic  physical  examinations  (at least
yearly).  Such examinations  should  include  specialized tests, such as those
for urinary porphyrins  and  for  certain  blood  parameters which, based upon
published clinical  observations,  are  appropriate  for  persons  who  may be
exposed to PCDO/PCDF.  Periodic  facial  photographs  to document the onset of
dermatologic problems are also advisable.
                                 8280   D-276
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                                                                   Page 1 of 2


                   OIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1


LAB NAME 	     CONTRACT No.	


CASE No. 	

                                          QUANTITY FOUND (ng/g)


SAMPLE NO.     FILE NAME       TCDD      PeCDD      HxCDO      HpCOD      OCDD
DATA RELEASE AUTHORIZED BY
                                8280   D-277
                                                         Revision
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
                                                                   Page  2 of  2
                   DIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY  FORM  8280-1
LAB NAME 	      CONTRACT No.


CASE No.
                                          QUANTITY FOUND (ng/g)
SAMPLE NO.     FILE NAME       TCDF      PeCDF      HxCOF      HpCDF      OCDF
                                 8280   D-278
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September 1986

-------
                                                                   Page 1 of 2
                  DIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1-W
LAB NAME
CONTRACT No.
CASE No.
                                          QUANTITY FOUND (ug/L)
SAMPLE NO.     FILE NAME       TCDD      PeCDD      HxCDD      HpCDD      OCOD
 DATA  RELEASE  AUTHORIZED  BY
                                 8280   D-279
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                                                                   Page 2 of 2



                  OIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY  FORM 8280-1-W



LAB NAME 	      CONTRACT No. 	


CASE No. 	

                                          QUANTITY FOUND  (ug/L)


SAMPLE NO.     FILE NAME       TCOF      PeCOF      HxCDF      HpCDF      OCDF
                                8280   D-280
                                                         Revision
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
                      DIOXIN  RAW SAMPLE  DATA  FORM  8280-2



 LAB  NAME 	   ANALYST(s)  	   CASE  No.


 SAMPLE  No.  	   TYPE OF  SAMPLE  	CONTRACT No.


 SAMPLE  SIZE           %  MOISTURE             FINAL  EXTRACT  VOLUME
 EXTRACTION  METHOD 	 ALIQUOT USED  FOR  ANALYSIS


 CLEAN  UP OPTION
 CONCENTRATION FACTOR 	 DILUTION  FACTOR


 DATE EXTRACTED                        DATA ANALYZED
 VOLUME 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD ADDED 	 TO SAMPLE VOLUME
 VOLUME INJECTED 	 Wt l3Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD ADDED
 Wt 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD ADDED 	 l3Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD % RECOVERY


 Wt 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-OCDD ADDED	 13C12-OCDD 55 RECOVERY 	
 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDO RRF 	  l3Ci2-OCDD RRF 	

                              13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD

 AREA 332 	 AREA 334 	 RATIO 332/334 _


 13C12-OCDD AREA 470 	  AREA 472 	  RATIO 470/472


-RT 2,3,7,8-TCDD (Standard) 	  RT 2,3,7,8-TCDD (Sample) 	


 13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD - 13C12-1,2,3,4-TCDD Percent Valley 	
                                 8280  D-281
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
              DIOXIN INITIAL CALIBRATION STANDARD DATA SUMMARY

                                 FORM 8280-3

                                          CASE No.
Lab Name
Date of Initial Calibration
                        Contract No.

                        Analyst(s)	
Relative to 13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD_
                            or 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD,
CALIBRATION
STANDARD
RRF
 1
RRF
 2
RRF   RRF
 3     4
RRF
 5
MEAN    %RSD
TCDD
PeCDD
HxCDD
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
                                8280    D-282
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                           FORM 8280-3 (Continued)


                           CONCENTRATIONS IN PG/UL

                  1        2345
TCDD
PeCDD
HxCDD
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
                                 8280  D-283
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
                    DIOXIN  CONTINUING  CALIBRATION  SUMMARY

                                 FORM  8280-4


                                         CASE No.
Lab Name 	     Contract No.

Date of Initial  Calibration 	     Analyst(s)	
Relative to 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD	     or 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD
COMPOUND             RRF             RRF               XD
TCDO
PeCDD
HxCOO
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
                                8280
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                    OIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-A
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
           CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
                 SAMPLE No.
TCDD REQUIRED 320/322 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.65 - 0.89
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDO

SCAN I  RRT   AREA       AREA
              322        320
         AREA
         257
1,2,3,4-TCDD

     3207
     322
                                      RRF
CONFIRM
AS TCDD
  Y/N      CONC.
                                             TOTAL TCDD
 TCDF  REQUIRED 304/306 RATIO WINDOW IS  0.65  -  0.89

 QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD	  1,2,3,4-TCDD
                                        RRF
 SCAN  I   RRT   AREA       AREA       AREA       304/
               306        304        243         306
                               CONFIRM
                               AS TCDD
                                 Y/N      CONC.
                                             TOTAL TCDD
                                 8280  D-285
                                                          Revision      0	
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
                    DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-8
LAB NAME
            ANALYST(s)
                            CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
                             SAMPLE No.
PeCOD REQUIRED 320/322 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.55 - 0.75
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD

SCAN I  RRT   AREA      AREA
              356       358
                           1,2,3,4-TCDD
                   AREA
                   354
                   AREA
                   293
                  358/
                  356
                                        RRF
                  CONFIRM
                  AS  PeCDD
                   Y/N
                                                                         CONC.
                                           TOTAL PeCDD
 PeCDF  REQUIRED  342/340  RATIO WINDOW  IS  0.55  - 0.75

 QUANTITATED FROM  2,3,7,8-TCDD 	   1,2,3,4-TCDD

 SCAN  I  RRT
AREA
340
AREA
342
AREA
338
AREA
277
342/
340
                                                    RRF
CONFIRM
AS PeCDF
  Y/N
                                                                          CONC.
                                            TOTAL PeCDF
                                 8280   D-286
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
                    OIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-C
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
         CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
                  SAMPLE No.
HxCDD REQUIRED 392/390 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.69 - 0.93
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD

SCAN I  RRT   AREA      AREA
              390       392
                1,2,3,4-TCDD
       AREA
       388
AREA
327
3927
390
                     RRF
CONFIRM
AS HxCDD
  Y/N
                                                                         CONC.
                                           TOTAL HxCDD

HxCDF REQUIRED 376/374
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7
SCAN 1 RRT AREA
376
RATIO WINDOW IS
,8-TCDD
AREA
374
0.69 - 0.93

1,2.3,4-TCDD
AREA
372
AREA
311
376/
374

RRF
CONFIRM
AS HxCDF
Y/N CONC.
                                           TOTAL HxCDF
                                 8280
                                       D-287
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date  September 1986

-------
                    DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-0
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
          CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
                  SAMPLE No.
HpCDD REQUIRED 426/444 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.83 - 1.12
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDO

SCAN I  RRT   AREA      AREA
              424       426
       AREA
       422
1,2,3,4-TCDO _

 AREA    4267
 361     424
                                      RRF
CONFIRM
AS HpCDD
  Y/N      CONC.
                                           TOTAL HpCDO

HpCDF REQUIRED 410/408
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,
SCAN 1 RRT AREA
408
RATIO WINDOW IS
8-TCDD
AREA
410
AREA
406
0.83 - 1.
1,2,3
AREA
345
12
,4-TCDD
410/
408
RRF
CONFIRM
AS HpCDF
Y/N CONC.
                                           TOTAL HpCDF
                                8280
                                        D-288
                                                          Revision      0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
                    DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-E



LAB NAME 	  ANALYST(s) 	  CASE No.	

CONTRACT No. 	            SAMPLE No. 	

OCDD REQUIRED 458/460 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.75 - 1.01


QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 	    1,2,3,4-TCDD 	  RRF
SCAN I  RRT   AREA        AREA      AREA       458/      CONFIRM
              460         458       395        460       AS OCDD
                                                           Y/N      CONC.
                                           TOTAL OCDD
OCDF REQUIRED 442/444 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.75 - 1.01

QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 	  1,2,3,4-TCDD	  RRF
SCAN I  RRT   AREA        AREA      AREA       442/      CONFIRM
              444         442       379        444       AS OCDF
	                	    	   Y/N      CONC.
                                           TOTAL  OCDF
                                 8280
                                                          Revision
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
            DIOXIN SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CHECK ANALYSIS FORM 8280-6
LAB NAME
                    CASE  No.
BEGINNING DATE

ENDING DATE
       TIME

       TIME
                   CONTRACT No..

                    ANALYST(s)
PC SOLUTION IDENTIFIER
PCDD's
                       ISOTOPIC RATIO CRITERIA MEASUREMENT
  IONS
RATIOED
RATIO AT
BEGINNING OF
12 HOUR PERIOD
RATIO AT
END OF 12   ACCEPTABLE
HOUR PERIOD   WINDOW
Tetra
320/322
                               0.65-0.89
Penta
358/356
                               0.55-0.75
Hexa
392/390
                               0.69-0.93
Hepta
426/424
                               0.83-1.12
Octa
458/460
                               0.75-1.01
PCDF's

Tetra
304/306
                               0.65-0.89
Penta
342-340
                               0.55-0.75
Hexa
376-374
                               0.69-0.93
Hepta
410/408
                               0.83-1.12
Octa
442/444
                               0.75-1.01
 Ratios  out  of  criteria
 PCDD

 PCDF
      Beginning

      _ out of

       out of
                            End

                           out of

                           out of
 NOTE:   One  form is  required  for  each  12  hour  period  samples  are  analyzed.
                                 8280   D-290
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   September  1986

-------
TOXICITY CHARACTERISTIC LEACHING  PROCEDURE
                      D-291

-------
                       Federal Register / Vol. 51. Nu. 1 !4 / Friday. June  13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
                                                                               21685
 Waste*. Vulitm* 1. El'A Contract fWWO-ZSSZ.
 lunuitry- 1HS1.
   |ZO) National KcMurch Council (NRC).
 Unnking Water and 1 lealth. VoL 4. Safe
 Drinking Water Committee, National
 Academy Press. Washington. D.C 1982.
   (21) Office of Manaermenl and Budget
 (OMU|. Interim Regulatory Impact Analysis
 Guidance. Washington O.C Inn*. 1901.
   (22) Rrscarr.li Triangle Institute (KIT).
 Regulatory Impact Analysis for Rxpaowon of
 Toxicity Characteristic Under RCRA. U.S.
 EPA Contract 08-01-7075. Octotier. 1985.
   (23) S-Cubcd. Preusion Evaluation of the
 TCLP Protocol For Non-Volatile Components.
 Draft Report. U.S. EPA Contract 68-03-1958.
 January 1986.
   (24) Spellenberg. S.P. Organic E.\traction
 Procedure. U.S. ETA Contract 66-01-8149.
 January1. 1982.
   (25| Technology Applications Inc. (TAJ).
 Statistical Analysis of TCLP Development
 Dala. U.S. EPA Contract bft-01-6936. May 21
 1985.
   (26) U.S. ETA. Background Document.
 Section 261.24. Characteristic of Extraction
 Procedure Toxicity. National Technical
 Information Service (NT1S) PB Sl-185-027.
 Springfield. Virginia. May. 1980.
   (27) U.S. EPA. Test Methods for Evaluating
 Solid Wastes—Physical/Chemical Methods.
 Second cd. Government Printing Office
 (CPO) 055-003-81001-2. EPA SW-846.
 Washington. O.C 1982.
   (28) U.S. EPA. Guidelines for Performing
 Regulatory Impact Analysis. Washington.
 D.C. December. 1983.
   (29) U.S. EPA Science Advisory Board
 (SAB). Report on the Review of HP-ill
 Washington. O.C May. 1984.
  (.TO) U-S. EPA. Background Document:
 Issues Relating to the Development and Use
 of Reference Doaes to Support 40 CFR Part
 268. Land Disposal Restrictions. Washington.
 D.C. November. 1985.
  (31) U.S. EPA. Acceptable D-il> Intake
 Workgroup Paper Assessing Risk*
 Associated With Systemic Toxicants.
 Washington, D.C 1985.
  (32) U.S. EPA. Verified  Reference Doses
 (RfD'sl of the U.S. EPA. Washington. O.C
 1985.
  (33) U.S. EPA. Background Document Fur
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure.
 Washington. D.C February. 1980.

 List of Subjects in 40 CFR Parts 261.271.
and 302

   Administrative practice and
procedure. Air pollution control.
Chemicals. Confidenttai business
information. Hazardous materials.
Hazardous materials transportation.
Hazardous substances. Hazardous
waste. Indian lands. Intergovernmental
relations. Natural resources.  Nuclear
materials. Penalties, Pesticides and
posts. Radioactive materials. Recycling.
 Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements. Superfund. Water
pollution control. Water supply. Waste
         t and disposal.
           .<> 11.
 Lee M. Thomas.
 Administrator.
   For the reasons set out in the
 preamble, it is proposed to amend Title
 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations as
 follows:

 PART 2«1—IDENTIFICATION AND
 LISTING OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

   1. The authority citation for Part 261
 continues to read as  follows:
   Authority: Sees. 1006. 200z(a). 31W1. and
 3002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act. as
 amended by the Resource Conservation and
 Recovery Act of 1978. as amended (42 U-S.C
 6905.a012(a). 6921. and  8022).
   2. § 281.24 is revised to read as
 follows:

 §2*1.24  Torictty characteristic.
   (a) A solid waste exhibits the
 characteristic of toxicity if. using the test
 methods described in Appendix II or
 equivalent methods approved by the
 Administrator under  the procedures set
 forth in Si 26O20 and 260-21. the extract
 from a representative sample of the
 waste contains any of the contaminants
 listed in Table 1 at (he concentration
 equal to or greater than the respective
 value given  in that Table. Where the
 waste contains less than 0-5 percent
 filterable solids, the waste itself, after
 filtering using the methodology  outlined
 in Appendix II. is considered to be the
 extract for die purpose of this section.
   (b) A solid waste that exhibits the
 characteristic of toxicity. but is not
 listed as a hazardous waste in Subpart
 D. has the EPA Hazardous Waste
 Number specified in Table 1 which
 corresponds to the toxic contaminant
 causing it  to be hazardous.

    TABLE  1.—Toxicrrv CHARACTERISTIC
   COMTAWMAMTS ANO REGULATORY LEVELS

0018—Aovtomm*.  .
OOO4— Kn*nc .
OOOS—ami*	
0021 —C4raan<*4Ut.e4>	
0022—Coaon Mncnano*
OOZJ—CM9KM	
0024—cmjB>i»i«t i	
002S—ataman*	
0007
                           CASNO .
                                   (mg/11
                         .  1O7-13-1 1
                           7440-30.2
           			 _	I
     71-43-2:
._  1 1 1-44-4 •
__ 744O-43-91
___   75-is-o!
     5S-23-5
     S7.74.9t
    x»-»-7;
     87-S8-3.
   1333-87-0'
                          I
OOJ*  oCima \
O0i«—2.4-0	 	
002»—1.2
0030—».
OEM—I
O03Z-1
O03J-Z..
0012—Emm
  50
  SO
100
  OOT
  oos
  10
 14.4
  007
  003
  14
  0.07
  iO
 100
 too
 100
  1 4
                                           0036—H,.
                                                    1.—TOXICITY  CMABACTEBISTIC  CO"
                                              TAMINANTS ANO REGULATORY LEVELS—Con
                                              tmued
                                                 U«VNC ant
                                                                        CASMO
                                            C036— Htucmotobuucm
                    0013—Lraunn	
                    0009—Mocurv

                    0039—Metiy«»* cmoroe
                    C04Q IHitQI «BV >^0n«
                    0041-
                    D042-t>Macn
                    0043—*h«nci .
        0010-:
        0011
        004S—l.l.l 2-r«tracnora«nan
        00<6—l.1.2.2-T«ir4cniun.-gff»n
        004;-T«r*crwD«nyMi4i	
        0048—J.3.4.6.T>»acr««oor«r»
        0049— ToiMn*	
                                         	I
        0050—1.1.1-Tn
        cost—t.
        OOU-Tncnora«i>Mi« . _
        OOS3- 2.4>Tncnaracxioi
        0054—2.4 9-Trvtxocnrvi
        0017—14.S-TP (S*V«	
        0055—V«m:
                                                                     ..1  87-68-3;  07?
                                                                      '  87-72-1,  43
                                                                     .!  78-83-1 j  38

                                                                     ..I  58-89-9 i  00.
                                                                      .7439-97^.   02
                                                                      !  T2-13-5;   1 4
                                                                                 72
                                                                                 O.rj
                                                                                 36
                                                                                 144
                                                                                 50
                                                                                 10
                                                                                 SO
                                                                                 100
                                                                                 l 3
                                                                                 Ol
                                                                                 IS
                                                                                 144
                                                                                 007
                                                                                 30
                                                                                 1J
                          -J   78-93-3
                          ~!   98-94-31
                          ..:   87-86-5.
                           !  108-9S-2
                           i  IIO-36-H
                          _:77»2-4»-ji
                          .. 744O-22-4,
                          _!  63O-ZO-6,
                                                 79-34.5
                                            -. :800l-3V2
                                             . J   71-55-6
                                             .._;   79-00-51
                                            —I   74-01-6,
                                                                      I
                                                                        M-O6-2
                                                          53
                                                          030
                                                          014
                                                          0.04
          i« • mmma at 10 0 mf t

   3. Appendix II of Part 2til is revised to
 read as follows:

 Appendix U—Toxicity Characteristic
 Leaching Procedure (TCLP)
   1.0 Scope and application.
   1.1 The TCLP is designed to deitrmine the
 mobility of bo4h organic and inontumc
 contaminants present in liquid, solid, and
 multiphasie wastes.
   1.2 If a total analysis of the waste
 demonstrates that individual contaminants
 are not present in the waste, or that th«y are
 present but at such low concentrations that
 the appropriate regulatory thresholds could
 not possibly be exceeded the TCLP need not
 be run.
   ZO Summary of method (See Figure 1).
   2.1  For wastes containing less than 0.5%
 solids, the waste, after filtration through a
 0.8-0.8 fim glass fiber filter, is defined as the
 TCLP extract.
   2.2 For wastes containing greater thdn
 0.5% solids, the liquid phase, if any. is
 separated from the solid phase 
-------
 21686
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114  / Friday, June 13. 1988 / Proposed Rules
 results an: mafhcmjt.-^illy combined In >iel
-------
                       Federal  Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June  13.  1986 /  Proposed Rules
                                                                                  H63;
  7 fi  Allow slurries lo sl.ind lo permit the
solid phase lo settle. W,isles thxt settle
slowly may l>e centrifuRed prior to filtration.
  7.7  Tr.-insfer the WHSIC sample lo the filler
holder
  Note.—If waste material has obviously
adhered to l(jp container used to transfer the
sample to the filtration apparatus, determine
the weight of ihi» residue and subtract it from
the sample weight determined in Step 7.5. to
determine the weight of the waste sample
which  will be filtered.
Gradually apply vacuum or gentle pressure of
1-iO psi. until air or pressurizing gas moves
through the filler. If this point is not reached
under lOpsi. and if no additional liquid has
passed through the filter m any 2 minute
interval, slowly increase the pressure in 10-
psi  increments to a maximum of SO psi. After
each incremental increase of 10 psi. if the
pressurizing gas has not moved through the
filter, and if no additional liquid has passed
through the filter in y initial weigh I
     of waste (Step 7.5 or 7.7) mnltiplied by
     100 equals percent solids.
  7.10.4  If the solid comprises less than 0.5".'.
 of the waste, the solid is discarded and the
 liquid phase is defined as the TCLP extract.
 Proceed to Step 7.14.
  7.10.5  If the solid is greater than or equal
 lo 0.5% of the waste, return to Step 7.1. and
 begin the procedure with a new sample of
 waste. Do not extract the solid that has been
 dried.
 • Note.—This step is only used to determine
 whether the solid must be extracted, or
 whether it may be discarded unextracted.  It
 is not used in calculating the amount of
 extraction fluid to use in extracting the
 waste, nor is the dried solid derived from this
 step subjected to extraction. A new sample
 will have to be prepared for extraction.
  7.11  If the sample has more than 0.5%
 solids, it is now evaluated for particle size. If
 the solid material has a surface area per gram
 of material equal to or greater than 3.1 cm!. or
 is capable of passing through a 9.3 mm (O.J75
 inch) standard sieve, proceed to Step 7.12. If
 the surface area is smaller or the particle size
 is larger than that described above, the solid
 material is prepared for extraction by
 crushing, cutting, or grinding the solid
 material to * surface area or particle size as
 described above. When surface area or
 particle size has been appropriately altered.
 proceed to Step 7.12.
  7.12  This step describe* the determination
 of the appropriate extracting fluid to use (See
 Sections 5.0 and 7.0).
  7.12.1  Weigh out a smdil sub-»ampl« of
 the solid phase of the waste, reduce the solid
 (if necessary) to a particle size of
 approximately 1 mm in diameter or less, and
 transfer a 5.0 gram portion to a 500 ml beaker
 or erlenmeyer flask.
  7.1&2  Add 96.5 ml distilled deior.ized
 water (ASTM Type 2). cover with watchgiass.
 and stir vigorously for 5 minutes using a
 magnetic stirrer. Measure and record the pH.
 If the pH is f. 5.0. extraction fluid »1 is uied.
 Proceed to Step 7.13.
  7.12.3  If the pH from Step 7.1£2 is >5.0.
 add 3.5 ml 1.0 N HCl. slurry for 30 seconds.
 cover with a watchgiass. heat to 50*C. and
 hold for 10 minutes.
  7.12.4  Let the solution cool !u room
 temperature and record pH. If pH is -.5.0. use
 extraction fluid =1.  If the pH is  >50.
 extraction fluid =2 is used.
• 7 13  Calculate the weight of the remaining'
 solid material by subtracting the weight of
 the sub-sample taken for Step 7.12. from (he
 original amount of solid material, as obtained
 from Step 7.1 or 7.9. Transfer remaining solid
 material into the extractor vessel, including
the filler usrti In >r|i.ir.ilc the imli.il liquul
from the solid phase.
  Note.—If any of the solid phase remains
adhered to trie walls of the filler holder, or
the container used to transfer the waste, it*
weight shall be determined, subtracted from
the weight of the solid phase of the  waste. as
determined above, and  this weight is used in
calculating the amount of extraction fluid in
add into the extractor bottle.
Slowly add an amount of the appropriate
extraction fluid (See Step 712). into the
extractor bottle equal to 20 times the weight
of the solid phase that has been placed into
the extractor bottle. Close extractor bottle
tightly, secure in rotary extractor dev ice and
rotate at 30 ± 2 rpm for 18 hours. The
temperature shall be maintained at  22 = 3 'C
during the extraction period.
  Note.—As  agitation continues, pressure
may build up within the extractor bottle (due
to the evolution of gasses such as carbon
dioxide). To relieve these pressures, the
extractor bottle may be periodically opened
and vented into a hood.
  7.14   Following the 18 hour extraction, the
material in the extractor vessel is separated
into its component liquid and solid phases by
filtering through a new glass fiber filter as
outlined in Step 7.7. This new filter shall be
acid washed  (See Section 4.4) if evaluating
the mobility of metals.
  7.15   The TCLP extract is now prepared as
follows:
  7.15.1  If the waste contained no initial
liquid phase, the filtered liquid material
obtained from Step 7.14 is defined as the
TCLP extract. Proceed to Step 7.16.
  7.15.2  If compatible (e.g.. will not form
precipitate or multiple phases), the filtered
liquid resulting from Step 7.14 is combined
with the initial liquid phase of the waste as
obtained in Step 7.9. This combined liquid is
defined as the TCLP extract. Proceed to Step
7.16.
  7.15.3  If the initial liquid phase of the
waste, as obtained from Step 7.9. is  not or
may not be compatible with the filtered liquid
resultingfrom Step 7.14. these liquids ari» not
combined. These liquids are collectively
defined as the TCLP extract, are analyzed
separately, and the results are combined
mathematically. Proceed to Step 7.16.
  7.16   The TCLP extract will be prepared
and analyzed according to the appropriate
SW-846 analytical methods identified m
Appendix'HI  of 10 CFR 261. TCLP extracts tu
be analyzed for metals shall be acid digested
If the individual phases are to he dnalvzpd
separately, determine the volams of the
individual phases (!o 0.1 ml),  conduct -}\f
appropriate analyses, and combine  the
results mathematically by using a simple
weighted avenge:
                Final contarninant concentration -.
                                                            V. -  V.
                                                                D-294

-------
21688
Federal Register /  Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13, 1986 / Proposed Rules
   where:
   V, =The volume of the first phase (1|
   C< 'The concentration of the contaminant of
      concern in the first phase (mg/l)
   Vj =The volume of the second phase (1)
   Ci = The concentration of the contaminant of
      concern in the second phase (mg/l]
    7.17  The contaminant concentrations in
   Ihe TCLP extract are compared to the
   thresholds identified in the appropriate
   regulations. Refer to Section 9 for quality
   assurance requirements.
    8.0   Procedure when volcti'es are
   involved.
    The ZHE device has approximately a 500
   ml internal capacity. Although a minimum
   sample size  of 1UO grams was required in the
  Section 7 procedure, the ZHE can only
  accommodate a maximum 100 percent solids
  sample of 25 grams, due to the need to add an
  amount of extraction fluid equal to 20 rimes
  the weight of (he solid phase. Step 3.4
  provides lh» means of which !o determine the
  approximate sample size for the ZHE device.
    Although (he following procedure allows
  for particle size reduction during the conduct
  of the  procedure, this could result in the loss
  of volatile compounds. If possible, any
  necessary particle size reduction (See Step
  8.5) should be conducted on the sample a* it
  is being taken. Particle size reduction should
  onry be conducted during the procedure if
  there is no other choice.
    In carrying out the following steps, do not
  allow the waste to be exposed to the
  atmosphere for any more time than is
  absolutely necessary.
    8.1   Pre-weigh the (evacuated) container
  which  will receive the filtrate (See Section
  4.6). and set aside.
   8-Z   Place  the ZHE piston within the body
  of the ZHE (it may be helpful to first moisten
  the piston O-rings slightly with extraction
 fluid). Secure the gas inlet/outlet flange
 (bottom flange) onto Ihe ZHE body in
 accordance with the manufacturer's
 instructions. Secure the glass fiber filler
 between the support screens and set aside.
 Set liquid inlet/outlet flange 'top  flange|
 aside.                            -,
   8.3   If the waste will obviously yield no
 free liquid when subiected to pressure
 filtration, weigh out a representative
 subsample of the wa.te (23 gram  maximum—
 See Step 8.0|.  record weight, and proceed to
 Step 8.5.
   8.4  This sfp provides the means by
 which to determine the approximate sample
 size for 'he 21 iE device. If the waste is liquid
 or multiyhasic. follow the procedure outlined
 in Steps 7.2 to 7 3 |-s:ng the Section ~
 filtration apparatus!, and obtain the percent
 solids by dividing :he weight of the solid
 phase of the waste hj. the original sample
 size used. If Ihe waste obviously contains
 greater  than 0.5'V, soi: Js. xu to Step 8.4.J. If it
 appears tHai the solid ma> comprise less than
 0.5% of the waste jo :o Step .1 4.1
   8.4.1   UiMerniine Ihe percent solids tiv
 using rhn out a now luo ,;r.im minimum
 representative sample, proceed to Sti-p 8 7.
 and follow until the liquid phj.se <>i the waste
 is filtered usm« the 7.1 IF. deucn (Step 8.S|.
This liquid !:!tf,it<; is JnlineJ us the TCl.P
                                             extract and is analyzed directly If Ihe waste
                                             contains greater than or equal to 0.5% solids.
                                             repeal Step 8.4 using a new 100 gram
                                             minimum sample, determine the percent
                                             solids, and proceed to Step 8.4.2.
                                               8.4.2  If the sample is <  25"i solids, weigh
                                             out a new too gram minimum representative
                                             sample, and proceed to Step 9.5. If ths sample
                                             is > 25% solids, the maximum amount of
                                             sample the ZHE can accommodate is
                                             determined  by dividing 25 grams by the
                                             percent solids obtained from Step 8.4 Weigh
                                             out a new representative sample of the
                                             determined size.
                                               &5  After a representative sample of the
                                             waste (sample size determined from Step 8.4)
                                             has been weighed out and recorded, the
                                             sample is now evaluated for particle size (See
                                             Step 8.0). If the solid material within the
                                             waste obviously has a. surface  area per gram
                                             of material equal to or greater than 3.1 cm2.
                                            or is capable of passing through a 9.5 mm
                                            [0.375 inch) standard sieve, proceed
                                            immediately to Step a.6. If the surface area is
                                            smaller or the particle size is larger than that
                                            described above, the solid material which
                                            does not meet the above criteria is separated
                                            from the liquid phase by sieving (or
                                            equivalent means), and the solid is prepared
                                            for extraction by crushing, cutting, or grinding
                                          ' to • surface area or particle size as described
                                            above.
                                              Note,—Wastes and appropriate equipment
                                            should be refrigerated, if possible, to 4'C
                                            pnor to particle «ze reduction.  Grinding and
                                            milling machinery  which generates heal shall
                                            not be used for panicle size reduction. If
                                            reduction of the so.'td phase of the waste is
                                            necessary,  exposure of the waste to the
                                            atmosphere should be avoided to the extent
                                            possible.
                                            When surface area or particle size has been
                                            appropriately altered, the solid is recombined
                                            with the rest of the waste.
                                            ' 8.8  Waste slurries need not be allowed to
                                            stand to permit the solid phase to settle.
                                            Wastes that settle slowly shall not be
                                            centnfuged prior to filtration.
                                             8.7  Transfer the entire sample (liquid and
                                            solid phases) quickly to the ZHE, Secure rhe
                                            filter and support screens into the top flange
                                           of the device and secure the  top flange to the
                                           ZHE body in accordance with the
                                           manufacturer's! instructions. Tighten all ZHE
                                           fittings and place the device  in the \ ertical
                                           position (gas inlet/outlet flange on the
                                           bottom). Do not attach the evract collection
                                           device to the lop plate.
                                             Note.—!f waste material has obviously
                                           adhered to the container US«Q :o transfer the
                                           sample to the  ZHE. determine the weight of
                                           this residue and subtract it from the sample
                                           weight determined  in Step a.4. to determine
                                           the weight of the waste sample which wiilb«t
                                           filtered.
                                           Attach a stas line to the ;>»s inl«t/outlet \jlve
                                           (bottom flanse). and with the liquid -r.'.ml
                                           outlet valve (lop Han«e| open, beqm ^
                                           gentle pressure of l-io psi (or more if
                                           necessary I to slowly force aii heoa
                                           of the ZHE device. At the first .ippi'.-irancc of
                                           liquid from the liquid inle'/out'el \ai-.e.
                                           quickly dose the \aive and disconur.ue
                                           pressure.
                                             8.8  Altai:h  evacudtpj pre-'Aeinhwi ri!trale
                                           collection i.ont.-iiniT 
-------
                        Federal Register / Vol. 51.  No'. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 /  Proposed Rules
                                                                                   21669
 Reposition the ZHE in the vertical position
 with (he liquid inlet/outlet valve on top. Put
 5-10 psi behind the piston (if necessary), and
 slowly open the liquid inlet/outlet valve to
 bleed out any headspace (into a hood) that
 may have been introduced due to the
 addition of extraction fluid. This bleeding
 shall be done quickly and shall be slopped at
 tfie first appearance of liquid from the valve.
 Re-pressunze the ZHE with 5-10 psi and
 check all ZI IE fillings to insure that they are
 closed.
   8.11.3  Place the ZHE in the rotary
 extractor apparatus (if it is not already there).
 and rotate the ZHE at 30 +• 2 rpm for 18
 hours. The temperature shall be maintained
 at 22 ± + 3*C during agitation.
   8.12   Following the 18 hour extraction.
 check the pressure behind the ZHE piston by
 quickly opening and closing the gas inlet/
 outlet valve, and noting the escape of gas. If
 the pressure has not been maintained (i.e..  no
 gas release observed), the device is leaking.
 Replace ZHE O-rings or other fittings, as
 necessary, and redo the extraction with a
 new sample of waste. If the pressure within
 the device has been maintained, the material
 in the extractor vessel is one* again
 separated into its component liquid and solid
 phases. If the waste contained an initial
 liquid phase, the liquid may be filtered
 directly into the same filtrate collection
 container (i.e.. TEOLAR* bag. gas-light
 syringe) holding the initial liquid phase of the
 waste, unless doing so would create multiple
 phases, or unless there is not enough volume
 left within the filtrate collection container. A
 separate filtrate collection container must be
 used in these cases. Filler through the glass
 fiber filler, using the ZHE device as discussed
 in Step 8.8. All extract shall be filtered and
 collected if the extract is multi-phasic or if
 the waste contained an initial liquid phase.
   Not*.—If the glass fiber niter is not  intact
 following agitation, the filtration device
 discussed in the NOTE in Section 4.3.1 may
 be used to filter the material within the ZHE.
   8.13  If the waste contained no initial
 liquid phase, the filtered liquid material
 obtained from Step 8.12 is defined as the
 TCLP extract If the waste contained an
 initial liquid phase, the filtered liquid
 material obtained from Step 8.12. and  the
 initial liquid phase (Step 8.8) are collectively
 defined as the TCLP extract.
   8.14  The TCLP extract will be prepared
 and analyzed according to the appropriate
 SW-846 analytical methods, as Identified in
 Appendix III of 40 CFR 261. If the individual
 phases  are to be analyzed separately.
 determine the volume of the individual
 phases  (to 0.1 ml), conduct the appropriate
 analyses and combine the results
 mathematically by using a simple volume
 weighted average:
                 Final contaminant concentration »  —
where
V, = The volume of the first phase (1)
C, = The concentration of the contaminant of
     concern in the first phase (mg/l|
V, = The volume of the second phase (1)
Ct = The concentration of the contaminant of
     concern in the second phase (mg/l)
  8.15  The contammani concentrations in
the TCLP extract are compared to the
thresholds identified in the appropriate
regulations. Refer to Section 9 for quality
assurance requirements.
  9.0  Quality  Assurance requirements.
  9.1  All data, including quality assurance
data, should be maintained and available for
reference or inspection.
  9.Z  A minimum of one blank for ev ery 10
extractions that h.ive been conducted in an
extraction vessel shall  be employed as a
check to rirtertnme if any memory effects
from the extraction equipment is occurring.
One blank shall also be employed for every
new batch of leaching fluid that is made up.
  9.3  All quality cpn'rol measures described
in the appropriate analytical methods shdil
be followed.
  9.4  Tht: method of slaud.ird .iddilion shall
be employed for each waste Upe if- II
Recovery of the compound from ^nkrd spiiK
of the TCLI' extract is not between 50 and
     , or 21 If the concentration of the
                                                           V.-i-V,
constituent measured in the extract i» within
20% of the appropriate regulatory threshold If
more than 1 extraction is being run on
samples of the same waste, the method of
standard addition need only be applied once
and the percent recoveries applied to the
remainder of the extractions.
  9.5  TCLP extracts shall be analyzed
within the following periods after generation:
Volatiles—14 days. Semi-volatiles—40 days.
Mercury—28 days, and other Metals—180
days.

    TABLE 1.—VOLATILE CONTAMINANTS '
             Comoound
                                    CASNO
n-aulf.
Cation 0>««jtli(M
Cj'OO" t*tracn.J*
i J D*craoroer>an*
€m«i wv
t*ooutanoi
 67-64-1
107-13-1
 71-43-2
 71-36-6
 75-15-0
 56-23-5
IG6-90-7
 67-66-3
107-06-2
 75-35-4
141.73-6
100-41-4
 60-2S-7
 78-83-1
 £7-56-1
 ?VO«-2
 78-93-3
1C9-IO-1
«3Q-:n-«
              TABLE 1.—VOLATILE CONTAMINANTS ' —
                            Continued
t.1.2.2-T*wacNe»o«man* 	
TofeMfl*

1.1.J.Tncmo«>*inan* 	

1 . 1 .2-1 nchiora- 1 .2.2-tnfluoro*aun*
Vinyl oMono* 	
Xytene 	

79-34-5
127-11-4
106-86-3

79-00-5
79-01-4

76-13- 1
75-C1-4
1330- JO-'

            1 Mckidw compound* oenXKO m earn m* Land Discos*
           H«lncnom Ru» and in* Toiicny Cnaraciansic

              TABLE 2.—SUITABLE ROTARY AGITATION
                          APPARATUS '
               Company
          AnociaMO Omen   j Ataundn*.
            •nd Manufacturing
            Co.

          LaraLano*
            Manulactunng

          IRA, MaclM Snog
            and LaBoratory

          EPRI Eincior	
                             (703) 549-5998.
                 Wiwmor* Lak*.
                   Mttnqan.13131
                   449-4118.
                 Santufc*. PtMrto
                   So». (8091 752-
            ' Any dew* wf*cn rotates In* Mttacnoft iran*i M an
          OMr-«ne; tamon uX s 2 rpm * accaeUOM.
            'AttMugn m aawe* t suuot*. * i» not
          (Md*.  n. mar 1*0 raw* rmroiimng to accommodate
                                                  TABLE 3.—SUITABLE ZERO-HEAOSPACC
                                                          EXTRACTOR VESSELS
Comcany | Location
AuooaMd Oeujn
O
Mjftvon Co>p 	
AMunona. Vigm*.
(7091 549-599*
U«ur*._~il«
Model No
3740-ZH8
SO1P58IC5
                            (800)225-3384
              TABLE 4.—SUITABLE FILTER HOLDERS
Company
NucMoore Con
MCTO Fmraoon
System
moor* Com
Location
Pteasanton.
CaMoma. (8OOI
882-7711.
(4151 828-6010
(800)225-3384
-x- !,*£,
425910!
4104001
^02400'
VT30142MW,
XX10O4700!
t
47
142
14;
47
  ' »nv a*nc* cacaow 01 soiu'iiin^ m* txtua horn in* so~d
pnaM o' me »«» i> sunaow. orowoy*) mji .1 s zntmcia,
co>*oanoi* wm tn« «ASI* and tn* consbiu«nn to o« ana-
lyzM Plastic otwcas iiot IKMO aoo««i may o* uwo «"*"
o~, 9anc comaminann ar« ot concern

      TABLE 5.—SUITABLE FILTER MEDIA
                                                 Comoany
                   Location     i Mod*) |  ^*,
Mnatmon
 Laoofaiom
                                                       ine
Cknon. N«> .Mrsry     GfF i
  (2011 773-S«00          !
                                                1 Non* KM

                                              BH.UNG COM *S«O-SO-U
                                                              D-296

-------
21690
Federal Register / VoL 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
                             FIGlFfc' 1:  TCLP Flowchart
  WET WASTE SAMPLE
  CONTAINS  < 0.5  %
  NON-FILTERABLE
  SOU IB
   LIQUID/SOLID
    SEPARATION
    0.6-0.8 urn
   GLASS FIBER
     FILTERS
                REPRESENTATIVE WASTE
                       SWPLE
                                        I
                                   CRY WASTE
                                    SAMPLE
                                                  SOLID
        DISCARD
         SOLID
SOLID
                       REDUCE PARTICLE SIZE IF >9.5 ran
                           OR SURFACE AREA <3.1 on2
                               TCLP EXTRACTION1
                                   O? SOLID
                            0-HEADSPACE EXTRACTOR
                            REQUIRED FOR VOLATILES
                                 LIQUID/SOLI 0
                                  SEPARATION
                               0.6-0.3 um GLASS
                                 FIBER FILTERS
                             WET WASTE SAMPLE
                             CONEMNS  > 0.5 %
                             NON-FILTERABLE
                             SOLICB
                                                     LIQUID/SOLID
                                                      SEPARATION
                                                      0.6-0.8 um
                                                      GLASS FIBER
                                                        FILTERS
                                                        LIQUID
                                                        ~1
                                                       STORE AT
                                                         4°C
                                           DISCATO
                                            SOLID
                                     LIQUID
                                   TCLP EXTRACT
             TCLP EXTRACr
                                   ANALYTICAL
                                  	 TCLP EXTRACT 	
    The extraction fluid employed is a function of the alkalinity of the 33lid
    phase of the waste.
                                           D-297

-------
             Federal Register / Vol. 51. Na 114 / Friday. )une 13-. 1966 / Propoaed Rules
21691
tl


c




T3


3
                            c
                            c
 J?T?_
        *
        a
                                    D-298

-------
 21692
                    Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
  4. Amend Table 1 of Appendix III of
Part 261 to add the following compounds
and methods in alphabetical order

Appendix III—Chemical Analysis Test
Methods
 TABLE 1.— ANALYSIS METHODS FOP ORGANIC
      CHEMICALS COHTAINEO m SW-846
        Compound
B-42-C
         IMM
&•*>«*>.
OcfUorooantanM*)	
1.2-Ofc
Z4On*«oajana...
   cMorobi
                         8.02.824  8020.8024,
                                 5030/8240
                          *      4)

                         8.01. U4  8010.8240.
                                 3510/8270
                          •      •

                         8.04.8.25  8040. 4250.
                                 3SIO/8270

                        801.8.02,  8010.8120.
                         8.12. 8.25      8250.
                                 3519/8270
                         8.01, 8.24  8010. 8240,
                                 5030/8240
                                 5030/8X0

                         8.08. 8.25  8090. 8250,
                                 3510/8270

                         8.118.25  8120.8250.
                                 3510.8270
                         8.12. 8-25  8120.8150,
                                 3510/8270
                         8.12.8.25  8010.8240.
                                 •3510/8270
                          •       •

                                 5030/8240
                                 5030/8240
                         8.0».8.25 8090. 8250.
                                 3910/8270
                                            TABLE  1.—ANALYSIS METHODS FOR ORGANIC
                                              CHEMICALS CONTAINED IN SW-&46—Contin-
                                              ued
                                                   Compound

                                           Pamacftloiminanol	

                                           PSanol..._	_..		
                                            T*ncnana«i*na 4
4
4
O018
0004
0005
0019
002O
0008
0021
0012
0023
0024
0025
0007
0026
0027
O028
O0t«
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
O012
0034
OO35
003«
0037
0038
0008
                                                                                                             a
                                                                                                             x
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             X
                                                                                                             x
                                                                                                             0
                                                                                                             0
                                                                                                             X

                                                                                                             3
                                                                                                             0
                                                                                                             X
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             8
                                                                                                             a
                                                                                                             a
                                                                                                             o
                                                                                                             o
                                                                                                             c
                                                                                                             X
                                                                                                                      100*14% 4)
                                                                                                                       1ZI0464)
                                                                                                                       10001*541
                                                                                                                      1000*1454)
                                                                                                                       1 910 4S4)
                                                                                                                       11)04541
                                                                               !OOO«<22?0>
                                                                                 1 *|0 45*1

                                                                                 100(45 II
                                                                               VXX)«.'270I
                                                                                 1 310 454)
                                                                               10no»(454|
                                                                                                                         1001454
                                                                                                                         10OI454
                                                                                                                         100)454
                                                                                                                       SOOO«t2Z70l
                                                                                                                        1(045*1
                                                                                                                      < s(0 444)


                                                                                                                      I«|Q454|
                                                                                                                      1<(0454|
                                                                                                                      I «IO 454)
                                                                                                                        1XII0454)
                                                            D-299

-------
                       Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13.  1986 / Proposed Rules
                                                                                                                 21693
                         TABLE 3024.—LIST or HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND REPOHTABLE QUANTITIES—Continued
                                                                                                Summv
                                        CASftN
                                                                                         HO
    1.1 JL2-T*»iei4.0^ncMOf^»«.»
                                         ?5014
IOOO
  to
IOOO
  t'
  1'

  f
  1-
  !•
  I-
                                                                              IOOO
                                                                                10
                                                                                10

                                                                                I"
                                                                                                                 CaMgory
1.4
4
1.4
2.4
4
1.2.4
'2.4
'.2.4
4
4
4
4
2.4
2.4
4
'.2.4
1.4
1»
2.4
t.2.4
1.4
1.2.4
1.4
2.3.4
0013
0009
0014
003»
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0010
0011
0049
004«
0047
0049
0048
0015
ooso
0051
0052
0053
OOS4
0017
0055
„
X
X
c
o
c
A
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
C
x
C
X
c
A
A
S .
X
1*104541
'(04541
'(04SJI
1000(4541
5000(22701
tOOO|454t
I0«(4 s»t
tOOO-*(434»
1 1=10 4541
1**(0«S4|
'10 4541
1»(04J4|
"(0 4541
"(O4S4I
10(4 54)
1000(4541
1*(0 454*
1000(454
1*(0 454
1000*4454
10«(4 54
1O«(454
100(45.4
1* CEHCLA • CAA SKKXI 112.
                                      • MMUnc* uM«t CEBCL* • ACHA S«Mn 3001
            itm »n nuutn ta<*e» to umamioo oi ma in
            m« itw^jutiiory Mum tor amqn»onal m* na

   1*—MOCMM tM «« l-cmM RQ • a CEHCLA MMBiy "O.
|FR Doc. 86-13033 Filed 6-12-8& 8MS am|
•UJNOCOOC IMP 89 II
                                                             D-300

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 245.5
      D-301

-------
                            MERCURY  IN SEDIMENT

                  Method  245.5  (Manual Cold Vapor Technique)

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This procedure'" measures total  mercury (organic t inorganic) in soils,  sediments,
           bottom deposits and sludge type materials.
     1.2   The range of the method is 0.2 to 5 ug/g. The range may be extended above or below the
           normal range by  increasing  or decreasing sample size or through  instrument and
           recorder control.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   A weighed portion of the sample is digested in aqua regia for 2 minutes at 95°C, followed
           by oxidation with potassium permanganate. Mercury in  the digested sample  is then
           measured by the conventional cold vapor technique.
     2.2   An alternate digestion12' involving the use of an autoclave is described in (8.2).
3.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     3.1   Because of the extreme sensitivity of the analytical procedure and the omnipresence of
           mercury, care must be taken to avoid extraneous contamination. Sampling devices and
           sample containers should be ascertained to be free of mercury; the sample should not be
           exposed to any condition in  the  laboratory that  may result in contact or air-borne
           mercury contamination.
     3.2   While the sample may  be analyzed without drying, it  has been found to be more
           convenient to analyze a dry sample. Moisture may be driven off in a drying oven at a
           temperature of 60°C. No mercury losses have been observed by using this drying step.
           The dry sample should  be  pulverized and  thoroughly  mixed before the aliquot  is
           weighed.
4.    Interferences
     4.1   The same types of interferences that may occur in water samples are also possible with
           sediments, i.e., sulfides, high copper, high chlorides, etc.
     4.2   Volatile materials which absorb at 253.7 nm will cause a positive interference.  In order to
           remove any interfering volatile materials, the dead air space in the BOD bottle should be
           purged before the addition of stannous sulfate.
5.    Apparatus
     5.1   Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (See Note 1):  Any atomic  absorption unit
           having an open sample presentation area in  which to mount the  absorption cell  is
           suitable.  Instrument settings recommended by the  particular manufacturer should  be
           followed.
           NOTE 1: Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the
           cold vapor technique are commercially available and may be substituted for  the atomic
           absorption spectrophotometer.
Issued 1974

                                          D-302

-------
      5.2   Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp: Westinghouse WL-22847, argon filled, or equivalent.
      5.3   Recorder:  Any multi-range variable speed recorder that  is compatible  with the  UV
           detection system is suitable.
      5.4   Absorption Cell: Standard  spectrophotometer cells 10 cm long, having quartz  end
           windows may be used. Suitable cells may be constructed from plexiglass tubing, 1" O.D.
           X  4-1/2".  The ends are ground perpendicular to the longitudinal axis and quartz
           windows (1" diameter X 1/16" thickness) are cemented in place. Gas inlet and outlet
           ports (also of plexiglass but 1/4" O.D.) are attached approximately 1/2" from each end.
           The cell is strapped to a burner for support and aligned in the light beam to give the
           maximum transmittance.
           NOTE 2: Two 2" X 2" cards with one inch diameter holes may be placed over each  end
           of the cell to assist in positioning the cell for maximum transmittance.
      5.5   Air Pump: Any peristaltic pump capable of delivering 1 liter of air per minute may be
           used. A Masterflex pump with electronic speed control has been found to be satisfactory.
           (Regulated compressed air can be used in an open one-pass system.)
      5.6   Flowmeter: Capable of measuring an air flow of 1 liter per minute.
      5.7   Aeration Tubing: Tygon tubing is used for passage of the mercury vapor from the sample
           bottle to the absorption cell and return. Straight glass tubing terminating in a coarse
           porous frit is used for sparging air into the sample.
      5.8   Drying Tube:  6" X 3/4" diameter tube containing 20 g of magnesium perchlorate (See
           Note 3). The apparatus is assembled as shown in the accompanying diagram.
           NOTE 3: In place of the magnesium perchlorate drying tube, a small reading lamp with
           60W  bulb may be used to prevent condensation of moisture inside the cell. The lamp is
           positioned  to shine on the absorption cell maintaining the air temperature in the  cell
           about 10°C above ambient.
6.     Reagents
      6.1    Aqua Regia: Prepare immediately before use by carefully adding three volumes of cone.
           HC1 to one volume of cone. HNO>
      6.2   Sulfuric Acid, 0.5 N: Dilute 14.0 ml of cone, sulfuric acid to 1 liter.
      6.3   Stannous Sulfate: Add 25 g stannous sulfate to 250 ml of 0.5 N sulfuric acid (6.2). This
           mixture is a suspension and should be stirred continuously during use.
      6.4   Sodium Chloride-Hydroxylamine Sulfate Solution:   Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride
           and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulfate in distilled water and dilute to 100ml.
           NOTE 4: A  10%  solution of stannous chloride  may be substituted for (6.3)  and
           hydroxylamine hydrochloride may be used in place of hydroxylamine sulfate in (6.4).
     6.5    Potassium Permanganate: 5% solution, w/v. Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in
           100 ml of distilled water.
     6.6    Stock Mercury Solution: Dissolve  0.1354 g of mercuric chloride  in 75 ml of distilled
           water. Add  10 ml of cone, nitric acid and adjust the volume to 100.0 ml. 1.0 ml  =   1.0
           mg Hg.
     6.7    Working Mercury Solution:  Make successive dilutions of the stock mercury solution
           (6.6) to obtain  a working standard containing 0.1 ug/ml. This working standard and  the
           dilution of the stock mercury solutions should be prepared fresh  daily. Acidity of  the
                                          D-303

-------
           working standard should be maintained at 0.15% nitric acid. This acid should be added
           to the flask as needed before the addition of the aliquot.
7.    Calibration
      7.1   Transfer 0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0 and  10 ml aliquots of the working mercury solution (6.7)
           containing 0 to 1.0 ug of mercury to a series of 300 ml BOD bottles. Add enough distilled
           water to each bottle to make a total volume of 10 ml. Add 5 ml of aqua regia (6.1) and
           heat 2 minutes in a water bath at 95°C.  Allow the sample to cool and add 50 ml distilled
           water and 15 ml of KMnO4 solution (6.5) to each bottle and return  to the water bath for
           30 minutes. Cool and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulfate solution (6.4)
           to reduce the excess permanganate. Add 50 ml of distilled water.  Treating each bottle
           individually, add 5 ml  of stannous sulfate solution (6.3) and  immediately  attach the
           bottle to the aeration apparatus.  At this point, the sample is allowed to stand quietly
           without manual agitation. The circulating pump, which has previously been adjusted to
           rate of 1 liter per minute,  is allowed to run continuously. The absorbance, as exhibited
           either on the spectrophotometer or the  recorder,  will increase and reach  maximum
           within 30 seconds. As soon as the recorder pen levels off, approximately  1 minute, open
           the bypass value and continue the aeration until the absorbance returns to its minimum
           value (See Note 5). Close the bypass value, remove the fritted tubing from the BOD
           bottle and continue the  aeration.  Proceed with the  standards and construct a standard
           curve by plotting peak height versus micrograms of mercury.
           NOTE 5: Because of the toxic nature of mercury vapor precaution must be taken to avoid
           its inhalation. Therefore, a bypass has been included in the system  to either vent the
           mercury vapor into an exhaust hood or pass the vapor through some absorbing media,
           such as:
           a)    equal volumes of 0.1  N KMnO4 and 10% H2SO4
           b)    0.25% iodine in a 3% KI solution.
           A  specially treated charcoal that will absorb mercury vapor is  also available from
           Barnebey and Cheney, E. 8th Ave., and North Cassidy St., Columbus, Ohio 43219,
           Cat. #580-13 or #580-22.
8.     Procedure
      8.1   Weigh triplicate 0.2 g portions of dry sample and place in bottom of a BOD bottle. Add 5
           ml of distilled water and 5 ml of aqua regia (6.1). Heat 2 minutes in a water bath at 95°C.
           Cool, add 50 ml distilled water and 15 ml potassium  permanganate solution (6.5) to each
           sample  bottle. Mix thoroughly and place in the water bath for 30 minutes at 95°C. Cool
           and add 6 ml  of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine  sulfate (6.4) to reduce the excess
           permanganate.  Add 55 ml of distilled water. Treating each bottle individually, add 5 ml
           of stannous sulfate  (6.3) and immediately attach the bottle to  the aeration apparatus.
           Continue as described under (7.1).
      8.2   An alternate digestion procedure employing an autoclave  may also be used.  In this
           method 5 ml of cone. H,SO4 and 2 ml of cone. HNO3 are added  to the 0.2 g of sample. 5
           ml of saturated  KMnO4  solution is added and the bottle covered with a piece of
           aluminum  foil.  The samples are autoclaved at  121°C and  15 Ibs. for  15 minutes. Cool,
           make up to a volume of 100 ml with distilled water and add 6  ml  of sodium chloride-
                                          D-304

-------
          hydroxylamine sulfate solution (6.4) to reduce the excess permanganate. Purge the dead
          air space and continue as described under (7.1).

9.    Calculation
     9.1  Measure the peak height of the unknown from the chart and read the mercury value from
          the standard curve.
     9.2  Calculate the mercury concentration in the sample by the formula:

                  _   ug Hg in the aliquot
          ugHg g    wt of the aliquot in gms

     9.3  Report mercury  concentrations as follows: Below 0.1 ug/gm, <0.1; between 0.1 and 1
          ug/gm, to  the nearest 0.01  ug; between 1 and 10 ug/gm, to nearest O.I  ug; above 10
          ug/gm, to nearest ug.
10.   Precision and Accuracy
     10.1 The following  standard deviations on replicate sediment samples were recorded at the
          indicated levels;  0.29 ug/g ±0.02 and 0.82 ug/g  ±0.03. Recovery of mercury at these
          levels, added as methyl mercuric chloride, was 97% and 94%, respectively.

                                      Bibliography

1.    Bishop, J. N., "Mercury in Sediments", Ontario Water Resources Comm., Toronto, Ontario,
     Canada, 1971.
2.    Salma, M., private communication, EPA Cal/Nev Basin Office, Almeda, California.
                                          D-305

-------
D-306

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 3020
   D-307

-------
                                 METHOD 3020

    ACID DIGESTION PROCEDURE FOR FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROSCOPY


1.0  Scope and Application

     1.1  This digestion procedure is approved for the preparation of
aqueous samples, mobility procedure extracts, and certain nonaqueous
wastes for analysis, by furnace atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS),
for the metals listed below.  The procedure is to be used when one is to
determine the total  amount of the metal in the sample.

     1.2  Metals for which Method 3020 is the approved furnace AAS procedure
are:
              Aluminum                             Lead
              Barium                               Manganese
              Beryllium                            Molybdenum
              Cadmium                              Nickel
              Chromium                             Silver
              Cobalt                               Thallium
              Copper                               Vanadium
              Iron                                 Zinc
     1.3  If a nonaqueous sample is not completely digested by this method
and determination as to the total  concentration of a metal  in the entire
sample is required, then the digestion methods described in Method 3030,
3040, or 3050 should be tried.  Some wastes will  require fusion techniques to
completely release metals from inorganic matrices.  The appropriate fusion
method should be chosen from the literature and its applicability to the
sample of interest proven by analyzing spiked samples and relevant standard
reference materials.
2.0  Summary of Method

     2.1  A mixture of nitric acid and the material  to be analyzed is
heated to near dryness in a Griffin beaker.  This step is repeated with
additional portions of nitric acid until  the digestate is light in color or
until its color has stabilized.   After the digestate has been brought to
near dryness, it is cooled and brought up in dilute  nitric acid such that the
final dilution contains 0.5% (v/v) HN03-


3.0  Interferences

     3.1  Interferences are discussed in  the referring analytical  method.
                                    D-308

-------
2 / WORKUP TECHNIQUES - Inorganic


4.0  Apparatus and Materials

     4.1  Griffin beakers of assorted sizes.

     4.2  Qualitative filter paper or centrifugation equipment.


5.0  Reagents

     5.1  ASTM Type II water (ASTM 01193):  Water should be monitored
for impurities.

     5.2  Concentrated nitric acid:  Acid should be analyzed to determine
level of impurities.  If impurities are detected, all analyses should be
blank-corrected.


6.0  Satnple Col 1ection, Preservation^ and Handling

     6.1  All samples must have been collected using a sampling plan that
addresses the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.

     6.2  All sample containers must be prewashed with detergents, acids, and
distilled deionized water.  Plastic and glass containers are both suitable.

     6.3  Aqueous wastewaters must be acidified to a pH of
less than 2 with nitric acid.

     6.4  Nonaqueous samples shall be refrigerated when possible, and analyzed
as soon as possible.


7.0  Procedure

     7.1  Transfer a representative aliquot of the well-mixed sample to a
Griffin beaker and add 3 ml  of cone. HN03-  Cover the beaker with a
watch glass.  Place the beaker on a hot plate and cautiously evaporate to
near dryness, making certain that the sample does not boil.  (DO NOT BAKE.)
Cool the beaker and add another 3-ml portion of cone. HN03.  Re-cover the
beaker with a watch glass and return to the hot plate.  Increase the temper-
ature of the hot plate so that a gentle reflux action occurs.  It should be
noted that if a sample is allowed to go to dryness, low recoveries may result
for tin and antimony.

      7.2  Continue heating, adding additional acid as necessary, until  the
digestion is complete (generally indicated when the digestate is light in
color or does not change in  appearance with continued refluxing).  Again,
evaporate to near dryness and cool the beaker.  Add a small quantity of
HN03 so that the final dilution contains 0.5% (v/v) HN03,  and warm the
beaker to dissolve any precipitate or residue resulting from evaporation.


                                        D-309

-------
                                                                    3020  /  3


       7.3  Wash down the beaker walls and watch glass with distilled water
and when necessary filter or centrifuge the sample to remove silicates and
other  insoluble material that could clog the nebulizer.  Filtration should be
done only if there is concern that insoluble materials may clog the nebulizer.
This additional step is liable to cause sample contamination unless the
filter and filtering apparatus are thoroughly cleaned and pren'nsed with
dilute nitric acid.  Adjust the volume to some predetermined value based on
the expected metal concentrations.  The sample is now ready for analysis.


8.0  Quality Control

     8.1  For each group of samples processed, procedural blanks (Type II
water and reagents) should be carried throughout the entire sample-preparation
and analytical  process.  These blanks will  be useful in determining if
samples are being contaminated.

     8.2  Duplicate samples should be processed on a routine basis.  Duplicate
samples will  be used  to determine precision.  The sample load will  dictate
the frequency,  but 10% is recommended.

     8.3  Spiked samples or standard reference materials should be employed
to determine accuracy.   A spiked sample should be included with each group of
samples processed and whenever a new sample matrix is being analyzed.

     8.4  The concentration of all calibration standards should be  verified
against a quality control  check sample obtained from an outside source.

     8.5  The method  of standard addition  shall be used for the analysis
of all  EP extracts and  whenever a new sample matrix is being analyzed.
                                     D-310

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 204.2
   D-311

-------
                                    ANTIMONY
              Method 204.2 (Atomic  Absorption, furnace technique)
                                                         STORET NO. Total  01097
                                                                      Dissolved  01095
                                                                     Suspended  01096
Optimum Concentration Range:   20-300 ug/1
Detection Limit:       3ug/l
Preparation of Standard Solution
     1.    Stock solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
     2.    Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
          analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
     3.    The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.2% (v/v) HNO3.

Sample Preservation
     1.    For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
          section of this manual.

Sample Preparation
     1.    The procedures for preparation of the sample as given in parts 4.1.1 thru 4.1.3 of the
          Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual should be followed including the
          addition of sufficient  1:1 HC1 to dissolve the digested residue for the analysis of
          suspended or total antimony. The sample solutions used for analysis should contain 2%
          (v/v) HNO3.

Instrument Parameters (General)
     1.    Drying Time and Temp:  30 sec-125°C.
     2.    Ashing Time and Temp:  30 sec-800"C.
     3.    Atomizing Time and Temp:   10sec-2700°C.
     4.    Purge Gas Atmosphere:  Argon
     5.    Wavelength:  217.6nm
     6.    Other  operating parameters should  be set as specified by the particular instrument
          manufacturer.

Analysis Procedure
     1.    For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
          Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1978
                                        D-312

-------
Notes
     1.     l he above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
           2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
           graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
           be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
           above recommended settings.
     2.     The use of background correction is recommended.
     3.     Nitrogen may also be used as the purge gas.
     4.     If  chloride concentration presents a  matrix problem or  causes a loss previous to
           atomization, add an excess of 5 mg of ammonium nitrate to the furnace and ash using a
           ramp accessory or with incremental steps until the recommended ashing temperature is
           reached.
     5.     For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
           standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
           section of this manual).
     6.     If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
           of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     7.     Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.

Precision and Accuracy
     1.     Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
                                         D-313

-------
D-314

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 206.2
     D-315

-------
                                      ARSENIC

              Method 206.2 (Atomic Absorption,  furnace technique)

                                                          STORET NO. Total 01002
                                                                      Dissolved 01000
                                                                     Suspended 01001
Optimum Concentration Range: 5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit: 1 ug/1

Preparation of Standard Solution
      1.    Stock solution: Dissolve 1.320 g of arsenic trioxide, As203 (analytical reagent grade) in
           100 ml of deionized distilled water containing 4 g NaOH. Acidify the solution with 20 ml
           cone. HNO3 and dilute to 1 liter. 1 ml = 1 mg As (1000 mg/1).

      2.    Nickel Nitrate Solution, 5%: Dissolve 24.780 g of ACS reagent grade Ni(NO3)2«6H:O in
           deionized distilled water and make up to 100ml.

      3.    Nickel Nitrate Solution, 1%: Dilute 20 ml of the 5% nickel nitrate to 100 ml with
           deionized distilled water.

      4.    Working Arsenic Solution:  Prepare dilutions  of the  stock solution to be used as
           calibration standards at the time of analysis. Withdraw appropriate aliquots of the stock
           solution, add 1 ml of cone. HNO3, 2ml of 30% H2O2 and 2ml of the 5%  nickel  nitrate
           solution. Dilute to 100 ml with deionized distilled water.

Sample Preservation
      1.    For  sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption  Methods
           section of this manual.

Sample Preparation
      1.    Transfer 100 ml of well-mixed sample to a 250 ml Griffin beaker, add 2 ml of 30% H:O2
           and  sufficient cone. HNO3 to result in an acid concentration of l%(v/v). Heat for 1 hour
           at 95°C or until the volume is slightly less than 50 ml.

      2.    Cool and bring back to 50 ml with deionized distilled water.

      3.    Pipet 5 ml of this digested solution into a 10-ml volumetric flask, add  1 ml of the 1%
           nickel nitrate solution and dilute to 10 ml with deionized distilled water. The sample is
           now ready for injection into the furnace.
Approved for NPDES and SDWA
Issued 1978


                                          D-316

-------
           NOTE: If solubilization or digestion is not required, adjust the HNO3 concentration of
           the sample to 1 % (v/v) and add 2 ml of 30%H2O2 and 2 ml of 5% nickel nitrate to each
           100 ml of sample. The volume of the calibration standard should be adjusted with
           deionized distilled water to match the volume change of the sample.

Instrument Parameters (General)
      1.    Drying Time and Temp: 30 sec-125°C.
      2.    Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec-1100°C.
      3.    Atomizing Time and Temp: 10sec-2700°C.
      4.    Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
      5.    Wavelength: 193.7 nm
      6.    Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
           manufacturer.

Analysis Procedure
      1.    For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3  of the
           Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.

Notes
      1.    The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
           2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, purge gas interrupt and non-pyrolytic
           graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
           be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods  than the
           above recommended settings.
     2.    The use of background correction is recommended.
     3.    For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
           standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1  of the Atomic Absorption  Methods
           section of this manual).
     4.    If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
           of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     5.     For quality control requirements  and optional recommendations  for  use in  drinking
           water analyses, see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     6.     Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.

Precision and Accuracy
      1.     In a  single laboratory  (EMSL),  using  a mixed industrial-domestic  waste  effluent
           containing 15 ug/1 and spiked with concentrations of 2,  10 and 25 ug/1, recoveries of
           85%, 90% and 88% were obtained respectively. The relative standard deviation at  these
           concentrations levels were ±8.8%,  ±fc.2%,  ±5.4% and  18.7%, respectively.
     2.     In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
           of 20, 50 and  100  ug As/1,  the  standard deviations  were ±0.7,  ±1.1 and  ±1.6
           respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 105%, 106% and 101 %, respectively.
                                        D-317

-------
D-318

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 270.2
       D-319

-------
                                     SELENIUM

              Method  270.2 (Atomic Absorption,  furnace technique)

                                                         STORET  NO.  Total  01147
                                                                      Dissolved  01145
                                                                     Suspended  01146

Optimum Concentration Range:   5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit:      2ug/l

Preparation of Standard Solution
      I.     Stock Selenium Solution: Dissolve 0.3453 g of selenous acid (actual assay 94.6% HiSeO,)
           in deionized distilled water and make up to 200 ml. 1 ml  = 1 mg Se (1000 mg/1).
      2.     Nickel Nitrate Solution, 5%: Dissolve 24.780 g of ACS reagent grade Ni(NO,):-6H:O in
           deionized distilled water and make up to 100 ml.
      3.     Nickel Nitrate Solution, 1%: Dilute 20  ml of the 5% nickel nitrate to 100 ml with
           deionized distilled water.
      4.     Working Selenium Solution: Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as
           calibration standards at the time of analysis. Withdraw appropriate aliquots of the stock
           solution, add 1 ml of cone. HNO3, 2 ml of 30% H2O2 and 2 ml of the 5% nickel nitrate
           solution. Dilute to 100 ml with deionized distilled water.

Sample Preservation                                     ;
      1.     For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
           section of this manual.

Sample Preparation
      1.     Transfer 100 ml of well-mixed sample to a 250 ml Griffin beaker, add 2 ml of 30% H;O:
           and sufficient cone. HNO3 to result in an acid concentration of 1 %(v/v). Heat for 1 hour
           at 95°C or until the volume is slightly less than 50 ml.
      2.     Cool and bring back to 50 ml with deionized distilled water.
      3.     Pipet 5 ml of this digested solution  into a 10-ml volumetric flask, add I ml of the 1%
           nickel nitrate solution and dilute to  10 ml with deionized distilled water. The sample is
           now ready for injection into the furnace. NOTE: If solubilization or digestion is not
           required adjust the HNO3 concentration of the sample to 1% (v/v) and add 2 ml of 30%
           H:O; and 2 ml of 5% nickel nitrate to  each 100 ml of sample. The volume  of the
           calibration standard should be adjusted  with deionized distilled water to match the
           volume change of the sample.
Approved for  NPDES  and SOW A
Issued 1978

                                         D-320

-------
Instrument Parameters
      1.    Drying time and temperature: 30 sec @ 125"C
      2.    Charring time and temperature: 30 sec @ 1200°C
      3.    Atomizing time and temperature: 10 sec @ 2700°C
      4.    Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
      5.    Wavelength: 196.0 nm.
      6.    Other operating  parameters  should be set as specified by the  particular instrument
           manufacturer.

Analysis Procedure
      1.    For the analysis procedure and the calculation see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
           Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.

Notes
      1.    The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
           2100, based  on the  use of a 20 ul injection,  purge gas  imenupt and non-pyiolvtic
           graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
           be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
           above recommended settings.
      2.    The use of background correction is recommended.
      3.    Selenium analysis suffers interference from chlorides (> 800 mg/1) and sulfate (> 200
           mg/1). For the analysis of industrial effluents and samples with concentrations of sulfate
           from 200 to 2000 mg/1, both samples and standards should be prepared to contain 1%
           nickel.
     4.    For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
           standard addition is  not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
           section of this manual).
      5.    For quality control requirements and optional recommendations  for use in drinking
           water analyses, see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     6.    If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
           of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     7.    Data to entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.

Precision and Accuracy
      1.    Using a sewage  treatment plant  effluent containing <2  ug/1 and  spiked  with  a
           concentration of 20 ug/1, a recovery of 99% was obtained.
     2.    Using a series of industrial waste effluents spiked at a 50  ug/1 level, recoveries ranged
           from 94 to 112%.
     3.    Using a 0.1% nickel nitrate solution as a synthetic matrix with selenium concentrations
           of 5, 10, 20, 40, 50, and 100 ug/1, relative standard deviations of 14.2, 11.6, 9.3, 7.2, 6.4
           and 4.1 %, respectively, were obtained at the 95% confidence level.
                                          D-321

-------
     4.   In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
          of  5,  10, and 20 ug Se/1, the standard deviations  were ±0.6, ±0.4, and ±0.5,
          respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 92%, 98%, and 100%, respectively.

Reference:
     "Determining Selenium in  Water,  Wastewater, Sediment and Sludge By  Flameless Atomic
     Absorption Spectroscopy",  Martin, T.  D., Kopp, J. F. and Ediger, R.  D. Atomic Absorption
     Newsletterl4,109(1975).
                                          D-322

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 272.2
      D-323

-------
                                      SILVER

              Method 272.2  (Atomic Absorption,  furnace  technique)

                                                        STORET NO. Total 01077
                                                                     Dissolved 01075
                                                                    Suspended 01076

Optimum Concentration Range:    1-25 ug/1
Detection Limit:      0.2 ug/1

Preparation of Standard Solution
     I.    Stock Solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
     2.    Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
          analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
     3.    The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.

Sample Preservation
     1.    For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
          section of this manual.

Sample Preparation
     1.    Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method". Sample solutions for analysis
          should contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.

Instrument Parameters (General)
     1.    Drying Time and Temp: 30 sec-125°C.
     2.    Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec-400°C.
     3.    Atomizing Time and Temp: 10 sec-2700'C
     4.    Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
     5.    Wavelength: 328.1 nm
     6.    Other  operating parameters should be set as  specified by the particular  instrument
          manufacturer.

Analysis Procedure
     1.    For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
          Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES and  SDWA
Issued 1978
                                        D-324

-------
Notes
      1.    The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
           2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, .continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
           graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
           be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
           above recommended settings.
     2.    Background correction may be required if the sample contains high dissolved solids.
     3.    The use of halide acids should be avoided.
     4.    If adsorption to container walls or formation of AgCl is suspected, see NOTE 3 under the
           Direct Aspiration Method 272.1.
     5     For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
           standard addition is not required (see part  5.2.1  of the Atomic Absorption Methods
           section of this manual).
     6.    For quality control  requirements and optional recommendations for use in drinking
           \\ateranalyses. see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     7.    ff method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
           of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     8.    Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.

Precision and Accuracy:
     1.    In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
           of 25,  50,  and 75  ug  Ag/1,  the standard deviations  were  -0.4,  -0.7,  and  09.
           respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 94%, 100% and 104%, respectively.
                                          D-325

-------
D-326

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 279.2
        D-327

-------
                                    THALLIUM

              Method 279.2  (Atomic Absorption,  furnace  technique)

                                                        STORET NO. Total  01059
                                                                     Dissolved  01057
                                                                   Suspended  01058

Optimum Concentration Range:    5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit:       1 ug/1

Preparation of Standard Solution
     1.    Stock solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
     2.    Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
          analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
     3.    The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.

Sample Preservation
     1.    For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
          section of this manual.

Sample Preparation
     I.    Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method". Sample solutions for analysis
          should contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.

Instrument Parameters (General)
     1.    Drying Time and Temp: 30 see @ 125*C
     2.    Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec @ 400°C
     3.    Atomizing Time and Temp: 10 see ® 2400°C
     4.    Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
     5.    Wavelength: 276.8 nm
     6.    Other  operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
          manufacturer.

Analysis Procedure
     1.    For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
          Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1978
                                        D-328

-------
Notes
     1.    The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HG A-
          2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
          graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
          be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time  periods than the
          above recommended settings.
     2.    The use of background correction is recommended.
     3.    Nitrogen may also be used as the purge gas.
     4.    For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
          standard addition  is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
          section of this manual).
     5.    If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given  earlier in part 8.5
          of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
     6.    Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.

Precision and Accuracy
     1.    Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
                                         D-329

-------
D-330

-------
   ACID DIGESTION
(FROM CLP SOW NO. 785)
          D-331

-------
                                  ATTACHMENT  1

               SAMPLE PREPARATION OP SEDIMENTS, SLUDGES AND SOILS

1.  Scope and Application

    1.1  This method is an acid digestion procedure used to prepare sediments,
         sludges, and soil samples for analysis by flame or furnace atomic
         absorption spectroscopy (AAS) or by  inductively coupled argon plasma
         spectroscopy (ICP).  Samples prepared by this method may be analyzed
         by AAS or ICP for the following metals:

                 Aluminum        Chromium        Potassium
                 Antimony        Cobalt          Selenium
                 Arsenic         Copper          Silver
                 Barium          Iron            Sodium
                 beryllium       Lead            Thallium
                 Cadmium         Magnesium       Vanadium
                 Calcium         Manganese       Zinc
                                 Nickel

2.  Summary of Method

    NOTE:  A separate digestion procedure is required for furnace AA and ICP
           analysis.

    2.1  A representative 1 g (wet weight) sample is digested in nitric acid and
         hydrogen peroxide.  The digestate is then refluxed with either nitric
         acid or hydrochloric acid.  Hydrochloric acid is used as the final
         reflux acid for the furnace AA analysis of Sb, the flame AA or ICP
         analysis of Al,  Sb, Ba, Be, Ca, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu,  Fe,  Pb, Mg, Mn,
         Ni, £, Ag, Na,  Tl, V and Zn.  Nitric acid is employed as the final
         reflux acid for the furnace AA analysis of As, Be, Cd,  Cr,  Co, Cu, Fe,
         Pb, Mn, Ni, Se,  Ag, Tl, V, and Zn.  A separate sample shall be dried
         for a total solids determinaeion (Exhibit 0, Attachment 9).

J.  Apparatus and Materials

    J.I  250 ml beaker or other appropriate vessel.

    J.2  Watch glasses

    3.3  Thermometer that covers range of U° to 20(J°C

    J.4  Whatman No. 4
-------
     4.3   Concentrated Hydrochloric Acid (sp. gr. 1.19)

     4.4   Hydrogen Peroxide (30%)

5.   Sample Preservation, and Handling

     5.1   Non-aqueous samples must be refrigerated upon receipt until analysis.

6.   Procedure

     6.1   Mix the sample thoroughly to achieve homogeniety.  For each digestion
           procedure,  weigh (to the nearest 0. Olgms) a 1.0 to 1.5 gm portion of
           sample and  transfer to a beaker.

     6.2   Add 10 ml of 1:1 nitric acid (HWOj), mix the slurry,  and cover with
           a watch glass.  Heat the sample to 95°C and reflux for 10 minutes
           without boiling.  Allow the sample to cool, add 5 ml  of concentrated
           HNO^,  replace the watch glass,  and reflux for 30 minutes.  L)o not
           allow  the volume to be reduced  to less than 5 ml while maintaining
           a covering  of solution over the bottom of  the beaker.

     6.3   After  the second reflux step has  been completed and the sample has
           cooled, add 2 ml of  Type 11 water and 3 ml of 302 hydrogen peroxide
           (H202).  Return the beaker to the hot plate for warming to start  the
           peroxide reaction.   Care must be  taken to  ensure that losses do not
           occur  due to excessively vigorous effervescence.  Heat until effer-
           vescence subsides,  and cool the beaker.
     6.4   Continue to add 30% ^2^2 in 1 ml aliquots with warming until  the
           effervescence  is minimal or until the general sample  appearance is
           unchanged.   (NOTE:   Do not add more than a total of  10 ml  30% H202. )

     6.5   If  the  sample  is being prepared for the furnace AA analysis of Sb,
           the flame AA or 1CP analysis of Al, Sb, Ba,  Be, Ca, Cd,  Cr, Co, Cu,
           Fe, Pb,  Mg,  tin, Hi, K, Ag, Na, Tl, V, and 2n, add 5 ml of  1:1 HC1
           and 10  ml of Type 11 water, return the covered beaker to the  hot
           plate,  and  heat for an additional 10 minutes.  After  cooling, filter
           through  Whatman No. 42 filter paper (or equivalent) and  dilute to
           100 ml  with  Type 11 water (or centrifuge the sample - see  Note 1).
           The diluted  sample  has an approximate acid concentration of 2.5*
           (v/v) HC1 and  5£ (v/v) UNO 3.   Dilute the digestate 1:1 (200 ml final
           volume)  with the deionized water.   The sample is now  ready for
           analysis.

     6.6   if  the  sample  is beiny prepared for the furnace analysis ot" As, Be,
           Cd, Cr,  Co,  Cu,  Fe, Pb,  tin, Hi, be, Ag, Tl,  V, and Zn,  continue heat-
           ing the  acid-peroxide  digestate until the volume has  been  reduced to
           approximately  2 ml, add  10 ml of  Type 11 water, and warm the  mixture
           After cooling,  filter  through Whatman No.  42 filter paper  (or equi-
           valent  - see l«ote I) and dilute to 100 ml with Type 11 water  (or
           centrifuge the  sample).   The  diluted digestate solution  contains
                                     D-333

-------
          approximately 2% (v/v) HN03-  Dilute the digestate 1:1 (200 tnL final
          volume) with deionized water.  For analysis, withdraw aliquots of
          appropriate volume, and add any required reagent or matrix modifier.
          The sample is now ready for analysis.

7.   Calculations

     7.1  A separate determination of percent solids must be performed
          (Exhibit D, Attachment 9).

     7.2  The concentrations determined in the digest are to be reported
          on the basis of the dry weight of the sample.

     Concentration (dry wt.) (mg/kg) =


      where   C =  Concentration  (mg/L)
              V =  Final volume in liters after sample preparation
              W =  Weight in kg of wet sample
              S =  % Solids/100

     R£F:  tlodification of Method 3050 from SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating
     Solid Waste, EPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, July 1982.
ti.    Bibliography

     1.  Modification (by committee) of llethod 3050, SW-6A6, 2nd ed., Test
         Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, EPA Office of Solid Waste and
         Emergency Response, July 1982.
                                     D-334

-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 200.7M
     D-335

-------
             Federal  Register / Vol. 49.  No.  209  /  Friday. October 26,  1984  / Rules  and Regulations         199
           (S
where'ZTSai.is equal to ti
  (d) The gsStatigdence limits'
denved in 7c are commuted accordingMo the
following equations denvilMcpm precentiles
 [ the chi squared over degreesot-iVsedom
where LCL and UCLaYaO^e lower and upper
95* confidence limits respettwejvbased on
14 aliquots.                   ^""^^^
            STUDENTS' t VALUES AT THE 99*
               T CONFIDENCE LEVEL
Raagrting
  Thear>aMical method used must be
specificallyKraqhfied by number or title and
the MDL for eacnSnajyte expressed in the
appropriate method repbvuna units. If the
analytical method permits opfmqs which
affSBlthe method detection limit/ft**^
conditi&mjnust be specified with the MDL
value. The saiqple matrix used to determine
the MDL must alswj?e identified with MDL
value. Report the mealv^nalyte level with the
MDLand indicate if the iCjSL^procedure was
iterared^lf a laboratory standard*or a sample
that con tawed a known amount anaHy^e was
used for this determination, also report the
mean recovery.
^if the level of anaiyfe-m the  sample was
beloVlhe determined M0t or does not
exceed HUtjnes the MDL of thV-analyte in
reagent water, do not report a  valueXor the
MDL.

Appendix C to  Part 136—Inductively
Coupled Plasma—Atomic Emission
Spectrometric Method for Trace Element
Analysis of Water and Wastes Method
200.7

1 Scupt* 
-------
200	Federal  Register /  Vol.  49,  No. 209 /  Friday.  October 26.  1984 /  Rules and  Regulations
 the line emission of high concentration
 elements. The first of these effects can be
 compensated by utilizing a computer
 correction of the raw data, requiring the
 monitoring and measurement of the
 interfering element The second effect may
 require selection of an alternate wavelength.
 The third and fourth effects can usually be
 compensated by a background correction
 adjacent to  the analyte line. In addition, users
 of simultaneous multi-element
 instrumentation must assume the
 responsibility of verifying the absence of
 spectral interference from an element that
 could occur in a sample but for which there is
 no channel in the instrument array. Listed in
 Table 2 are  some interference effects for the
 recommended wavelengths given in Table 1.
 The data  in Table 2 are intended for use only
 as a rudimentary guide for the indication of
 potential  spectral interferences. For this
 purpose, linear relations between
 concentration and intensity for the analytes
 and the interferents can be assumed. The
 Interference information, which was
 collected at the Ames Laboratory,1 is
 expressed as analyte concentration
 equivalents (i.e. false analyte concentrations]
 arising from 100 mg/L of the interferent
 element. The suggested use of this
 information is as follows: Assume that
 arsenic (at 193.696 nm) is to be determined in
 a sample containing approximately 10 mg/L
 of aluminum. According to Table Z. 100 mg/L
 of aluminum would yield a false signal for
 arsenic equivalent to approximately 1.3 mg/L.
 Therefore, 10 mg/L of aluminum would result
 in a false signal for arsenic equivalent to
 approximately 0.13 mg/L The reader is
 cautioned that other analytical systems may
 exhibit somewhat different levels of
 interference than those shown in Table 2, and
 that the interference effects must be
 evaluated for each individual system.
  Only those interferents listed were
 investigated and the blank spaces in Table 2
 indicate that measurable interferences were
 not observed for the interferent
 concentrations listed in Table 3. Generally.
 interferences were discernible if they
 produced peaks or background shifts
 corresponding to 2-5% of the peaks generated
 by the analyte concentrations also listed in
 Table 3.
  At present, information on the listed silver
 and potassium wavelengths are not available
 but it has been reported that second order
 energy from the magnesium 383.231 nm
 wavelength  interferes with the listed
 potassium line at 766.491 nm.
  5.1.2  Physical interferences are generally
 considered to be effects associated with the
 sample nebuhzation and transport processes.
 Such properties as change in viscosity dnd
 surface tension can cause significant
 inaccuracies especially in samoles which
 may contain high dissolved solids and/or
 acid concentrations. The use of a peristaltic
 pump may lessen these interferences. If these
 types of interferences are operative, they
 must be reduced by dilution of the sample
and/or utilization of standard addition
 techniques. Another problem which can
  1 Ames La bora lory. USDOE. Iowa Slate
University. Ames Iowa 50011
 occur from high dissolved solids is salt
 buildup at the tip of the nebulizer. This
 affects aersol flow rate causing instrumental
 drift. Wetting the argon prior to nebulization,
 the use of a tip washer, or sample dilution
 have been used to control this problem. Also,
 it has been reported that better control of the
 argon flow rate improves instrument
 performance. This is accomplished with the
 use of mass flow controllers.
  5.1.3   Chemical Interferences are
 characterized by molecular compound
 formation, ionization effects and solute
 vaporization effects. Normally these effects
 are not pronounced with the ICP technique,
 however, if observed they can be minimized
 by careful selection of operating conditions
 (that is, incident power, observation position.
 and so forth), by buffering of the sample, by
 matrix matching, and by standard addition
 procedures. These types of interferences can
 be highly dependent on matrix type and the
 specific analyte element.
  5.2  It is recommended that whenever a
 new or unusual sample matrix is
 encountered, a series of tests be performed
 prior to reporting concentration data for
 analyte elements. These tests, as outlined in
 5.2.1 through 5.2.4. will ensure the analyst
 that neither positive nor negative interference
 effects are operative on any of the analyte
 elements thereby distorting the accuracy of
 the reported values.
  5.2.1  Serial dilution—If the analyte
 concentration is sufficiently high (minimally a
 factor of 10 above the instrumental detection
 limit after dilution), an analysis of a dilution
 should agree within 5 percent of the original
 determination (or within some acceptable
 control limit (14.3) that has been established
 for that matrix.). If not, a chemical or physical
 interference effect should be suspected.
  5.2.2  Spike addition— The recovery of a
 spike addition added at a minimum level of
 10X  the instrumental detection limil
 (maximum 100X) to the original
 determination should be recovered to  within
 90 to 110 percent or within the established
 control limit for that matrix. If not, a matrix
 effect should be suspected. The use of a
 standard addition analysis procedure  can
 usually compensate for this effect.
  Caution: The standard addition technique
 does not detect coincident spectral overlap. If
 suspected, use of computerized
 compensation, an alternate wavelength, or
 comparison with an alternate method  is
 recommended (See 5.2.3).
  5.2.3  Comparison with alternate method
 of analysis—When investigating a new
 sample matrix, comparison tests may be
 performed with other analytical techniques
 such as atomic absorption spectrometry, or
 other approved methodology.
  5.2.4  Wavelength scanning of analyte line
 region—If the appropriate equipment is
 available, wavelength scanning can be
 performed to detect potential spectral
 interferences.

6. Apparatus
  6.1  Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic
Emission Spectrometer.
  6.1.1  Computer controlled atomic
emission spectrometer with background
correction.
   6.1.2  Radiofrequency generator.
   6.1.3  Argon gas supply, welding grade or
 better.
   6.2  Operating conditions—Because of the
 differences between various makes and
 models of satisfactory instruments, no
 detailed operating instructions can be
 provided. Instead, the analyst should follow
 the instructions provided by the manufacturer
 of the particular instrument. Sensitivity.
 instrumental detection limit, precision, linear
 dynamic range, and interference effects must
 be investigated and established for each
 individual analyte line on that particular
 instrument. It is the responsibility of the
 analyst to verify that the instrument
 configuration and operating conditions used
 satisfy the analytical requirements and to
 maintain quality control data confirming
 instrument performance and analytical
 results.

 7. Reagents and Standards
   7.1  Acids used in the preparation of
 standards and  for sample processing must be
 ultra-high purity grade or equivalent.
 Redistilled acids are acceptable.
   7.1.1  Acetic acid.  cone, (sp gr 1.06).
   7.1.2  Hydrochloric acid. cone, (sp gr 1.19).
   7.1.3  Hydrochloric acid. (1+1): Add 500
 mL cone. HO (sp gr 1.19) to 400 mL deionized,
 distilled water  and dilute to 1 liter.
   7.1.4  Nitric acid.  cone, (sp gr 1.41).
   7.1.5  Nitric acid.  (1+1): Add 500 mL cone.
 HNO, (sp gr 1.41) to 400 mL deionized,
 distilled water  and dilute to 1 liter.
   7.2  Deionized distilled water Prepare by
 passing distilled water through a mixed bed
 of cation and anion exchange resins. Use
 deionized, distilled water for the preparation
 of all reagents,  calibration standards and as
 dilution water.  The purity of this water must
 be equivalent to ASTMType II reagent water
 of Specification D1193 (14.6).
   7.3  Standard stock solutions may be
 purchased or prepared from ultra high purity
 grade chemicals or metals. All salts must be
 dried for 1 h at  105 *C unless otherwise
 specified.
   (CAUTION: Many metal salts are
 extremely toxic and may be fatal if
 swallowed. Wash hands thoroughly after
 handling.)
   Typical stock solution preparation
 procedures follow:
   7.3.1  Aluminum solution, stock. 1 mL = /ig
 Al: Dissolve 0.100 g of aluminum metal in an
 acid mixture of 4 mL of (1 +\) HCI and l mL
 of cone. HNO] in a beaker. Warm gently to
 effect solution.  When solution is complete.
 transfer quantitatively to a liter flask add an
 additional 10 mL of (1 +1) HCI and dilute to
 1,000 mL with deionized. distilled water.
  7.3.2  Antimony solution stock, 1 mL = 100
 Hg Sb: Dissolve 0.2669 g K(SbO)C.H4O, in
 deionized distilled water, add 10 mL (1 + IJ
 HCI and dilute to 1,000 mL with deionized.
 distilled water.
  7.3.3  Arsenic solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
(ig As: Dissolve 0.1320 g of AsjO] in 100 mL of
deionized. distilled water containing 0.4 g
NaOH. Acidify  the solution with 2 mL cone.
 HNO] and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
                                                           D-337

-------
             Federal Register /  Vol.  49, No. 209 /  Friday,  October  26,  1984 /  Rules and  Regulations         201
  7.3.4  Barium solution, stock. 1 mL=100 fig
Ba: Dissolve 0.1516 g BaCI, (dried at 250 *C
for 2 hrs) in 10 mL deionized. distilled water
with 1 mL (1+1! HC1. Add 10.0 mL (1+1) HC1
and dilute to 1.000 with mL deionized.
distilled water.
  7.3.5  Beryllium solution, stock. 1 raL^lOO
fig Be: Do not dry. Dissolve 1.966 g
BeSO. -4H.O. in deionized. distilled water.
add 10.0 mL cone. HNO» and dilute to 1.000
mL with deionized. distilled water.
   7.3.6  Boron solution, stock. I mL—lOO fig
B: Do not dry. Dissolve 0.5716 g anhydrous
Hi BO] in deionized. distilled water and dilute
to 1.000 mL. Use a reagent meeting ACS
specifications, keep the bottle tightly
stoppered and store in a desiccator to
prevent the entrance of atmospheric
moisture.
   7.3.7  Cadmium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Cd: Dissolve 0.1142 g CdO in a minimum
amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Heat to increase rate
of dissolution. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to  1.000 mL with  deionized. distilled
water.
   7.3.8  Calcium solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Ca: Suspend 0.2498 g CaCOj dried at 180
'C for 1 h before weighing in deionized.
distilled water and dissolve cautiously with a
minimum amount of(1+1) HNOj. Add 10.0
mL cone. HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
   7 3.9  Chromium solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Cr: Dissolve 0.1923 g of CrOj in deionized.
distilled water. When solution is complete,
acidify with 10 mL cone. HNO> and dilute to
1.000 mL with deionized. distilled water.
   7 3.10  Cobalt solution, stock. 1 ml=100
fig Co: Dissolve 0.1000 g of cobalt metal in a
minimum amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Add 10.0
mL (1 + 1) HC1 and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
   7.3.11  Copper solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Cu: Dissolve 0.1252 g CuO in a minimum
amount of (1+1) HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
   7.112  Iron solution, stock. 1 mL=100 fig
Fe: Dissolve 0.1430 g Fe>O> in a warm mixture
of 20 mL (1 +1) HCI and 2 mL of cone. HNO>.
Cool, add an additional 5 mL of cone. HNOj
and  dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
   7.3.13  Lead solution, stock. \ mL = 100fig
Pb: Dissolve 0.1599 g Pb(NOj)i in a minimum
amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOi and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
   7314  Magnesium solution, stock. 1
mL ---100 fiij Mg:  Dissolve 0.1658 " MgO in a
minimum jmount of (1  -Ml HNOi.  Add 10.0
ml. r.onc UNO, and dilute to 1,000 mL with
: Do not dry. Dissolve 0.4730 g NaiSiOj
«9HtO in deionized. distilled water. Add 10.0
mL cone HNO> and dilute to 1,000 mL with
deionized, distilled water.
  7.3.21  Silver solution, stock.  1 mL=100 fig
Ag: Dissolve 0.1575 g AgNOj in 100 mL of
deionized, distilled water and 10 mL cone.
HNOj. Dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
  7.3.22  Sodium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Na: Dissolve 0.2542 g NaCl in deionized.
distilled water. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized. distilled
water.
  7.3.23  Thallium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Tl: Dissolve 0.1303 g TlNCs in deionized.
distilled water. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized. distilled
water.
  7.3.24  Vanadium solution, stock. 1
mL=100 fig V: Dissolve 0.2297 NH.VO, in a
minimum amount of cone HNOi. Heat to
increase rate of dissolution. Add 10.0 mL
cone. HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
  7.3.25  Zinc solution, stock. 1 mL = 100 fig
Zru Dissolve 0.1245 g ZnO in a minimum
amount of dilute HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL deionized.
distilled water.
  7:4  Mixed calibration standard
solutions—Prepare mixed calibration
standard solutions by combining appropriate
volumes of the stock solutions in volumetric
flash*. (See 7.4.1 thro 7.4.5) Add 2 mL of
(1+1) HNOi and 10 mL of (1 + 1) HCl and
dilute to 100 mL with deionized, distilled
water. (See Notes 1 and 6.) Prior to preparing
the mixed standards, each stock solution
should be analyzed separately to determine
possible spectral interference or the presence
of impurities. Care should be taken when
preparing the mixed standards that the
elements are compatible and stable. Transfer
the mixed standard solutions to a FEP
fluorocarbon or unused polyethylene bottle
for storage. Fresh mixed standards should be
prepared as needed with the realization that
concentration can change on aging.
Calibration standards must be initially
verified using a quality control sample and
monitored weekly for stability (See 7 6.3).
Although not specifically required, some
typical calibration standard combinations
follow when using those specific wavelengths
listed m Table 1.
  7.4.1  Mixed standard solution I—
Manganese, beryllium, cadmium, lead, and
zinc.
  7.4.2  Mixed standard solution II—Barium.
copper, iron, vanadium, and cobalt.
  7.4.3  Mixed standard solution III—
Molybdenum, silica, arsenic, and selenium.
  7.4.4  Mixed standard solution IV—
Calcium, sodium, potassium, aluminum.
chromium and nickel.
  7.4.5  Mixed standard solution V—
Antimony, boron, magnesium, silver, and
thallium.
  Note 1.—If the addition of silver to the
recommended acid combination results in an
initial precipitation, add 15 mL of deionized
distilled water and warm the flask until the
solution clears. Cool and dilute to 100 mL
with deionized, distilled water. For this acid
combination the silver concentration should
be limited to 2 mg/U Silver under these
conditions is stable in a tap water matrix for
30 days. Higher concentrations of silver
require additional HCI.
  7.5 Two types of blanks are required for
the analysis. The calibration blank (3.13) is
used in establishing the analytical curve
while the reagent blank (3.12)  is used to
correct for possible contamination resulting
from varying amounts of the acids used in the
sample processing.
  7.5.1  The calibration blank is prepared by
diluting 2 mL of (1 +1) HNOj and 10 mL of
(1+1) HCI to 100 mL with deionized. distilled
water. (See Note 6.) Prepare a sufficient
quantity to be used to flush the system
between standards and samples.
  7.5.2  The reagent blank must contain all
the reagents and in the same volumes as used
in the processing of the samples. The reagent
blank must be carried through the complete
procedure and contain  the same acid
concentration in the final solution as the
sample solution used for analysts.
  7.8  In addition  to the calibration
standards, an instrument check standard
(3.7), an interference check sample (3.8) and a
quality control sample  (3.9) are also required
for the analyses.
  7,6.1  The instrument check standard is
prepared by the analyst by combining
compatible elements at a concentration
equivalent to the midpoint of their respective
calibration curves. (See 12.1.1.)
  7.6.2  The interference check sample is
prepared by the analyst in the following
manner. Select a representative sample
which contains minimal concentrations of the
analytes of interest but known concentration
of interfering elements  that will provide an
adequate test of the correction factors. Spike
the sample with the elements  of interest at
the approximate concentration of either 100
fig/L or 5 times the estimated detection limits
given in Table 1. (For effluent samples of
expected high concentrations, spike at an
appropriate level.) If the type of samples
analyzed are varied, a  synthetically prepared
sample may be used if  the above criteria and
intent are met. A limited supply of a synlhetic
interference check sample will be available
from the Quality Assurance Branch of EMSL-
Cincmnati. (See 12.1.2).
  7 6.3  The quality control sample should
be prepared in the  same acid matrix as the
calibration standards at a concentration near
1 mg/L and in accordance with the
instructions  provided by the supplier. The
Quality Assurance Branch of EMSL-
Cincinnati will either supply a quality control
sample or information where one of equal
quality can be procured. (See  12.1.3.)
                                                             D-338

-------
  202
Federal  Register /  Vol. 49.  No.  209  / Friday. October  26.  1984 / Rules  and Regulations
 8. Sample Handling and Preservation
   8.1  For the determination of trace
 elements, contamination and loss are of
 prime concern. Dust in the laboratory
 environment, impurities in reagents and
 impurities on laboratory apparatui which the
 sample contacts are all sources of potential
 contamination. Sample containers can
 introduce either  positive or negative errors in
 the measurement of trace elements by (a)
 contributing contaminants through leaching
 or surface desorption and (b) by depleting
 concentrations through adsorption. Thus the
 collection and treatment of the sample prior
 to analysis requires particular attention.
 Laboratory glassware including the sample
 bottle (whether polyethylene, polyproplyene
 or FEP-fluorocarbon) should be thoroughly
 washed with detergent and tap water rinsed
 with (1+1) nitnc acid, tap water. (1 + 1)
 hydrochloric acid, tap and finally deiomzed.
 distilled water in that order (See Notes 2 and
 3).
   Note 2.—Chromic acid may be useful to
 remove organic deposits from glassware:
 however, the analyst should be cautioned
 that the glassware must be thoroughly rinsed
 with water to remove the last traces  of
 chromium. This is especially important if
 chromium is to be included in the analytical
 scheme. A commercial product.
 NOCHROMIX available from Godax
 Laboratories, 8 Vanck St., New York, NY
 10013, may be used in place of chromic acid.
 Chromic acid should not be used with plastic
 bottles.
   Note 3.—If it can be documented through
 an active analytical quality control program
 using spiked samples and reagent blanks.
 that certain steps in the cleaning procedure
 are not required for routine samples,  those
 steps  may be eliminated from the procedure.
   8.2  Before collection of the sample a
 decision must be made as to the type of data
 desired, that is dissolved, suspended or total,
 so that the appropriate preservation and
 pretreatment steps may be accomplished.
 Filtration, acid preservation, etc., are to be
 performed at the  time the sample is collected
 or as soon as possible thereafter.
   8.2.1 For the determination of dissolved
 elements the sample must be filtered  through
 a 0.45-^m membrane filter as soon as
 practical after collection. (Class or plastic
 filtering apparatus are recommended to avoid
 possible contamination.) Use the first 50-100
 mL to  rinse the filter flask. Discard this
 portion and collect the required volume of
 filtrate. Acidify the filtrate with (1 +1) HNO3
 to a pH of 2 or less. Normally. 3 mL of (1 +1)
 acid per liter should be sufficient to preserve
 the sample.
  8.2.2 For the determination of suspended
 elements a measured volume of unpreserved
 sample must be filtered through  a OAS-pm
 membrane  filter as soon as practical after
 collection. The filter plus suspended material
 should be transferred to A suitable container
 for storage and/or shipment. No preservative
 is required.
  8.2.3  For the determination of total or
 total recoverable elements, the sample is
acidified with (1 +1) HNOj to pH 2 or  less as
soon as possible, preferably at the time of
collection. The sample is not filtered before
processing.
                               9. Sample Preparation
                                 9.1  For the determinations of dissolved
                               elements, the filtered, preserved sample may
                               often be analyzed as received. The acid
                               matrix and concentration of the samples and
                               calibration standards must be the same. (See
                               Note 8.) If a precipitate formed upon
                               acidification of the sample or during transit
                               or storage, it must be redissolved before the
                               analysis by adding additional acid and/or by
                               heat as described in 9.3.
                                 9.2  For the determination of suspended
                               elements, transfer the membrane filter
                               containing the insoluble material to a 150-mL
                               Griffin beaker and add 4 mL cone. HNCv
                               Cover the beaker with a watch glass and heat
                               gently. The warm acid will soon dissolve the
                               membrane. Increase the temperature of the
                               hot plate  and digest the material. When the
                               acid has nearly evaporated, cool the beaker
                               and watch glass and add another 3 mL of
                               cone. HNOj. Cover and continue heating until
                               the digestion is complete, generally indicated
                               by a light colored digestate. Evaporate to
                               near dryness (2 mL). cool, and 10 mL HC1
                               (1+1) and 15 mL deionized, distilled water
                               per 100 mL dilution and warm the beaker
                               gently for 15 min. to dissolve any precipitated
                               or residue material. Allow to cool, wash
                               down the watch glass and beaker walls with
                               deionized distilled water and filter the
                               sample to remove insoluble material that
                               could clog the nebulizer. (See Note 4.) Adjust
                               the volume based on the expected
                               concentrations of elements present. This
                               volume will vary depending on the elements
                               to be determined (See Note 8). The sample is
                               now ready for analysis. Concentrations so
                               determined shall be reported as "suspended."
                                 Note 4.—In place of filtring, the sample
                               after diluting and mixing may be centrifuged
                               or allowed to settle by gravity overnight to
                               remove insoluble material.
                                9.3   For the determination of total
                               elements,  choose a measured volume of the
                               well mixed acid preserved sample
                               appropriate for the expected level of
                               elements and transfer to a Griffin beaker.
                               (See Note 5.) Add 3 mL of cone. HNOi. Place
                               the beaker on a hot plate and evaporate to
                               near dryness cautiously, making certain that
                               the sample does not boil and that no area of
                               the bottom of the beaker is allowed to go dry.
                               Cool the beaker and add another 5 mL
                               portion of cone. HNOi. Cover the beaker with
                              a watch glass and return to the hot plate.
                              Increase the temperature of the hot plate so
                              that a gently reflux action occurs. Continue
                              heating, adding additional acid as necessary.
                              until the digestion is complete (generally
                              indicated when the digestate is light in color
                              or does not change in appearance with
                              continued  refluxmg.) Again, evaporate to
                              near dryness and cool the beaker. Add 10 mL
                              of 1 +1  HC1 and 15 mL of deionized, distilled
                              water per 100 mL of final solution and warm
                              the beaker gently for 15 mm. to dissolve any
                              precipitate or residue resulting from
                              evaporation. Allow to cool, wash down the
                              beaker walls and watch glass with deionized
                              distilled water and filter the sample to
                              remove insoluble material  that could clog the
                              nebulizer. (See Note 4.) Adjust the sample to
                              a predetermined volume based on the
                              expected concentrations of elements present.
  The sample is now ready for analysis (See
  Note 6). Concentrations so determined shall
  be reported as "total."
    Note 5.—If low determinations of boron are
  critical, quartz glassware should be used.
    Note 6.—If the sample analysis solution
  has a different acid concentration from that
  given in 9.4, but does not introduce a physical
  interference or affect the analytical result, the
  same calibration standards may be used.
    9.4  For the determination of total
  recoverable elements, choose a measured
  volume of a well mixed, acid preserved
  sample appropriate for the expected level of
  elements and transfer to a Griffin beaker.
  (See Note 5.) Add 2 mL of (1 + 1) HNO> and 10
  mL of (1 +1) HC1 to the sample  and heat on a
  steam bath or hot plate until the volume has
  been reduced to near 25 mL making certain
  the sample does not boil. After this treatment.
  cool the sample and filter to remove insoluble
  material that could clog the nebulizer. (See
  Note 4.) Adjust the volume to 100 mL and
  mix. The sample is now ready for analysis.
  Concentrations so determined shall be
  reported as "total."

  10. Procedure
    10.1  Set up instrument with  proper
  operating parameters established in Section
  8.2. The instrument must be allowed to
  become thermally stable before beginning.
  This usually requires at least 30 min. of
  operation prior to calibration.
    10.2  Initiate appropriate operating
  configuration of computer.
    10.3  Profile and calibrate instrument
  according- to instrument manufacturer's
  recommended procedure*, using the typical
  mixed calibration standard solutions
 described in Section 7.4. Flush the system
  with the calibration blank (7.5.1} between
 each standard. (See Note 7.) (The use of the
 average intensity of multiple exposures for
 both  standardization and sample analysis
 has been found to reduce random error.)
   Note 7.—For boron concentrations greater
 than 500 j*g/L extended flush times of 1 to 2
 minutes may be required.
   10.4  Before beginning the sample run.
 reanalyze the highest mixed calibration
 standard as if it were a sample.
 Concentration values obtained should not
 deviate from the actual values by more than
 +5 percent (or the established control limits
 whichever is lower). If they do, follow the
 recommendations of the instrument
 manufacturer to correct for this condition.
   10.5  Begin the sample run flushing the
 system with the calibration blank solution
 (7.5.1) between each sample. (See Note 7.)
 Analyze the instrument check standard  (761)
 and the calibration blank (7 5.1)  each 10
 samples.
   10.6  If it has been found that  methods of
 standard addition are required, the following
 procedure is recommended.
   10.6.1   The standard addition  technique
 (14.2)  involves preparing new standards in
 the sample matrix by adding known amounts
 of standard to one or more aliquots of the
processed sample solution. This technique
compensates for a sample constitutent that
enhances or depresses the analyte signal thus
                                                           D-339

-------
               Federal  Register /  Vol. 49.  No. 209 /  Friday. October  26.  1984 /  Rules and Regulations
 producing a different slope from that of the
 calibration standards. It will not correct for
 additive interference which causes a baseline
 shift. The simplest version of this technique is
 the single-addition method. The procedure is
 as follows. Two identical aliquots of the
 sample solution, each of volume V,. are
 taken. To the first (labeled A) is added a
 small volume V. of a standard analyte
 solution of concentration c,. To the second
 (labeled B) is added the same volume V, of
 the solvent. The analytical signals of A and  B
 are measured and corrected for nonanalyte
 signals. The unknown sample concentration
 c, is calculated:


                     S.V.C,
                   (SA-S.) V,
 where SA and S, are the analytical signals
 (corrected fur the blank) of solutions A and B.
 respectively. V, and c, should be chosen 50
 that S» is roughly twice SB on the average. It
 is best if V, is made much less than V,. and
 thus c, is much greater than c,. to avoid
 excess dilution of the sample matrix. If a
 separation or concentration step is used, the
 additions are best made first and carried
 through  the entire procedure. For the results
 from this technique to be valid, the following
 limitations must be taken into consideration:
   1. The analytical curve must be linear.
   2. The chemical form of the analyte added
 must respond the same as the analyte in the
 sample.
   3. The interference effect must be constant
 over the working range of concern.
   4. The signal must be corrected for any
 additive interference.

 :;. Calculation
   11.1   Reagent blanks (7.5.2) should be
 subtracted from all samples. This is
 particularly important for digested samples
 requiring large quantities of acids to complete
 the digestion.
   11.2   If dilutions were performed, the
 appropriate factor must be applied to sample
 values.
  11.3   Data should be rounded  to the
 thousandth place and all results should be
 reported in mg/L up to three significant
 figures.

 !2. Quality Control (Instrumental)
  12.1  Check the instrument standardization
by aridlyzmg appropriate quality control
check standards as follow:
   12.1.1  Analyze and appropriate
 instrument check standard (7.6.1) containing
 the elements of interest at a frequency of 10%.
 This check standard is used to determine
 instrument drift. If agreement is not within
 ±5% of the expected values or within the
 established control limits, whichever is
 lower, the analysis is out of control. The
 analysis should be terminated, the problem
 corrected, and the instrument recalibrated.
   Analyze the calibration blank (7.5.1) at a
 frequency of 10%. The result should be within
 the established control limits of 2 standard
 deviations of the mean value. If not. repeat
 the analysis two more times and average the
 three results. If the average is not within the
 control limit, terminate the analysis, correct
 the problem and recalibrate the instrument.
   12.1.2  To verify interelement and
 background correction factors analyze the
 interference check sample (7.6.2) at the
 beginning, end. and at periodic intervals
 throughout the sample run. Results should fall
 within the established control limits of 1.5
 times the standard deviation of the mean
 value. If not, terminate the analysis, correct
 the problem and recalibrate the instrument.
   12.1.3  A quality control sample (7.6.3)
 obtained from an outside source must first be
 used for the initial verification of the
 calibration standards. A fresh dilution of this
 sample shall be analyzed every week
 thereafter to monitor their stability. If the
 results are not within ±591 of the true value
 listed for the control sample, prepare  a new
 calibration standard and recalibrate the
 instrument. If this does not correct the
 problem, prepare a new stock standard and a
 new calibration standard and repeat the
 calibration.

 13. Precision and Accuracy
   13.1  In an EPA round robin phase  1 study.
 even laboratories applied the IGP technique
 to acid-distilled water matrices that had been
 dosed with various metal concentrates. Table
 4 lists the true value, the mean reported value
 and the mean * relative standard deviation.

 14. References
  14.1  Winge. R.K.. V.J. Peterson, and V.A.
 Fassel. "Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic
 Emission Spectroscopy: Prominent Lines.
 EPA-600/4-79-017.
  14.2  Winefordner. J.D.. 'Trace Analysis:
Spectroscopic Methods for Elements."
Chemical Analysis. Vol. 48. pp. 41-42.
  14.3  Handbook for Analytical Quality
Control in Water and Wastewater
Laboratories. EPA-600/4-79-019.
   14.4  Garbarino. J.R. and Taylor. H.E.. "An
 Inductively-Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission
 Spectrometric Method for Routine Water
 Quality Testing." Applied Spectroscopy 33.
 No. 3 (1979).
   14.5  "Methods for Chemical Analysis of
 Water and Wastes." EPA-600/4-79-020.
   14.8  Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
 Part 31.
   14.7  "Carcinogens—Working With
 Carcinogens." Department of Health.
 Education, and Welfare. Public Health
 Service. Center for Disease Control. National
 Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
 Publication No. 77-206. Aug. 1977
   14.8  "OSHA Safety and Health
 Standards. General Industry." (29 CFR 1910).
 Occupational Safety and Health
 Administration. OSHA 2206. (Revised.
 January 1976).
   14.9  "Safety in Academic Chemistry
 Laboratories. American Chemical Society
 Publication. Committee on Chemical Safety.
 3rd Edition. 1979.

   TABLE 1 —RECOMMENDED WAVELENGTHS '
  and Estimated Instrumental  Detection Limits
_
Aluminum .. 	
Anamc 	 	 	 .
Antimony
Banum 	
Beryllium 	
Boron 	
Cadmium 	
Cataum
Cnromum 	
Coba*. 	
Copper 	
Iron 	
L4ad 	
Maona*um ,!...'.. " '.!'.' 	 '.'.".'. ..'.....
Manganese 	
Mofybdtnum 	 ....
Ndiai 	
Potaaawm
5elenmn
Sifcca (SO,)
SJver 	
Sodium...
Thanum 	
Vanadun . ..
Zinc . . 	
Wvjtn.
nm
309215
•33696
2C€ 933
455 4^3
313 042
249 773
226 502
3 1 ? 933
267 718
229616
32« 754
259340
220353
2T9 079
257610
202030
231 604
766 491

2!S 158
329068
568 995

292 J02
2-3956 {
Estimated
detection
MIM.
45



0 3
e
4

7
7
6
7
42
30
2
9
15

75
58
7

40
8
2
  'The wevewjngtns  luted am recommended Because of
me» sensnvily and overall acceptance Ounr wavetangtnj
may be substituted 4 they can provide the needed sensitivity
and are treated  «mi me same correcave leotmaues for
spectral interference. (See 511).
  'The estimated instrumental detection »rvs IS snown are
laken  from "Inductively Coupled  Rasr-^.*iorr»c Emission
Specvoacopy-Promnenl  Unes." EPA-600'i-79-017  They
are grven as a guide for an  instrumental  >
-------
 204	Federal  Register / Vol.  49. No. 209  /  Friday. October 26.  1984 /  Rules and Regulations
          TABLE 1.—ANALYTE CONCENTRATION EQUIVALENTS (MG/L) ARISING FROM INTERFERENTS AT THE 100 MG/L LEVEL—Continued


1 eat)
MaQneaum
IHaUaqMiaM 	 	 , ...... u 	 . . „... ,,...
Molybdenum
Nicttel
Setonum
«-brfln
Sodwn 	 - 	 	 _ 	 .
ThaNum
Vanednim
Zinc

Wave-
nm
220353
279079
2*7810

231.804
19ft (KM
206 198
S88.9BS
190.884
292.402
213.8S6


A1
017

0.005
O.OS

0.23


0.30




Ca

0.02











Cr

0.11
0.01



007


DOS



Cu










0 14

Wart*
F.

013
0.002
0.03

009



0005


rant—
"0


0.002










Mn

0.25











Mi













Ti

007





006



	

V








	



           TABLE 3. INTERFERENT AND ANALYTE ELEMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS USED FOR INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS IN TABLE 2

























AnalyWa
At
AS 	
8
Ba
Be
Ca
Cd 	
Co
Cr
Cu 	
Fe
Mg 	
Mn
Mo
Na
Mi 	
PtJ ...
Sb 	 „ 	
Se
$i
Tl
V
Zn . ...

(mg/u
10
to
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
t
t
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
10
1
10


























Intarierents
Al .
Ca
Cr 	
Cu 	
Fa
Mg
Mn
Ni 	
Ti
V















MfVMa)
vital j*/L
733
349
749
206>
f49
239
594
(96
40
512
245
236
201
32


Mean
p«an»MB
62
2.7
1 (
75
38
51
30
56
12
10
58
16
56
21 9


TnMvakM
MS/1
20
15
TO
22

11
20
60
25

30
24
)«


Samp**No. 2
Mean
repoftw*
vatua»ig/L

15














Mean
perc*rtRSO
















Tnwvvlua
M4/1









*





Sampla No. 3
Maan
rcpoflad
valua^g/L
















Wean
percent flSD





"





14
14


   h4ot M uloiiionia war* anatyud by aH labonrtonaa.

[Doc. 84-26189 Filed 10-23-84: 8:45 am)
BILLING COO€ 65«O-50-*I
                                                  D-341

-------
        SUP6RSCAN ELEMENTS, WAVELENGTHS, i, LTL
    Element

   Aluminum
   Ant tmony
   Arsenic
   Barium
   Bury I Hum
   Bismuth
   Baron
   Cadmium
   Calcium
   Cerium
   Chr om ium
   Cobalt
   Copper
   Dysprosium
   Erbium
   Europium
   Sado1inium
   Gallium
   Germanium
   Sold
   Hafnium
   Holmium
   Indium
   Iodine
   I r i d i urn
   Iron
   Lanthanum
   Lead
   Lithium
   Lutetium
   Magnesium
   Manganese
   Mercury
   Molybdenum
   Neodymium
   Nickel
   Niobium
   Osmium
   Palladium
   Phosphorus
   PI a t i num
   Potassium
   Praseodymium
   Rhenium
   Rhod ium
   Ruthenium
   Samar ium
   Scandium
   Selenium
   Si 1 icon
   Silver
   Sod ium
   Strontium
   Sulfur
   Tantalum
   Tellurium
   Teroium
   Thallium
   Thar ium
   Thulium
   Tin
   Ti tanium
   Tungsten
   Uranium
   Vanadium
   Ytterbium
   Yttrium
   Zinc
   Zirconium
Symbo1

fll-SS
Sb-SS
A»-SS
9a-SS
Se-SS
9i-SS
B-SS
Cd-SS
Ca-SS
Ce-SS
Cr-SS
Co-SS
Cu-SS
Dy-SS
Er-SS
Eu-SS
Gd-SS
G»-SS
G«-SS
Au-SS
Hf-SS
Ho-SS
In-SS
I-S3
Ir-SS
Fe-SS
La-SS
Pb-SS
Li-SS
Lu-SS
ng-SS
nn-SS
Hg-SS
Mo-SS
Nd-SS
Ni-SS
Nb-SS
Os-SS
Pd-SS
P-SS
Pt-SS
K-SS
Pr-SS
Re-SS
Rh-SS
Ru-SS
Sm-SS
Se-SS
Se-SS
Si-S3
Ag-SS
Na-SS
Sr-SS
s-ss
Ta-SS
Te-SS
Tb-SS
Tl-SS
Th-SS
Tm-SS
Sn-SS
Ti-SS
UI-SS
u-ss
V-SS
Yb-SS
Y-SS
Zr>-SS
Zr-SS
Wavelength*

  396. i3a
  306.833
  197. 197
  313.0*2
  S23.061
  2<»9.773
  393.366
  M3.76S
  203 . 332
  238.892
  333 . 1 70
  3<»9.910
  381.967
  263. 113
  2^2.763
  277.336
  32
  279.333
  237.610
  19<».232
  202.030
  309.<4l8
  231 .60
-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 350.2
         D-343

-------
                             NITROGEN, AMMONIA

            Method 350.2 (Colorimetric; Titrimetric; Potentiometric -
                                Distillation Procedure)

                                                          STORET NO. Total 00610
                                                                      Dissolved 00608

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This distillation method covers the determination of ammonia-nitrogen exclusive of total
           Kjeldahl nitrogen, in drinking, surface and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
           It is the method of choice where economics and sample load do not warrant the use of
           automated equipment.
     1.2   The method covers the range from about 0.05 to 1.0 mg NH3-N/1 for the colorimetric
           procedure, from 1.0 to 25 mg/1 for the titrimetric  procedure, and  from 0.05 to 1400
           mg/1 for the electrode method.
     1.3   This method  is described for  macro glassware; however,  micro distillation equipment
           may also be used.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   The sample is buffered at a pH of 9.5 with a borate buffer in order to decrease hydrolysis
           of cyanates and organic nitrogen compounds, and is then distilled into a solution of boric
           acid. The ammonia in the distillate can be determined colorimethcally by nesslerization,
           titrimetrically with standard sulfuric  acid with the use  of a mixed  indicator, or
           potentiometrically  by  the  ammonia electrode. The choice between  the first  two
           procedures depends on the concentration of the ammonia.
3.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     3.1   Samples may be preserved with 2 ml of cone. H2SO4 per liter and stored at 4*C.
4.    Interferences
     4.1   A number of aromatic and aliphatic amines, as well as other compounds, both organic
           and inorganic,  will cause turbidity upon the addition of  Nessler  reagent, so direct
           nesslerization (i.e., without distillation), has been discarded as an official method.
     4.2   Cyanate, which may be encountered in certain industrial effluents, will  hydroiyze to
           some extent even at the pH of 9.5 at which distillation is  carried out.  Volatile alkaline
           compounds, such as certain ketones, aldehydes, and alcohols, may cause an off-color
           upon nesslerization in the distillation method. Some of these,  such as formaldehyde, may
           be eliminated by boiling off at a low pH (approximately 2  to 3) prior, to distillation and
           nesslerization.
     4.3   Residual chlorine must also be removed by pretreatment of  the sample with sodium
           thiosulfate before distillation.
Approved fcr NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial region 1974

                                         D-344

-------
5.    Apparatus
     5.1   An all-glass distilling apparatus with an 800-1000 ml flask.
     5.2   Spectrophotometer or filter photometer for use at 425 nm and providing a light path of 1
           cm or more.
     5.3   Nessler tubes: Matched Nessler tubes (APHA Standard) about 300 mm long, 17 mm
           inside diameter, and marked at 225 mm ±1.5 mm inside measurement from bottom.
     5.4   Erlenmeyer flasks: The distillate  is collected in 500 ml glass-stoppered flasks. These
           flasks should be marked at the 350 and the 500 ml volumes. With such marking, it is not
           necessary to transfer the distillate to volumetric flasks.
6.    Reagents
     6.1   Distilled water should  be free of ammonia.  Such water is best prepared by passage
           through an ion exchange column containing a strongly acidic cation exchange resin
           mixed with a strongly basic anion exchange resin. Regeneration of the column should be
           carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions.
           NOTE 1: All solutions must be made with ammonia-free water.
     6.2   Ammonium chloride, stock solution: 1.0 ml = 1.0 mg NH3-N. Dissolve 3.819 g NH4C1
           in distilled water and bring to volume in a 1 liter volumetric flask.
     6.3   Ammonium chloride, standard solution: 1.0  ml = 0.01 mg.  Dilute 10.0 ml of stock
           solution (6.2) to 1 liter in a volumetric flask.
     6.4   Boric acid solution (20 g/1): Dissolve 20 g H3BO3 in distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
     6.5   Mixed indicator: Mix 2 volumes of 0.2%  methyl  red in 95% ethyl alcohol with 1 volume
           of 0.2% methylene blue in 95%  ethyl alcohol. This solution should be prepared fresh
           every 30 days.
           NOTE 2: Specially denatured ethyl alcohol conforming to Formula 3 A or 30 of the U.S.
           Bureau of Internal Revenue may be substituted for 95% ethanol.
     6.6   Nessler reagent: Dissolve 100 g of mercuric iodide and 70 g of potassium iodide in a small
           amount of water. Add this mixture slowly, with stirring, to a cooled solution of 160 g of
           NaOH in 500 ml of water. Dilute the mixture to 1 liter. If this reagent is stored in a Pyrex
           bottle out of direct sunlight, it will remain stable for a period of up to 1 year.
           NOTE 3:  This reagent should give the characteristic color with ammonia within  10
           minutes  after addition, and should  not  produce a precipitate with small amounts of
           ammonia (0.04 mg in a 50 ml volume).
     6.7   Borate buffer:  Add 88 ml of 0.1 N NaOH  solution to 500 ml of 0.025 M sodium
           tetraborate solution (5.0 g anhydrous Na2B4O7 or 9.5 g Na2BtO7»10H;,O per liter) and
           dilute to 1 liter.
     6.8   Sulfuric acid, standard  solution: (0.02 N, 1 ml  = 0.28 mg NH3-N). Prepare a stock
           solution of approximately 0.1 N acid by diluting 3 ml of cone.  H2SO4 (sp. gr. 1.84) to 1
           liter with CO2-free distilled water. Dilute 200 ml of this solution to 1 liter with CO2-free
           distilled water.
           NOTE 4:  An  alternate  and perhaps preferable  method  is to  standardize  the
           approximately 0.1 N H,SO4  solution against a 0.100 N Na2CO3 solution. By proper
           dilution the 0.02 N acid can then be prepared.
                                          D-345

-------
          6.8.1 Standardize the approximately 0.02 N acid against 0.0200 N Na:CO3 solution.
                This last solution is prepared by dissolving 1.060 g anhydrous Na:CO3, oven-dried
                at 140'C, and diluting to 1000 ml with CO:-free distilled water.
     6.9  Sodium hydroxide, I N: Dissolve 40 g NaOH in ammonia-free water and dilute to 1 liter.
     6.10 Dechlorinating reagents: A number of dechlorinating reagents may be used to remove
          residual chlorine prior to distillation. These include:
          a.    Sodium thiosulfate (1/70 N): Dissolve 3.5 g Na,S,O3»5H:O in distilled water and
                dilute to 1 liter. One ml of this solution will remove 1 mg/1 of residual chlorine in
                500 ml of sample.
          b.    Sodium arsenite (1/70 N): Dissolve 1.0 g NaAsO: in distilled water and dilute to 1
                liter.
7.    Procedure
     7.1  Preparation of equipment: Add 500 ml of distilled water to an 800 ml Kjeldahl flask. The
          addition of boiling  chips which have been previously treated with dilute NaOH will
          prevent bumping. Steam out the distillation apparatus until the distillate shows no trace
          of ammonia with Messier reagent.
     7.2  Sample  preparation:   Remove the residual  chlorine  in  the sample  by  adding
          dechlorinating agent equivalent to the chlorine residual. To 400 ml of sample add 1 N
          NaOH (6.9), until the pH is 9.5, checking the pH during addition with a pH meter or by
          use of a short range pH paper.
     7.3  Distillation: Transfer the sample, the pH of which has been adjusted to 9.5, to an 800 ml
          Kjeldahl flask and add 25 ml of the borate buffer (6.7). Distill 300 ml at the rate of 6-10
          ml/min. into 50 ml of 2% boric acid (6.4) contained in a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask.
          NOTE 5: The condenser tip  or an extension of the condenser tip must extend below the
          level of the boric acid solution.
          Dilute the distillate to 500 ml with distilled water and nesslerize an aliquot to obtain an
          approximate value of the ammonia-nitrogen concentration. For concentrations above 1
          mg/1 the ammonia should be determined titrimetrically. For concentrations below this
          value it is determined colorimetncally. The electrode method may also be used.
     7.4  Determination of ammonia in distillate: Determine the ammonia content of the distillate
          titrimetrically, colorimetrically or potentiometrically as described below.
          7.4.1 Titrimetric determination: Add 3 drops of the  mixed indicator to the distillate and
                titrate the ammonia with the 0.02 N H:SO^ matching the end point against a blank
                containing the same volume of distilled water and H,BO3 solution.
                                          D-346

-------
          7.4.2 Colorimetric determination: Prepare a series of Nessler tube standards as follows:

                    ml of Standard
               1.0 mi  = 0.01  mg NH3-N                        mg NH3-N/50.0 ml

                       0.0                                            0.0
                       0.5                                          0.005
                        1.0                                           0.01
                       2.0                                           0.02
                       3.0                                           0.03
                       4.0                                           0.04
                       5.0                                           0.05
                       8.0                                           0.08
                       10.0                                           0.10

                Dilute each tube to 50 ml with distilled water, add 2.0 ml of Nessler reagent (6.6)
                and mix. After 20 minutes read the absorbance at 425 nm against the blank. From
                the values obtained  plot absorbance vs. mg NH3-N for the  standard curve.
                Determine the ammonia in the distillate by nesslerizing 50 ml or an aliquot diluted
                to 50 ml and reading the  absorbance at 425 nm as described above  for the
                standards. Ammonia-nitrogen content is read from the standard curve.
          7.4.3 Potentiometric determination: Consult the method entitled Nitrogen, Ammonia:
                Selective Ion Electrode Method (Method 350.3) in this manual.
     7.5  It is not imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the samples. It is
          recommended that at least two standards (a high and low) be distilled and compared to
          similar values on the curve to insure that the distillation technique is reliable. If distilled
          standards do not agree with undistilled standards the operator should find the cause of
          the apparent error before proceeding.
8.    Calculations
     8.1  Titrimetric

                                  ,.  KI1J     v.    A x 0.28 x 1.000
                               mg/1  NHi -  N =  	s	'	
           where:
           A = ml0.02NH2SO4used.
           S = ml sample.
     8.2   Spectrophotometric
                                                           x
           where:
           A = mg NH3-N read from standard curve.
           B = ml total distillate collected, including boric acid and dilution.
           C = ml distillate taken for nesslerization.
           D = ml of original sample taken.
                                            D-347

-------
     8.3  Potentiometric
9.
                                  mg/l NH, - N = —  x A
                                                   D
     where:
     A = mgNHj-N/l from electrode method standard curve.
     D = ml of original sample taken.
Precision and Accuracy
9.1   Twenty-four analysts in sixteen laboratories analyzed natural water samples containing
     exact increments of an ammonium salt, with the following results:
      Increment as
   Nitrogen, Ammonia
       mg  N/Uter

          0.21
          0.26
           1.71
           1.92
                         Precision as
                     Standard Deviation
                         mgN/liter

                           0.122
                           0.070
                           0.244
                           0.279
          Accuracy as
 Bias,
 -5.54
-18.12
+0.46
 -2.01
   Bias,
mg N/liter

   -0.01
   -0.05
   4-0.01
   -0.04
(FWPCA Method Study 2, Nutrient Analyses)
                                      Bibliography

1.    Standard Methods for the Examination of Water  and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p  410,
     Method 418A and 41 SB (1975).
2.    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1426-74, Method A, p 237
     (1976).
                                          D-348

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 350.3
      D-349

-------
                             NITROGEN, AMMONIA

             Method  350.3  (Potentiometric, Ion  Selective  Electrode)

                                                         STORET  NO.  Total  00610
                                                                      Dissolved  00608

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method is applicable to the measurement of ammonia-nitrogen in drinking, surface
          and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
     1.2   This method covers the range from 0.03 to 1400 mg NH3-N/1. Color and turbidity have
          no effect on the measurements, thus, distillation may not be necessary.
2.    S ummary of Method
     2.1   The ammonia is determined potentiometrically using an ion selective ammonia electrode
          and a pH meter having an expanded millivolt scale or a specific ion meter.
     2.2   The ammonia electrode uses a hydrophobic gas-permeable membrane to separate the
          sample solution from an ammonium chloride internal solution. Ammonia in the sample
          diffuses through the membrane and alters the pH of the  internal solution, which is sensed
          by a pH electrode. The constant level of chloride in the internal solution is sensed by a
          chloride selective ion electrode which acts as the reference electrode.
3.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     3.1   Samples may be preserved with 2 ml of cone. HjSO4 per  liter and stored at 4°C.
4.    Interferences
     4.1   Volatile amines act as a positive interference.
     4.2  Mercury interferes by forming a strong complex with ammonia. Thus the samples cannot
          be preserved with mercuric chloride.
5.    Apparatus
     5.1   Electrometer (pH meter) with expanded m V scale or a specific ion meter.
     5.2  Ammonia selective electrode, such as Orion Model 95-10 or EIL Model 8002-2.
     5.3   Magnetic stirrer, thermally insulated, and Teflon-coated stirring bar.
6.    Reagents
     6.1    Distilled water: Special precautions must be taken to insure that the distilled water is free
           of ammonia. This is accomplished by passing distilled water through an ion exchange
           column containing a strongly acidic cation  exchange resin mixed  with a strongly basic
           anion exchange resin.
     6.2   Sodium hydroxide, ION: Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide in 800 ml of distilled water.
           Cool and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water (6.1).
     6.3   Ammonium chloride, stock solution:  1.0 ml =  1.0 mg  NH3-N. Dissolve 3.819 g NH4C1
           in water and bring to volume in a 1 liter volumetric flask using distilled water (6.1).
Issued 1974

                                           D-350

-------
     6.4  Ammonium chloride, standard solution: 1.0 ml = 0.01 mg NH3-N. Dilute 10.0 ml of the
          stock solution (6.3) to 1 liter with distilled water (6.1) in a volumetric flask.
          NOTE 1: When analyzing saline waters, standards must be made up in synthetic ocean
          water (SOW); found in Nitrogen, Ammonia: Colorimetric, Automated Phenate Method
          (350.1).
7.    Procedure
     7.1  Preparation of standards:  Prepare  a series  of standard  solutions  covering the
          concentration range of the samples by diluting either the stock or standard solutions of
          ammonium chloride.
     7.2  Calibration of electrometer:  Place 100 ml of each standard solution in clean 150 ml
          beakers. Immerse electrode into standard of lowest concentration and add  1 ml of ION
          sodium hydroxide solution while mixing. Keep  electrode in the solution until a stable
          reading is obtained.
          NOTE 2: The pH of the solution after the addition of NaOH must be above 11.
          Caution: Sodium hydroxide  must  not be added  prior to electrode immersion, for
          ammonia may be lost from a basic solution.
     7.3  Repeat this procedure with the  remaining  standards, going from lowest to  highest
          concentration. Using semilogarithmic graph paper, plot the concentration of ammonia in
          mg NH3-N/1 on the log axis vs. the electrode potential developed in the standard on the
          linear axis,  starting with the lowest concentration at the bottom of the scale.
     7.4  Calibration of a specific ion  meter: Follow the directions of the manufacturer for the
          operation of the instrument.
     7.5  Sample measurement: Follow the procedure in (7.2) for 100 ml of sample in 150 ml
          beakers.  Record the stabilized potential of each  unknown sample and  convert the
          potential reading to the ammonia concentration using the standard curve.  If a specific
          ion meter is used, read the ammonia level directly in mg NH3-N/1.
8.    Precision and Accuracy
     8.1  In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at concentrations of 1.00,
          0.77, 0.19,  and 0.13 mg NH3-N/1, standard deviations were   ±0.038, ±0.017, ±0.007,
          and ±0.003, respectively.
     8.2  In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at concentrations of 0.19 and
          0.13 mg NH3-N/1, recoveries were 96% and 91 %, respectively.

                                      Bibliography

1.    Booth, R. L., and Thomas, R. P., "Selective Electrode Determination of Ammonia in Water
     and Wastes", Envir. Sci.  Technology, 7, p 523-526 (1973).
2.    Banwart, W. L., Bremner, J. M., and Tabatabai, M. A., "Determination of Ammonium in Soil
     Extracts and Water  Samples by an Ammonia Electrode", Comm. Soil Sci. Plant.,3,p 449
     (1952).
3.    Midgley, D., and Torrance, K., "The Determination of Ammonia in Condensed Steam and
     Boiler Feed-Water with a Potentiometric Ammonia Probe", Analyst. 97 p 626-633 (1972).
                                         D-351

-------
D-352

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 405.1
    D-353

-------
                      BIOCHEMICAL  OXYGEN DEMAND

                            Method 405.1  (5 Days, 20°O

                                                                STORET  NO.  00310
                                                                Carbonaceous 80082
1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  The biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) test is used for determining the relative oxygen
          requirements of municipal and industrial wastewaters. Application of the  test to organic
          waste discharges  allows calculation of the effect of the discharges, on  the  oxygen
          resources of the receiving water. Data from BOD tests are used for the development of
          engineering criteria for the design of wastewater treatment plants.
     1.2  The BOD test is an empirical  bioassay-type procedure which measures the dissolved
          oxygen consumed by microbial life while assimilating and oxidizing the organic matter
          present. The standard test conditions include dark incubation at 20'C for a specified time
          period (often 5 days).  The actual environmental conditions of temperature,  biological
          population, water movement, sunlight, and oxygen concentration cannot be accurately
          reproduced in the laboratory. Results obtained must take into account the above factors
          when  relating BOD results to stream oxygen demands.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  The sample of waste, or an appropriate dilution, is incubated for 5 days  at 20°C in the
          dark.  The reduction in dissolved oxygen concentration  during  the incubation period
          yields a measure of the biochemical oxygen demand.
3.    Comments
     3.1  Determination of dissolved oxygen in the BOD test may be made by use of either the
          Modified Winkler with Full-Bottle Technique or the Probe Method in this  manual.
     3.2  Additional information relating to oxygen demanding characteristics of wastewaters can
          be gained by applying the Total Organic Carbon and Chemical  Oxygen  Demand tests
          (also found in this manual).
     3.3  The use of 60 ml incubation bottles in place of the usual 300 mi incubation  bottles, in
          conjunction with the probe, is often convenient.
4.    Precision and Accuracy
     4.1  Eighty-six analysts in  fifty-eight laboratories analyzed natural water samples  plus an
          exact  increment of biodegradable organic compounds. At a mean value of 2.1 and 175
          mg/1  BOD,  the standard deviation was tO.7 and  -26 mg/1. respectively (EPA Method
          Research Study 3).
     4.2  There is no acceptable procedure for determining the accuracy of the BOD test.
Appmvrd fm  NPDKS C.HOO: pending .ippioval loi SCMIOII  il)l(li). (A\ A
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974

                                         D-354

-------
 5.    References
5.1    The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:                             /
      Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  15th
      Edition, p. 483, Method 507 (1980).
5.2    Young, J. C., "Chemical Methods for Nitrification Control," J. Water
      Poll. Control Fed., 45, p. 637 (1973).
                                   D-355

-------
D-356

-------
EPA METHOD
  NO. 300
      D-357

-------
                               United States
                               Environmental Protection
                               Agency
                               Environmental Monitoring and
                               Support Laboratory
                               Cincinnati OH 45268
                               Research and Development
                                EPA-600/ 4-84-017  Mar. 1984
vvEPA
Test  Method
The  Determination  of
Inorganic  Anions  in
Water by Ion  Chromatography
Method  300.0
                               James W. O'Oell. John 0. Pfaff. Morris E. Gales, and Gerald 0. McKee
                               1.  Scope and Application

                               1.1 This method covers the
                               determination of the following
                               inorganic anions.
Analvte
Chloride
Fluoride
Nitrate-N
Nitrtte-N
Ortho-Phosphate-P
Sulfate
Storet No.
Total Dissolved
00940 —
00951 00950
00620 —
00615 —
— 00671
00945 —
                               1.2  This is an ion chromatographic
                               (1C) method applicable to the
                               determination of the anions listed
                               above in drinking water, surface
                               water, and mixed domestic and
                               industrial wastewater.

                               1.3  The Method Detection Umit
                               (MOL defined m Section 13) for the
                               above analytes is listed in Table 1.
                               The MDL for a specific matrix may
                               differ from those listed, depending
                               upon the nature of the sample.

                               1.4  This method is restricted to use
                               by or under the supervision of
                               analysts experienced in the use of ion
                               Chromatography and in the
                               mtrepretation of the resulting ion
                               chromatogram. Each analyst must
                               demonstrate the ability to generate
                               acceptable results with this method.
                               using the procedure described in
                               Section 10.2.
                                1.5  When this method is used to
                                analyze unfamiliar samples for any of
                                the above anions. anion identification
                                should be supported by the addition
                                of  spike solutions covering the anions
                                of  interest. The spike procedure is
                                described in Section 11.6.
                         —      2.  Summary of Method

                                2.1 A small volume of sample.
                                typically 2 to 3 mL. is introduced into
                                an ion chromatograph. The anions of
                                interest are separated and measured.
                                using a system comprised of a guard
                               .column, separator column, suppressor
                                column, and conductivity detector.

                                3.  Definitions

                                3.1  Stock standard solution — a
                                concentrated solution containing a
                                certified standard that is a method
                                analyte. Stock standard solutions are
                                used to prepare secondary standard
                                solutions.

                                3.2  Calibration standards — a
                                solution of analytes prepared in the
                                laboratory from stock standard
                                solutions and diluted as needed to
                                prepare aqueous calibration solutions.

                                3.3  Quality control check sample —
                                a solution containing known
                                concentrations of analytes. prepared
                                by a laboratory other than the
                                laboratory performing the analysis.
                                The analyzing laboratory uses this
                                solution to demonstrate that it can
                                             D-358
                                                       an  J384

-------
obtain acceptable identifications and
measurements with a method.

3.4  Performance evaluation sample
— a solution of method analytes
distributed by the Quality Assurance
Branch (QAB). Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory
(EMSL-Cincmnati).  USEPA, Cincinnati.
Ohio, to multiple laboratories for
analysis. A volume of the solution is
added to a known volume of reagent
water and analyzed with procedures
used for samples. Results of analyses
are used by the QAB to determine
statistically the accuracy and precision
that can be expected when a method
is performed by a competent analyst.
Analyte true values are unknown to
the analyst.

3.5  Laboratory control standards —
a solution of analytes prepared in the
laboratory by adding appropriate
volumes of the stock standard
solutions to reagent water.

3.6  Laboratory duplicates — two
aliquots of the same sample that are
treated exactly the  same throughout
laboratory analytical procedures.
Analyses of laboratory duplicates
indicate precision associated with
laboratory procedures but not the
sample collection, preservation, or
storage procedures.

3.7  Field duplicates — two samples
taken at the same time and place
under identical circumstances and
treated exactly the  same throughout
field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of field duplicates indicate the
precision associated with sample
collection, preservation and storage,
as well as with laboratory procedures.

4.   Interferences

4.1  Interferences can be caused by
substances with retention times that
are similar to and overlap those of the
anion of interest. Large amounts of an
an ion can interfere with the peak
resolution of an adjacent anion.
Sample dilution and/or spiking can be
used to solve most interference
problems.

4.2  The water dip or negative peak
that elutes near and can interfere
with the fluoride peak can  be
eliminated by the addition of the
equivalent of 1  mL of concentrated
eluent (7.3 100X) to 100 mL of each
standard and sample.

4.3  Method interferences may be
caused by contaminants in the
reagent water, reagents, glassware,
and other sample processing
apparatus that lead to discrete
artifacts or elevated baseline in ion
chromatograms.

4.4  Samples that contain particles
larger than 0.45 microns and reagent
solutions that contain particles larger
than 0.20 microns require filtration to
prevent damage to  instrument
columns and flow systems.

5.   Safety

5.1  Normal, accepted laboratory
safety practices should be followed
during reagent preparation and
instrument operation. No known
carcinogenic materials are  used in
this method.


6.   Apparatus and Materials

6.1  Balance — Analytical, capable of
accurately weighing to the  nearest
0.0001 g.

6.2  Ion chromatograph — Analytical
system complete with ion
chromatograph and all required
accessories including syringes,
analytical columns, compressed air,
detector, and stripchart recorder. A
data system is recommended for peak
integration.

6.2.1  Anion guard column: 4 x 50
mm. Dionex P/N 030825. or
equivalent.

6.2.2  Anion separator column: 4 x
250 mm, Dionex P/N 030827, or
equivalent.

6.2.3  Anion suppressor column:
fiber, Dionex P/N 35350. or
equivalent

6.2.4  Detector — Conductivity cell:
approximately 6 i/L volume, Dionex, or
equivalent.

7.   Reagents and
Consumable Materials

7.1  Sample bottles: Glass or
polyethylene of sufficient volume to
allow replicate analyses of anions of
interest.

7.2  Reagent water: Distilled or
deionized water, free of the anions of
interest. Water should contain
particles no larger than 0.20 microns.

7.3  Eluent solution: Sodium
bicarbonate (CAS RN 144-55-8) 0.003
M, sodium carbonate (CAS RN 497-
19-8)0.0024M. Dissolve 1.0081 g
sodium bicarbonate (NaHCOs) and
1.0176 g of sodium carbonate
(NajCOj) in reagent water  and dilute
to 4 liters.
7.4  Regeneration solution (fiber
suppressor): Sulfunc acid (CAS RN
7664-93-9) 0.025N. Dilute 2.8 mL
cone, sulfuric acid (HgSO*) to 4 liters
with reagent water.

7.5  Stock standard solutions, 1000
mg/L(1 mg/mL): Stock standard
solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from
ACS reagent grade materials (dried
at 105°C for 30 mm.) as listed below.

7.5.1  Chloride (CL1 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 1.6485 g sodium chloride
(NaCL  CAS RN 7647-14-5) in reagent
water and dilute to 1 liter.

7.5.2  Fluoride (f~] 1000 mg/L:
Dissolve 2.2100 g sodium fluoride
(NaF, CAS RN 7681 -49-4) in reagent
water and dilute to 1 liter.

7.5.3  Nitrate (NdJ-N) 1000 mg/L:
Dissolve 6.0679 g sodium nitrate
(NaNOs, CAS RN 7631-99-4) in
reagent water and dilute to 1  liter.

7.5.4  Nitrite (NO*-N) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 4.9257 g sodium nitrite
(NaNOi CAS RN 7632-00-0) in
reagent water and dilute to 1  liter.

7.5.5  Phosphate (POl-P) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 4.3937 g potassium
phosphate (KH2PO4. CAS RN 7778-77-
0) in reagent water and dilute to 1
liter.

7.5.5  Sulfate (SOT) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 1.8141 g potassium sulfate
(KjSCu. CAS RN 7778-80-5) in
reagent water and dilute to 1  liter.

7.5.7  Stability of standards: Stock
standards (7.5) are  stable for at least
one month when stored at 4°C. Dilute
working standards should be prepared
weekly, except those that contain
nitrite and phosphate should be~
prepared fresh daily.

8.   Sample Collection,
Preservation and Storage

8.1  Samples should be collected in
scrupulously clean  glass or
polyethylene bottles.

8.2  Sample preservation and holding
times for the anions that can be
determined by this  method are as
follows:
                             noiumy
Analyte	Preservation    Time
Chloride       None required 28 days
Fluoride       None required 28 days
Nitrate-N      Cool to 4°C   48 hours
Nitrite-N      Cool to 4°C   48 hours
O-Phosphate-P Filter and cool 48 hours
               to4°C
Sulfate
Cool to 4°C    28 days
                                      Jtn. 1984
                D-359

-------
8.3  The method of preservation and
the holding time for samples analyzed
by this method are determined by the
anions of interest. In a given sample.
the anion that requires the most
preservation treatment and the
shortest holding time will determine
the preservation treatment and
holding time for the total sample.

9.   Calibration and
Standardization

9.1  Establish ion chromatographic
operating parameters equivalent to
those indicated  in Table  1.

9.2  For each analyte of interest.
prepare calibration standards at a
minimum of three concentration
levels and a blank by adding
accurately measured volumes of one
or more stock standards (7.5) to a
volumetric flask and diluting to
volume with reagent water. If the
working range exceeds the linear
range of the system, a sufficient
number of standards must be
analyzed to allow an accurate
calibration curve to be established.
One of the standards should be
representative of a concentration
near, but above, the method detection
limit if the system is operated on an
applicable attenuator range.  The other
standards should correspond to the
range of concentrations  expected in
the sample or should define  the
working range of the detector. Unless
the attenuator range settings are
proven to be linear, each setting must
be calibrated individually.

9.3  Using injections of 0.1  to 1.0 mL
(determined by  infection loop volume)
of each calibration standard, tabulate
peak height or area responses against
the concentration. The results are
used to prepare a calibration curve for
each analyte. During this procedure.
retention times must be recorded. The
retention time is inversely
proportional to the concentration.

9.4 The working calibration curve
must be verified on each working day,
or whenever the anion eluent is
changed, and after every 20 samples.
If the response or retention time for
any analyte vanes from  the expected
values by more than = 10%. the test
must be repeated, using fresh
calibration standards. If  the results
are still more than r 10%. an entire
new calibration curve must be
prepared for that analyte.

9.5  Nonlinear response can result
when  the separator column  capacity
is exceeded (overloading). Maximum
column loading (all anions) should not
exceed about 400 ppm.

10.  Quality Control

10.1  Each laboratory using this
method should have a formal quality
control program. The minimum
requirements of this program consist
of an initial demonstration of
laboratory capability (10.2) and the
analysis of spiked samples as a
continuing check on performance. The
laboratory should maintain
performance records to define the
quality of data that are generated.

10.1.1  In recognition of the rapid
advances occurring in
chromatography. the analyst is
permitted  certain options to improve
the separations or lower the cost of
measurements. Each time such
modifications to the method are made,
the analyst is required to repeat the
procedure in Section 10.2

10.1.2  The laboratory should spike
and analyze a minimum of 10% of all
samples to monitor continuing
laboratory performance. Field and
laboratory duplicates should also be
analyzed.

10.2   Before performing  any
analyses,  the analyst should
demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method, using a laboratory
control standard.

10.2.1   Select a representative
spike  concentration for each analyte
to be  measured. Using stock
standards, prepare a quality control
check sample concentrate in reagent
water 100 nmes more concentrated
than the selected concentrations.

 10.2.2  Using a pipet. add 1.00 mL
of the check sample concentrate
(10.2.1) to each of a minimum of four
 100-mL aliquots of reagent water.
Analyze the aliquots according to the
procedure in Section 11.

 10.2.3  Calculate the average
percent recovery (R), and  the standard
deviation^) of the percent recovery, for
the results.

 10.2.4  Using the appropriate data
from Table 2. determine the recovery
and single operator precision expected
for the method, and compare these
results to the values calculated in
 Section 10.2.3. If the data are not
comparable within control limits
(10.3.1). review potential problem
 areas and repeat the test.
10.3   The analyst must calculate
method performance criteria and
define the performance of the
laboratory for aach spike
concentration of analyte being
measured.

10-3.1   Calculate upper  and lower
control limits for method performance
as follows:

  Upper Control Limit (UCL) = R + 3 s
  Lower Control  Limit (LCD - R - 3 s
where R and s are calculated as in
Section 10.2.3. The UCL and LCL can
be used to construct control Chans
that are useful in observing trends in
performance.

10.4   The laboratory should develop
and maintain separate accuracy
statements of laboratory performance
for water and wastewater samples.
An accuracy statement for the method
is defined as R ± s. The accuracy
statement should be developed by the
analyses of four aliquots of water or
wastewater. as described in Section
10.2.2. followed by the calculation of
R and s.

10.5   Sefore processing any
samples, the analyst must
demonstrate through the analysis of
an aliquot of reagent water that all
glassware and reagent interferences
are under control. Each time there is
a change in reagents, a laboratory
reagent blank must be processed as a
safeguard against laboratory
contamination.

10.6   It is recommended that the
laboratory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this
method. The specific practices that
are most productive depend upon  the
needs of the laboratory andnhe nature
of the samples. Field duplicates may
be analyzed to monitor the precision
of the sampling technique. When
doubt exists over the identification of
a peak in the chromatogram,
confirmatory techniques such as
sample dilution and spiking, must be
used. Whenever possible, the
laboratory should perform analysis of
quality control check samples and
participate in relevant performance
evaluation sample studies.


 11.   Procedure

 11.1  Table 1  summarizes the
 recommended operating  conditions for
 the ion chromatograph. Included m
 this table are estimated retention
 times that can be achieved by this
 method. Other columns.
 chromatographic conditions, or
                                                  D-360
                                                                 Jan.

-------
 detectors may be used if the
 requirements of Section 10.2 are met.

 11.2  Check system calibration daily
 and, if required, recalibrate as
 described in Section 9.

 11.3  Load and inject a fixed amount
 of well mixed sample. Flush injection
 loop thoroughly, using each new
 sample. Use the same size  loop for
 standards and samples. Record the
 resulting peak size in  area or peak
 height units. An automated constant
 volume injection system may also be
 used.

 11.4  The width of the retention time
 window used to make identifications
 should be based upon measurements
 of actual retention time variations of
 standards over the course of a day.
 Three times the standard deviation of
 a retention time can be used to
 calculate a suggested window size for
 a compound. However, the  experience
 of the analyst should weigh heavily in
 the interpretation of chromatograms.

 11.5  If the response for the peak
 exceeds the working range  of the
 system, dilute the sample with an
• appropriate amount of reagent water
 and reanalyze.

 11.6  If the resulting chromatogram
 fails to produce adequate resolution.
 or if identification of specific anions is
 questionable, spike the sample with
 an appropriate amount of standard
 and reanalyze.
  Note: Retention time is inversely
 proportional to concentration. Nitrate
 and sulfate exhibit the greatest
 amount of change, although all anions
 are affected to some degree. In some
 cases, this peak migration can
 produce poor resolution or
 misidentification.

 12.   Calculation

 12.1  Prepare separate calibration
 curves for each anion of interest by
 plotting peak size in area, or peak
 height units of standards against
 concentration values.  Compute
 sample concentration by comparing
 sample peak response with the
 standard curve.

 12.2  Report results  in mg/L
zero. The MDL concentrations listed m
Table 1 were obtained using reagent
water.

13.2  Single-operator accuracy and
precision for reagent, drinking and
surface water,  and mixed domestic
and industrial wastewater are listed in
Table 2.

14.  References

14.1  An nual  Book of ASTM
Standards. Part 31 Water, proposed
test method for "Anions in Water by
Ion Chromatography." p. 1485-1492
(1982).

14.2  Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and
Wastewater, Method 400Z. "Anions
by Ion Chromatography" proposed for
the 16th Edition of Standard Methods.

14.3  Dionex, 1C 16 operation and
maintenance manual. PN 30579,
Oionex Corp., Sunnyvale, California
94086.

14.4  Method detection limit (MOD
as described in 'Trace Analyses for
Wastewater." J. Glaser. 0. Foerst.
G. McKee. S. Quave. W. Budde.
Environmental Science and
Technology. Vol. 15,  Number 12, p.
1426, December 1981.
13.  Precision and Accuracy
— Method Detection Limit
13.1  The method detection limit
(MOD is defined as the minimum
concentration of a substance that can
be measured and  reported with 99%
confidence that the value is above
                                      J»n. 1384
                                                        D-361

-------
Table I.    Chramatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits in Reagent
           Water
                       Retention'          Relative             Method1
                          Time           Retention         Detection Limit
Analyte	(Mint	Time	mg/L
Fluoride
Chloride
Nitrite-N
0-Phosphate-P
Nitrate-N
Sulfate
1.2
3.4
4.5
3.0
11.3
21.4
1.0
2.8
3.8
7.5
9.4
17.8
0.005
0.015
0.004
0.061
0.013
0.206
                                  Sample Loop — 10O (iL
                                  Pump Volume — 2.30 mL/Min
Standard Conditions:
  Columns — 4s specified in 6.2
  Detector — As specified in 6.2
  Sluent — As specified in 7.3
1  Concentrations of mixed standard fmg/U
  Fluoride 3.0         0-Phosphate-P 9.0
  Chloride 4.0            Nitrate-N 30.0
  Nitrite-N 10.0            Sulfate 50.0
*• MDL calculated from data obtained using an attenuator setting of 1 itMHO full
scale. Other settings would produce an MDL proportional to their value.
Table 2. Single-Operator Accuracy and Precision
Number
Sample Spike of
Anelvte Type fmg/LJ Replicates
Chloride



Fluoride



Nitrate-N



Nitrite-N



0-Phosphate-P



Sulfate



RW
ow .
sw
ww
RW
OW
SW
ww
RW
DW
SW
WW
RW
DW
SW
WW
RW
DW
SW
ww
RW
DW
SW
ww
0.050
10.0
1.0
7.5
0.24
9.3
0.50
1.0
0.10
31.0
0.50
4.0
0.10
19.6
0.51
0.52
0.50
46.7
0.51
4.0
1.02
98.5
10.0
12.5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Mean
Recovery
%
97.7
98.2
10S.O
82.7
103.1 -
87.7
74.0
920
100.9
100,7
100.0
94.3
97.7
103.3
88.2
10O.O
100.4
102.5
94.1
97.3
102.1
104.3
111.6
134.9
Standard
Deviation
(mo/Li
0.0047
0.289
0.139
0.445
0.0009
0.075
0.0038
0.011
0.0041
0.356
0.0058
0.058
0.0014
0.1 SO
0.0053
0.018
0.019
0.386
0.020
0.04
0.066
1.475
0.709
0.466
RW = Reagent Water
DW * Drinking Water
                        SW = Surface Water
                        WW - Wastawater
                                                   D-362
                                                                 J»n. 198'-
                                                                                           TBCPO: 1984-759-102-862

-------
    FREE CHLORINE
(FIELD DETERMINATION)
         D-363

-------
    FREE CHLORINE

    Liquid samples were tested  in the  field  for  free  chlorine content orior
to the addition of any preservatives.  This  was  done  to determine whether A
VOfl vial preserved with sodium  thiosulfate was necessary.   Free chlorine
tests were conducted using a chlorine  test kit made by Coastal Chemical
Cornoany.  The kit is equiped with a cell  in  which  to  place the test sample,
a color chart to compare the sample with, and a  small bottle of orthotoli-
dine.   The color chart ranges from pale yellow  (0.2 ppm chlorine)  to bright
yellow  (1.0 ppm chlorine).  The chart  measures color  changes corresponding
to quantities of 0.2, 8.4, 0.6, 0.8, and  1.0 ppm chlorine.  Intermediate
chlorine levels can be estimated.

    To test for free chlorine,   liquid  is  placed  in the test  cell up to a
measured limit.   Four drops of  orthotolidine are added and the cell con-
tents are mixed.  Any color change is  compared to  the color chart.
                                    D-364

-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 410.4M
       D-365

-------
                        CHEMICAL OXYGEN  DEMAND

                Method 410.4  (Colorimetric,  Automated; Manual)

                                                                STORET NO. 00340

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method covers the determination of COD in surface waters, domestic and industrial
           wastes.
     1.2   The applicable range of the automated method is 3-900 mg/1 and the range of the
           manual method is 20 to 900 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   Sample, blanks and standards in sealed tubes are heated in an oven or block digester in
           the presence of dichromate at 15CTC. After two hours, the tubes are removed from the
           oven or digester, cooled and measured spectrophotometrically at 600 nm.
3.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     3.1   Collect the samples in glass bottles if possible. Use of plastic containers is permissible if it
           is known that no organic contaminants are present in the containers.
     3.2   Samples should be preserved with sulfuric acid to a pH < 2 and maintained at 4*C until
           analysis.
4.    Interferences
     4.1   Chlorides are  quantitatively  oxidized by dichromate and  represent  a positive
           interference. Mercuric sulfate is added to the digestion tubes to complex the chlorides.
5.    Apparatus
     5.1   Drying oven or block digestor, 150"C
     5.2   Corning culture tubes, 16 x 100 mm or 25 x 150 mm with Teflon lined screw cap
     5.3   Spectrophotometer or Technicon AutoAnalyzer
     5.4   Muffle furnace, SOOTC.
6.    Reagents
     6.1   Digestion solution: Add 10.2 g K2Cr2O7, 167 ml cone. H2SO4 and 33.3 g HgSO4 to 500 ml
           of distilled water, cool and dilute to 1 liter.
     6.2   Catalyst  solution: Add 22 g Ag2SO4 to a 4.09kg bottle of cone. H7SO4. Stir until
           dissolved.
     6.3   Sampler wash solution: Add 500 ml of cone H7SOt to 500 ml of distilled water.
     6.4   Stock potassium acid phthalate: Dissolve 0.850 g in 800 ml of distilled water and dilute to
           1 liter. 1ml =  ImgCOD
           6.4.1  Prepare  a series  of standard  solutions that  cover the  expected sample
                concentrations by diluting appropriate volumes of the stock standard.
7.    Procedure
     7.1   Wash all culture tubes and screw caps with 20% H2SO4 before their first use to prevent
           contamination. Trace contamination may be removed from the tubes by  igniting them in
           a muffle oven at 500*C for 1 hour.

Issued  1978

                                        D-366

-------
      7.2   Automated
           7.2.1 Add 2.5 ml of sample to the 16 x 100 mm tubes.
           7.2.2 Add 1.5 ml of digestion solution (6.1) and mix.
           7.2.3 Add 3.5 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) carefully down the side of the culture tube.
           7.2.4 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
           7.2.5 Process standards and blanks exactly as the samples.
           7.2.6 Place in oven or block digestor at 150°C for two hours.
           7.2.7 Cool,  and place standards in sampler  in order of decreasing concentration.
                Complete filling sampler tray with unknown samples.
           7.2.8 Measure color intensity on Auto Analyzer at 600 nm.
      7.3   Manual
           7.3.1 The following procedure  may be used if a  larger sample  is  desired or  a
                spectrophotometer is used in place of an Auto Analyzer.
           7.3.2 Add 10 ml of sample to 25 x 150 mm culture tube.
           7.3.3 Add 6 ml of digestion solution (6.1) and mix.
           7.3.4 Add 14 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) down the side of culture tube.
           7.3.5 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
           7.3.6 Place in oven or block digestor at 150°C for 2 hours.
           7.3.7 Cool, allow any precipitate to settle and measure intensity in spectrophotometer at
                 600 nm.  Use only optically matched culture tubes or  a single cell for spectro-
                 photometric measurement.
8.     Calculation
      8.1   Prepare a standard curve by plotting peak height or percent transmittance against known
           concentrations of standards.
      8.2   Compute concentration of samples by comparing sample response to standard curve.
9.     Precision and Accuracy
      9.1   Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.

                                      Bibliography

1.     Jirka, A. M., and M. J. Carter, "Micro-Semi-Automated Analysis of Surface and Wastewaters
      for Chemical Oxygen Demand." Anal. Chem. ^7:1397. (1975).
                                        D-367

-------
D-368

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 335.2
      D-369

-------
                                 CYANIDE,  TOTAL

                  Method  335.2 (Titrimetric;  Spectrophotometric)

                                                                 STORET NO. 00720

 1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method is applicable to the determination of cyanide in drinking, surface and saline
           waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
     1.2   The titration  procedure  using silver nitrate with  p-dimethylamino-benzal-rhodanine
           indicator is used  for measuring concentrations of cyanide exceeding I  mg/1  (0.25
           mg/250 ml of absorbing liquid).
     1.3   The colorimetric procedure is used for concentrations below 1  mg/1 of cyanide and is
           sensitive to about 0.02 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   The cyanide as hydrocyanic acid (HCN) is released from cyanide complexes by means of
           a reflux-distillation operation and absorbed in a scrubber containing sodium hydroxide
           solution. The cyanide ion in the absorbing solution is then determined by volumetric
           titration or colorimetrically.
     2.2   In the colorimetric measurement the cyanide is converted to cyanogen chloride, CNC1.
           by reaction with chloramme-T at a pH less than 8 without hydrolyzing to the cyanate.
           After the reaction is complete, color is formed on the addition of pyridine-pyrazolone or
           pyndine-barbituric acid reagent. The absorbance is read at 620 nm when using pyndine-
           pyrazolone or 378 nm for pyridine-barbitune  acid. To obtain colors  of comparable
           intensity,  it is essential to have the same  salt content in both  the sample and the
           standards.
     2.3   The titrimetrie measurement uses a standard solution of silver nitrate to titrate cyanide in
           the presence of a silver sensitive indicator.
3.    Definitions
     3.1   Cyanide is defined as cyanide ion and complex cyanides converted to hydrocyanic acid
           (HCN) by reaction in a reflux system of a mineral acid in the presence of magnesium ion.
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1   The sample should be collected in  plastic or glass  bottles of 1  liter or larger size. All
           bottles must be thoroughly cleansed and thoroughly rinsed  to remove soluble material
           from containers.
     4.2   Oxidizing agents such as chlorine decompose most of the cyanides. Test a drop of the
           sample with potassium  iodide-starch test paper (Kl-starch paper); a blue color indicates
           the need for treatment. Add ascorbic acid, a few crystals at a  time, until a drop of sample
           produces no color on the indicator paper. Then add an additional 0.06 g ol .i
           ,K id lor each liter  of sample volume.

Approved  for  NPDES
Issued  1974
Editorial revision 1974 and 1978
Technical  Revision 1980
                                         D-370

-------
      4.3   Samples must be preserved with 2 ml of 10 N sodium hydroxide per liter of sample
           (pH > 12) at the time of collection.
      4.4   Samples should be analyzed as rapidly as possible after collection. If storage is required,
           the samples should be stored in a refrigerator or in an ice chest filled with water and ice to
           maintain temperature at 4°C.
 5.    Interferences
      5.1   Interferences are eliminated or reduced by using the distillation procedure described
           in Procedure 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3.
      5.2   Su If ides adversely affect the colorimetric  and titration procedures. Samples  thai
           contain hydrogen sulfide, metal sulfides or other compounds that may pioduce
           hydrogen sulfide during the distillation should be distilled by the optional procedure
           described in Procedure 8.2. The apparatus for  this procedure is shown in Figure 3.
      5.3   Fatty acids will distill and form soaps under the alkaline titration conditions, making the
           end point almost impossible to detect.
           5.3.1  Acidify the sample with acetic acid (1+9) to pH 6.0 to 7.0.
                 Caution: This operation must be performed in the hood and the sample left there
                 until it can be made alkaline again after the extraction has been performed.
           5.3.2  Extract with iso-octane, hexane, or chloroform (preference in order named) with a
                solvent volume equal to 20% of the sample volume.  One extraction is usually
                adequate to reduce the  fatty  acids below the interference level. Avoid multiple
                extractions or a long contact time at low pH in order to keep the loss of HCN at a
                minimum.  When the extraction is completed, immediately raise the pH  of the
                sample to above 12 with NaOH solution.
      5.4   High results may be obtained for samples that contain nitrate and/or nitrite. During
           the distillation nitrate and nitrite will form nitrous acid which will react with some
           organic compounds to form oximes. These compounds formed will decompose under
           test conditions to generate HCN. The interference of nitrate and nitrite is eliminated
           by pretreatment with sulfamic acid.
6.    Apparatus
      6.1   Reflux distillation apparatus such as shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2. The boiling P.ask
           should be of 1 liter size with inlet tube and provision for condenser. The gas absorber may
           be a Fisher-Milligan scrubber.
      6.2   Microburet, 5.0 ml (for titration).
      6.3   Spectrophotometer suitable for measurements at 578 nm or 620 nm with a 1.0 cm cell or
           larger.
      (i. 1   Reflux distillation apparatus for sulfide removal a.s shown in Figuif .1 The boiling
           I task same as (i.l. The suit idesnuhbei may be a Wheaton Rubber *709ti82 with 29  11'
           joints, sue 100 ml. The air inlet tube should not IK- fritted. The cyanide absoipumi
           vessel  should be the same as the sulfide scrubber. The air inlet tube should \H- li itted.
      f>  ">   Flow meter, such as Lab Crest with stainless steel flout (Fisher  1l-164-.">(».
7.     Reagents
      7.1   Sodium hydroxide solution, 1.25N: Dissolve 50 g of NaOH in distilled water, and dilute
           to 1  liter with distilled water.
                                        D-371

-------
7.2  Lead acetate: Dissolve 30 g of Pb(C2H3O2)«3H2O in 950 ml of distilled water. Adjust
     the pH to 4.5 with acetic acid. Dilute to 1 liter.
7.5  Sulfuric acid; 18N: Slowly add 500 ml of concentrated HaSO4 to 500 rnl of distilled
     water.
7.6  Sodium dihydrogenphosphate, 1  M: Dissolve 138  g  of NaH2PO4«H2O in 1 liter of
     distilled water. Refrigerate this solution.
7.7  Stock cyanide solution: Dissolve 2.51 g of KCN and 2 g KOH in 900 ml of distilled
     water. Standardize with 0.0192 N AgNO3- Dilute to appropriate concentration so thai
     1  ml = 1  mg CN.
7.8  Standard cyanide solution, intermediate: Dilute 100.0 ml of stock (I ml = I rngC.N) to
     1000 ml with distilled water (1 ml = 100.0 ug).
7.9  Working standard cyanide  solution: Prepare fresh daily by diluting 100.0  ml  ot
     intermediate cyanide solution to 1000 ml with distilled water and store in a glass
     stoppered bottle. 1 ml = 10.0 ugCN.
7.10 Standard  silver  nitrate solution, 0.0192 N: Prepare by  crushing approximately  5 g
     AgNO3 crystals and drying to constant weight at 40"C. Weigh out 3.2647 g  of dried
     AgNO], dissolve in distilled water, and dilute to 1000 ml (1 ml = 1 mg CN).
7.11 Rhodanine indicator: Dissolve 20 mg of p-dimethyl-amino-benzalrhodanine in 100 ml of
     acetone.
7.12 Chloramine T solution: Dissolve 1.0 g of white, water soluble Chloramine T in 100 ml of
     distilled water and refrigerate until ready to use. Prepare fresh daily.
7.13 Color Reagent — One of the following may be used:
     7.13.1      Pyridine-Barbituric Acid Reagent: Place 15 g of barbituric acid in a 250 mi
                volumetric flask and add just enough distilled water to wash the sides of the
                flask and wet the barbituric acid. Add 75  ml of pyridine and mix. Add 15 ml
                of cone.  HC1, mix, and cool to room temperature. Dilute to 250 ml with
                distilled water and mix. This reagent is stable for approximately six months
                if stored in a cool, dark place.
     7.13.2      Pyridine-pyrazolone solution:
          7.13.2.1   3-Methyl-I-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one reagent, saturated solution: Add
                     0.25  g of 3-methyI-l-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one to  50 ml of distilled
                     water, heat to 60°C with stirring. Cool to room temperature.
          7.13.2.2   3,3'Dimethyl-l, l'-diphenyl-[4,4'-bi-2  pyrazoline]-5,5'dion« (bispyra-
                     zolone): Dissolve 0.01 g of bispyrazolone in 10 ml of pyridine.
          7.13.2.3   Pour solution (7.13.2.1) through non-acid-washed filter paper. Collect
                     the filtrate. Through  the same  filter paper  pour solution (7 13.2.2)
                     collecting the filtrate in the same container as filtrate from (7 13.2.1).
                     Mix until the filtrates are homogeneous. The mixed reagent develops a
                     pink color but this does not affect the color production with cyanide if
                     used within 24 hours of preparation.
7.14 Magnesium chloride solution: Weight 510 g of MgCl2«6H;O into a 1000 ml flask, dissolve
     and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
7.1") Sulfamu arid.
                                    D-372

-------
8.    Procedure
     8.1   For samples without sulfide.
          8.1.1    Place 500 ml of sample, or an aliquot diluted to 500 ml in the 1 liter boiling
                  flask. Pipet 50 ml of sodium hydroxide (7.1) into the absorbing tube. If the
                  apparatus in Figure 1 is used, add distilled water until the spiral is covered.
                  Connect the boiling flask, condenser, absorber and trap in the train. (Figure 1
                  or 2)
          8.1.2    Start a slow stream of air entering the boiling flask by adjusting the vacuum
                  source. Adjust the vacuum so that approximately two bubbles of air per second
                  enters the boiling flask through the air inlet tube. Proceed to 8.4.
     8.2   For samples that contain sulfide.
          8.2.1    Place 500 ml of sample, or an aliquot diluted to 500 ml in the 1 liter boiling
                  flask. Pipet 50 ml of sodium hydroxide (7.1) to the absorbing tube. Add 25 ml of
                  lead acetate (7.2) to the sulfide scrubber. Connect the boiling flask, condenser.
                  scrubber and absorber in the train. (Figure3) The flow meter is connected to the
                  outlet tube of the cyanide absorber.
          8.2.2    Start a stream of air entering the boiling flask by adjusting the vacuum source.
                  Adjust the vacuum so that approximately  1.5 liters per minute enters the
                  boiling flask through the air inlet tube. The bubble  rate may not remain
                  constant while heat is being applied to the flask. It may be necessary to readj ust
                  the air rate occasionally. Proceed to 8.4.
     8.3   If samples contain NOS and or NO2 add 2 g of sulfamic acid solution (7.15) after the air
          rate is set through the air inlet tube. Mix for 3 minutes prior to addition of HjSO^
     8.4   Slowly add 50 ml 18N sulfuric aeid (7.5) through the air inlet tube. Rinse the tube with
          distilled water and allow the airflow to mix the  flask contents for 3 min. Pour 20 ml  of
          magnesium chloride (7.14) into the air inlet and wash down with a stream of water.
     8.5   Heat the solution to boiling. Reflux for one houF. Turn oil heat and continue the
          airflow for at least 15 minutes. After cooling the boiling flask, disconnect absorber and
          close off the vacuum source.
     8.6   Drain the solution from the absorber into a 250 mt volumetric flask. Wash the absorber
          with distilled water and add the washings to the flask. Dilute to the mark with distilled
          water.
     8.7   Withdraw 50 ml or less of the solution from the flask and transfer to a 100 ml volumetric
          flask. If less than 50 ml is taken, dilute to 50 ml with 0.25N sodium hydroxide solution
          (7.4). Add 15.0 ml of sodium phosphate solution (7.6) and mix.
          8.7.1    Pyridine-barbituric acid method: Add 2 ml of chloramine T (7.12) and mix.
                  See Note 1. After 1 to 2 minutes, add 5 ml of pyridine-barbituric acid solution
                  (7.13.1) and mix. Dilute to  mark with distilled water and mix again. Allow 8
                  minutes for color development then read absorbance at 578 nm in a 1 cm cell
                  within 15 minutes.
          8.7.2    Pyridine-pyrazolene method: Add 0.5 ml of chloramine T (7.12) and mix. See
                  Note  1 and 2. After 1 to 2 minutes add 5 ml of pyridine-pyrazolone solution
                                              D-373

-------
             (7.13.1) and mix. Dilute to mark with distilled water and mix again. After 40
             minutes read absorbance at 620 nm in a I cm cell.
             NOTE 1: Some distillates  may  contain  compounds that  have a chlorine
                       demand. One minute after the  addition of chloramine T, test for
                      residual chlorine with Kl-starch  paper. If the test is negative, add an
                      additional 0.5 ml of chlorine T. After one minute, recheck the sample.
             NOTE 2: More than 05.  ml of chloramine T will prevent the color from
                      developing with pyridine-pyrazolone.
8.8  Standard curve for samples without sulfide.
     8.8.1    Prepare a series of standards by pipeting suitable volumes of standard solution
             (7.9) into 250 ml volumetric flasks.  To each standard add 50 ml of 1.25 X
             sodium hydroxide and dilute to 250 ml with distilled water. Prepare as follows:
              ML of Working Standard Solution             Cone,  fjg CN
                      (1  ml = 10//gCN)                       per 250 ml
                              0                                BLANK
                              1.0                                  10
                              2.0                                  20
                              5.0                                  50
                             10.0                                 100
                             15.0                                 150
                             20.0                                 200
     8.8.2    It is not imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the
             samples. It is recommended that at least two standards (a high and low) be
             distilled and compared to similar values on the curve to insure that the distil-
             lation technique is reliable.  If distilled standards do not agree within ±10%
             of the undistilled standards the analyst should find the cause of the apparent
             error before proceeding.
     8.8.3    Prepare a standard curve by  plotting absorbance  of standard  vs.  cyanide
             concentrations.
     8.8.4    To check the efficiency of the sample distillation, add an increment of cyanide
             from either the intermediate standard (7.8) or the working standard (7.9) to
             500 ml of sample to insure a level of 20 pg/1.  Proceed  with the analysis as in
             Procedure (8.1.1).
8.9  Standard curve for samples with sulfide.
     8.9.1    It is imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the samples.
             Standards distilled by this  method will give a  linear curve, but as the concen-
             tration increases, the recovery decreases. It is recommended that  at least 3
             standards be distilled.
     8.9.2    Prepare a standard curve by plotting absorbance of standard vs. cyanide con-
             centrations.
                                    D-374

-------
    8.10 Titrimetric method.
         8.10.1  If the sample contains more than 1 mg/1 of CM, transfer the distillate or a
               suitable aliquot diluted to 250 ml, to a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10-12 drops
               of the benzalrhodanine indicator.
        8.10.2  Titrate with standard silver nitrate to the first change in color from yellow to
               brownish-pink. Titrate a distilled water blank using the same amount of sodium
               hydroxide and indicator as in the sample.
        8.10.3  The analyst should familiarize himself with the end point of the titration and the
               amount of indicator to be used before actually titrating the samples.
9.    Calculation
     9.1   If the  colorimetric procedure is used, calculate the cyanide, in ug/1, in the original
           sample as follows:

                                  CN,ug/l =  A x 1.000 x 50
                                                  B        C

             where:

             A = ug CN read from standard  curve
             B =  ml of original  sample  for distillation
             C =  ml taken for colorimetric analysis
                                         D-375

-------
      9.2   Using the titrimetric procedure, calculate concentration of CN as follows:
     -M    ,,     (A - B)1.000      	250	
     CN, mg/l =  -^-.—:—L-i—— x  —:—7.—r	:	?
                 ml ong. sample     ml ot aliquot titrated

           where:

           A = volume of AgNO3 for titration of sample.
           B = volume of AgNO3 for deration of blank.

10.  Precision and Accuracy
     10.1  In a single laboratory (EMSL),  using mixed industrial and domestic waste samples at
           concentrations of 0.06, 0.13, 0.28 and 0.62 mg/l CN,  the standard deviations were
           ±0.005, ;0.007,  -0.031  and ±0.094, respectively.
     10.2  In a single laboratory (EMSL),  using mixed industrial and domestic waste samples at
           concentrations of 0.28 and 0.62 mg/l CN, recoveries were 85% and 102%, respectively.

                                      Bibliography

1.    Bark, L. S., and Higson, H. G. "Investigation of Reagents for the Colorimetric Determination
     of Small Amounts of Cyanide", Talanta. 2:471^*79(1964).
2.    Elly, C. T. "Recovery of Cyanides by Modified Seifass Distillation". Journal Water Pollution
     Control Federation 40:848-856 (1968).
3.    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D2036-75, Method A, p 503
     (1976).
4.    Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 367 and 370,
     Method 413B and D( 1975).
5..  Egekeze.  J. Q.. and Oehne, F. W., "Direct Potentiometric  Determination of Cyanide in
     Biological Materials." J. Analytical Toxicology, Vol. 3, p. 119, May/June 1979.
6.    Casey, J. P., Bright, J. W., and Helms, B. D., "Nitrosation Interference in Distillation Tests
     for Cvanide." Gulf Coast Waste Disposal Authority, Houston. Texas.
                                        D-376

-------
ALLIHN CONDENSER

AIR INLET TUBE
— CONNECTING TUBING
ONE LITER	
BOILING FLASK
                                    SUCTION
                 FIGURE 1
   CYANIDE DISTILLATION APPARATUS
                   D-377

-------
   COOLING WATER
   INLET TUBE^
        HEATER*
SCREW CLAMP

     &

    TO  LOW VACUUM
       SOURCE


- ABSORBER
                           DISTILLING FLASK
                  O
             FIGURE 2
CYANIDE DISTILLATION  APPARATUS
                  D-378

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 340.1
    D-379

-------
                               FLUORIDE, TOTAL

        Method 340.1  (Colorimetric, SPADNS with Bellack Distillation)

                                                       STORET  NO. Total 00951
                                                                    Dissolved 00950

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method is applicable to the measurement of fluoride in drinking, surface, and saline
          waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
     1.2  The method covers the range from 0.1 to about 2.5 mg/1 F. This range may be extended
          to  1000  mg/l  using the  Fluoride Ion Selective Electrode Method  (340.2) after
          distillation.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  Following distillation to remove interferences, the sample is treated with the SPADNS
          reagent The loss of color resulting from the reaction of fluoride with the zirconyl-
          SPADNS dye is a function of the fluoride concentration.
3.    Comments
     3.1  The SPADNS reagent is more tolerant of interfering  materials than other accepted
          fluoride  reagents.  Reference  to  Table 414:1,  p 388,  Standard  Methods  for  the
          Examination of Waters and Wastewaters, 14th Edition, will help the analyst decide if
          distillation is required. The addition of the highly colored SPADNS reagent must be
          done with utmost accuracy because the fluoride concentration is measured as a difference
          of absorbance in the blank and the sample. A small error in reagent additon is the most
          prominent source of error in this test.
     3.2  Care must be taken to avoid overheating the flask above  the level of the solution. This is
          done by maintaining an even flame entirely under the boiling flask.
4.    Apparatus
     4.1  Distillation apparatus:  A  1-liter  round-bottom, long-necked  pyrex boiling flask,
          connecting tube, efficient condenser, thermometer adapter and thermometer reading to
          200*C. All connections should be ground glass. Any apparatus equivalent to that shown
          in Figure 1 is acceptable.
     4.2  Colorimeter One of the following
          4.2.1 Spectrophotometer for use at 570 nm providing a light path of at least 1 cm.
          4.2.2 Filter photometer equipped with a  greenish yellow filter  having maximum
               transmittance at 550 to 580 nm and a light path of at least 1 cm.
5.    Reagents
     5.1  Sulfuric acid, H2SO4, cone.
Approved for NPDES and SDWA
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974 and 1978

                                       D-380

-------
      5,2   Silver sulfate, Ag2SO4 crystals.
      5.3   Stock fluoride  solution: Dissolve 0.221 g anhydrous sodium fluoride, NaF, in distilled
           water in a 1-liter volumetric flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water; 1.00 ml =
           O.lmgF.
      5.4   Standard fluoride solution: Place  100 ml stock fluoride solution (5.3)  in  a  1 liter
           volumetric flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water; 1.00 ml = 0.010 mg F.
      5.5   SPADNS solution:  Dissolve  0.958 g SPADNS, sodium  2-(parasulfophenylazo)-l,8-
           dihydroxy-3,6-naphthalene disulfonate, in distilled water in a 500 ml volumetric flask
           and dilute to the mark. Stable indefinitely if protected from direct sunlight.
      5.6   Zirconyl-acid reagent: Dissolve 0.133 g zirconyl chloride octahydrate, ZrOCI2»8H2O in
           approximately  25 ml distilled water in a 500 ml volumetric flask. Add 350 ml cone HCI
           and dilute to the mark with distilled water.
      5.7   Acid-zirconyl-SPADNS reagent: Mix equal  volumes of SPADNS solution (5.5) and
           zirconyl-acid reagent (5.6). The combined reagent is stable for at least 2 years.
      5.8   Reference solution: Add 10 ml SPADNS solution (5.5) to 100 ml distilled water. Dilute 7
           ml cone HCI to 10 ml and add to the dilute SPADNS solution. This solution is used for
           zeroing the spectrophotometer or photometer. It is stable and may be used indefinitely.
      5.9   Sodium arsenite solution: Dissolve 5.0 g NaAsO2 in distilled water in a 1-liter volumetric
           flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water (CAUTION: Toxic-avoid ingestion).
6.     Procedure
      6.1   Preliminary distillation
           6.1.1 Place 400 ml distilled water in the distilling flask.
           6.1.2 Carefully add 200 ml cone. H2SO4 and swirl until contents are homogeneous.
           6.1.3 Add 25 to 35 glass beads, connect the apparatus (Figure 1) making sure all joints
                are tight.
           6.1.4 Heat slowly at first, then as rapidly as the efficiency  of the condenser will  permit
                (distillate must be cool) until the temperature of the flask contents reaches exactly
                180'C.  Discard the distillate.  This process removes fluoride contamination and
                adjusts the acid-water ratio for subsequent distillations.
           6.1.5 Cool to 120*C or below.
           6.1.6 Add 300  ml sample, mix thoroughly, distill as in 6.1.4 until temperature reaches
                180*C. Do not heat above 180*C to prevent sulfate carryover.
           6.1.7 Add Ag,SO4 (5.2) at a rate of 5 mg/mg Cl when high chloride samples are distilled.
           6.1.8 Use the sulfuric acid solution  in the flask repeatedly  until the contaminants from
                the samples accumulate to such an extent that recovery is affected or interferences
                appear in the distillate. Check periodically by distilling standard fluoride samples.
           6.1.9 High fluoride samples may require that the still be flushed by using distilled water
                and combining distillates.
     6.2   Colorimetric Determination:
           6.2.1 Prepare fluoride standards in the range 0 to 1.40 mg/1 by diluting appropriate
                quantities of standard fluoride solution (5.4) to 50 ml with distilled water.
                                        D-381

-------
              CONNECTING TUBE
        THERMOMETER
THERMOMETER ADAPTER ^
             1-liter
    ROUND BOTTOM
        FLASK
CONDENSER
              BURNER

                                       300-ml
O                                       VOLUMETRIC
                                       FLASK

      FIGURE 1  DIRECT DISTILLATION APPARATUS
               FOR  FLUORIDE. .
                       D-382

-------
          6.2.2 Pipet 5.00 ml each of SPADNS solution (5.5) and zirconyl-acid reagent (5.6) or
                10.00 ml of the mixed acid-zirconyl-SPADNS reagent (5.7) to each standard and
                mix well.
          6.2.3 Set  photometer to zero with reference solution (5.8) and immediately obtain
                absorbance readings of standards.
          6.2.4 Plot absorbance versus concentration. Prepare a new standard curve whenever
                fresh reagent is made.
          6.2.5 If residual chlorine is present pretreat the sample with 1 drop (0.05 ml) NaAsO2
                solution  (5.9)  per 0.1  mg residual  chlorine  and  mix.  Sodium  arsenite
                concentrations of 1300 mg/1 produce an error of 0. 1 mg/1 at 1 .0 mg/1 F.
          6.2.6 Use a 50 ml sample or a portion diluted to 50 ml. Adjust the temperature of the
                sample to that used for the standard curve.
          6.2.7 Perform step 6.2.2 and 6.2.3.
7.    Calculations
     7. 1  Read the concentration in the 50 ml sample using the standard curve (6.2.4)
     7.2  Calculate as follows:

                    mgF x 1.000
          mg/1 F =   ml sample

     7.3  When a sample (ml sample) is dilutee! to a volume (B) and then a portion (C) is analyzed,
          use:
8.    Precision and Accuracy
     8. 1  On a sample containing 0.83 mg/1 F with no interferences, 53 analysts using the Bellack
          distillation and the SPADNS reagent obtained a mean of 0.81 mg/1 F with a standard
          deviation of ±0.089 mg/1.
     8.2  On  a  sample containing  0.57  mg/1  F (with 200 mg/1  SO4 and  10 mg/1 Al  as
          interferences) 53 analysts using the Bellack distillation obtained a mean of 0.60 mg/IF
          with a standard deviation of ±0. 103 mg/1.
     8.3  On a sample containing 0.68 mg/1 F (with 200 mg/1 SO4, 2 mg/1 Al and 2.5 mg/1
          [Na(PO3)6] as interferences), 53 analysts using the Bellack distillation obtained a mean of
          0.72 mg/1 F with a standard deviation of ±0.092 mg/1. (Analytical Reference Service,
          Sample 1 1 1-B water, Fluoride, August, 1961.)

                                      Bibliography

1.    Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, p. 389-390 (Method No.
     414A, Preliminary Distillation Step) and p. 393-394 (Method 414C SPADNS) 14th Edition,
     (1975).
2.    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 3 1 , "Water", Standard D 1 1 79-72, Method A, p. 3 1 0
     (1976).

                                         D-383

-------
t>

00
00

-------
         PH
(FIELD DETERMINATION)
        D-385

-------
    oH
    Liquid and sludge  samoles  were tested for- oH in the field  orior  to  tne
addition of any preservatives.   Values of oH were measured usinq  "AlKacia
Test Ribbon" manufactured  by Fiscner Scientific Cornoany.  Tnis  oH paoer
provides 5 distinct color  changes ranqing from violet  ( DH = cl)  to dark  olue
(pH = 10) .   fl color comparison chart is included with the paoer.   The cnart
indicates the colors for pH  values of S,  4,  6,  8, and  liZl. Intermediate  oH
values can be estimated.

    To determine the pH a  liquid  sample,  a section of the oH ribbon  is
removed from the dispenser and a  small amount of liquid  (a few  droos)  is
aoplied to the paper.  flny color  change will occur immediately  and  is corn-
pared to the color chart while the paper is still wet.  To determine the DH
of a sludge sample, a  small amount of sludge is aoplied to the  paper.   Time
is allowed for the fluid content  of the sludge to absorb into  the oH rib-
bon. Once this has occurred, any  color change is compared to the  chart.
                                    D-386

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 150.1
      D-387

-------
                                          pH

                            Method 150.1 (Electrometric)

                                                                       STORET NO.
                                                          Determined on  site   00400
                                                                   Laboratory   00403

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
          wastes.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  The pH of a sample is determined electrometrically using either a glass electrode in
          combination with a reference potential or a combination electrode.
3.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     3.1  Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible preferably in the field  at the time of
          sampling.
     3.2  High-purity waters and waters not at equilibrium with the atmosphere are subject to
          changes when exposed to the atmosphere, therefore the sample containers should be
          filled completely and kept sealed prior to analysis.
4.    Interferences
     4.1  The glass electrode,  in general,  is not subject to solution interferences from color,
          turbidity, colloidal matter, oxidants, reductants or high salinity.
     4.2  Sodium error at pH levels greater than  10 can be reduced or eliminated by using a "low
          sodium error" electrode.
     4.3  Coatings of oily material or paniculate matter can impair electrode response. These
          coatings can  usually  be removed by gentle wiping or detergent washing, followed by
          distilled water rinsing. An additional treatment with hydrochloric acid (1+9) may be
          necessary to remove any remaining film.
     4.4  Temperature effects on the electrometric measurement of pH arise from two sources.
          The first is caused by the change in electrode output at various temperatures. This
          interference can be controlled with instruments having temperature compensation or by
          calibrating the electrode-instrument system at the temperature  of the samples. The
          second source is the change of pH inherent in the sample at various temperatures. This
          error is sample dependent and cannot be controlled, it should therefore be noted by
          reporting both the pH and temperature at the time of analysis.
5.    Apparatus
     5.1  pH Meter-laboratory or field model. A wide variety of instruments are commercially
          available with various specifications and optional equipment.


Approved for NPDES
Issued  1971
Editorial revision 1978

                                          D-388

-------
     5.2  Glass electrode.
     5.3  Reference electrode-a calomel, silver-silver chloride or other reference electrode of
          constant potential may be used.
          NOTE  1:  Combination electrodes  incorporating  both measuring and  reference
          functions are convenient to use and are available with solid, gel type filling materials that
          require minimal maintenance.
     5.4  Magnetic stirrer and Teflon-coated stirring bar.
     5.5  Thermometer or temperature sensor for automatic compensation.
6.    Reagents
     6.1  Primary standard buffer salts are available from the National Bureau of Standards and
          should be used in situations where extreme accuracy is necessary.
          6.1.1  Preparation of reference solutions from these salts require some special precautions
                and handling'" such as low conductivity dilution water, drying ovens, and carbon
                dioxide free purge gas. These solutions  should be replaced at least once each
                month.
     6.2  Secondary standard buffers may be prepared from NBS salts or purchased as a solution
          from commercial vendors. Use of these commercially available solutions, that have been
          validated by comparison to NBS standards, are recommended for routine use.
7.    Calibration
     7.1  Because of the wide variety of pH meters and accessories, detailed operating procedures
          cannot be incorporated into this  method. Each analyst must be acquainted with  the
          operation of each system and familiar with all instrument functions. Special attention to
          care of the electrodes is recommended.
     7.2  Each instrument/electrode system must be calibrated at a minimum of two points that
          bracket the expected pH of the samples and are approximately  three pH units or more
          apart.
          7.2.1  Various instrument designs may involve use of a "balance" or "standardize" dial
                and/or a slope adjustment as outlined in the manufacturer's instructions. Repeat
                adjustments  on successive portions of the  two buffer solutions as outlined in
                procedure 8.2 until readings are within 0.05 pH units of the buffer solution value.
8.    Procedure
     8.1  Standardize the meter and electrode system as outlined in Section 7.
     8.2  Place the sample or buffer solution in  a clean glass beaker using a sufficient volume to
          cover  the sensing  elements  of the electrodes and to give adequate clearance for  the
          magnetic stirring bar.
          8.2.1  If field measurements are being made the electrodes may be immersed directly in
                the sample stream to an adequate depth and moved in a manner to insure sufficient
                sample movement across the electrode sensing element as indicated by drift free
                (< 0.1 pH) readings.
     8.3  If the sample temperature differs by more than 2°C from the buffer solution the measured
          pH values must be  corrected. Instruments are equipped with automatic  or  manual
                  '"National Bureau of Standards Special Publication 260.

                                          D-389

-------
9.
10.
     compensators  that  electronically  adjust  for  temperature  differences.  Refer  to
     manufacturer's instructions.
8.4  After rinsing and gently wiping the electrodes,  if necessary, immerse them into the
     sample beaker or sample stream and stir at a constant rate to provide homogeneity and
     suspension of solids. Rate of stirring should minimize the air transfer rate at the air water
     interface  of  the sample.  Note and  record  sample pH and temperature.  Repeat
     measurement on successive volumes of sample until values differ by less than 0.1 pH
     units. Two or three volume changes are usually sufficient.
Calculation
9.1  pH meters read directly in pH units. Report pH to the nearest 0.1 unit and temperature
     to the nearest *C.
Precision and Accuracy
10.1  Forty-four analysts  in twenty  laboratories  analyzed six  synthetic  water samples
     containing exact increments of hydrogen-hydroxyl ions, with the following results:
        pH Units
           3.5
           3.5
           7.1
           7.2
           8.0
           8.0
                      Standard Deviation
                          pH Units

                            0.10
                            0.11
                            0.20
                            0.18
                            0.13
                            0.12
 Bias,
                                                                   Accuracy as
 -0.29
 -0.00
+ 1.01
 -0.03
 -0.12
+0.16
  Bias,
pH  Units

  -0.01

  +0.07
  -0.002
  -0.01
  +0.01
(FWPCA Method Study I, Mineral and Physical Analyses)
      10.2  In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at an average pH of 7.7, the
           standard deviation was tO.l.

                                       Bibliography

1.     Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 460, (1975).
2.     Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1293-65, p 178 (1976).
                                          D-390

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 413.1
       D-391

-------
                OIL AND GREASE, TOTAL,  RECOVERABLE

           Method  413.1  (Gravimetric,  Separatory  Funnel Extraction)

                                                                STORET NO. 00556

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method includes the measurement of fluorocarbon-113 extractable matter from
          surface  and saline waters,  industrial and domestic wastes. It is applicable  to  the
          determination of relatively non-volatile hydrocarbons, vegetable oils, animal fats, waxes,
          soaps, greases and related matter.
     1.2  The method is not applicable to measurement of light hydrocarbons  that volatilize at
          temperatures below 70*C. Petroleum fuels from  gasoline through #2 fuel oils  are
          completely or partially lost in the solvent removal operation.
     1.3  Some crude oils and heavy fuel oils contain  a significant percentage of residue-type
          materials that are  not soluble  in fluorocarbon-113. Accordingly, recoveries of these
          materials will be low.
     1.4  The method covers the range from 5 to 1000 mg/1 of extractable material.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  The sample is acidified to a low pH (< 2) and serially extracted with fluorocarbon-113 in
          a separatory funnel. The solvent is evaporated from the extract and the residue weighed.
3.    Definitions
     3.1  The definition of oil and grease is based on the procedure used. The  nature of the oil
          and/or grease, and the presence of extractable non-oily matter will influence the material
          measured and interpretation of results.
4.    Sampling and Storage
     4.1  A representative sample of 1 liter volume should be collected in a glass bottle. If analysis
          is to be delayed for more than a few hours, the sample is preserved by the addition of 5 ml
          HC1 (6.1) at the time of collection and refrigerated at 4*C.
     4.2  Because losses of grease will occur on sampling equipment, the collection of a composite
          sample is impractical. Individual portions collected at prescribed time intervals must be
          analyzed separately to obtain the average concentration over an extended period.
5.    Apparatus
     5.1  Separatory  funnel, 2000 ml, with Teflon stopcock.
     5.2  Vacuum pump, or other source of vacuum.
     5.3  Flask, boiling, 125 ml (Corning No. 4100 or equivalent).
     5.4  Distilling head, Claisen or equivalent.
     5.5  Filter paper, Whatman No. 40,11 cm.
6.    Reagents
     6.1  Hydrochloric acid, 1:1. Mix equal volumes of cone. HC1 and distilled water.

Approved for  NPDES
Issued  1974
Editorial revision  1978

                                        D-392

-------
      6.2   Flurocarbon-113,(l,l,2-trichloro-l,2,2-trifluoroethane), b. p. 48°C.
      6.3   Sodium sulfate, anhydrous crystal.
7.    Procedure
      7.1   Mark the sample bottle at the water meniscus for later determination of sample volume.
           If the sample was not acidified at time of collection, add 5 ml hydrochloric acid (6.1) to
           the sample bottle. After mixing the sample, check the pH by touching pH-sensitive paper
           to the cap to insure that the pH is 2 or lower. Add more acid if necessary.
      7.2   Pour the sample into a separatory funnel.
      7.3   Tare a boiling flask (pre-dried in an oven at 103°C and stored in a desiccator).
      7.4   Add 30 ml fluorocarbon-113 (6.2) to the sample bottle and rotate the bottle to rinse the
           sides. Transfer the solvent into the separatory funnel. Extract by shaking vigorously for 2
           minutes. Allow the layers to separate, and filter the solvent layer into the flask through a
           funnel containing solvent moistened filter paper.
           NOTE: An emulsion that fails to dissipate can be broken by pouring about 1 g sodium
           sulfate (6.3) into the filter paper cone and slowly draining the emulsion through the salt.
           Additional 1 g portions can be added to the cone as required.
      7.5   Repeat (7.4) twice more, with additional portions of fresh solvent, combining all solvent
           in the boiling flask.
      7.6   Rinse the tip of the separatory funnel, the filter paper, and then  the runnel with a total of
           10-20 ml solvent and collect the rinsings in the flask.
      7.7   Connect the boiling flask to the distilling head and evaporate the solvent by immersing
           the lower half of the flask in water at 70*C. Collect the solvent for reuse. A solvent blank
           should accompany each set of samples.
      7.8   When the temperature in the distilling head reaches 50°C or the flask appears dry remove
           the distilling head. Sweep out the flask for 15 seconds with air to remove solvent vapor by
           inserting a glass tube connected to a vacuum source. Immediately remove the flask from
           the heat source and wipe the outside to remove excess moisture and fingerprints.
      7.9   Cool the boiling flask in a desiccator for 30 minutes and weigh.
8.    Calculation
      8.1   mg/1 total oil and grease =
           where:

           R = residue, gross weight of extraction flask minus the tare weight, in milligrams.
           B  =  blank determination, residue  of equivalent volume of extraction  solvent,  in
                milligrams.
           V = volume of sample, determined  by refilling  sample bottle to calibration line and
                correcting for acid addition if necessary, in liters.
                                           D-393

-------
(              9.   Precision and Accuracy
                    9.1   The two oil and grease methods in this manual were tested by a single laboratory (EMSL)
                          on sewage. This method determined the oil and grease level in the sewage to be 12.6
                          mg/1. When 1 liter portions of the sewage were dosed with 14.0 mg of a mixture of #2
                          fuel oil and Wesson oil, the recovery was 93% with a standard deviation of ±0.9 mg/1.

                                                     Bibliography

               1.   Standard Methods for.the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  14th Edition, p 515,
                    Method 502A,( 1975).
               2.   Blum, K. A., and Taras, M. J., "Determination of Emulsifying Oil in Industrial Wastewater",
                    JWPCF Research Suppl. 40, R404 (1968).
                                                       D-394

-------
OIL AND GREASE ANALYSIS OF SLUDGE  SAMPLES
             -RETORT METHOD-
                  D-395

-------
          Oil and Grease Analysis of Sludge Samples
 A study was performed to determine a quick,  reliable method for
 the determination of oil and grease in sludge samples.   Oil and
 grease is defined to mean that material which can be extracted
 from the sample by freon extraction and which is determined by
 gravimetry after evaporating the freon from  sodium sulfate dried
-extract.  Three methods were compared: the straight freon
 extraction method (A); the sonication assisted freon extraction
 method (8) and the freon extraction following retort (C).  A
 brief description of each method will be given below.

      Method A:  A weighed aliquot (approximately 10 grams) of
      well mixed sludge is acidified to pH 2  by addition a few
      drops of dilute HC1.  The sample is extracted by shaking
      with three successive portions (30 mL each) of freon.  The
      extracts are dried by passing them through anhydrous sodium
      sulfate contained in a filter tube plugged with glass wool.
      The sodium sulfate is rinsed with an additional aliquot of
      clean freon which is then combined with the extracts.  The
      freon is then removed by evaporation over a steam-bath and
      the oil and grease residue is determined by gravimetric
      analysis.

      Method B:  Method 8 is identical to Method A except that the
      extraction is assisted by sonicating the freon and sludge to
      attempt to get a better recovery of oil and grease.

      Method C--  A weighed aiiquot (approximately 20 grama) of
      well mixed sludge is acidified to pH 2  by addition of a feu
      drops of dilute HC1.  The sample is then placed in a retort
      apparatus.  The sample is heated frow ambient to approxim-
      ately 500 degrees centigrade over 30 minutes.  The
      distillate is condensed and collected in a aide arm
      receiver.  The oil and grease is determined in the
      distillate by the procedure outlined in Method A.

 The results of this study suggest that the retort  step (Method C)
 yields a higher oil and grease result with considerably  lass
 variability than either Methods A or  8.  The sonication  step
 (Method B) actually yielded a lower oil and grease result than
 either Methods A or C.  This was contrary to our expectations,
 however, there was no  specific attempt to discover  the reason  for
 the  lower results.

 The  results of this study are presented graphically in  figures  1
 and  2.  Two actual  field samples were used.  One was considered
 to have a moderate oil  and  grease value and  the other a  high
 value.
                                  D-396

-------
                                                                                             46 1320
VO
--a

-------
CO
OS
 I
Q

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 160.1
      D-399

-------
                             RESIDUE, FILTERABLE

                    Method 160.1 (Gravimetric,  Dried at 180°Q

                                                                 STORET  NO.  70300

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
           wastes.
     1.2   The practical range of the determination is 10 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   A well-mixed sample is  filtered through a standard glass fiber filter. The filtrate is
           evaporated and dried to constant weight at 180*C.
     2.2   If Residue, Non-Filterable is  being determined, the filtrate from that method  may be
           used for Residue, Filterable.
3.    Definitions
     3.1   Filterable residue is defined as those solids capable of passing through a glass fiber filter
           and dried to constant weight at 18CTC.
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1   Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
           Refrigeration or icing to  4*C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is
           recommended.
5.    Interferences
     5. 1   Highly mineralized waters containing significant concentrations of calcium, magnesium,
           chloride and/or  sulfate  may be  hygroscopic and will require prolonged  drying,
           desiccation and rapid weighing.
     5.2   Samples containing high concentrations of bicarbonate will require careful and possibly
           prolonged drying at 180*C to insure that all the bicarbonate is converted to carbonate.
     5.3   Too much residue in the evaporating dish will crust over and entrap water that will not
           be driven off during drying. Total residue should be limited to about 200 mg.
6.    Apparatus
     6.1   Glass fiber filter discs, 4.7 cm  or 2.1 cm, without organic binder, Reeve Angel type 934-
           AH, Gelman type A/E, or equivalent.
     6.2   Filter holder,, membrane filter funnel or Gooch crucible adapter.
     6.3   Suction flask, 500 ml.
     6.4   Gooch crucibles, 25 ml (if 2.1 cm filter is used).
     6.5   Evaporating  dishes, porcelain,  100 ml  volume. (Vycor or platinum dishes  may be
           substituted).
     6.6   Steam bath.
     6.7   Drying oven, 180*C ±2*C.
     6.8   Desiccator.

Approved for  NPDES
Issued  1971

                                          D-400

-------
     6.9   Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7.   Procedure
     7.1   Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the disc on the membrane filter apparatus or
           insert into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible. While vacuum is applied, wash the disc
           with three successive 20 ml volumes of distilled water. Remove all traces of water by
           continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed through. Discard washings.
     7.2   Preparation of evaporating dishes: If Volatile Residue is also to be measured heat the
           clean dish to 550 ±50°C for one hour in a muffle furnace. If only Filterable Residue is to
           be measured heat the clean dish to 180 ±2°C for one hour. Cool in desiccator and store
           until needed. Weigh immediately before use.
     7.3   Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Shake the sample vigorously and
           rapidly transfer 100 ml to the funnel by means of a 100 ml graduated cylinder. If total
           filterable residue is low, a larger volume may be filtered.
     7.4   Filter the sample through the glass fiber filter, rinse with three 10 ml portions of distilled
           water and continue to apply vacuum for about 3 minutes after filtration is complete to
           remove as much water as possible.
     7.5   Transfer 100 ml (or a larger volume) of the filtrate to a weighed evaporating dish and
           evaporate to dryness on a steam bath.
     7.6   Dry the evaporated sample for at least one hour at 180  ±2°C. Cool in a desiccator and
           weigh. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained or until weight loss is
           less than 0.5 mg.
8.   Calculation
     8.1   Calculate filterable residue as follows:
           FUterable residue, mg/1  =  ^	-tr-—'•—
           where:

           A = weight of dried residue + dish in mg
           B = weight of dish in mg
           C = volume of sample used in ml
9.    Precision and Accuracy
     9.1   Precision and accuracy are not available at this time.

                                       Bibliography

1.    Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 92, Method
     208B,(1975).
                                           D-401

-------
t
£>
O

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 160.2
      D-403

-------
                          RESIDUE,  NON-FILTERABLE

                 Method  160.2 (Gravimetric, Dried  at 103-105°O

                                                                 STORET  NO.  00530

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
          wastes.
     1.2  The practical range of the determination is 4 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  A well-mixed sample is filtered through a glass fiber filter, and the residue retained on the
          filter is dried to constant weight at 103-105*C.
     2.2  The filtrate from this method may be used for Residue, Filterable.
3.    Definitions
     3.1  Residue, non-filterable, is defined as those solids which are retained by a glass fiber filter
          and dried to constant weight at 103-105*C.
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1  Non-representative particulates such as leaves, sticks,  fish, and lumps of fecal matter
          should be excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired
          in the final result.
     4.2  Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
          Refrigeration or icing to 4*C, to minimize microbiological  decomposition of solids, is
          recommended.
5.    Interferences
     5.1  Filtration apparatus, filter material, pre-washing, post-washing, and drying temperature
          are specified because these variables have been shown to affect the results.
     5.2  Samples high in Filterable Residue (dissolved solids), such as saline waters, brines and
          some wastes, may be subject to a positive interference. Care must be taken in selecting the
          filtering apparatus so that washing of the filter and any dissolved solids in the filter (7.5)
          minimizes this potential interference.
6.    Apparatus
     6.1  Glass fiber filter discs, without organic binder,  such as Millipore AP-40, Reeves Angel
          934-AH, Gelman type A/E, or equivalent.
          NOTE: Because of the physical nature of glass fiber filters, the absolute pore size cannot
          be controlled or measured. Terms such as "pore size", collection efficiencies and effective
          retention are used to define this property in glass fiber filters. Values for these parameters
          vary for the  filters listed above.
     6.2  Filter  support: filtering apparatus with reservoir and a coarse (40-60 microns) fritted
          disc as a filter support.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971

                                          D-404

-------
          NOTE: Many funnel designs are  available in glass  or porcelain. Some of the most
          common are Hirsch or Buchner funnels, membrane filter holders and Gooch crucibles.
          All are available with coarse fritted disc.
     6.3  Suction flask.
     6.4  Drying oven, 103-105°C.
     6.5  Desiccator.
     6.6  Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7.    Procedure
     7.1  Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the glass fiber filter on the membrane filter
          apparatus or insert into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible with wrinkled surface up.
          While vacuum is applied, wash the disc with three successive 20 ml volumes of distilled
          water. Remove all traces of water by continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed
          through. Remove filter from membrane filter apparatus or both crucible and filter if
          Gooch  crucible is used, and dry in an oven at 103-105°C for one  hour. Remove to
          desiccator and store until needed.  Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is
          obtained (weight loss is less than 0.5 mg). Weigh immediately before use. After weighing,
          handle the filter or crucible/filter with forceps or tongs only.
     7.2  Selection of Sample Volume
          For a 4.7 cm diameter filter, filter 100  ml of sample. If weight of captured residue is less
          than  1.0 mg, the sample volume must be increased to provide at least 1.0 mg of residue. If
          other filter diameters are used, start with a sample volume equal to 7 ml/cm2 of filter area
          and collect at least a weight of residue proportional to the 1.0 mg stated above.
          NOTE: If during filtration of this  initial volume the  filtration rate drops rapidly, or if
          filtration time exceeds 5 to 10 minutes,  the following scheme is recommended:  Use an
          unweighed glass fiber filter of choice affixed in the filter assembly. Add a known volume
          of sample to the  filter funnel and record the  time elapsed after selected volumes have
          passed through the filter. Twenty-five  ml increments for timing are suggested. Continue
          to record the time and volume increments until fitration  rate  drops rapidly.  Add
          additional sample if the filter funnel volume is inadequate to reach a  reduced rate. Plot
          the observed time versus volume filtered. Select the proper filtration volume as that just
           short of the time a significant change in filtration rate occurred.
     7.3   Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Wet the filter with a small volume of
           distilled water to seat it against the fritted support.
     7.4   Shake  the  sample vigorously and quantitatively transfer the predetermined  sample
           volume selected in 7.2 to the filter using a graduated cylinder. Remove all traces of water
           by continuing to apply vacuum after sample has passed through.
     7.5   With suction on, wash the graduated cylinder, filter, non-filterable residue and filter
           funnel  wall with three  portions  of distilled water allowing complete drainage between
           washing. Remove all traces of water by continuing  to apply vacuum after water has
           passed through.
           NOTE: Total volume of wash water used should equal approximately 2 ml per cm:. For a
           4.7 cm filter the total volume is 30 ml.
                                           D-405

-------
     7.6   Carefully remove the filter from the filter support. Alternatively, remove crucible and
           filter from crucible adapter. Dry at least one hour at 103-105*C. Cool in a desiccator and
           weigh. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained (weight loss is less than
           0.5 mg).
8.    Calculations
     8.1   Calculate non-filterable residue as follows:
           Non-filterable residue, mg/1 = ^	Bj* 1.000
           where:

           A = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) -t- residue in mg
           B = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) in mg
           C = ml of sample filtered
9.    Precision and Accuracy
     9.1   Precision data are not available at this time.
     9.2   Accuracy data on actual samples cannot be obtained.

                                       Bibliography

1.    NCASI Technical Bulletin No. 291, March 1977. National Council of the Paper Industry for
     Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., 260 Madison Ave., NY.
                                           D-406

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 160.3
        D-407

-------
                                 RESIDUE,  TOTAL

                 Method  160.3 (Gravimetric, Dried at  103-105T)

                                                                 STORET NO. 00500

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
          wastes.
     1.2  The practical range of the determination is from 10 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  A well mixed  aliquot of  the  sample is quantitatively  transferred to a  pre-weighed
          evaporating dish and evaporated to dryness at 103-105°C.
3.    Definitions
     3.1  Total Residue  is defined  as  the  sum of the homogenous suspended and dissolved
          materials in a sample.
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1  Preservation of the sample is not  practical;  analysis should begin as soon as possible.
          Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological  decomposition of solids, is
          recommended.
5.    Interferences
     5.1  Non-representative particulates such as leaves, sticks, fish  and lumps of fecal matter
          should be excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired
          in the final result.
     5.2  Floating oil and grease, if present,  should be included in  the sample and dispersed by a
          blender device before aliquoting.
6.    Apparatus
     6.1  Evaporating dishes, porcelain, 90 mm, 100 ml capacity. (Vycor or platinum dishes may
          be substituted and smaller size dishes may be used if required.)
7.    Procedure
     7.1  Heat the clean evaporating dish to 103-105'C for one hour,  if Volatile Residue is  to be
          measured, heat at 550  ±50"C for one hour in a muffle furnace. Cool, desiccate, weigh and
          store in desiccator until ready for use.
     7.2  Transfer a measured aliquot of sample to the pre-weighed dish and evaporate to dryness
          on a steam bath or in a drying oven.
          7.2.1  Choose an aliquot of sample sufficient to contain a residue of at  least 25 mg. To
                obtain a weighable residue, successive aliquots of sample may be added to the same
                dish.
          7.2.2  If evaporation is performed in a drying oven, the temperature should be lowered to
                approximately 98*C to prevent boiling and splattering of the sample.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971

                                         D-408

-------
     7.3   Dry the evaporated sample for at least 1 hour at  103-105'C. Cool in a desiccator and
           weigh. Repeat the cycle of drying at 103-105°C, cooling, desiccating and weighing until a
           constant weight is obtained or until loss of weight is less than 4% of the previous weight,
           or 0.5 mg, whichever is less.
8.    Calculation
     8.1   Calculate total residue as follows:
           Total residue, mg/1 = 
-------
D-410

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 120.1
     D-411

-------
                                  CONDUCTANCE

              Method 120.1  (Specific Conductance,  umhos at 25°O

                                                                STORET NO.  00095

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1  This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
          wastes.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1  The specific conductance of a sample is measured by use of a self-contained conductivity
          meter, Wheatstone bridge-type, or equivalent.
     2.2  Samples are preferably analyzed at 25*C. If not, temperature corrections are made and
          results reported at 25*C.
3.    Comments
     3.1  Instrument must be standardized with KC1 solution before daily use.
     3.2  Conductivity cell must be kept clean.
     3.3  Field measurements with comparable instruments are reliable.
4.    Precision and Accuracy
     4.1  Forty-one analysts in  17 laboratories  analyzed six synthetic water samples containing
          increments of inorganic salts, with the following results:

      Increment  as            Precision as                          Accuracy as
   Specific Conductance      Standard Deviation              Bias,                  Bias,
   	      ——————               %                 mnhos/cm

           100                     7.55                   -2.02                  -2.0
           106                     8.14                   -0.76                  -0.8
           808                    66.1                   -3.63                  -29.3
           848                    79.6                   -4.54                  -38.5
          1640                    106                     -5.36                  -87.9
          1710                    119                     -5.08                  -86.9

(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses.)

     4.2  In a single laboratory (EMSL) using surface water samples with an average conductivity
          of 536 umhos/cm at 25*C, the standard deviation was ±6.
5.    References
     5.1  The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:
          Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1125-64, p 120 (1976).
          Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  14th Edition, p 71,
           Method 205, (1975).
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 376.2
     D-413

-------
                                                     SULFIDE

                                  Method 376.2 (Colorimetric, Methylene  Blue)

                                                                        STORET NO. Total  00745
                                                                                     Dissolved  00746

               1.   Scope and Application
                    1.1   This method is applicable to the measurement of total and dissolved sulfides in drinking,
                          surface and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
                    1.2   Acid insoluble sulfides are not measured by this method. Copper  sulfide is the only
                          common sulfide in this class.
                    1.3   The method is suitable for the measurement of sulfide in concentrations up to 20 mg/1.
               2.   Summary of Method
                    2.1   Sulfide reacts with  dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine (p-aminodimethyl aniline) in the
                          presence of ferric chloride to produce methylene blue, a dye which is measured at a
                          wavelength maximum of 625 nm.
               3.   Comments
                    3.1   Samples must be taken with a minimum  of aeration. Sulfide may be volatilized by
                          aeration and any oxygen inadvertently added to the sample may convert the sulfide to an
                          immeasurable form. Dissolved oxygen should not be present in any water used to dilute
                          standards.
                    3.2   The analysis must be started immediately.
                    3.3   Color and turbidity may interfere with observations of color or with photometric
                          readings.
               4.   Apparatus
                    4.1   Matched test tubes, approximately 125 mm long and 15 mm O. D.
                    4.2   Droppers, delivering 20 drops/ml. To obtain uniform drops, hold dropper in  vertical
                          position and allow drops to form slowly.
                    4.3   Photometer, use either 4.3.1 or 4.3.2.
                          4.3.1 Spectrophotometer, for use at 625 nm with cells of 1 cm and 10 cm light path.
                          4.3.2 Filter photometer, with filter providing transmittance near 625 nm.
               5.   Reagents
                    5.1   Amino-sulfuric acid  stock solution: Dissolve 27 g N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine
                          oxalate (p-aminodimethylaniline) in a cold mixture of 50 ml cone. H2SO4 and 20 ml
                          distilled water in a 100 ml volumetric flask. Cool and dilute to the mark. If dark discard
                          and purchase fresh reagent. Store in dark glass bottle.
                    5.2   Amino-sulfuric acid reagent: Dissolve 25 ml amino-sulfuric acid stock solution (5.1) with
                          975 ml of 1 +1 H,SO4 (5.4). Store in a dark glass bottle. This solution should be clear.
                    5.3   Ferric chloride solution: Dissolve 100 g FeCl3«6H2O in 40 ml distilled water.
               Approved for NPDES
/               Issued 1978


                                                        D-414

-------
     5.4   Sulfuric acid solution, H2SO4,1 +1
     5.5   Diammonium hydrogen phosphate solution: Dissolve 400 g (NH4)2HPO4 in  800 ml
           distilled water.
     5.6   Methylene blue solution I: Dissolve 1.0 g of methylene blue in distilled water in a 1  liter
           volumetric flask  and dilute to the mark.  Use U.S.P. grade or one certified by the
           Biological Stain Commission. The dye content reported on the label should be 84% or
           more. Standardize  (5.8) against sulfide solutions  of known  strength  and  adjust
           concentration so that 0.05 ml (1 drop) equals 1.0 mg/1 sulfide.
     5.7   Methylene blue solution II: Dilute 10.00 ml of adjusted methylene blue solution I (5.6) to
           100 ml with distilled water in a volumetric flask.
     5.8   Standardization of methylene blue I solution:
           5.8.1 Place several  grams of clean, washed crystals of sodium sulfide Na2S«9H2O  in a
                small beaker.
           5.8.2 Add somewhat less than enough water to cover the crystals.
           5.8.3 Stir occasionally for a few minutes. Pour the solution into another  vessel. This
                reacts slowly  with oxygen but the change is insignificnat over a few hours. Make
                the solution daily.
           5.8.4 To 1 liter of distilled water add 1 drop of solution and mix.
           5.8.5 Immediately determine the sulfide concentration by the methylene blue procedure
                (6) and by the titrimetric iodide procedure (Method 376.1, this manual).
           5.8.6 Repeat using more than one drop of sulfide solution or less water until at least five
                tests have been made in the range of 1 to 8 mg/1 sulfide.
           5.8.7 Calculate the average  percent  error of the methylene blue procedure  (6) as
                compared to the titrimetric iodide procedure (Method 376.1).
           5.8.8 Adjust by dilution or by adding more dye to methylene blue solution I (5.6).
6.    Procedure
     6.1   Color development
           6.1.1  Transfer 7.5 ml of sample to each of two matched test tubes using a special wide
                tipped pipet or filling to a mark on the test tubes.
           6.1.2  To tube A add 0.5 ml amine-sulfuric acid reagent (5.2) and 0.15 ml (3 drops) FeCl3
                solution (5.3).
           6.1.3 Mix immediately by inverting the tube only once.
           6.1.4 To tube B add 0.5 ml 1 +1 H2SO4 (5.4) and 0.15 ml (3 drops) JFeCl3 solution (5.3)
                and mix.
           6.1.5 Color will develop in tube A in the presence  of sulfide. Color development is
                usually complete in about 1 minute, but a longer time is often required for the
                fading of the initial pink color.
           6.1.6 Wait 3 to 5 minutes.
           6.1.7 Add 1.6 ml (NH4)2HPO4 solution (5.5) to each tube.
           6.1.8  Wait 3 to 5 minutes and make color comparisons. If zinc acetate was used wait at
                least 10 minutes before making comparison.
                                          D-415

-------
                    6.2  Color comparison
 _                            6.2.1 Visual
' .                                   6.2.1.1     Add methylene blue solution  I (5.6) and/or II (5.7) (depending on
                                              sulfide concentration and accuracy desired) dropwise to tube B (6.1.4)
                                              until the color matches that developed in the first tube.
                                    6.2.1.2     If the concentration exceeds 20 mg/1, repeat 6.2.1.1 using a portion of
                                              the sample diluted to one tenth.
                               6.2.2 Photometric
                                    6.2.2.1     Use a 1 cm cell for 0.1 to 2.0 mg/1. Use a 10 cm cell for up to 20 mg/1.
                                    6.2.2.2     Zero instrument with portion of sample from tube B (6.1.4).
                                    6.2.2.3     Prepare  calibration  curve from  data  obtained  in methylene  blue
                                              standardization (5.8), plotting  concentraton obtained from  titrimetric
                                              iodide procedure (Method 376.1) versus absorbance. A straight  line
                                              relationship can be assumed from 0 to 1.0 mg/1.
                                    6.2.2.4     Read the sulfide concentration  from the calibration curve.
                    7.    Calculations
                         7.1   Visual comparison: With methylene blue solution I (5.6), adjusted so  that 0.05 ml (1
                               drop) = 1.0 mg/1 sulfide and a 7.5 ml sample

                               mg/1 sulfide  = number drops methylene  blue solution I (5.6) + 0.1 x [number of drops
                                              methylene blue solution II (5.7)].
                         7.2   Photometric: see 6.2.2.4
                    8.    Precision and Accuracy:
                         8.1   The precision has not been determined. The accuracy is about ±10%.

                                                           Bibliography

                    1.    Standard Methods for he Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th edition, p. 503, Method
                         428C(1975).
                                                             D-416

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 415.1
       D-417

-------
                          ORGANIC CARBON, TOTAL

                     Method 415.1  (Combustion or  Oxidation)

                                                         STORET NO. Total  00680
                                                                     Dissolved  00681

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method includes the measurement of organic carbon in drinking, surface and saline
          waters,  domestic and industrial wastes. Exclusions are noted under Definitions and
          Interferences.
     1.2   The method is most applicable to measurement of organic carbon above 1 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   Organic carbon in a sample is converted to carbon dioxide (CO2) by catalytic combustion
          or wet chemical oxidation. The CO2 formed can  be measured directly by an infrared
          detector or converted to methane (CH4) and measured by a flame ionization detector.
          The amount of CO2 or CH« is directly proportional to the concentration of carbonaceous
          material in the sample.
3.    Definitions
     3.1   The carbonaceous analyzer measures all of the carbon in a sample.  Because of various
          properties of carbon-containing compounds in liquid samples, preliminary treatment of
          the sample prior to analysis dictates the definition of the carbon as it is measured. Forms
          of carbon that are measured by the method are:
          A)   soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon; for instance, natural sugars.
          B)   soluble, volatile organic carbon; for instance, mercaptans.
          C)   insoluble, partially volatile carbon; for instance, oils.
          D)   insoluble, particulate carbonaceous materials, for instance; cellulose fibers.
          E)   soluble or insoluble carbonaceous materials adsorbed or entrapped on insoluble
               inorganic suspended matter, for instance, oily matter adsorbed on silt particles.
     3.2   The final  usefulness  of the carbon measurement is in assessing the potential oxygen-
          demanding load  of  organic material on a receiving  stream. This statement  applies
          whether the carbon measurement is made on a sewage plant effluent,  industrial waste, or
          on water taken directly from the stream. In this light, carbonate and bicarbonate carbon
          are not a part of the oxygen demand in the stream and therefore should be discounted in
          the final calculation or removed prior to analysis. The manner of preliminary treatment
          of the sample and instrument settings defines the types of carbon which are measurer1
          Instrument manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Approved for  NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974
                                         D-418

-------
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1   Sampling and storage of samples in glass bottles is preferable. Sampling and storage in
           plastic bottles such as conventional polyethylene and cubitainers is permissible if it is
           established that the containers do not contribute contaminating organics to the samples.
           NOTE 1: A brief study performed in the EPA Laboratory indicated that distilled water
           stored in new, one quart cubitainers did not show any increase in organic carbon after
           two weeks exposure.
     4.2   Because  of the possibility of oxidation or bacterial decomposition of some components of
           aqueous  samples, the lapse of time between collection of samples and start of analysis
           should be kept to a minimum. Also, samples should be kept cool (4°C) and protected
           from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
     4.3   In instances where analysis cannot be performed within two hours (2 hours) from time of
           sampling, the sample is acidified (pH < 2) with HC1 or H2SO4.
5.    Interferences
     5.1   Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the terms of this test
           and must be removed or accounted for in the final calculation.
     5.2   This procedure is applicable only to homogeneous samples which can be injected into the
           apparatus reproducibly by means of a microliter type syringe or pipette. The openings of
           the syringe or pipette limit the maximum size of particles which may be included in the
           sample.
6.    Apparatus
     6.1   Apparatus for blending or homogenizing samples: Generally, a Waring-type blender is
           satisfactory.
     6.2   Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon:
           6.2.1 A  number of  companies manufacture systems for measuring carbonaceous
                material in liquid samples. Considerations should  be made as to the  types of
                samples to be analyzed, the expected concentration range, and forms of carbon to
                be  measured.
           6.2.2 No specific analyzer is recommended as superior.
7.    Reagents
     7.1   Distilled water used in preparation of standards and for dilution of samples should be
           ultra pure to reduce the carbon concentration of the blank. Carbon dioxide-free,  double
           distilled  water is recommended. Ion exchanged waters are not recommended because of
           the possibilities of contamination with organic materials from the resins.
     7.2   Potassium hydrogen phthalate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Dissolve 0.2128 g
           of potassium hydrogen phthalate (Primary Standard Grade) in distilled water and dilute
           to 100.0 ml.
           NOTE 2: Sodium oxalate and acetic acid are not recommended as stock solutions.
     7.3   Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard solutions: Prepare standard solutions  from the
           stock solution by dilution with distilled water.
     7.4   Carbonate-bicarbonate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Weigh 0.3500 g of sodium
           bicarbonate and 0.4418 g of sodium carbonate and transfer both to the  same 100 ml
           volumetric flask. Dissolve with distilled water.
                                           D-419

-------
     7.5   Carbonate-bicarbonate, standard solution: Prepare a series of standards similar to step
           7.3.
           NOTE 3: This standard is not required by some instruments.
     7.6   Blank solution: Use the same distilled  water (or similar quality water) used  for the
           preparation of the standard solutions.
8.    Procedure
     8.1   Follow  instrument manufacturer's  instructions for  calibration,  procedure, and
           calculations.
     8.2   For calibration of the  instrument, it  is recommended that  a series of standards
           encompassing the expected concentration range of the samples be used.
9.    Precision and Accuracy
     9.1   Twenty-eight analysts in twenty-one laboratories analyzed distilled  water solutions
           containing exact increments of oxidizable organic compounds, with the following results:
      Increment as
          TOC
        mg/liter

           4.9
           107
   Precision as
Standard  Deviation
  TOC. mg/liter

       3.93
       8.32
(FWPCA Method Study 3, Demand Analyses)
  Bias,
   %
           Accuracy as
 Bias,
mg/liter
+ 15.27
+  1.01
 +0.75
 + 1.08
                                       Bibliography

1.    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D 2574-79, p 469 (1976).
2.    Standard Methods  for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  14th  Edition, p 532,
     Method 505, (1975).
                                           D-420

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 9060
 D-421

-------
                                 METHOD 9060

                            TOTAL ORGANIC CARBON
1.0  SCOPE AND APPLICATION
     1.1  Method 9060 1s used to determine the concentration of organic carbon
in ground  water,  surface  and  saline  waters,   and  domestic and industrial
wastes.  Some restrictions are noted 1n Sections  2.0 and 3.0.

     1.2  Method 9060 1s  most  applicable  to measurement  of organic carbon
above 1 mg/L.


2.0  SUMMARY OF METHOD

     2.1  Organic carbon 1s  measured  using  a  carbonaceous  analyzer.  This
instrument converts the organic carbon in  a sample to carbon dioxide (C02)  by
either catalytic combustion or wet chemical oxidation.  The C02 formed is then
either measured directly by an infrared detector  or converted to methane (CH^.)
and measured by a flame ionization detector.    The  amount of C02 or CH^ in a
sample is directly proportional to  the concentration of carbonaceous material
in the sample.

     2.2  Carbonaceous analyzers are capable of  measuring all forms of carbon
in a sample.    However,  because  of  various properties of carbon-containing
compounds 1n liquid samples,  the  manner  of  preliminary sample treatment as
well as the  instrument  settings  will  determine  which  forms of carbon are
actually measured.  The forms of  carbon   that  can be measured by Method 9060
are:

       1.  Soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon:  e.g., natural  sugars.

       2.  Soluble, volatile organic  carbon:    e.g., mercaptans, alkanes, low
          molecular weight alcohols.

       3.  Insoluble,  partially volatile   carbon:    e.g.,  low  molecular weight
          oils.

       4.  Insoluble,   particulate  carbonaceous  materials:    e.g.,  cellulose
          fibers.

       5.  Soluble  or  insoluble   carbonaceous  materials   adsorbed or  entrapped
          on Insoluble inorganic suspended matter:   e.g.,  oily matter adsorbed
          on silt  particles.

      2.3  Carbonate  and bicarbonate  are  inorganic   forms  of carbon  and  must be
 separated from the total  organic carbon   value.    Depending  on  the  instrument
 manufacturer's instructions,  this separation  can   be accomplished  by either  a
 simple mathematical  subtraction,  or  by   removing  the  carbonate and  bicarbonate
 by converting  them to C02  with degassing  prior to  analysis.


                                  9060    D-422
                                                          Revision       Q
                                                          Date  September  1986

-------
3.0  INTERFERENCES

     3.1  Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the
terras of this test and must be  removed or accounted for in the final  calcula-
tion.

     3.2  This procedure 1s-applicable  only  to homogeneous samples which can
be injected into  the  apparatus  reproducibly  by  means of a microliter-type
syringe or pipet.  The openings of the syringe or pipet limit the maximum size
of particle which may be included in the sample.

     3.3  Removal of carbonate  and  bicarbonate  by acidification and purging
with nitrogen, or other inert gas, can  result in the loss of volatile organic
substances.
4.0  APPARATUS AND MATERIALS

     4.1  Apparatus  for  blending  or  homogenizing  samples:    Generally,  a
War1 ng-type blender is satisfactory.

     4.2  Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon;

          4.2.1  Several  companies   manufacture   analyzers   for  measuring
     carbonaceous material in  liquid  samples.    The most appropriate system
     should be selected based on consideration  of  the types of samples to be
     analyzed, the expected concentration range, and the forms of carbon to be
     measured.

          4.2.2  No specific analyzer  is  recommended  as  superior.   If the
     technique of chemical oxidation is  used,  the laboratory must be certain
     that the instrument is  capable  of  achieving  good carbon recoveries in
     samples containing parti culates.


5.0  REAGENTS

     5.1  ASTM Type II water  (ASTM  D1193) :    Water  should be monitored for
impurities, and should be boiled and cooled to remove
     5.2  Potassium hydrogen  phthalate,  stock  solution.  1,000 mg/L carbon:
Dissolve 0.2128 g of potassium  hydrogen phthalate (primary standard grade) in
Type II water and dilute to 100.0 ml.
     NOTE;  Sodium  oxalate  and  acetic  acid  are  not  recommended as stock
          solutions.

     5.3  Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard  solutions;  Prepare standard
solutions from the stock solution by dilution with Type II water.
                                  9060
                                                         Revision      0
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------
     5.4  Carbonate-bicarbonate,  stock  solution,   1,000  mg/L  carbon:   Weigh
0.3500 g of sodium bicarbonate and  0.4418  g of sodium carbonate and transfer
both to the same 100-mL volumetric flask.   Dissolve with Type II water.

     5.5  Carbonate-bicarbonate,   standard  solution;     Prepare  a  series of
standards similar to Step 5.3.
     NOTE;  This standard 1s not required  by some instruments.

     5.6  Blank solution;  Use the same  Type  II water as was used to prepare
the standard solutions.
6.0  SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION,  AND HANDLING

     6.1  All samples must be collected  using  a sampling plan that addresses
the considerations discussed in Chapter Nine of this manual.

     6.2  Sampling and storage  of  samples  in  glass  bottles is preferable.
Sampling and storage in plastic  bottles such as conventional polyethylene and
cubitainers is permissible if  it  is   established  that the containers do not
contribute contaminating organlcs to the samples.
     NOTE;  A brief study performed  in the EPA Laboratory indicated that Type
          II water stored 1n new,  1-qt  cubital ners did not show any increase
          in organic carbon after 2 weeks' exposure.

     6.3  Because of the possibility  of  oxidation or bacterial decomposition
o'f some components of aqueous samples,  the time between sample collection and
the start of analysis should be minimized.   Also, samples should be kept cool
(4*C) and protected from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
     6.4  In instances where analysis  cannot
time of sampling, the sample Is acidified (pH
                                               be  performed  within 2 hr from
                                                2} with HC1 or
7.0  PROCEDURE

     7.1  Homogenize  the sample in a blender.
     NOTE:   To  avoid  erroneously  high  results,  inorganic  carbon must be
          accounted for.  The preferred method  is to measure total  carbon and
          inorganic carbon and to  obtain  the  organic carbon by  subtraction.
          If this  1s  not possible, follow Steps 7.2 and 7.3 prior  to analysis;
          however, volatile organic carbon may be lost.

     7.2  Lower  the pH  of the sample to 2.

     7.3  Purge  the sample with nitrogen for  10 min.

     7.4  Follow  instrument  manufacturer's.   instructions   for   calibration,
procedure,  and calculations.

     7.5  For calibration of 'the  instrument,  a  series of standards should be
used that encompasses the expected concentration range of the samples.
                                   9060
                                          D-424
                                                          Revision       0
                                                          Date   Seotember  1986

-------
     7.6  Quadruplicate analysis is required.   Report both  the average and the
range.


8.0  QUALITY CONTROL

     8.1  All quality control data should be maintained and available for easy
reference or inspection.

     8.2  Employ a minimum  of  one  blank  per  sample  batch to determine 1f
contamination or any memory effects are occurring.

     8.3  Verify calibration  with  an  independently  prepared check standard
every 15 samples.

     8.4  Run one spike duplicate sample  for  every  10 samples.  A duplicate
sample is a sample brought through the whole sample preparation and analytical
process.


9.0  METHOD PERFORMANCE

     9.1  Precision and accuracy data are available in Method 415.1 of Methods
for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes.


10.0 REFERENCES

1.   Annual Book  of ASTM  Standards,  Part 31,  "Water,"  Standard D 2574-79,
p. 469 (1976).

2.   Standard Methods  for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  14th ed.,
p. 532, Method 505 (1975).
                                  9060   D-425
                                                         Revision
                                                         Date  September 1986

-------

I.




• I
I)
1 UW
»(. C >
to o-> —
a-- c • «
«» C • 3C
u» o •
• c -• .»
•• OK II C "
t Ml 3-0
C J" • • U
L-«O— •
J W »O 3 C
O» UL OO
•» -c o-«o
•*•* • 1.
N O O •
k. u







+- \.
0 O C
«• O
« -
• nu
^- o •
« • o
C-*
VI V V •
N 3 w








V
w
•
UM
-• «
3 —
OC
  o
    o
VD

(NJ
o
«o
o
c \




L



\ 	 /










C
• **
•* t
** it •

•SE

^



I».
c
4f












• X
C 0
o


ra

N
i:













c

c-c
0 > •
0

n

N
i!5e
•












-------
      EPA METHOD
      NO. 415.1M
TOTAL VOLATILE ORGANICS
             D-427

-------
                          ORGANIC CARBON, TOTAL

                     Method 415.1 (Combustion or Oxidation)

                                                         STORET NO. Total 00680
                                                                      Dissolved 00681

1.    Scope and Application
     1.1   This method includes the measurement of organic carbon in drinking, surface and saline
          waters, domestic and industrial wastes. Exclusions are noted under Definitions and
          Interferences.
     1.2   The method is most applicable to measurement of organic carbon above 1 mg/1.
2.    Summary of Method
     2.1   Organic carbon in a sample is converted to carbon dioxide (CO2) by catalytic combustion
          or wet chemical oxidation. The CO2 formed can be measured directly by an infrared
          detector or converted to methane  (CH4) and measured by a flame ionization detector.
          The amount of CO2 or CH4 is directly proportional to the concentration of carbonaceous
          material in the sample.
3.    Definitions
     3.1   The carbonaceous analyzer measures all of the carbon in a sample. Because of various
          properties of carbon-containing compounds in liquid samples, preliminary treatment of
          the sample prior to analysis dictates the definition of the carbon as it is measured. Forms
          of carbon that are measured by the  method are:-
          A)   soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon; for instance, natural sugars.
          B)   soluble, volatile organic carbon; for instance, mercaptans.
          C)   insoluble, partially volatile carbon; for instance, oils.
          D)   insoluble, paniculate carbonaceous materials, for instance; cellulose fibers.
          E)   soluble or insoluble carbonaceous materials adsorbed or entrapped on insoluble
               inorganic suspended matter,  for instance, oily matter adsorbed on silt particles.
     3.2   The final usefulness of the carbon measurement is in assessing the potential oxygen-
          demanding load  of  organic material on a receiving  stream. This statement applies
          whether the carbon measurement is made on a sewage plant effluent, industrial waste, or
          on water taken directly from the stream. In this light, carbonate and bicarbonate carbon
          are not a part of the oxygen demand in the stream and therefore should be discounted in
          the final calculation or removed prior to analysis. The manner of preliminary treatment
          of the sample and instrument settings defines the types of carbon which are measured
          Instrument manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Approved for  NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974
                                          D-428

-------
4.    Sample Handling and Preservation
     4.1   Sampling and storage of samples in glass bottles is preferable. Sampling and storage in
           plastic bottles such as conventional polyethylene and cubitainers is permissible if it is
           established that the containers do not contribute contaminating organics to the samples.
           NOTE 1: A brief study performed in the EPA Laboratory indicated that distilled water
           stored in new, one quart cubitainers did not show any increase in organic carbon after
           two weeks exposure.
     4.2   Because of the possibility of oxidation or bacterial decomposition of some components of
           aqueous samples, the lapse of time between collection of samples and start of analysis
           should be kept to a minimum. Also, samples should be kept cool (4°C) and protected
           from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
     4.3   In instances where analysis cannot be performed within two hours (2 hours) from time of
           sampling, the sample is acidified (pH < 2) with HC1 or H2SO4.
5.    Interferences
     5.1   Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the terms of this test
           and must be removed or accounted for in the final calculation.
     5.2   This procedure is applicable only to homogeneous samples which can be injected into the
           apparatus reproducibly by means of a microliter type syringe or pipette. The openings of
           the syringe or pipette limit the maximum size of particles which may be included in the
           sample.
6.    Apparatus
     6.1   Apparatus for blending or homogenizing samples: Generally, a Waring-type blender is
           satisfactory.
     6.2   Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon:
           6.2.1  A  number of companies manufacture systems for  measuring carbonaceous
                material in liquid samples. Considerations should  be  made as to the types  of
                samples to be analyzed, the expected concentration range, and forms of carbon to
                be measured.
           6.2.2 No specific analyzer  is recommended as superior.
7.    Reagents
     7.1   Distilled water used in preparation of standards and for dilution of samples should be
           ultra pure to reduce the carbon concentration of the blank. Carbon dioxide-free, double
           distilled  water is recommended. Ion exchanged waters are not recommended because of
           the possibilities of contamination with organic materials from the resins.
     7.2   Potassium hydrogen phthalate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter:  Dissolve 0.2128 g
           of potassium hydrogen phthalate (Primary Standard Grade) in distilled water and dilute
           to 100.0 ml.
           NOTE 2: Sodium oxalate and acetic acid are not recommended as stock solutions.
     7.3   Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard solutions: Prepare standard solutions from the
           stock solution by dilution with distilled water.
     7.4   Carbonate-bicarbonate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Weigh 0.3500 g of sodium
           bicarbonate and 0.4418 g  of sodium carbonate and transfer both to  the  same 100 ml
           volumetric flask. Dissolve with distilled water.
                                          D-429

-------
f
     7.5   Carbonate-bicarbonate, standard solution: Prepare a series of standards similar to step
           7.3.
           NOTE 3: This standard is not required by some instruments.
     7.6   Blank solution: Use the same distilled  water (or similar quality water) used for the
           preparation of the standard solutions.
8.   Procedure
     8.1   Follow  instrument  manufacturer's  instructions for  calibration,  procedure, and
           calculations.
     8.2   For calibration of the  instrument, it  is recommended that  a series of standards
           encompassing the expected concentration range of the samples be used.
9.   Precision and Accuracy
     9.1   Twenty-eight analysts in twenty-one laboratories analyzed distilled water solutions
           containing exact increments of oxidizable organic compounds, with the following results:
                      Increment as
                          TOC
                        mg/liter

                           4.9
                           107
                              Precision  as
                           Standard Deviation
                             TOC. mg/liter

                                 3.93
                                 8.32
                (FWPCA Method Study 3, Demand Analyses)
  Bias,
   %
           Accuracy as
 Bias,
mg/liter.
+15.27
+  1.01
 +0.75
 + 1.08
                                                       Bibliography

                1.    Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D 2574-79, p 469 (1976).
                2.    Standard  Methods  for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,  14th Edition, p 532,
                     Method 505, (1975).
                                                          D-430

-------
 Tekmar Company^
 Telqnar Company"
            Comoairv"
                   LIQUID SAMPLE CONCENTRATOR

                        MODEL LSC-1

                      Instruction Manual


SECTION I
SECTION II





SECTION III




SECTION TV








TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Utilities Required
Assembly
Interfacing with a G.C.
Interfacing with a Totals Detector
Conditioning Trap .Column
OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description of Controls
Operation
Calibration
Trap Column

Page
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
7
8
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LSC-1
Purge Mode Schematic
Desorb Mode Schematic
Direct Interface to G.C.
Tube-needle Interface to G.C.
Tube-needle Interface to Totals Detector
9
10
10
11
11
11
SECTION V
REPRINTS AND COMPONENT PARTS INFORMATION
                      D-431
P.O-Box 37202 • Cincinnati, Ohio 45222 • (513) 761-0633 • TELEX NO. 21-1221

-------
     Procedure  for  Purgeable  Organic  Carbon   
-------
                                              JcJqnar Company*
 SECTION I    INTRODUCTION

 The  LSC-1  is designed  to concentrate volatile organic
 contaminants found  in  fresh  and waste water.  By
 bubbling an  inert gas  through the aqueous  sample,
 the  volatile organic contaminants exhibiting low
 solubility in water will be  quantitatively
 partitioned  into the gas phase.  A trap column in
 the  LSC-1  concentrates the organics from the gas
 phase to complete the concentration step.  Following
 the  concentration step (Purge Mode, Figure 2) the
 sample  is  thermally desorbed from the trap column
 (Desorb  Mode, Figure 3) and  transferred via connect-
 ing  tubing to your measurement device.

 The  technique will quantitatively remove those
 organics exhibiting high volatility (less than
 150  C Boiling Point) and low solubility (less than
 5%)  in water.  At solubilities greater than 5% (apx.)
partitioning of the organic  compound is not quantita-
 tive.  In the latter case,  quantitative analysis is
possible by relating the amount of sample partitioned
 from the aqueous phase to the volume of purge gas
used.
                         D-433

-------
                                                      Company"
 SECTION II     INSTALLATION

 1.    Utilities Required:
      Power:    110V,  60 Hz,  2A
      Gases:    Purge  gas should be  zero grade Helium
               or Nitrogen.  Connect to Purge Gas on
               rear of LSC-1.  Set  delivery pressure
               to 20  psi.  A hydrocarbon trap should
               be used to scrub the purge gas before
               entering the  LSC-1.
               Desorb gas should be pre-purified grade
               Helium or Nitrogen.  Connect to Desorb
              Gas on rear of LSC-1.  Delivery pressure
              will be determined by type of  interfac-
               ing used.  (See Section U, 3  for
               further details on desorb gas.)
2.   Assembly
     Except for the sampler, the LSC-1 is completely
     assembled.  Remove the sampler from its packing
     and install as pictured in Figure 1.   The sampler
     is supported by the 1/4" compression fitting
     attached to the front panel bracket.  Connect the
     purge gas tube  (left side of bracket)  to the
     sampler arm running to the bottom of the frit.
     Connect the exit tube  (right side of bracket)
     to the right arm of the sampler.   Reasonable care
     should be exercised in attaching  the fittings  to
     avoid breakage of the saapler.
3.   Interfacing with a -Gas Chromatograph
     Interfacing to a G.C.  is best done by using  the
     G.C. carrier gas as the desorb gas for  the LSC-1
     (see Figure 4).   The output of the G.C.  flow
     controller is  connected directly  to  the desorb
                            D-434

-------
                                             Tckmar Company*
     gas input of the LSC-1.  The trap effluent port on
     the LSC-1 is connected directly .to the carrier input
     of the G.C. injection port using the 1/8" O.D.
     teflon tubing supplied.  Using this type of inter-
     facing, the G.C. carrier backflushes the LSC-1
     trap directly to the G.C. column in Desorb Mode.
     In Purge Mode, operation of the G.C. is unaffected.

     An alternate means of interfacing to a G.C. is the
     tube-needle coupling (see Figure 5).  In this case
     the trap effluent port of the LSC-1 is connected
     to the septa injector of the G.C. with teflon tubing
     and needle adaptor (supplied with LSC-1.)  Oesorb
     gas for the LSC-1 must be supplied at a pressure
     greater than the pressure of the carrier gas going
     to the G.C. (to prevent G.C. carrier from back-
     streaming to the LSC-1 during Desorb Mode.)  A flow
     rate of 20 cc/min. for the desorb gas is sufficient.
     An auxiliary flow controller is required between the
     desorb gas tank and the LSC-1 to regulate the desorb
     flow.
4.   Interfacing with a Totals Detector
     Interfacing to a totals detector (specific chlorine,
     TOC analyzer,  total hydrocarbon analyzer,  etc. )  is
     usually accomplished using the tube-needle coupling
     (Figure 6).  However, if the totals detector uses a
     carrier gas, that carrier could be used as the desorb
     gas for the LSC-1 (Figure 4).
5.   Conditioning Trap Column
     The trap column in, your LSC-1 was baked out prior to
     shipment but should be baked again prior to operation.
     Turn on the LSC-1, set the Purge/Desorb valve to
     Purge, set the Trap Bake/Operate switch to Trap Bake,
     and set the Trap Temperature Control to 250 C.
                          D-435

-------
                                        Te^rnar Company*
Leave the LSC-1 in this condition overnight for
a thorough cleaning of the trap.  This procedure
can be repeated whenever trap contamination is
suspected.
                      D-436

-------
                                                     Company"
SECTION III

1.
         OPERATION
Description of Controls
Trap Bake/Operate
          Operate:
          Trap Bake:
     Trap Temperature
          Control:
     Purge Timer:
                  Trap oven and fan are controlled by
                  position of purge/desorb valve.
                  Purge timer can be set for desired
                  purge time.
                  Used for conditioning trapping
                  column.   Fan is off and the oven is
                  on independent of purge/desorb valve
                  position.   (The purge/desorb valve
                  should be set in the purge position
                  during trap bake mode to avoid con-
                  tamination of the measurement device.

                  This is  a direct set proportional
                  temperature controller.   The red
                  light below the control  blinks when
                  the controller is proportioning  at
                  the set  temperature.   The control is
                  off in purge mode.   For  all other
                  instrument settings,  the controller
                  is on.   The range is  room temperature
                  to 350°C.
                  The timer controls  a  three-way valve
                  supplying  purge gas to the sampler.
                  The timer  can be set  from zero to
                  thirty minutes and is continuously
                  adjustable.   After  setting the time,
                  the timer  is  started  by  pressing  the
                  white button in the center of  the
                      D-437

-------
                                                     Company*
                 timer knob.  At the end of  the pre-set
                 time the purge valve closes and the timer
                 re-sets itself.  To terminate a run,
                 rotate the timer knob counter-clockwise
                 to zero.
     Purge/Desorb:
         Purge:  The flow of purge gas (controlled by
                 rotameter and purge timer) is directed
                 to the trap column and to vent.  The
                 desorb gas passes through the valve, by-
                 passing the trap column enroute to the
                 measurement device (Figure 2).
         Desorb: The sampler is connected to vent and the
                 desorb gas backflushes the heated trap
                 column enroute to the measurement device
                 (Figure 3).
     Purge Flow: Flowneter used to establish the flow of
                 purge gas'to the sampler.
     Trap
      Effluent:  For connection to measurement unit.
     In j ection
        Port:    Located on top of front  panel bracket
                 and uses standard G.C. septa.
2.    Operation
     Set main power switch to  On (no warm-up  required)  and
     set Trap Bake/Operate switch to Operate.  Establish
     a 40 cc/min.  flow rate of purge gas  with the  flov*neter
     (approximately 45  on the  flovroeter,  but  this must  be
     checked against a  bubble  type flowneter  or  similar
     calibrating device.)   Set the Trap Temperature Control
     to 130°C.  Fill the 5  ml  syringe with  sample by remov-
     ing the plunger and pouring  sample into  the barrel to
                             D-438

-------
                                             Tckpiar Company*
     overflowing.  Open the valve on the bottom of the
     syringe and reinsert the plunger into the syringe
     barrel  (avoid air bubbles between the liquid and
     plunger. )  Using the long needle, the sample is
     injected into the purge unit.  (If the sample is
     not injected immediately/ close the syringe valve
     to avoid loss of volatiles.)
     Set the purge timer to the required purge time
     (typically 11 minutes ) , and press the white button
     in the center of the timer knob.   Purge gas will
     now be bubbling through the sample and will stop
     automatically at the end of the pre-set purge time.
     During this interval, prepare your measurement
     device to receive the sample.  The concentrated
     sample is transferred to your measurement unit by
     turning the Desorb/Purge valve to Desorb.  This
     backflushes the trap column and turns on the
     Temperature Controller, causing a rapid temperature
     rise in the trap and thermal desorption.   After
     three or four minutes, return the system to purge
     mode and the LSC-1 is ready to accept a new sample.
     As mentioned above, the LSC-1 needs no warm-up.
     Indeed, if long delays occur between sample runs,
     it would be best to turn off the  LSC-1 to a>/cid
     needless running of the trap column cooling fan.

3.    Calibration
     Prepare a solution of your standards in methanol at
     a concentration of 1000 times the desired calibration
     level.   Inject 5 ul of the methanol solution directlv
                             D-439

-------
                                              Tckgiar Company*
     into the 5 ml sample syringe containing  organic free
     water using the 10 ul syringe supplied with the LSC-1.
     The 10 ul syringe needle is run through  the valve
     attached to the 5 ml sample syringe with the valve in
     the open position.  After injecting the  standard into
     the organic free water, withdraw the 10 ul syringe/
     close the valve, attach the long needle  to the valve
     and inject the 5 ml into the purge unit.
4.   Trap Column
     The trap installed in your LSC-1 contains 2/3 Tenax
     and 1/3 Silica Gel Oavisson Grade 15.   This is
     optimized for trapping organohalides but will also
     trap a broad range of organic compounds.  A blank.
     trap is supplied for making your own trap column if
     it is desired to optimize for a particular compound.
     The top of the column is identified by two grooves
     cut near the top end.   An all tenax trap is available
     and is  identified by one groove cut near the top end.
     The trap column is accessible through the rear panel.

          CAUTION:     Unplug power cord before
                                 i
                       removing  the back panel
                       or chassis.
     The fittings  at the top  of  the trap are finger tight
     and utilize  teflon ferrules.    Remove  the 1/16"  tube
     and fitting  from the top of the trap and loosen the
     fitting at the  base.   Lift  the trap vertically about
     one inch.  Swing the bottom of the  trap to  the rear
     of the  LSC-1  and the trap and  furnace  can be removed
     through the opening in the  rear of  the furnace housing.
                             D-440

-------
s

-------
Purge  gas  (He or N2)  is  bubbled through the
sample, partitioning volatile organics into the gas
phase for concentration by  the trap column.
                                                             Figure 2
           D«aortj G*» Ovrt
  Desortt Gas In
                                                Purge Mode
                                              (Trap Column 2S'C)
                                                                in
Desorfo Mode
The trap column is heated and backflushed with
carrier gas  (He orN2) to transfer the concentrated
sample to the measurement device.
Figure 3
       Oesorb Gas and Simple Out
                                               DesorfeMode
                                             (Trap Column 125'C)
                                                               In
Bake Mode
This is a service mode for cleaning the trap column
at elevated temperature while venting the effluent
to atmosphere.
                                    D-442

-------
                        LSC-1 Typical Detector Interfacings
    LSC1/GC
   Direct couple to GC using GC
   carrier as LSC-1 input.
    Figure 4
                                                      Carrier
                       From Flow Controller
Purge
                                                LSC-1
                                      <3C
      Effluent Out     Garner Input of Injection Port
   LSC-l/GC

   Tube-needle coupling to GC
   using alternate source of He or
   Ni as LSC-1 carrier input.
(    Figure 5
      Effluent Out
                                                                            Injection Port
   LSC-1/Specific Totals Detector

   Tube-needle coupling to totals
   detector using alternate source
   of He or Ns as LSC-1 carrier
   input.
   Figure  6
                            Total Organic Carbon Analyzer

                             Specific Chlorine Detector
                                                    Effluent Out
                            1 Sample Input
     Tekmar Company*
     P.O. Box 37202 • Cincinnati, Ohio 45222 • Telephone: 513/781-0633
                                                   D-443

-------
xf
xT
xf

o

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 1010
     D-445

-------
                                 METHOD 101C1

                       PENSKY-MARTENS CLOSED-CUP METHOD
1.0  Scope and Application

     1.1  Method 1010 uses the Pensky-Martens  closed-cup tester to determine
the flash point of fuel  oils,  lube oils,  suspensions  of solids, liquids that
tend to form a surface film under test conditions,  and  other liquids.


2.0  Summary of Method

     2.1  The sample is  heated at a slow,  constant  rate with continual
stirring.  A small  flame is directed into  the  cup at  regular intervals  with
simultaneous interruption of stirring.  The flash point is  the  lowest  temper-
ature at which application of  the test flame ignites  the vapor  above the
sample.


3.0  Interferences
     3.1  Ambient pressure,  sample homogeneity,  drafts,  and  operator  bias  can
affect flash point values.


4.0  Apparatus

     4.1  Pensky-Martens Closed Flash Tester,  as described  in  Annex Al  of  ASTM
Method D93-77.  (Automatic  flash point testers are  available and  may  be
advantageous since they save testing time,  permit the  use of smaller  samples,
and exhibit other advantages.   If automatic testers are  used,  the user  must  be
sure to follow all the manufacturer's instructions  for calibrating, adjusting,
and operating the instrument.   In any cases of dispute,  the  flash point as
determined manually shall  be considered the referee test.)

     4.2  Thermometers:  Two standard thermometers  shall  be  used  with the
ASTM Pensky-Martens tester.

          4.2.1  For tests  in  which the indicated reading  falls within  -7* to
     -f-110* C (20* to 230* F),  inclusive:  either (1) an  ASTM Pensky-Martens
     Low Range or Tag Closed Tester Thermometer having a range from  -7* to
     +110* C (20* to 230" F) and conforming to the  requirements  for  Thermometers
     SC (9F) and as prescribed in ASTM Specification El, or (2) an IP Thermo-
     meter 15C (15F) conforming to specifications given  in  Annex  A3  of  ASTM
     D93-77.
     iThis method is based on ASTM Method D93-77.   Refer to 093-77 or D93-80
for more information.
                                      D-446

-------
2 / CHARACTERISTICS - Ignitability


          4.2.2  For tests in which the indicated reading falls within 110*
     to 370* C (230* to 700* F):  either (1) an ASTM Pensky-Martens High
     Range Thermometer having a range from 90* to 370" C (200* to 700* F) and
     conforming to the requirements for Thermometers IOC (10F) as prescribed
     in Specification El, or (2) IP Thermometer 16C (16F) conforming to
     specifications given in Annex A3 of ASTM D93-77.


5.0  Reagents

     5.1  Calcium chloride.

     5.2  p-Xylene reference standard.


6.0  Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling

     6.1  All samples must be collected using a sampling plan that addresses
the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.

     6.2  Samples shall not be stored in plastic bottles since volatile
materials may diffuse through the walls of the bottle.


7.0  Procadure

     7.1  Preparation of samples:  Samples that do not contain volatile
contaminants shall be prepared in the following manner.  NOTE:  If the sample
is suspected of containing volatile contaminants, the  treatment described in
7.1.1 and 7.1.2 should be omitted.

          7.1.1  Samples of very viscous materials may be warmed until they
     are reasonably fluid before they are tested.  However,  no sample should
     be heated more than is absolutely necessary, and  no sample should ever
     be heated to a temperature that exceeds 17' C (30* F) below the sample's
     expected flash point.

          7.1.2  Samples containing dissolved or free  water  may be dehydrated
     with calcium chloride or by filtering through a qualitative filter paper
     or a loose plug or dry absorbent cotton.  Warming the sample is permitted,
     but it shall not be heatad for prolonged periods  or above a temperature
     of 17* C (30* F) below the sample's expected flash point.

     7.2  Routine procedure

         7.2.1  Thoroughly clean and dry all parts of  the cup and its
     accessories before starting the test.  Be sure to remove any solvent
     that was used to clean the apparatus.  Fill the cup with the sample to
                                       D-447

-------
 --                                                                       1010 / 3


            be tested to the level indicated by the filling mark.  Place the lid on
            the cup and set the latter in the stove.  Be sure to properly engage the
            locating or locking device.  Insert the thermometer.  Light the test
            flame and adjust it to a diameter of 5/32 in. (4 mm).  Supply the heat
            at such a rate that the temperature as indicated by the thermometer
            increases 5* to 6* C (9* to 11* F)/min.  Turn the stirrer 90 to 120 rpm,
            stirring in a downward direction.

                 7.2.2  If the sample is expected to have a flash point of 110* C
            (230* F) or below, apply the test flame when the temperature of the
            sample is from 17* C (30* F) to 28* C (50* F) below the expected
            flash point and thereafter at a temperature reading that is a multiple
            of 1* C (2* F).  Apply the test flame by operating the mechanism on the
            cover which controls the shutter and test flame burner so-that the flame
            is lowered into the vapor space of the cup in 0.5 sec, left in its
            lowered position for 1 sec, and quickly raised to its high position.
            Do not stir the sample while applying the test flame.

                 7.2.3  If the sample is expected to have a flash point above 110* C
            (230* F), apply the test flame in the manner just described at each
            temperature that is a multiple of 2* C (5* F), beginning at a temperature
            of 17* C (30* F) to 28* C (50* F) below the expected flash point.
            NOTE:  When testing materials to determine if volatile contaminants are
 >--          present, it is not necessary to adhere to the temperature limits for
•C.          initial flame application as stated in 7.2.2 and 7.2.3.

                 7.2.4  Record as the flash point the temperature read on the
            thermometer at the time the test flame application causes a distinct
            flash in the interior of the Cup.  Do not confuse the true flash point
            with the bluish halo that sometimes surrounds the test flame at applica-
            tions preceding the one that causes the actual flash.  The actual flash
            will have occurred when a large flame propagates itself over the surface
            of the sample.

            7.3  Determination of flash point of suspensions of solids and highly
       viscous materials

                 7.3.1  Bring the material to be tested and the tester to a tempera-
            ture of 15* i 5* C (60* + 10* F) or 11* C (20* F) lower than the estimated
            flash point, whichever is lower.  Turn the stirrer 250+^10 rpm, stirring
            in a downward direction.  Raise the temperature throughout the duration
            of the test at a rate of not less than 1* nor more than 1.5" F (2 to 3* F)/
            min.  With the exception of these requirements for rates of stirring
            and heating, proceed as prescribed in Section 7.2.

            7.4  Calculation and report

                 7.4.1  Observe and record the ambient barometric pressure at the
            time of the test.  When the pressure differs from 760 mm Hg (101.3 kPa),
v           correct the flash point as follows:


                                              D-448

-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Ignitability

          (A) Corrected flash point = C + 0.25 (101.3 - p)
          (B) Corrected flash point = F + 0.06 (760 - P)
          (C) Corrected flash point = C + 0.033 (760 - P)
     where:
          F = observed flash point, *F
          C = observed flash point, *C
          P = ambient barometric pressure, mm Hg
          p = ambient barometric pressure, kPa.
     NOTE:  The barometric pressure used in this calculation must be the
     ambient pressure for the laboratory at the time of test.  Many aneroid
     barometers, such as those used at weather stations and airports, are
     precorrected to give sea level readings.  These must not be used.
          7.4.2  Record the corrected flash point to the nearest
     0.5* C  (or r F).
          7.4.3  Report the recorded flash point as the Pensky-Martens Closed
     Cup Flash Point ASTM D93 - IP 34, of the sample tested.
     7.5  Refer to Method ASTM 093 77 for more details and background
on the Pensky-Marten method.

8.0  Quality Control
     8.1  All quality control data should be available for review.
     8.2  Duplicates and standard  reference materials should be routinely
analyzed.
     8.3  The flash point of the p-xylene reference standard must be deter-
mined in duplicate at least once'per sample batch.  The average of the two
analyses should be 27' + 0.8* C (81* +. 1.5* F).
                                  D-449

-------
a

.t-
Ul
o

-------
EPA METHOD
 NO. 1110
      D-451

-------
                                METHOD 1110

                          CORROSIVITY TOWARD STEEL
1.0  Introduction
     1.1  Method lllQl is used to measure the corrosivity toward steel of
both aqueous and nonaqueous liquid wastes.


2.0  Summary of Method

     2.1  This test exposes coupons of SAE Type 1020 steel  to the liquid
waste to be evaluated and, by measuring the degree to which the coupon has
been dissolved, determines the corrosivity of the waste.


3.0  Interferences

     3.1  In laboratory tests, such as this one, corrosion of duplicate
coupons is usually reproducible to within ^ 10%.  However,  large differences
in corrosion rates may occasionally occur under conditions  where the metal
surfaces become passivated.  Therefore, at least duplicate determinations of
corrosion rate should be made.
4.0  Apparatus and Materials

     4.1  A versatile and convenient apparatus should be used, consisting of
a kettle or flask of suitable size (usually 500 to 5000 milliliters),
a reflux condenser, a thermowell  and temperature regulating device, a heating
device (mantle, hot plate, or bath), and a specimen support system.  A
typical resin flask set up for this type test is shown in Figure 1.

     4.2  The supporting device and container should not be affected by or
cause contamination of the waste under test.

     4.3  The method of supporting the coupons will vary with the apparatus
used for conducting the test but should be designed to insulate the coupons
from each other physically and electrically and to insulate the coupons from
any metallic container or other device used in the test.  Some common support
materials include glass, fluorocarbon or coated metal.


     ^hTs~method is based on NACE Standard TM-01-69 (1972 Revision),
"Laboratory Corrosion Testing of Metals for the Process Industries," National
Association of Corrosion Engineers, 3400 West Loop South, Houston, TX
77027.
                                      D-452

-------
 2 /  CHARACTERISTICS -  Corrosivity
                                                              H
     Figure 1. Typical resin flask that can be used as a versatile and convenient apparatus to
conduct simple immersion tests.  Configuration of the flask top is such that more sophisticated
apparatus can be added as required by the specific test being conducted. A = thermowell, B =
resin flask,  C * specimens hung on supporting device, D * gas inlet, E a heating mantle, F a liquid
interface, G = opening in flask for additional apparatus that may be required, and H » reflux
condenser.
                                          D-453

-------
                                                                     1110 / 3


     4.4  The shape and form of the coupon support should ensure free contact
with the waste.

     4.5  A circular specimen of SAE 1020 steel  of about 3.75 cm (1.5 Inch)
diameter Is a convenient shape for a coupon.   With a thickness of approxi-
mately 0.32 cm (0.125 inch) and a 0.80-cra (0.4-1n.) diameter hold for
mounting, these specimens will readily pass through a 45/50 ground glass
joint of a distillation kettle.  The total surface area of a circular speci-
men 1s given by the following equation:

          A » 3.14/2(D2-d2) + (t)(3.14)(0) + (t)(3.14)(d)

where t * thickness, 0 * diameter of the specimen, and d * diameter of the
mounting hole.  If the hole 1s completely covered by the mounting support,
the last term (t)(3.14)(d) 1n the equation 1s omitted.

          4.5.1  All coupons should be measured carefully to permit accurate
     calculation of the exposed areas.  An area calculation accurate to +. 1%
     1s usually adequate.                                               ~

          4.5.2  More uniform results may be expected 1f a substantial layer
     of metal 1s removed from the coupons prior to testing the corrosivity of
     the waste.  This can be accomplished either by chemical treatment
     (pickling), electrolytic removal, or by grinding with a coarse abrasive.
     At least 0.254 mm (0.0001 inch) or 2 to 3 rag/cm* should be removed.
     Final surface treatment should Include finishing with #120 abrasive
     paper or cloth.  Final cleaning consists of scrubbing with bleachfree
     scouring powder, followed by rinsing in distilled water, then acetone or
     methanol, and finally air drying.  After final cleaning, the coupon
     should be stored 1n a desiccator until used.

          4.5.3  The minimum ratio of volume of waste to area of the metal
     coupon to be used in this test 1s 40 ml/cm2.


5.0  Reagents

     5.1  Sodium hydroxide  (20%).

     5.2  Zinc dust.

     5.3  Concentrated hydrochloric acid.

     5.4  Stannous chloride.

     5.5  Antimony chloride.
                                       D-454

-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Corrosivity


6.0  Sample Collection. Presentation, and Handling

     6.1  All  samples should be collected using a sampling plan  that addresses
the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.
7.0  Procedure

     7.1  Assemble the test apparatus as described in Section 4.0 above.

     7.2  Fill the container with the appropriate amount of waste.

     7.3  Begin agitation at a rate sufficient to ensure that the liquid  is
kept well mixed and homogeneous.

     7.4  Using the heating device bring the temperature of the waste to
55* C (130' F).

     7.5  An accurate rate of corrosion is not required but only a
determination as to whether the rate of corrosion is less than or greater
than 6.35 mm per year.  A 24-hour test period should be ample to determine
whether or not the rate of corrosion is greater than 6.35 mm per year.
                                                                   «
     7.6  In order to accurately determine the amount of material lost to
corrosion, the coupons have to be cleaned after immersion and prior to
weighing.  The cleaning procedure should remove all products of corrosion
while removing a minimum of sound metal.  Cleaning methods can be divided
into three general categories:  mechanical, chemical and electrolytic.

          7.6.1  Mechanical cleaning includes scrubbing, scraping, brushing
     and ultrasonic procedures.  Scrubbing with a bristle brush and mild
     abrasive is the most popular of these methods.  The others are used  in
     cases of heavy corrosion as a first step in removing heavily encrusted
     corrosion products- prior to scrubbing.  Care should be taken to avoid
     removing sound metal.

          7.6.2  Chemical cleaning implies the removal of material from the
     surface of the coupon by dissolution in an appropriate solvent.  Solvents
     such as acetone, dlchloromethane, and alcohol are used to remove oil,
     grease or resinous materials, and are used prior to immersion to remove
     the products of corrosion.  Solutions suitable for removing corrosion
     from the steel coupon are:

                Solution                       Soaking Time   Temperature

     20% NaOH +  200 g/1 zinc dust                 5 min        Boiling

                 or

     Cone. HC1 + 50 g/1 Snd2 + 20 g/1 SbCla   Until clean      Cold
                                       D-455

-------
                                                                     1110 / 5


          7.6.3  Electrolytic cleaning sheu1 •  be preceded by scrubbing to
     remove loosely adhering corrosion products.  One method of electrolytic
     cleaning that can be employed is:

          Solution                          "0 g/1  83804

          Anode                             *.rt>on  or lead

          Cathode                           l;eel  coupon

          Cathode current density           .3 amp/cm2 (129 amp/in.2)

          Inhibitor                         i  ;c organic inhibitor/liter

          Temperature                       "** C (165* F)

          Exposure Period                   j  minutes

     NOTE:  Precautions must be taken to ensure good electrical contact with
     the coupon, to avoid contamination of ths cleaning solution with easily
     reducible metal ions, and to ensure thac  inhibitor decomposition has not
     occurred.  Instead of using a proprietary inhibitor, 0.5 g/1  or either
     diorthotolyl thiourea or quinolin ethiodide can be used.

     7.7  Whatever treatment is employed to clean the coupons, its effect In
removing sound metal should be determined using a blank (i.e., a coupon that
has not been exposed to the waste).  The blank should be cleaned along witrt
the test coupon and its waste loss subtracted  from  that calculated for the
test coupons.

     7.8  After corroded specimens have been cleaned and dried, they are
reweighed.  The weight loss is employed as the principal  measure of corrosfon.
Use of weight loss as a measure of corrosion requires making the assumption
that all weight loss has been due to generalized corrosion and not localized
pitting.  In order to determine the corrosion  rate  for the purpose of this
regulation, the following formula is used:

          Corrosion Rate (mmpy) * weight loss  x 11.145
                                      area x time

          where weight loss is in milligrams,  area  in square centimeters,
          time in hours, and corrosion rate in millimeters per year
          (mmpy).


8.0  Quality Control

     8.1  All quality control data should b«  filed and available for
auditing.

     8.2  Duplicate samples should be analyzed on a routine basis.
                                     D-456

-------
HAZARDOUS WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
         -REACTIVITY-
         (FROM SW 846)
                D-457

-------
                   CHARACTERISTICS - Corrosivity; Reacfvity
     2.1.3  Reactivity

Introduction

     The regulation in 40 CFR 261.23 defines reactive wastes to include
wastes which have any of the following properties:   (1)  readily undergo
violent chemical change; (2) react violently or form potentially explosive
mixtures with water; (3) generate toxic fumes when  mixed with water or, in
the case of cyanide or sulfide-bearing wastes, when exposed to mild acidic
or basic conditions; (4) explode when subjected to  a strong initiating force;
(5) explode at normal temperatures and pressures; or (6) fit within the
Department of Transportation's forbidden explosives, Class A explosives, or
Class B explosives classifications.

     This definition is intended to identify wastes which, because of
their extreme instability and tendency to react violently or explode, pose
a problem at all stages of the waste management process.  The definition is
to a large extent a paraphrase of the narrative definition employed by the
National Fire Protection Association.  The Agency chose  to rely on a
descriptive, prose definition of reactivity because the  available tests
for measuring the variegated class of effects embraced by the reactivity
definition suffer from a number of deficiencies.


Regulatory Definition

     Characteristic of Reactivity Regulation

     A solid waste exhibits the characteristic of reactivity if a representa-
tive sample of the waste has any of the following properties:

      1.  It is normally unstable and readily undergoes  violent change
          without detonating.

      2.  It reacts violently with water.

      3.  It forms potentially explosive mixtures with water.

      4.  When mixed with water, it generates toxic gases, vapors or fumes
          in a quantity sufficient to present a danger to human health or
          the environment,

      5.  It is a cyanide-  or sulfide-bearing waste which, when exposed to pH
          conditions between 2 and 12.5, can generate toxic gases, vapors,
          or fumes in  a quantity sufficient to present a danger to human
          health or  the environment.   (Methods 9010 and 9030 can  be used to
          detect the presence of cyanide and sulfide in wastes.)

      6.  It is capable of  detonation or explosive  reaction if  it  is
          subjected  to a strong  initiating  source or if heated  under
          confinement.

                                      D-458

-------
2 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity


      7.  It is readily capable of detonation or explosive decomposition or
          reaction at standard temperature and pressure.

      8.  It is a forbidden explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.51, or a
          Class A explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.53,  or a Class B
          explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.88.

      9.  A solid waste that exhibits the characteristic  of reactivity, but
          is not listed as a hazardous waste in Subpart D, has the EPA
          Hazardous Waste Number of D003.
     Definition of Explosive Materials

     For purposes of this regulation, a waste is a reactive waste by reason
of explosivity if it meets one or more of the following descriptions:

      1.  Is explosive and ignites spontaneously or undergoes marked
          decomposition when subjected for 48 consecutive hours to a
          temperature of 75* C (167* F).

      2.  Firecrackers, flash crackers, salutes, or similar commercial
          devices which produce or are intended to produce an audible
          effect, the explosive content of which exceeds 12 grains each in
          weight; pest control bombs, the explosive content of which exceeds
          18 grains each in weight; and any such devices, without respect to
          explosive content, which on functioning are liable to project or
          disperse metal, glass or brittle plastic fragments.

      3.  Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator or blasting
          cap.

      4.  Fireworks containing an ammonium salt and a chlorate.

      5.  Fireworks containing yellow or white phosphorus.

      6.  Fireworks or firework compositions that ignite spontaneously or
          undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 48 consecutive
          hours to a temperature of 75* C (167* F).

      7.  Toy torpedoes, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds
          7/8 inch, or toy torpedoes containing a mixture of potassium
          chlorate, black antimony and sulfur with an average weight of
          explosive composition in each torpedo exceeding four grains.

      8.  Toy torpedoes containing a cap composed of a mixture of red
          phosphorus and potassium chlorate exceeding an average of one-half
          (0.5) grain per cap.

      9.  Fireworks containing copper sulfate and a chlorate.

                                    D-459

-------
                                              Regulatory  Definition  / 3


10.   Explosives  containing  an  ammonium  salt  and  a  chlorate.

11.   Liquid nitroglycerin,  diethylene glycol  dinitrate  or other liquid
     explosives  not  authorized.

12.   Explosives  condemned by the  Bureau of Explosives  (except  properly
     packed samples  for  laboratory  examinations).

13.   Leaking or  damaged  packages  of explosives.

14.   Solid materials which  can be caused to  deflagrate  by contact with
     sparks or flame such as produced by safety  fuse or an electric
     squib, but  cannot be detonated (see Note 1) by  means of a No. 8
     test blasting  cap  (see Note  2).  Example:  Black  powder and low
     explosives.

15.   Solid materials which  contain  a  liquid  ingredient, and which, when
     unconfirmed  (see Note 3),  can be  detonated by  means of a No. 8 test
     blasting cap (see Note 2); or  which can be  exploded  in at least
     50 percent  of  the trials  in  the  Bureau  of Explosives' Impact
     Apparatus (see  Note 4) under a drop of  4 inches or more,  but
     cannot be exploded  in  more than  50 percent  of the  trials  under  a
     drop of less than 4 inches.   Example:   High explosives, commercial
     dynamite containing a  liquid explosive  ingredient.

16.   Solid materials which  contain  no liquid ingredient and which can
     be detonated,  when  unconfined  (see Note 3), by  means of No. 8 test
     blasting cap (see Note 2); or  which can be  exploded in at least
     50 percent  of  the trials  in  the Bureau  of Explosives' Impact
     Apparatus (see Note 4) under a drop of  4 inches or more,  but
     cannot be exploded  in  more than  50 percent  of the  trials  under  a
     drop of less than 4 inches.   Example:   high explosives, commercial
     dynamite containing no liquid  explosive ingredient,  trinitrotoluene,
     amatol, tetryl, picric acid, ureanitrate, pentolite, commercial
     boosters.

17.   Solid materials which  can be caused to  detonate when unconfined
     (see Note 3),  by contact  with sparks or flame such as produced by
     safety fuse or an  electric squib;  or which can be exploded in the
     Bureau of Explosives'  Impact Apparatus  (see Note 4), in more than
     50 percent of  the  trials  under a drop of less than 4 inches.
     Example:  initiating  and  priming explosives, lead azide,  fulminate
     of mercury, high explosives.

18.   Liquids which  may  be  detonated separately or when absorbed in
     sterile absorbent  cotton, by a No. 8 test blasting cap (see  Note
     2); but which  cannot  be exploded in the Bureau of Explosives'
     Impact Apparatus (see Note 4), by  a drop of less than 10 inches.
     The liquid must not be significantly more volatile than nitro-
     glycerine and must  not freeze at temperatures above minus  10" F.
     Example:  high explosives, desensitized nitroglycerine.

                                  D-460

-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity


     19.  Liquids that can be exploded in the Bureau of Explosives'  Impact
          Apparatus (see Note 4) under a drop of less than 10 inches.
          Example:  nitroglycerine.

     20.  Blasting caps,  these are  small tubes, usually made of an  alloy of
          either copper or aluminum, or of molded plastic closed at  one end
          and loaded with a charge of initiating or priming explosives.
          Blasting caps (see Note 5) which have been provided with a means
          for firing by an electric  current,  and sealed, are known as
          electric blasting caps.

     21.  Detonating primers which contain a  detonator and an additional
          charge of explosives, all  assembled in a suitable envelope.

     22.  Detonating fuses, which are used in the military service to
          detonate the high explosive bursting charges of projectiles,
          mines, bombs, torpedoes, and grenades.  In addition to a powerful
          detonator, they may contain several ounces of a high explosive,
          such as tetryl or dry nitrocellulose, all  assembled in a heavy
          steel  envelope.  They may  also contain a small amount of radio-
          active component.  Those that will  not cause functioning of other
          fuses, explosives, or explosive devices in the same or adjacent
          containers are classes as  class C explosives and are not reactive
          waste.

     23.  A shaped charge, consisting of a plastic,  paper, or other  suitable
          container comprising a charge of not to exceed 8 ounces of a  high
          explosive containing no liquid explosive ingredient and with  a
          hollowed-out portion (cavity) lined with a rigid material.

     24.  Ammunition or explosive projectiles, either fixed, semi-fixed or
          separate components which  are made  for use in cannon, mortar,
          howitzer, recoil less rifle, rocket, or other launching device with
          a caliber of 20 mm or larger.

     25.  Grenades.  Grenades, hand  or rifle, are small metal  or other
          containers designed to be  thrown by hand or projected from a
          rifle.  They are filled with an explosive or a liquid, gas,  or
          solid material such as a tear gas or an incendiary or smoke
          producing material and a bursting charge.

     26.  Explosive bombs.  Explosive bombs are metal or other containers
          filled with explosives.  They are used in warfare and include
          airplane bombs and depth bombs.

     27.  Explosive mines.  Explosive mines are metal or composition
          containers filled with a high explosive.

     28.  Explosive torpedoes.  Explosive torpedoes, such as those used in
          warfare, are metal devices containing a means of propulsion  and a
          quantity of high explosives.

                                     D-461

-------
                                                    Regulatory  Definition  /  5


     29.   Rocket  ammunition.  Rocket ammunition  (including  guided  missiles)
          is  ammunition designed for launching from  a  tube,  launcher,  rails,
          trough, or other  launching device,  in  which  the propel 1 ant
          material  is  a solid propel!ant  explosive.   It  consists of an
          igniter,  rocket motor, and projectile  (warhead) either fused or
          unfused,  containing high explosives or chemicals.

     30.   Chemical  ammunition.  Chemical  ammunition  used in  warfare is all
          kinds  of explosive chemical  projectiles, shells,  bombs,  grenades,
          etc.,  loaded with tear, or other gas,  smoke  or incendiary agent,
          also such miscellaneous apparatus as cloud-gas cylinders, smoke
          generators,  etc.,.that may be utilized to  project  chemicals.

     31.   Boosters, bursters, and supplementary  charges. Boosters and
          supplementary charges consist of a  casing  containing  a  high
          explosive and are used to increase  the intensity  of explosion of
          the detonator of  a detonating fuse.  Bursters  consist of a  casing
          containing a high explosive  and are used to  rupture a projectile
          or  bomb to permit release of its contents.

     32.   Jet thrust units  or other rocket motors containing a  mixture of
          chemicals capable of  burning rapidly and producing considerable
          pressure.

     33.   Propellant mixtures  (i.e., any  chemical mixtures  which are
          designed to function  by rapid combustion with  little  or  no  smoke).

NOTE 1:  The  detonation test  is performed by  placing the sample in an open-end
fiber tube which is set on  the  end of  a lead  block approximately 1-1/2 in.
in diameter and 4 in.  high  which, in turn,  is placed on  a  solid base.   A
steel plate may be placed between the  fiber tube and the lead block.

NOTE 2:  A No. 8 test blasting  cap is  one containing two grams  of a mixture
of 80% mercury fulminate  and  20%  potassium chlorate, or  a  cap of equivalent
strength.

NOTE 3:  "Unconfined" as  used  in  this  section does  not exclude  the use of a
paper or soft fiber tube  wrapping to  facilitate  tests.

NOTE 4:  The Bureau of Explosives'  Impact Apparatus  is a testing device
designed so that a guided 8-1 b  weight  may be  dropped from predetermined
heights so as to impact  specific  quantities  of liquid or solid materials
under fixed conditions.   Detailed prints  of the  apparatus may be obtained
from the Bureau of Explosives,  Association of American Railroads, Operations
and Maintenance Dept., Bureau of  Explosives,  American Railroad Building,
Washington, D.C. 20036;  202-293-4048.   The procedures for operating this
apparatus are described in  the following paragraphs.

     Method for  Testing Liquids.   The anvil  is  inserted in the receptable in
     the anvil housing.A new cup  is  dropped into the  cup-positioning block.
     One drop of the sample liquid  (about 0.01  g) is dropped into the  cup

                                  B-462

-------
6 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity; EP Toxicity


     from a pipette and the cup is revolved until an even film forms on base.
     The top striker and the main striker are inserted as far as possible
     into the upper housing.  The upper housing is then placed over the
     cup-positioning block so that the end of the main striker goes into the
     brass cup.  When the upper housing is removed from the cup-positioning
     block, the brass cup is picked up on the end of the main striker.  When
     the two housings are screwed together, the brass cup automatically rests
     firmly on the anvil.

     An 8-1b drop weight is dropped from predetermined heights until consistent
     failure results using the new sample portion and cup each time.  An
     explosion is evidenced by flame or flame and noise, but in either event
     the brass cup will be belled out or bulged.

     After making the drop, the drop weight is raised, the test assembly
     removed, and appropriate solvent is poured into the top end.  The two
     housings are then separated, the striker removed, and the brass cup
     removed from the striker end.

     All solvent is removed carefully and thoroughly before preparations are
     started for next drop and the apparatus cooled and cleaned.  The test is
     then repeated in the same manner, but with a filter paper disc in the
     base of the cup under the composition being tested.

     Method for Testing Solids.  The die is placed in the anvil assembly and
     a small amount (about 0.01 g)1 to make a thin film is placed into the
     die assembly.  The steel striker pellet (plug) is inserted carefully and
     then the striker (plunger).  The assembly is then placed in the apparatus
     and the drop weight allowed to rest on the striker top to effect even
     distribution of the explosive.

     The 8-1b drop weight is then dropped on the striker from predetermined
     heights until consistent failure results (i.e., explosion, etc.) using a
     new sample portion each time.

     The die assembly is removed carefully and the striker removed.  A few
     drops of appropriate solvent are poured into the die assembly before it
     is disassembled.

     All parts are cleaned and dried carefully before each test.

NOTE 5:  Blasting caps, blasting caps with safety fuse, or electric blasting
caps in quantities of 1,000 or less are classified as class 0 explosives and
not subject to regulation as a reactive waste.
              is suggested that a tiny spoon be devised to measure the proper
     amount of test sample, since this is much more convenient and safer than
     other methods of measuring the sample.
                                   D-463

-------